IM02602007E
Rev. New
EDR-5000 EATON DISTRIBUTION RELAY
Instruction Manual for Installing, Operating, and Maintaining the EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
EDR-5000 Application Overview
EDR-5000
1
79
74
TC
Metering,
Statistics and
Demand
Current and Volt.:
unbalance
%THD and THD
Fund. and RMS
min./max./avg.
phasors and
angles
27A
46
50R
51R
50
BF
59A
50P
51P
67P
67R
LOP
59N
3
CTS
SOTF
CLPU
25
1
55
A/D
47
67X
3
Power:
Fund. and RMS
MVA, Mwatt, Mvar,
PF
Disturb. recorder
27M
59M
IRIG-B00X
81
U/O
81R
78V
50X
51X
51V
32
*
32V
Fault recorder
Event recorder
Zone Interlocking
Breaker Wear
Programmable Logic
Trend recorder
standard
2
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Key Features, Functions and Benefits..........................................................................................8
General Description.........................................................................................................................................8
Features...........................................................................................................................................................9
Comments on the Manual.............................................................................................................14
What Is Included with the Device...................................................................................................................17
Storage..........................................................................................................................................................17
Important Information.....................................................................................................................................17
Symbols.........................................................................................................................................................18
General Conventions.....................................................................................................................................23
Device.............................................................................................................................................24
Device Planning.............................................................................................................................................24
Device Planning Parameters of the Device....................................................................................................24
Installation and Wiring..................................................................................................................27
Three-Side-View............................................................................................................................................27
Overview of Slots - Assembly Groups............................................................................................................28
Typical Connection Diagrams........................................................................................................................30
Slot X1: Power Supply Card with Digital Inputs..............................................................................................34
Slot X2: Relay Output Card - Zone Interlock..................................................................................................37
Slot X3: Current Transformer Measuring Inputs.............................................................................................39
Slot X4: Voltage Transformer Measuring Inputs.............................................................................................47
Slot X5: Relay Output Card............................................................................................................................52
Slot X100: Ethernet Interface.........................................................................................................................55
Slot X103: Data Communication....................................................................................................................56
Slot X104: IRIG-B00X and Supervision Contact............................................................................................60
X120 - PC Interface.......................................................................................................................................61
Control Wiring Diagram.................................................................................................................................62
Input, Output, and LED Settings..................................................................................................63
Digital Input Configuration..............................................................................................................................63
DI-8P X..........................................................................................................................................................64
Wired Inputs (Aliases)....................................................................................................................................67
Relay Output Configuration............................................................................................................................74
RO-4ZI X - Settings........................................................................................................................................77
RO-6 X Settings.............................................................................................................................................95
LED Configuration........................................................................................................................................120
The »System OK« LED ...............................................................................................................................123
LED Settings................................................................................................................................................123
Front Panel..................................................................................................................................144
Basic Menu Control......................................................................................................................................148
PowerPort-E Keyboard Commands.............................................................................................................149
PowerPort-E.................................................................................................................................151
Installation of PowerPort-E...........................................................................................................................151
Uninstalling PowerPort-E.............................................................................................................................151
Setting up the Serial Connection PC - Device..............................................................................................152
Loading of Device Data When Using PowerPort-E......................................................................................162
Restoring Device Data When Using PowerPort-E........................................................................................163
Backup and Documentation When Using PowerPort-E...............................................................................164
Off-line Device Planning Via PowerPort-E...................................................................................................165
Measuring Values........................................................................................................................165
Read Out Measured Values.........................................................................................................................165
Current - Measured Values..........................................................................................................................166
Voltage - Measured Values..........................................................................................................................169
Power - Measured Values............................................................................................................................174
Energy Counter...........................................................................................................................175
Direct Commands of the Energy Counter Module .......................................................................................175
Signals of the Energy Counter Module (States of the Outputs)....................................................................175
Statistics......................................................................................................................................177
Read Out Statistics......................................................................................................................................177
Statistics (Configuration)..............................................................................................................................177
Direct Commands........................................................................................................................................178
Global Protection Parameters of the Statistics Module................................................................................178
States of the Inputs of the Statistics Module................................................................................................182
www.eaton.com
3
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Signals of the Statistics Module...................................................................................................................183
Counters of the Module Statistics.................................................................................................................183
System Alarms.............................................................................................................................193
Demand Management.................................................................................................................................193
Peak Demand..............................................................................................................................................195
Min. and Max. Values...................................................................................................................................195
THD Protection............................................................................................................................................195
Device Planning Parameters of the Demand Management.........................................................................195
Signals of the Demand Management (States of the Outputs)......................................................................196
Global Protection Parameter of the Demand Management..........................................................................196
States of the Inputs of the Demand Management........................................................................................200
System Alarm Signals (States of the Outputs).............................................................................................200
Resets..........................................................................................................................................201
Manual Acknowledgment.............................................................................................................................202
Manual Acknowledgment Via PowerPort-E..................................................................................................202
External Acknowledgments..........................................................................................................................202
External Acknowledge Via PowerPort-E.......................................................................................................203
External LED - Acknowledgment Signals.....................................................................................................203
Manual Resets.............................................................................................................................................204
Manual Resets Via PowerPort-E..................................................................................................................204
Status Display..............................................................................................................................205
Status Display via PowerPort E....................................................................................................................205
Operating Panel (HMI).................................................................................................................206
Special Parameters of the Panel..................................................................................................................206
Direct Commands of the Panel....................................................................................................................206
Global Protection Parameters of the Panel..................................................................................................206
Recorders....................................................................................................................................207
Disturbance Recorder..................................................................................................................................207
Fault Recorder.............................................................................................................................................215
Event Recorder............................................................................................................................................220
Trend Recorder............................................................................................................................................221
Communication Protocols..........................................................................................................226
Modbus®.....................................................................................................................................................226
IEC 61850....................................................................................................................................................232
IRIG-B00X...................................................................................................................................................239
Parameters...................................................................................................................................244
Parameter Definitions..................................................................................................................................244
Adaptive Parameters via HMI......................................................................................................................247
Operational Modes (Access Authorization)..................................................................................................259
Password.....................................................................................................................................................260
Changing of Parameters - Example.............................................................................................................261
Changing of Parameters When Using the PowerPort-E - Example.............................................................262
Protection Parameters ................................................................................................................................264
Setting Groups.............................................................................................................................................264
Comparing Parameter Files Via PowerPort-E..............................................................................................266
Converting Parameter Files Via PowerPort-E..............................................................................................266
Device Parameters......................................................................................................................268
Date and Time.............................................................................................................................................268
Version.........................................................................................................................................................268
Version Via PowerPort-E..............................................................................................................................268
TCP/IP Settings...........................................................................................................................................269
Direct Commands of the System Module.....................................................................................................269
Global Protection Parameters of the System...............................................................................................270
System Module Input States........................................................................................................................272
System Module Signals................................................................................................................................273
Special Values of the System Module..........................................................................................................274
System Parameters.....................................................................................................................275
General System Parameters........................................................................................................................275
Voltage Depending System Parameters......................................................................................................275
Current Depending System Parameters......................................................................................................276
Blocking.......................................................................................................................................278
4
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Permanent Blocking.....................................................................................................................................278
Temporary Blocking.....................................................................................................................................278
To Activate or Deactivate the Tripping Command of a Protection Module....................................................280
Activate, Deactivate Respectively to Block Temporary Protection Functions...............................................281
Protection (Prot) Module............................................................................................................283
How to Block All Protective and Supervisory Functions................................................................................283
Direct Commands of the Protection Module.................................................................................................290
Global Protection Parameters of the Protection Module...............................................................................290
Protection Module Input States....................................................................................................................290
Protection Module Signals (Output States)..................................................................................................290
Protection Module Values.............................................................................................................................291
Switchgear/Breaker - Manager...................................................................................................292
Breaker Configuration..................................................................................................................................292
Switching the Breaker at the Panel..............................................................................................................318
Protective Elements....................................................................................................................327
Directional Feature – Phase Current............................................................................................................327
50P/67P- DEFT Overcurrent Protection.......................................................................................................330
51P/67P - INV Overcurrent-Protection.........................................................................................................337
Directional Features for Measured (IX) Ground Fault Elements 50X/51X....................................................354
50X/67X DEFT Measured Ground Fault Protection.....................................................................................357
51X/67X INV Measured Ground Fault Protection.........................................................................................364
Directional Features for Calculated (IR) Ground Fault Elements 50R/51R..................................................372
50R/67R DEFT Calculated Ground Fault Protection....................................................................................375
51R/67R INV Calculated Ground Fault Protection.......................................................................................382
ZI - Zone Interlocking...................................................................................................................................389
79 - Automatic Reclosure.............................................................................................................................401
46 - Current Unbalance Protection...............................................................................................................431
LOP – Loss of Potential...............................................................................................................................438
SOTF - Switch Onto Fault Protection...........................................................................................................443
CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup............................................................................................449
27M - Undervoltage Protection.....................................................................................................................456
59M - Overvoltage Protection.......................................................................................................................465
27A - Auxiliary Undervoltage Protection.......................................................................................................474
59A - Auxiliary Overvoltage Protection.........................................................................................................479
59N - Neutral Overvoltage...........................................................................................................................484
25 - Sync-check...........................................................................................................................................489
47 - Voltage Unbalance Protection...............................................................................................................519
81O/U, 81R, 78V Frequency Protection.......................................................................................................526
32 - Power Protection...................................................................................................................................549
32V - Reactive Power Protection.................................................................................................................560
55A and 55D - PF Protection.......................................................................................................................571
ExP - External Protection.............................................................................................................................578
Supervision..................................................................................................................................584
50BF – Breaker Failure Supervision............................................................................................................584
CTS – Current Transformer Supervision......................................................................................................601
74TC - Trip Circuit Monitoring......................................................................................................................606
Self Supervision...........................................................................................................................................612
Programmable Logic...................................................................................................................614
General Description.....................................................................................................................................614
Programmable Logic at the Panel................................................................................................................618
Programmable Logic Via PowerPort-E.........................................................................................................618
Commissioning...........................................................................................................................641
Commissioning/Protection Test....................................................................................................................641
Decommissioning – Removing the Plug from the Relay..............................................................................642
Service and Commissioning Support........................................................................................644
Maintenance Mode......................................................................................................................................644
Principle – General Use...............................................................................................................................644
Before Use...................................................................................................................................................645
How to Use the Maintenance Mode.............................................................................................................645
Forcing the Relay Output Contacts..............................................................................................................647
Disarming the Relay Output Contacts..........................................................................................................648
Failure Simulator (Sequencer)*....................................................................................................................649
www.eaton.com
5
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Technical Data.............................................................................................................................666
Climatic Environmental Conditions...............................................................................................................666
Degree of Protection EN 60529...................................................................................................................666
Routine Test.................................................................................................................................................666
Housing........................................................................................................................................................666
Current and Ground Current Measurement.................................................................................................667
Voltage and Residual Voltage Measurement................................................................................................667
Frequency Measurement.............................................................................................................................668
Voltage Supply.............................................................................................................................................668
Power Consumption.....................................................................................................................................668
Display.........................................................................................................................................................668
Front Interface RS232..................................................................................................................................668
Real Time Clock...........................................................................................................................................668
Digital Inputs................................................................................................................................................668
Relay Outputs..............................................................................................................................................669
Supervision Contact (SC).............................................................................................................................669
Time Synchronization IRIG-B00X.................................................................................................................669
Zone Interlocking.........................................................................................................................................670
RS485*........................................................................................................................................................670
Fiber Optic*..................................................................................................................................................670
URTD-Interface*..........................................................................................................................................670
Boot Phase..................................................................................................................................................670
Standards.....................................................................................................................................671
Approvals.....................................................................................................................................................671
Design Standards........................................................................................................................................671
High Voltage Tests (IEC 60255-6)................................................................................................................671
EMC Immunity Tests....................................................................................................................................671
EMC Emission Tests....................................................................................................................................672
Environmental Tests.....................................................................................................................................672
Mechanical Tests.........................................................................................................................................673
Specifications..............................................................................................................................674
Specifications of the Real Time Clock..........................................................................................................674
Specifications of the Measured Value Acquisition........................................................................................674
Protection Elements Accuracy.....................................................................................................................675
Appendix......................................................................................................................................681
Instantaneous Current Curves (Phase)........................................................................................................687
Time Current Curves (PHASE)....................................................................................................................688
Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Calculated).......................................................................700
Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Measured)........................................................................701
Time Current Curves (Ground Current)........................................................................................................702
Assignment List..........................................................................................................................714
6
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
ff29cf4c2846dafcd774575c3a3fc66e
7e00f5bb7cdd4f821e6f72b400fc1985
RMS Handoff: 0
File: C:\p4_data\deliver_EDR-5000_KWelchering\generated\EDR-5000_user_manual_eaton_en.odt
This manual applies to devices (version):
Version 1.0.b
Build: 12288
www.eaton.com
7
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Key Features, Functions and Benefits
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microprocessor-based protection with monitoring and control for medium voltage main and feeder
applications.
Current, voltage, and frequency protection for electrical power distribution systems.
Complete metering of voltage, currents, power, energy, minimum/maximum, and demand functions.
Complete metering, protection, and control in a single compact case to reduce panel space, wiring, and
costs.
Integral test function reduces maintenance time and expense.
Zone selective interlocking improves coordination and tripping time, and saves money compared to a
traditional bus differential scheme.
Programmable logic control functions for main-tie-main transfer schemes.
Reduce trouble shooting time and maintenance costs - Trip and event recording in non-volatile memory
provides detailed information for analysis and system restoration. Waveform capture aids in post fault
analysis (viewable using PowerPort-E software).
Minimum replacement time - Removable terminal blocks ideal in industrial environments.
Front RS-232 port and PowerPort-E software provides local computer access and User-friendly windows
based interface for relay settings, configuration, and data retrieval.
Breaker open/close from relay faceplate or remotely via communications.
Fast an easy troubleshooting, improved maintenance procedures, and increased device security.
Provides detailed traceability for system configuration changes
Relays self-diagnostics and reporting improves up-time and troubleshooting.
Breaker trip circuit monitoring improves the reliability of the breaker operation.
General Description
Eaton’s EDR-5000 distribution protection relay is a multi-functional, microprocessor-based relay for feeder
circuits of all voltage levels. It may be used as the primary protection on feeders, mains, and tie breaker
applications; or as backup protection for transformers, high voltage lines, and differential protection. The relay is
most commonly used on medium voltage switchgear applications.
The EDR-5000 feeder protection relay provides complete current, voltage, and frequency protection and
metering in a single, compact case. The relay has four current inputs rated for either 5 amperes or 1 ampere
and four voltage inputs. Three of the voltage inputs are to be connected to the 3-phase power voltage for
voltage protection and for metering. They can be connected in wye-ground or open delta configuration. The
fourth voltage is for independent single-phase undervoltage/overvoltage protection, or ground protection for an
ungrounded system.
The maintenance mode, password protected soft key can be used for arc flash mitigation to change to an
alternate settings group or set to have instantaneous elements only. The multiple setting groups can also be
changed,via communications or a digital input.
An integral keypad and display is provided for direct User programming and retrieval of data without the need of
a computer. 14 programmable LEDs provide quick indication of relay status.
A front port is provided for direct computer connection. An RS-485 communication port on the back is standard
for local area networking using Modbus-RTU. An optional Ethernet port and protocols are available.
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay includes programmable logic functions. Logic gates and timers may
be defined and arranged for customized applications. Programmable logic control functions make the
EDR-5000 relay ideally suited for main-tie-main and main 1/main 2 transfer schemes. The relay allows for four
preprogrammed setting groups which can be activated through software or contact input.
Flash memory is used for the programming and all settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. The relay allows
for four preprogrammed setting groups which can be activated through software, the display, or a contact input.
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay has mass memory for data storage and a real-time clock with 1 ms
8
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
time resolution. The relay will log 300 sequence of event records, 20 detailed trip logs, minimum/maximum
values, load profiles, breaker wear information, and oscillography data.
The EDR-5000 has programmable binary inputs, two normally opened and eight Form C heavy duty outputs and
one form C signal alarm relay. It can be powered from 19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Features
Protection Features
Phase overcurrent elements
•
Three instantaneous elements with timers ( 50P[1], 50P[2], and 50P[3])
•
Three inverse time overcurrent elements (51P[1], 51P[2], and 51P[3])
•
11 standard curves
•
Instantaneous or time delay reset
•
Voltage Restraint (51P[2] and 51P[3])
•
Directional Control (All Elements)
Ground overcurrent elements
•
Two instantaneous measured elements with timers (50X[1] and 50X[2])
•
Two instantaneous calculated elements with timers (50R[1] and 50R[2])
•
Two inverse time overcurrent measured elements (51X[1],and 51X[2])
•
Two inverse time overcurrent calculated elements (51R[1] and 51R[2])
•
11 standard curves
•
Directional Control (All Elements)
•
Instantaneous or time delay reset
Breaker failure (50BF)
Phase unbalance negative sequence overcurrent (46[1], 46[2]))
Phase voltage unbalance and sequence protection (47[1], 47[2])
Main 3-phase under/overvoltage (27M[1], 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
Auxiliary single-phase under/overvoltage (27A[1], 27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2])
Ground fault overvoltage relay (59N[1], 59N[2])
Six Frequency elements that can be assigned to: over frequency, under frequency, rate of change, or
vector surge (81[1], 81[2], 81[3], 81[4], 81[5], 81[6])
Apparent and displacement power factor (55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], 55D[2])
Forward and Reverse Watts (32[1], 32[2], 32[3])
Forward and Reverse Vars (32V[1], 32V[2], 32V[3])
Sync-check (25)
Zone interlocking for bus protection (87B)
Switch onto fault protection
Cold load pickup
www.eaton.com
9
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Metering Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Amperes: Positive, negative, and zero sequence
Ampere demand
Volts: Positive, negative, and zero sequence
Phase angles
Volt-amperes and VA demand
Watts and kW demand
kWh (forward, reverse, net)
Vars and kvar demand
kvarh (lead, leg and net)
Power factor
Frequency
% THD V and I
Magnitude THD V and I
Minimum/maximum recording
Trending (load profile over time)
Monitoring Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
Trip coil monitor
Breaker wear primary and secondary (accumulated interrupted current)
Oscillography (6000 cycles total)
Fault data logs (up to 20 events)
Sequence of events report (up to 300 events)
Clock (1 ms time stamping)
Control Functions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Breaker open/close
Remote open/close
Programmable I/O
Programmable Logic
Programmable LEDs
Multiple setting groups
Cold load pickup
CT supervision
Communication Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
10
Local HMI
Password protected
Addressable
IRIG-B
Local communication port
Remote communication port:
- RS-232; and
- RS-485
Protocols:
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
•
IM02602007E
- Modbus-RTU;
- Modbus-TCP (Optional); and
- IEC61850 (Optional)
Configuration software
Protection and Control Functions
The Eaton’s EDR-5000 distribution protection relay has been designed for maximum User flexibility and
simplicity. The base relay includes all the standard current and voltage protection and metering functions.
Directional Overcurrent Protection
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides complete 3-phase and ground directional overcurrent
protection. There are 8 independent ground overcurrent elements. The ground elements “X” use the
independently measured ground (or neutral) current from a separate current-sensing input. The ground
elements “R” uses a calculated 3Io residual current obtained from the sum of the 3-phase currents. This
calculated current could be used for either the neutral or ground current in a 3-phase, 4-wire system. Each of
the phase and ground overcurrent elements can be selected to operate based on fundamental or RMS current.
Phase direction is a function used to supervise all phase current elements (50, 51). A quadrature voltage is
compared to a corresponding phase current to establish the direction of the fault. This function is selectable to
operate in the forward, reverse or both directions. Ground direction is used to supervise ground current
elements and is accomplished by using ground, negative sequence or residual currents supervised by zero,
negative, or positive sequence voltages or ground current. This function s selectable to operate in forward,
reverse or both directions.
Voltage Restrained Overcurrent
Voltage restraint reduces the overcurrent pickup level (51P[3]). This modification of the pickup overcurrent level
is compared to the corresponding phase input voltage. The EDR-5000 uses the simple linear model below to
determine the effective pickup value.
Sync-check
The sync-check function is provided for double-ended power source applications. The sync-check monitors
voltage magnitude, phase angle and slip frequency between the bus and line. It also incorporates breaker close
time, dead bus dead line, dead bus live line, and live bus live line features
Reverse Power
Reverse power provides control for power flowing through a feeder. There are three elements to be configured:
•
•
•
Operate in forward;
Reverse; or
Under or over power conditions.
Reverse power is typically applied to generator or motor applications while under power is generally applied to
load or generation loss
Reverse Vars
Reverse vars can be used to detect loss of excitation in synchronous machines. There are three elements to be
configured:
•
•
•
Operate in forward;
Reverse; or
Under or over vars conditions.
www.eaton.com
11
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Inverse-Time Characteristics
There are 11 User-selectable inverse-time overcurrent curve characteristics. The User can select from the
ANSI, IEC, or thermal curve families and can select instantaneous or time delay reset characteristics.
Breaker Failure
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay includes a breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) function that can be initiated
from either an internal or external trip signal. This is an independent element that can be used to operate a
lockout relay or trip an upstream breaker. The timer must be longer than the breaker operating time and the
protective function reset times.
Voltage Protection
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay has four voltage-input circuits. There is a 3-phase set designated as
Main Voltage (M) and a single-phase voltage circuit designated as Auxiliary Voltage (A). Both include
undervoltage (27) and overvoltage (59) protection. The 3-phase voltage protection can be set to operate on a
single-phase, 2 out of 3 phases, or all 3-phase logic. The Main VTs also provide phase voltage
unbalance/reversal (47 negative sequence) protection. Each element has an independent threshold set point
and adjustable time delay.
Ground Voltage Protection
In high impedance grounded systems, ground fault protection is provided by the detection of zero sequence
voltage (3Vo) voltage in the neutral of the transformer by an overvoltage element (59N) connected to the
secondary of the distribution grounding transformer, or in the secondary of a Wye- Broken Delta transformer
used when the neutral is not accessible or in Delta system. In the EDR-5000, the User can measure this zero
sequence voltage through the 4th voltage input; the 59N element has to be desensitized for 3rd harmonic
voltages that can be present in the system under normal operation.
Flexible Phase Rotation
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay can be applied on either an A-B-C or A-C-B phase rotation. A User
setting permits correct operation and indication of the actual system configuration.
Frequency Protection
The EDR-5000 relay provides six frequency elements than can be used to detect under/over frequency, rate of
change, and a vector surge (decoupling of two systems) protection on the Main VT inputs. Each element has an
independent threshold set point and adjustable time delay.
Autoreclosing Logic
The EDR-5000 provides a six shot-recloser scheme. Autoreclosing is normally used by the utilities in their
distribution and transmission lines, but it can be used in commercial and industrial applications with long
overhead lines. Nearly 85% of the faults that occur on overhead lines are transient in nature. Tripping of a
breaker normally clears a transient fault and reclosing of the breaker restores power back to the circuit.
Maintenance Mode
The Maintenance Mode can improve safety by providing a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing
time and lower incident energy levels at energized panels. The Maintenance Mode allows the User to switch to
more sensitive settings via a password protected soft key, communication, or via a digital Input while
maintenance work is being performed at an energized panel or device. The more sensitive settings provide
greater security for maintenance personnel and helps reduce the possibility of injury.
12
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Monitoring and Metering
Sequence of Events Records
The EDR-5000 protection relay records a maximum of 300 events associated with the relay. An event is
classified as a change of state as detected by the relay. These include relay pickups, dropouts, trips, contact
closure, alarms, setting changes, and self-diagnostic failures. Each event is date and time stamped to a 1 ms
resolution. The events are stored in a FIFO in chronological order.
Trip Log
The EDR-5000 protection relay will store a maximum of 20 trip records in a FIFO trip log. Each trip record will
be date and time stamped to a 1 ms resolution. The trip log record will include information on the type of fault,
protection elements that operated, fault location, and currents and voltages at the time of the fault.
Waveform Capture
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides oscillography-recording capabilities. The relay will record all
measured signals along with the binary signals of pickup, trip, logic, and contact closures. The EDR-5000 relay
can record up to 6000 cycles of data. The number of records is proportional to the size of each record; the
maximum size per record is 600 cycles. The waveform capture is initiated by up to eight different triggers; it can
also be generated manually through the display or via communications.
Integral User Interface
The front panel User interface has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD display with background illumination for wide angle
viewing in all light conditions. 17 programmable LEDs provide quick and easy visual display of power on, mode
of operation, alarm, and trip indication. Soft keys are provided for operation mode selection, scrolling through
data, and settings. In addition, the relay settings and test functions are password protected.
Load Profiling/Trending
The EDR-5000 relay automatically records selected quantities into non-volatile memory every 5, 10, 15, 30, or
60 minutes, depending on the trending report setting.
Programmable I/O
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides heavy-duty, trip rated, two normally open and eight Form C
contacts. Two isolated inputs can be used for monitoring the trip circuit. One Form C contact is dedicated to the
relay failure alarm function and is operated in a normally energized (fail-safe) mode. There are eight Userconfigurable discrete inputs that accept a wet contact and can operate through a wide range of power. Each
input and output is User-programmable for maximum application flexibility.
Programmable Logic
The EDR-5000 distribution protection relay provides logic gates and timers that the User can customize for
special or unique applications. Each gate can be assigned a logic function of either AND, OR, NAND or NOR.
Each gate can have a maximum of four input signals and each input signal can be required to be a NOT. Input
signals can be external inputs received via the binary inputs or internal values associated with the protection,
alarm or metering set points. Each gate has a unique output assignment and designation that can be used as
the input to another gate. There are 24 independent timers that have adjustable pickup and dropout delay
settings.
www.eaton.com
13
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Comments on the Manual
This manual gives a general explanation of the tasks of device planning, parameter setting, installation,
commissioning, operation, and maintenance of the Eaton devices.
The manual serves as reference document for:
•
•
•
•
Engineers in the protection field;
Commissioning engineers;
Personnel dealing with the setting, testing, and maintenance of protection and control devices; and
Well trained personnel involved in electrical installations and power stations.
All functions concerning the type code will be defined. Should there be a description of any functions,
parameters, or inputs/outputs that do not apply to the device in use, please ignore that information.
All details and references are explained to the best of our knowledge and are based on our experience and
observations.
This manual describes the full featured versions of the devices, including all options.
All technical information and data included in this manual reflect their state at the time this document was issued.
Eaton Corporation reserves the right to carry out technical modifications in line with further development without
changing this manual and without previous notice. Therefore no claim can be brought based on the information
and descriptions included in this manual.
Text, graphics, and formulas do not always apply to the actual delivery scope. The drawings and graphics are
not true to scale. Eaton Corporation does not accept any liability for damage and operational failures caused by
operating errors or disregarding the directions of this manual.
No part of this manual is allowed to be reproduced or passed on to others in any form, unless Eaton Corporation
has issued advanced approval in writing.
This User manual is part of the delivery scope when purchasing the device. In case the device is passed on
(sold) to a third party, the manual has to be passed on as well.
Any repair work carried out on the device requires skilled and competent personnel with verifiable knowledge
and experienced with local safety regulations and have the necessary experience with working on electronic
protection devices and power installations.
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS
The symbol/word combinations detailed below are designed to call the User's attention to issues that could affect
User safety and well being as well as the operating life of the device.
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION, used with the safety alert symbol, indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
14
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
CAUTION, without the safety alert symbol, is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.
NOTICE is used to address information and practices not related to
personal injury.
FOLLOW INSTRUCTIONS
Read this entire manual and all other publications pertaining to the work to
be performed before installing, operating, or servicing this equipment.
Practice all plant and safety instructions and precautions. Failure to follow
the instructions can cause personal injury and/or property damage.
PROPER USE
Any unauthorized modifications to or use of this equipment outside its
specified mechanical, electrical, or other operating limits may cause
personal injury and/or property damage, including damage to the
equipment. Any such unauthorized modifications: (1) constitute "misuse"
and/or "negligence" within the meaning of the product warranty, thereby
excluding warranty coverage for any resulting damage; and (2) invalidate
product certifications or listings.
The programmable devices subject to this manual are designed for
protection and also control of power installations and operational devices.
The devices are further designed for installation in low voltage (LV)
compartments of medium voltage (MV) switchgear panels or in decentralized protection panels. The programming and settings have to meet
all requirements of the protection concept (of the equipment that is to be
protected). The User must ensure that the device will properly recognize
and manage (e.g.: switch off the breaker) on the basis of User selected
programming and settings all operational conditions (failures). Before
starting any operation and after any modification of the
programming/settings, make a documented proof that the programming
and settings meet the requirements of the protection concept.
Typical applications for this product family/device line are for example:
•
Feeder protection;
•
Mains protection;
•
Transformer Protection and
•
Machine protection.
This device is not designed for any usage beyond these applications. The
manufacturer cannot be held liable for any resulting damage. The User
alone bears the risk if this device is used for any application for which it
was not designed. As to the appropriate use of the device: the technical
data specified by Eaton Corporation has to be met.
www.eaton.com
15
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
OUT-OF-DATE PUBLICATION
This publication may have been revised or updated since this copy was
produced. To verify that you have the latest revision, be sure to check the
Eaton Corporation website:
www.eaton.com
The latest versions of most publications are available at this site.
If the User's publication is not found on the web site, please contact Eaton
Customer Support to get the latest copy.
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE AWARENESS
All electronic equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, some
components more than others. To protect these components from
electrostatic damage, the User must take special precautions to minimize or
eliminate electrostatic discharges.
Follow these precautions when working with or near the device.
16
1.
Before performing maintenance on the electronic device, discharge
the static electricity on your body to ground by touching and holding a
grounded metal object (pipes, cabinets, equipment, etc.).
2.
Avoid the build-up of static electricity on your body by not wearing
clothing made of synthetic materials. Wear cotton or cotton-blend
materials as much as possible because these do not store static
electric charges as much as synthetics.
3.
Keep plastic, vinyl, and Styrofoam materials (such as plastic or
Styrofoam cups, cup holders, cigarette packages, cellophane
wrappers, vinyl books or folders, plastic bottles, and plastic ash trays)
away from the device, the modules, and the work area as much as
possible.
4.
Do not remove any printed circuit board (PCB) from the device cabinet
unless absolutely necessary. If you must remove the PCB from the
device cabinet, follow these precautions:
•
Do not touch any part of the PCB except the edges.
•
Do not touch the electrical conductors, the connectors, or the
components with conductive devices or with your hands.
•
When replacing a PCB, keep the new PCB in the plastic, antistatic protective bag it comes in until you are ready to install
the PCB. Immediately after removing the old PCB from the
device cabinet, place it in the anti-static protective bag.
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Eaton Corporation reserves the right to update any portion of this publication at any time. Information provided
by Eaton Corporation is believed to be correct and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Eaton
Corporation unless otherwise expressly undertaken.
© Eaton Corporation, 2010. All Rights Reserved.
What Is Included with the Device
The device package includes all connection terminals, except communication connectors, but does not include
the fastening material. Please check the package for completeness upon delivery.
Device Package Contents:
•
•
•
•
1 – Protective Relay;
1 – Mount (Standard or Projection);
1 – Quick Start Guide; and
2 – CDs
Disk 1 - Contains the User's Manual, Modbus Datapoint List, Wiring Diagram, and Device
Template for Off-line Parameter Setting;
Disk 2 - Contains PowerPort-E and Quality Manager software applications.
Disk1 contains the device templates. The device templates MUST BE
installed to allow PowerPort-E to configure a device off-line.
Please make sure the product label, wiring diagram, type code, and materials and description pertain to this
device. If you have any doubts, please contact Eaton Corporation's Customer Service Department.
Storage
The devices must not be stored outdoors. If stored, it must be stored in an area with temperature and humidity
control (see the Technical Data section contained in this manual).
Important Information
In line with the customer’s requirement, the devices are combined in a
modular way (in compliance with the order code). The terminal assignment
of the device can be found on the top of the device (wiring diagram). In
addition, it can be found within the Appendix of this manual (see Wiring
Diagrams).
www.eaton.com
17
18
www.eaton.com
"φ "=Elements with complex functions
"gray-box".
Functional description: If the setting
value "IG.Block at VG=0" is set to
"inactive", the output 1 is active and
output 2 is inactive. If the setting value
"IG.Block at VE=0" is set to "active",
the output 2 is active and the output 1
is inactive.
Measured Values:
Internal message
Signal:
Device Planning:
Setting Value:
φ
AR.t-D
Active
Inactive
IG.nondir Trip at
VG=0
t-D
IG
0
<Name>.*int Alm L1
Prot.I dir fwd
<Name>
<Name>.I
2
1
Limit value monitoring (Compared to
a fixed value). Compares a value with
the fixed set limit; output value is
binary as a result of the comparision.
If the signal exceeds the limit, the
corresponding output signal becomes
"1".
Limit value monitoring with three
analog input values. Compares 3
analog values with the set limit; output
values are three different binary
values as a result of the comparision.
If the analog signal exceeds the limit I/
In, the corresponding output signal
becomes "1".
Parameter of a Module-Input (with
special values): An (1..n) output from the
list will be assigned to the input
"<name>.identifier". If the parameter is
set to "ItemNull", an "active"-signal will be
given out.
Parameter of a Module-Input with a
SelectionList/DropDown. An (1..n)
signal/output from the list or a predefined value can be selected.
Option/features to be realised in the future.
IC
IB
IA
V
<20%Vn
I/ In
No assignment,1..n
1..n,
1..n,
Assignment
VeEnableList
No assignment 1
<Name>
1..n, Assignment List
<Name>
Active
Inactive
Bkr.Latched
Direct Command
Selection List
<Name>
Adaptive Parameter
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Symbols
www.eaton.com
Analog Value
Comparator
Analog Values
Quotient of Analog Values
Band-pass (filter)
IH2
Band-pass (filter)
IH1
Negated Output
Negated Input
Inverting
Exclusive-XR
Or
And
IH1
IH2
IH2
IH1
XOR
OR
AND
Time stage minimum pulse
width: The pulse width
<name>.t will be started if a
"1" is feed to the input. By
starting <name>.t, the
output becomes "1". If the
time is expired, the output
becomes "0" independent
from the input signal.
Edge triggered counter
+ Increment
R Reset
Time stage: A "1" at the
input starts the element. If
the time <name>.t is
expired, the output becomes
"1" too. The time stage will
be reset by "0" at the input.
Thus the output will be set to
"0" at the same time.
RS flip-flop
abcd
0 0 Unchanged
0101
1010
1101
b
a
t
1
R
+
Q
Q
Counter
t2
t1: Switch On Delay
t2: Switch Off Delay
t2
c
d
Bkr.t-TripCmd
t1
t1
Delay Timer
R1
S
t1
Delay Timer
t2
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
19
2
20
www.eaton.com
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision
Ground Fault
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision
Ground Fault
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision
Phase overcurrent
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings**
10a
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
1
Please Refer to Diagram: Prot
2
VTS.Pickup
VTS.Pickup
Please Refer to Diagram: VTS
Please Refer to Diagram: VTS
12
11
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground
Prot - 50X - Direction Detection Fault
10b
Prot - 50R - Direction Detection
Name. Fault in Projected Direction
Name. Fault in Projected Direction
IH2.Blo IG
IH2.Blo Phase C
IH2.Blo Phase B
IH2.Blo Phase A
Name.Active
Name.Blo TripCmd
Name.Active
Prot.Available
Input Signal
Output Signal
Name.TripCmd
Name.TripCmd
Name.TripCmd
Name.TripCmd
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip Phase C
Name.Trip Phase C
Name.Trip Phase C
Name.Trip Phase B
Name.Trip Phase B
Name.Trip Phase B
Name.Trip Phase A
Each trip of an active, trip authorized
protection module will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip Phase A
Name.Pickup
Name.Trip Phase A
Each pickup of a module (except from
supervision modules but including BF) will
lead to a general pickup (collective pickup).
19d
19c
19b
19a
19
18b
18a
18
17b
17a
17
16b
16a
16
15
14
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
www.eaton.com
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup IC
Name.Pickup IC
Name.Pickup IC
Name.Pickup IB
Name.Pickup IB
Name.Pickup IB
Name.Pickup IA
Name.Pickup IA
Name.Pickup IA
Name.Trip
Name.Trip Phase C
Name.Trip Phase B
Name.Trip Phase A
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module
will lead to a general trip.
27
26b
26a
26
25b
25a
25
24b
24a
24
23
22
21
20
CTS.Pickup
Q->&V<.Decoupling Energy Resource
LOP.LOP Blo
Bkr.Pos Disturb
Bkr.Pos Indeterm
Bkr.Pos OPEN
Bkr.Pos CLOSE
Bkr.State
Prot.Blo TripCmd
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup Phase C
Name.Pickup Phase B
Name.Pickup Phase A
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27d
27c
27b
27a
Please Refer to Diagram: CTS.Pickup
40
39
Please Refer to Diagram: Q->&V<.Decoupling Energy Resource
Please Refer to Diagram: LOP.LOP Blo
Please Refer to Diagram: Bkr.Bkr Manager
Please Refer to Diagram: Bkr.Bkr Manager
Please Refer to Diagram: Bkr.Bkr Manager
Please Refer to Diagram: Bkr.Bkr Manager
Please Refer to Diagram: Bkr.Bkr Manager
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX
depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general pickup (collective pickup).
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
21
22
Breaker.CLOSE Cmd
Breaker.Prot CLOSE
Breaker.CLOSE Cmd
Breaker.Prot CLOSE
42
41
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
General Conventions
»Parameters are indicated by right and left double arrow heads and written in italic.«
»SIGNALS are indicated by right and left double arrow heads and small caps.«
[Paths are indicated by brackets.]
Software and Device names are written in italic.
Module and Instance (Element) names are displayed italic and underlined.
»Pushbuttons, Modes, and Menu entries are indicated by right and left double arrow heads.«
1
2
3
Image References (Squares)
.
www.eaton.com
23
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device
EDR-5000
Device Planning
Planning of a device means to reduce the functional range to a degree that suits the protection task to be fulfilled
(i.e.: the device shows only those functions needed or desired). If the User, for example, deactivates the voltage
protection function, all parameter branches related to this function will not appear in the parameter. All
corresponding events, signals, etc. will also be deactivated. Due to this change, the parameter trees become
very transparent.
Planning also involves adjustment of all basic system data (frequency etc.).
It MUST be taken into account that by deactivating, for instance, protective
functions, the User also changes the functionality of the device. If the User
cancels the directional feature of the overcurrent protections, then the
device no longer trips in a directional way but merely in a non-directional
way.
The manufacturer does not accept liability for any personal or material
damage as a result of incorrect planning.
Contact your Eaton Customer Service representative for more information.
Beware of the inadvertent deactivating of protective functions/modules.
If the User is deactivating modules within the device planning, all
parameters of those modules will be set on default.
If the User is activating one of these modules, again, all parameters of
those reactivated modules will be set on default.
If the protective device is equipped with Zone Interlocking, overcurrent and
earth current elements are needed to trigger the Zone Interlocking function.
Therefore, some overcurrent and earth current elements cannot be
deactivated if the device is equipped with Zone Interlocking.
Device Planning Parameters of the Device
Parameter
Description
Options
Hardware
Variant 1
Optional Hardware Extension
»A« 8 DI, 2 Form A, 8+1 Form C, 8 DI, 2
ZI
Form A,
8+1 Form
C, ZI
[EDR-5000]
Hardware
Variant 2
Optional Hardware Extension
»0« Without,
[EDR-5000]
»1« Sensitive Ground Current
24
www.eaton.com
Default
»0«
Without
Menu Path
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Communica Communication
tion
Options
Default
Menu Path
»B« Modbus RTU: RS485 /
Terminals,
Modbus
RTU:
RS485 /
Terminals
[EDR-5000]
»A«
Standard
[EDR-5000]
»H« Ethernet: RJ45,
»I« RS485 term / Ethernet
Printed
Circuit
Board
Printed Circuit Board
»A« Standard,
»B« Conformal Coating
There are two mounts available for the EDR-5000: a Standard Mount and a Projection Mount. To order the
EDR-5000 with a Standard Mount, append the device code with a zero (0). To order the EDR-5000 with a Projection Mount, append the device code with a one (1). Refer to the table below for details of the available device
options.
A retrofit kit for Eaton IQ cutouts is available (Style No. 66D2217G01 – Catalog No. ER-IQEDRKIT). This kit is
required when replacing a DT-3000 with the EDR-5000.
EDR-5000 Eaton Distribution Relay Removable
Terminals
EDR-5000
A
0
B
A
1
Choose from the following options.
Hardware Option 1
8 DI, 11 Outputs, Removable Terminals, Zone
Interlocking.
A
8 DI, 11 Outputs, Removable Terminals, Zone
Interlocking, and Larger Display*.
B
Hardware Option 2
Phase Current 5A/1A, Ground Current 5A/1A,
Power Supply Range: 19-300 Vdc, 40-250 Vac.
0
(Zero)
Phase Current 5A/1A, Sensitive Ground Current
0.5A/0.1A, Power Supply Range: 19-300 Vdc,
40-250 Vac.*
1
Communication Options
Modbus-RTU (RS-485)
B
IEC-61850 (Goose)
H
Modbus-RTU + Modbus-TCP
I
www.eaton.com
25
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Conformal Coating Options
None
A
Conformal Coated Circuit Boards
B
Mounting Options
Standard Mount
0
(Zero)
Projection Panel Mount
*
1
Consult the factory for the availability of sensitive ground and larger display.
The catalog number identification table defines the electrical characteristics and operation features included in
the EDR-5000. For example, if the catalog number were EDR-5000A0BA1, the device would have the following:
EDR-5000
(A) -
8 DI, 11 Outputs Relays, Removable Terminals, Zone Interlocking
(0)
5A/1A Phase and Ground CTs, Power Supply Range: 19-300 Vdc, 40-250 Vac.
-
(B) -
Modbus-RTU (RS-485)
(A) -
Without Conformal Coating
(1)
Projection Panel Mount
26
-
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Installation and Wiring
Three-Side-View
Depending on the connection method of the communication system used, the
needed space (depth) differs. If, for instance, a D-Sub-Plug is used, it has to be
added to the depth dimension.
Even when the auxiliary voltage is switched-off, unsafe voltages remain at
the device connections.
Outline Projection Mount - Door Cut-out
The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (AWG
12-10 [4 to 6 mm2] / 15 In-lb [1.7 Nm]) to the housing, using the screw that is
marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device).
The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (AWG 14
[2.5 mm2] / 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]) at terminal X1.
DO NOT over-tighten the mounting nuts of the relay (0.164 X32 ). Check the
torque by means of a torque wrench (1.7 Nm [15 In-lb]). Over-tightening
the mounting nuts could cause personal injury or damage the relay.
www.eaton.com
27
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Outline Standard Mount - Door Cut-out
The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (AWG
12-10 [4 to 6 mm2] / 15 In-lb [1.7 Nm]) to the housing, using the screw that
is marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device).
The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (AWG 14
[2.5 mm2] / 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]) at terminal X1.
Overview of Slots - Assembly Groups
In line with the customers' requirement, the devices are combined in a
modular way (in compliance with the order code). In each of the slots, an
assembly/group may be integrated. In the following diagram, the terminal
assignment of the individual assembly/groups are shown. The exact
installation/placement of the individual modules can be determined from
the connection diagram attached to the top of your device.
28
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Overview of Slots
Housing B2
Slot1
Slot2
X1
X2
X100
X101
Slot3
Slot4
Slot5
Slot6
X3
X4
X5
X6
X102
X103
X104
Schematic Diagram
The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (AWG
12-10 [4 to 6 mm2] / 15 In-lb [1.7 Nm]) to the housing, using the screw that is
marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device).
The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (AWG 14
[2.5 mm2] / 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]) at terminal X1.
Grounding
The housing must be carefully grounded. Connect a ground cable (AWG
12-10 [4 to 6 mm2] / 15 In-lb [1.7 Nm]) to the housing, using the screw that is
marked with the ground symbol (at the rear side of the device).
The power supply card needs a separate ground connection (AWG 14
[2.5 mm2] / 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm]) at terminal X1.
The devices are very sensitive to electrostatic discharges.
www.eaton.com
29
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Typical Connection Diagrams
A
B
C
A
B
C
X4.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
B
X3.
C
IA'
IB'
IC'
IX'
IA
IB
IC
LOAD
Wye VTs and 5 A CTs in Residual Connection
30
www.eaton.com
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
VA/
VAB
VB/
VBC
VC/
VCA
VX
1A
5A
N
IA
1A
5A
N
IB
1A
5A
IC
N
1A
5A
N
IX
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
A
B
C
A
B
C
X4.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
B
C
IA'
IB'
IC'
IA
IB
IC
IX'
X3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
VA/
VAB
VB/
VBC
VC/
VCA
VX
1A
5A
N
IA
1A
5A
N
IB
1A
5A
IC
N
1A
5A
IX
N
LOAD
Wye Input Wiring with Aux VX Input Connected to the Load Side of the Breaker and 1A
CTs in Residual Connection
www.eaton.com
31
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
A
B
C
A
A
B
B
X4.
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C
IA'
IB'
IC'
IX'
IA
IB
X3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
VA/
VAB
VB/
VBC
VC/
VCA
VX
1A
5A
N
1A
5A
N
5A
IC
N
1A
5A
N
IC
Open Delta VTs Input Wiring and 1 A CTs in Residual Connection
www.eaton.com
IB
1A
LOAD
32
IA
IX
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
A
B
C
A
A
B
B
X4.
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C
IA'
IB'
IC'
IA
IB
IC
IX'
X3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
VA/
VAB
VB/
VBC
VC/
VCA
VX
1A
5A
N
IA
1A
5A
N
IB
1A
5A
IC
N
1A
5A
N
IX
LOAD
Open Delta VTs Input Wiring with Aux VTs Connected to the Load Side of the Breaker
and 1A CTs in Residual Connection
www.eaton.com
33
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Slot X1: Power Supply Card with Digital Inputs
Slot1
Slot2
X1
X2
X100
X101
Slot3
Slot4
Slot5
Slot6
X3
X4
X5
X6
X102
X103
X104
Rear Side of the Device (Slots)
The type of power supply card and the number of digital inputs on it used in this slot is dependent on the ordered
device type. The different variants have a different scope of functions.
Available assembly groups in this slot:
•
(DI8-X1): This assembly group comprises a wide-range power supply unit; and two non-grouped digital
inputs and six (6) digital inputs (grouped).
The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code.
DI-8 X - Power Supply and Digital Inputs
Make sure that the tightening torque is 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm].
This assembly group comprises:
•
•
•
34
A wide-range power supply unit;
Two non-grouped digital inputs; and
Six (6) digital inputs, grouped.
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Auxiliary Voltage Supply
•
The auxiliary voltage inputs (wide-range power supply unit) are non-polarized. The device can be
powered with an AC or DC control voltage.
Digital Inputs
For each digital input group, the related voltage input range has to be
configured. Wrong switching thresholds can result in malfunctions/wrong
signal transfer times.
The digital inputs are provided with different switching thresholds (that are configurable) (two AC and five DC input ranges). The following switching levels can be defined:
•
•
•
•
•
24 Vdc;
48 Vdc
60 Vdc;
110/120 Vac/dc; and
230/240 Vac/dc.
If a voltage >80% of the set switching threshold is applied at the digital input, the state change is recognized
(logically “1”). If the voltage is below 40% of the set switching threshold, the device detects logically “0”.
When using DC supply, the negative potential has to be connected to the
common terminal (COM1, COM2, COM3 - please see the terminal marking).
www.eaton.com
35
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Terminal Marking
X?.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
PE
V+ Power Supply
VN.C.
COM1
DI1
COM2
DI2
COM3
COM
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
Do not use
Do not use
Pin Assignment
36
1
PE
2
V+
3
V-
4
N.C.
5
COM1
6
DI1
7
COM2
8
DI2
9
COM3
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
0+HTL-NT
COM3
Power Supply
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
DI7
DI8
Do not use
Do not use
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Slot X2: Relay Output Card - Zone Interlock
Slot1
Slot2
X1
X2
X100
X101
Slot3
Slot4
Slot5
Slot6
X3
X4
X5
X6
X102
X103
X104
Rear Side of the Device (Slots)
The type of card in this slot is dependent on the ordered device type. The different variants have a different
scope of functions.
Available assembly groups in this slot:
•
(RO-4Z X2): Assembly Group with four Relay Outputs (two Form A and two Form C) and Zone
Interlocking.
The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code.
RO-ZI X - Relay Outputs and Zone Interlock
The Relay Outputs are potential-free contacts. In the Assignment/Relay Outputs section, the assignment of the
Relay Outputs is specified. The changeable signals are listed in the Assignment List section.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm].
Please carefully consider the current carrying capacity of the Relay
Outputs. Please refer to the Technical Data.
www.eaton.com
37
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Terminal Marking
X?.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Do not use
Do not use
RO1
RO2
RO3
RO4
OUT
COM
IN
COM
Pin Assignment
1
Do not use
RO1 N.O.
5
4
3
Do not use
2
RO-4Z X
38
7
RO3 N.C.
8
RO3 CMN
9
RO3 N.O.
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
6
RO2 N.O.
RO4 N.C.
RO4 CMN
RO4 N.O.
OUT
COM
IN
COM
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Slot X3: Current Transformer Measuring Inputs
Slot1
Slot2
X1
X2
X100
X101
Slot3
Slot4
Slot5
Slot6
X3
X4
X5
X6
X102
X103
X104
Rear Side of the Device (Slots)
This slot contains the current transformer measuring inputs. Depending on the order code, this might be a
standard current measuring card or a sensitive ground current measuring card.
Available assembly groups in this slot:
•
(TI-4 X3): Standard ground current measuring card.
•
(TIS-4 X3): Sensitive Ground current measuring card.
The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code.
TI X- Standard Phase and Ground Current Measuring Input Card
A current measuring card is provided with four (4) current measuring inputs: three for measuring the phase
currents and one for measuring of the ground current. Each of the current measuring inputs has a measuring
input for 1 A and 5 A.
The input for ground current measuring either can be connected to a zero sequence current transformer or,
alternatively, it is possible to connect the summation current path of the phase current transformer to this input
(residual connection).
Current transformers have to be earth grounded on their secondary side.
www.eaton.com
39
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Interrupting the secondary circuits of current transformers causes
hazardous voltages.
The secondary side of the current transformers have to be short circuited
before the current circuit to the device is opened.
The current measuring inputs may exclusively be connected to current
measuring transformers (with galvanic separation).
•
Do not mix the inputs (1 A/5 A).
•
Make sure the transformer ratios and the power of the CTs are
correctly rated. If the rating of the CTs is not correct (overrated),
then the normal operational conditions may not be recognized. The
pickup value of the measuring unit amounts to approximately 3% of
the rated current of the device. Also, the CTs need a current greater
than approximately 3% of the rated current to ensure sufficient
accuracy.
Example: For a 600 A CT (primary current), any currents below 18 A
cannot be detected.
•
Overloading can result in destruction of the measuring inputs or
faulty signals. Overloading means that, in case of a short circuit, the
current carrying capacity of the measuring inputs could be
exceeded.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 17.7 In-lb [2 Nm].
40
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Terminal Markings
X?.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1A
5A
IA
N
1A
5A
IB
N
1A
5A
IC
N
1A
5A
IX
N
Pin Assignment
0+HTL-TI-x
IA-1A
1
IA-5A
2
IB-1A
4
IB-5A
5
IC-1A
7
IC-5A
8
IX-1A
10
IX-5A
3
IA-N
6
IB-N
9
IC-N
12
IX-N
11
www.eaton.com
41
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
TIS X – Phase and Sensitive Ground Current Measuring Card
The sensitive ground current measuring card is provided with four (4) current measuring inputs: three for
measuring the phase currents and one for measuring of the sensitive ground current. Each of the phase current
measuring inputs has a measuring input for 1 A and 5 A.
The sensitive ground current measuring inputs has a measuring input for 0.1 A and 0.5 A.
The input for ground current measuring either can be connected to a zero sequence current transformer or,
alternatively, it is possible to connect the summation current path of the phase current transformer to this input
(residual connection).
Current transformers have to be earth grounded on their secondary side.
Interrupting the secondary circuits of current transformers causes
hazardous voltages.
The secondary side of the current transformers have to be short circuited
before the current circuit to the device is opened.
The current measuring inputs may exclusively be connected to current
measuring transformers (with galvanic separation).
Make sure that the tightening torque is 17.7 In-lb [2 Nm].
42
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Terminal Markings
X?.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1A
5A
IA
N
1A
5A
IB
N
1A
5A
IC
N
0.1A
0.5A
IX
N
Pin Assignment
IA-1A
1
IA-5A
2
IB-1A
4
IB-5A
5
IC-1A
7
IC-5A
IX-0.1A
IX-0.5A
3
IA-N
6
IB-N
9
IC-N
12
IX-N
8
10
11
Common CT Wiring Configurations
Check the installation direction.
It is imperative that the secondary sides of measuring transformers be
grounded.
www.eaton.com
43
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
The current measuring inputs may exclusively be connected to current
measuring transformers (with galvanic separation).
CT secondary circuits must always to be low-burdened or short-circuited
during operation.
For current and voltage sensing function external wired and appropriate
current and voltage transformer shall be used, based on the required input
measurement ratings. Those devices provide the necessary insulation
functionality.
All current measuring inputs can be provided with 1 A or 5 A nominal.
Make sure that the wiring is correct.
CT Connection Options
The current transformers may be connected in several ways, and the specified configuration affects the way
system measurements are made and results computed. The computation of the residual current IR, is
dependent on the system configuration setting for the CT connection. The configurations resulting from the
setting options are shown as well as the calculated IR residual current.
3-phase, 3-wire IG Calculated
A
B
C
X3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
IA'
IB'
IA
IC'
IB
IC
IR calc = IA + IB + IC = IG
Three-phase Current Measurement; Inom Secondary = 5 A.
44
www.eaton.com
1A
5A
IA
N
1A
5A
IB
N
1A
5A
IC
N
1A
5A
N
IX
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
3-phase, 3-wire IG Measured
A
B
C
IA'
IB'
IA
IC'
IB
IX'
X3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1A
5A
IA
N
1A
5A
IB
N
1A
5A
IC
N
1A
5A
IX
N
IC
Zero Sequence Current
Transformer: Measures the
ground current (sum of the three
phase currents). Can be used for
measuring the ground current in
isolated and compensated
networks. The shield is to be
returned through the zero
sequence current transformer.
IR calc = IA + IB + IC
IX meas = IG
Three-phase Current Measurement; Inom Secondary = 1 A.
Ground Current Measuring via Zero Sequence CT ; IGnom Secondary = 1 A.
Warning!
The shielding at the dismantled end of the line has to be put through the zero sequence
current transformer and has to be grounded at the cable side.
www.eaton.com
45
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
4-wire system, 4th CT on Neutral
A
B
N
C
X3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
IA'
IB'
IA
IC'
IB
IN'
IC
IN
IR calc´
IR calc = IG = IA + IB + IC - IN
IX meas=IN
4-wire system, 4th CT on Neutral; In secondary = 5 A.
46
www.eaton.com
1A
5A
N
IA
1A
5A
N
IB
1A
5A
IC
N
1A
5A
N
IX
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
4-wire System Ground Current CT Involving Neutral
A
B
N
C
X3.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
IA'
IA
IB'
IB
IC'
IR calc´
IC
1A
5A
N
IA
1A
5A
N
IB
1A
5A
IC
N
1A
5A
N
IX
IG = IA + IB + IC + IN
IR calc = IA + IB + IC = IG + IN
IN
IX meas = IG
4-wire system with ground current CT (Torodial) involving Neutral; In secondary = 5 A.
Slot X4: Voltage Transformer Measuring Inputs
Slot1
Slot2
X1
X2
X100
X101
Slot3
Slot4
Slot5
Slot6
X3
X4
X5
X6
X102
X103
X104
Rear Side of the Device (Slots)
www.eaton.com
47
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
This slot contains the voltage transformer measuring inputs.
Voltage Measuring Inputs
The device is provided with 4 voltage measuring inputs. Three for measuring the mains voltages (»VAB«,
»VBC« , »VCA« - in case of Open Delta) or phase-to-neutral voltages (»VA«, »VB«, »VC« in case of Wye). The
fourth measuring input is to be used for »VX«.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 1.2-1-6 Nm [11-15 In-lb].
The rotating field of your power supply system has to be taken in to
account. Make sure that the voltage transformers are wired correctly.
For the Open Delta connection the system parameter »Main VT con« has to
be set to »Open Delta«.
For the Wye connection the system parameter »Main VT con« has to be set
to »Wye«.
Please refer to the Technical Data.
48
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Terminal Marking
X?.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VL1/VL12
VL2/VL23
VL3/VL31
VX
Pin assignment
1
VL1.1
2
VL1.2
3
VL2.1
4
VL2.2
5
VL3.1
6
VL3.2
7
VX1.1
8
0+HTL-TU-x
VX1.2
www.eaton.com
49
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Common VT Wirings
Check the installation direction of the VTs.
It is imperative that the secondary sides of measuring transformers be
grounded.
For current and voltage sensing function, externally wired and appropriate
current and voltage transformer must be used, based on the required input
measurement ratings. Those devices provide the necessary insulation
functionality.
VT Check Measuring Values
Connect a three-phase measuring voltage equal to the rated voltage to the relay.
Take the connection of the measuring transformers
(open delta/Wye connection) into account.
Now adjust the voltage values in the nominal voltage range with the corresponding nominal frequencies that are
not likely to cause over-voltage or under-voltage trips.
Compare the values shown in the device display with the readings of the measuring instruments. The deviation
must be according to the specifications in the Technical Data section.
50
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
VT Wye
A
B
C
A
VCA'
VAB'
B
VBC'
VAB
C
N
VA'
VBC
VB' VC'
VCA
X?.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VA/
VAB
VB/
VBC
VC/
VCA
VX
VA
VB
VC
Three-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measurement inputs:
"Wye"
www.eaton.com
51
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
VT Open Delta
A
B
C
X?.
A
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VCA'
VAB'
B
VBC'
C
VAB
VBC
VCA
Two-phase voltage measurement - wiring of the measuring inputs:
"Open Delta"
Slot X5: Relay Output Card
Slot1
Slot2
X1
X2
X100
X101
Slot3
Slot4
Slot5
Slot6
X3
X4
X5
X6
X102
X103
Rear Side of the Device (Slots)
52
www.eaton.com
X104
VA/
VAB
VB/
VBC
VC/
VCA
VX
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
The type of card in this slot is dependent on the ordered device type. The different variants have a different
scope of functions.
Available assembly groups in this slot:
•
(RO-6 X5): Assembly Group with 6 Relay Outputs (Form C).
The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code.
RO-6 X - Relay Outputs
The Relay Outputs are potential-free contacts. In the Assignment/Relay Outputs section, the assignment of the
Relay Outputs is specified. The changeable signals are listed in the Assignment List section.
Make sure that the tightening torque is 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm].
Please carefully consider the current carrying capacity of the Relay
Outputs. Please refer to the Technical Data.
www.eaton.com
53
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Terminal Marking
X?.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
RO1
RO2
RO3
RO4
RO5
RO6
Pin Assignment
54
1
RO1 N.C.
2
RO1 CMN
3
RO1 N.O.
4
RO2 N.C.
5
RO2 CMN
6
RO2 N.O.
7
RO3 N.C.
8
RO3 CMN
18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
0+HTL-MK
RO3 N.O.
RO4 N.C.
RO4 CMN
RO4 N.O.
RO5 N.C.
RO5 CMN
RO5 N.O.
RO6 N.C.
RO6 CMN
RO6 N.O.
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Slot X100: Ethernet Interface
Slot1
Slot2
X1
X2
X100
X101
Slot3
Slot4
Slot5
Slot6
X3
X4
X5
X6
X102
X103
X104
Rear Side of the Device (Slots)
An Ethernet interface may be available depending on the device type ordered.
The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code.
Ethernet - RJ45
1
N.C.
N.C.
RxD –
N.C.
N.C.
RxD +
TxD –
TxD +
Terminal Marking
8
www.eaton.com
55
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Slot X103: Data Communication
Slot1
Slot2
X1
X2
X100
X101
Slot3
Slot4
Slot5
Slot6
X3
X4
X5
X6
X102
X103
X104
Rear Side of the Device (Slots)
The data communication interface in the X103 slot is dependent on the ordered device type. The scope of
functions is dependent on the type of data communication interface.
Available assembly groups in this slot:
•
RS485 Terminals
The available combinations can be gathered from the ordering code.
56
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
RS485 - Modbus® RTU
Make sure that the tightening torque is 2-4 In-lb [0.22-0.45 Nm].
Terminal Marking
Protective Relay
560Ω
560 Ω
A(-)
B(+)
120Ω
1
2
3
4
5
6
X103
HF Shield
GND
+5V
Pin Assignment
Protective Relay
+5V
R1
HF Shield
R2
A(-)
R1
B(+)
R1 = 560 Ω
R2 = 120 Ω
GND
1 2 3 4 5 6
The Modbus® connection cable must be shielded. The shielding has to be
fixed at the screw that is marked with the ground symbol at the rear side of
the device.
The communication is Half Duplex.
www.eaton.com
57
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Wiring Example: Device in the Middle of the Bus
Protective Relay
+5V
R1
R2
HF Shield
R1 = 560 Ω
R2 = 120 Ω
GND
R1
1 2 3 4 5 6
B(+)
B(+)*
A(-)*
A(-)
Wiring Example: Device at the End of the BUS (Using the Integrated Terminal Resistor)
Protective Relay
+5V
R1
R2
R1
1 2 3 4 5 6
B(+)
A(-)
58
www.eaton.com
HF Shield
R1 = 560 Ω
R2 = 120 Ω
GND
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Shield at bus master side
connected to earth termination
resistors used
Shield at bus device side
connected to earth termination
resistors used
Shield at bus master side
connected to earth termination
resistors not used
Common
6
HF Shield
5
TR-N
4
A(-)
3
TR-P
2
2.2nF
(internal)
B(+)
1
HF Shield
6
TR-N
5
Common
4
B(+)
3
A(-)
2
2.2nF
(internal)
TR-P
1
Common
6
HF Shield
5
TR-N
HF Shield
4
B(+)
Common
3
A(-)
TR-N
2
2.2nF
(internal)
TR-P
B(+)
1
A(-)
TR-P
Shielding Options (2-wire + Shield)
1
2
3
4
5
6
2.2nF
(internal)
Shield at bus device side
connected to earth termination
resistors not used
Shield at bus master side
connected to earth termination
resistors used
Shield at bus device side
connected to earth termination
resistors used
6
Shield at bus master side
connected to earth termination
resistors not used
www.eaton.com
1
2
HF Shield
5
Common
4
A(-)
3
TR-N
2
B(+)
1
2.2nF
(internal)
TR-P
6
HF Shield
5
Common
4
TR-N
3
A(-)
2
B(+)
1
2.2nF
(internal)
TR-P
6
HF Shield
HF Shield
5
Common
Common
4
TR-N
TR-N
3
A(-)
A(-)
2
TR-P
B(+)
1
2.2nF
(internal)
B(+)
TR-P
Shielding Options (3-wire + Shield)
3
4
5
6
2.2nF
(internal)
Shield at bus device side
connected to earth termination
resistors not used
59
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Slot X104: IRIG-B00X and Supervision Contact
Slot1
Slot2
X1
X2
X100
X101
Slot3
Slot4
Slot5
Slot6
X3
X4
X5
X6
X102
X103
X104
Rear Side of the Device (Slots)
This comprises the IRIG-B00X and the System contact (Supervision Contact).
System Contact and IRIG-B00X
Make sure that the tightening torque is 5-7 In-lb [0.56-0.79 Nm].
60
SC
IRIG-B-
1
2
3
4
5
X104
IRIG-B+
Terminals
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Pin Assignment for Device
0+HTL-uP-6 / 0+HTL-uP-14
SC N.O.
SC CMN
IRIG-B-
SC N.C.
IRIG-B+
X104
1 2 3 4 5
The Supervision Contact (SC) closes after the boot phase of the device if the protection is working. This Supervision Contact (SC) will open if an internal device error has occurred (please refer to the Self Supervision section).
The System-OK contact (SC relay) cannot be configured. The system contact is a Form “C” contact that picks
up when the device is free from internal faults. While the device is booting up, the System OK relay (SC) remains dropped-off (unenergized). As soon as the system is properly started, the System Contact picks up and
the assigned LED is activated accordingly (please refer to the Self Supervision section).
X120 - PC Interface
The interface is a 9-pole D-Sub at all device fronts.
Pin Assignment
1
6
5
9
1 DCD
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI
Housing shielded
www.eaton.com
61
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Assignment of the Null Modem Cable
Assignment of the fully wired, null modem cable.
Dsub -9 (Female)
2
3
4
6,1
7
8
5
9
Signal
RxD
TxD
DTR
DSR, DCD
RTS
CTS
GND (Ground)
Ring Signal
Dsub -9 (Female)
3
2
6,1
4
8
7
5
9
The connection cable must be shielded.
Control Wiring Diagram
Below is the recommended control wiring schematic for the EDR-5000.
Wiring Diagrams
Please refer to the file “edr-5000_wiring_diagrams.pdf” on your manual CD.
62
www.eaton.com
Signal
TxD
RxD
DSR, DCD
DTR
CTS
RTS
GND (Ground)
Ring Signal
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Input, Output, and LED Settings
Digital Input Configuration
The State of the Digital Inputs can be checked within menu:
[Operations/Status Display/Name of the assembly group (e.g. DI-8X)]
The Digital Inputs can be configured within menu:
[Device Para/Digital Inputs/Name of the assembly group (e.g. DI-8X)/Group X]
Set the following parameters for each of the digital inputs:
•
»Nominal voltage«;
•
»Debouncing time«: A state change will only be adopted by the digital input after the debouncing time
has expired; and
•
»Inverting« (where necessary).
Inverting
DI Slot X.DI x
XOR
State of the Digital Input.
Nom Voltage
Debouncing Time
t
Input Signal
0
The debouncing time will be started each time the state of the input signal alternates.
In addition to the debouncing time that can be set via software, there is always a
hardware debouncing time (approx 12 ms) that cannot be turned of.
www.eaton.com
63
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
DI-8P X
Name of the Assembly group:
DI-8P X1
Device Parameters of the Digital Inputs on DI-8P X
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Nom Voltage
Nominal voltage of the digital inputs
24 V dc,
110/120 V dc
[Device Para
48 V dc,
/Digital Inputs
60 V dc,
/DI-8P X1
110/120 V dc,
/Group 1]
230/240 V dc,
110/120 V ac,
230/240 V ac
Inverting 1
Inverting the input signals.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
/Group 1]
Debouncing
Time 1
A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time,
only be recognized after the debouncing
time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms,
transient signals will not be misinterpreted.
50 ms,
20 ms
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
100 ms
Nom Voltage
Nominal voltage of the digital inputs
24 V dc,
[Device Para
/Group 1]
110/120 V dc
[Device Para
48 V dc,
/Digital Inputs
60 V dc,
/DI-8P X1
110/120 V dc,
/Group 2]
230/240 V dc,
110/120 V ac,
230/240 V ac
Inverting 2
Inverting the input signals.
Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
/Group 2]
64
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Debouncing
Time 2
A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time,
only be recognized after the debouncing
time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms,
transient signals will not be misinterpreted.
50 ms,
Default
Menu Path
20 ms
[Device Para
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
100 ms
Nom Voltage
Nominal voltage of the digital inputs
24 V dc,
/Group 2]
110/120 V dc
[Device Para
48 V dc,
/Digital Inputs
60 V dc,
/DI-8P X1
110/120 V dc,
/Group 3]
230/240 V dc,
110/120 V ac,
230/240 V ac
Inverting 3
Inverting the input signals.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
Debouncing
Time 3
A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time,
only be recognized after the debouncing
time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms,
transient signals will not be misinterpreted.
50 ms,
20 ms
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
100 ms
Inverting 4
Inverting the input signals.
Inactive,
[Device Para
/Group 3]
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
Debouncing
Time 4
A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time,
only be recognized after the debouncing
time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms,
transient signals will not be misinterpreted.
50 ms,
20 ms
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
100 ms
Inverting 5
Inverting the input signals.
Inactive,
Active
[Device Para
/Group 3]
Inactive
[Device Para
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
www.eaton.com
65
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Debouncing
Time 5
A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time,
only be recognized after the debouncing
time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms,
transient signals will not be misinterpreted.
50 ms,
Default
Menu Path
20 ms
[Device Para
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
100 ms
Inverting 6
Inverting the input signals.
Inactive,
/Group 3]
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
Debouncing
Time 6
A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time,
only be recognized after the debouncing
time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms,
transient signals will not be misinterpreted.
50 ms,
20 ms
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
100 ms
Inverting 7
Inverting the input signals.
Inactive,
[Device Para
/Group 3]
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
Debouncing
Time 7
A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time,
only be recognized after the debouncing
time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms,
transient signals will not be misinterpreted.
50 ms,
20 ms
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
100 ms
Inverting 8
Inverting the input signals.
Inactive,
[Device Para
/Group 3]
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
Debouncing
Time 8
A change of the state of a digital input will No Debouncing Time,
only be recognized after the debouncing
time has expired (become effective). Thus, 20 ms,
transient signals will not be misinterpreted.
50 ms,
100 ms
66
www.eaton.com
20 ms
[Device Para
/Digital Inputs
/DI-8P X1
/Group 3]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Digital Inputs Output Signals on DI-8P X
Name
Description
DI 1
Signal: Digital Input
DI 2
Signal: Digital Input
DI 3
Signal: Digital Input
DI 4
Signal: Digital Input
DI 5
Signal: Digital Input
DI 6
Signal: Digital Input
DI 7
Signal: Digital Input
DI 8
Signal: Digital Input
Wired Inputs (Aliases)
Available Elements:
WiredInputs
The module WiredInputs allows aliasing Digital Inputs. By means of the menu [Device Para/WiredInputs] the
User can assign specific functions on digital inputs.
Alias Example: The 52a contact will be assigned/connected to Digital input1 (DI1). Once the 52a is
aliased (linked) on the DI1, the signal »WiredInput.52A« can be used instead of the DI1 signal for further
processing within the protective relay. That means, from now on any state changes of the Digital Input1
will we represented by the »WiredInput.52A« signal.
Global Protection Parameter of the Wired Inputs Wired
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
52a M1
Main 1 Breaker Closed
-.-,
-.-
[Device Para
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
www.eaton.com
67
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
52b M1
Main 1 Breaker Open
-.-,
-.-
[Device Para
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
TOCa M1
Main 1 Breaker Connected
-.-,
-.-
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
43/10 M1
Main 1 Breaker Selected To Trip
-.-,
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
68
www.eaton.com
-.-
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
52a M2
Main 2 Breaker Closed
-.-,
-.-
[Device Para
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
52b M2
Main 2 Breaker Open
-.-,
-.-
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
TOCa M2
Main 2 Breaker Connected
-.-,
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
-.-
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
www.eaton.com
69
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
43/10 M2
Main 2 Breaker Selected To Trip
-.-,
-.-
[Device Para
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
52a T
Tie Breaker Closed
-.-,
-.-
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
52b T
Tie Breaker Open
-.-,
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
70
www.eaton.com
-.-
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
TOCa T
Tie Breaker Connected
-.-,
-.-
[Device Para
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
43/10 T
Tie Breaker Selected To Trip
-.-,
-.-
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
43 M
System In Manual
-.-,
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
-.-
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
www.eaton.com
71
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
43 A
System in Auto
-.-,
-.-
[Device Para
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
43 P1
Preferred Source 1
-.-,
-.-
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
43 P2
Preferred Source 2
-.-,
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
72
www.eaton.com
-.-
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Bkr Trouble
Breaker Trouble
-.-,
-.-
[Device Para
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
/WiredInputs]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
States of the Inputs of the Wired Inputs Module
Name
Description
Assignment Via
52a M1-I
State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker
Closed
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
52b M1-I
State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker
Open
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
TOCa M1-I
State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker
Connected
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
43/10 M1-I
State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker
Selected To Trip
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
52a M2-I
State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker
Closed
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
52b M2-I
State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker
Open
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
TOCa M2-I
State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker
Connected
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
43/10 M2-I
State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker
Selected To Trip
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
52a T -I
State of the module input: Tie Breaker
Closed
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
52b T-I
State of the module input: Tie Breaker
Open
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
www.eaton.com
73
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
TOCa T-I
State of the module input: Tie Breaker
Connected
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
43/10 T-I
State of the module input: Tie Breaker
Selected To Trip
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
43 M-I
State of the module input: System In
Manual
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
43 A-I
State of the module input: System in Auto
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
43 P1-I
State of the module input: Preferred Source [Device Para
1
/WiredInputs]
43 P2-I
State of the module input: Preferred Source [Device Para
2
/WiredInputs]
Bkr Trouble-I
Breaker Trouble
[Device Para
/WiredInputs]
Relay Output Configuration
The State of the Relay Outputs can be checked within menu:
[Operations/Status Display/Name of the assembly group (e.g. RO-XX)]
The Relay Outputs can be configured within menu:
[Device Para/Relay Outputs/Name of the assembly group (e.g. RO-XX)]
Set the following parameters for each of the relay output contacts.
•
Up to seven (7) signals from the »assignment list« (OR-connected).
The states of the module outputs and the signals (e.g. states of protective functions) can be assigned to
the relay output contacts. The relay output contacts are “dry-type“ contacts.
•
Each of the assigned signals can be inverted.
•
The (collective) state of the relay output contacts can be inverted.
•
Each relay output contact can be set as »Latched« (Latched = active or inactive). A latched relay output
contact will return to it's latched position after a loss of power to the protective device. A latched relay
output contact will keep it´s position as long as it has not been reset and as long as the power supply
feeds the protective relay. In the case of a loss of power to the protective device, the relays will return to
the latched position once the power is restored to the protective device (latched = relay output contacts
have a memory). A latched state of a relay output contact always needs to be reset after a power loss
even if the assignments are taken away (if the assignments are reprogrammed).
74
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
•
Latched = inactive«:
If the latching function is »inactive«, the relay output and, respectively, the relay output contact will adopt
the state of those pickups that were assigned.
•
»Latched = active«:
If the latching function is »active«, the state of the relay output and, respectively, the relay output contact
that was set by the pickups will be stored (they have a memory that needs to be reset).
The relay output contact can only be acknowledged after reset of those signals that had
initiated the setting of the relay and after expiration of the »t-OFF delay«.
•
At signal changes, the minimal latching time (»t-OFF delay«) ensures that the relay will be maintained as
picked-up or released for at least this period.
If the relay output contacts are configured as »Latched=active«, they will
keep their position even if there is a power outage within the power supply
of the protective device.
If the relay output contacts are configured as »Latched=active«, they will
also retain their position even if they are reprogrammed in another way.
This also applies if the relay output contacts are set to »Latched is set to
inactive«. Resetting a relay output contact that has latched a signal will
always require an acknowledgement.
The »System OK Relay« (watchdog) cannot be configured.
Acknowledgment Options
Relay output contacts can be acknowledged:
•
Via the push-button »C« at the operating panel;
•
If »Latched is active«, each relay output contact can be acknowledged by a signal (for example: It could
be reset by the state of a digital input);
•
Via the module »Ex Acknowledge« where all relay output contacts can be acknowledged at once if the
signal for external acknowledgment that was selected from the »Assignment list« becomes true (e.g.:
the state of a digital input); and
•
Via Communication (Comm), all relay output contacts can be acknowledged at once.
Relay output contacts can be set by force or disarmed (for commisioning
support, please refer to the “Service/Disarming the Relay Output Contacts“ and
“Service/Forcing the Relay Output Contacts“ sections).
www.eaton.com
75
76
www.eaton.com
Latched
Acknowledge-Comm
Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List
Acknowledge -HMI
Active
Inactive
Inverting 7
Assignment 7
Inverting 6
Assignment 6
Inverting 5
Assignment 5
Inverting 4
Assignment 4
Inverting 3
Assignment 3
Inverting 2
Assignment 2
Inverting 1
Assignment 1
Inverting
OR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
OR
XOR
AND
R1
S
Q
Q
OR
t-Off Delay
0
Switch Off Delay
OR
State of the Relay
Output
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
RO-4ZI X - Settings
RO-4Z X2
Direct Commands of RO-4ZI X
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
DISARMED
This is the second step, after the
"DISARMED Ctrl" has been activated, that
is required to DISARM the relay output
contacts. This will DISARM those relay
output contacts that are currently not
latched and that are not timing out.
CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order
to safely perform maintenance while
eliminating the risk of taking an entire
process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking
and Supervision Contact cannot be
disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that
the relays are ARMED AGAIN after
maintenance.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Service
Active
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/DISARMED
/RO-4Z X2]
Only available if: DISARMED Ctrl = Active
Force all Outs
By means of this function the normal Relay Normal,
Output State can be overwritten (forced).
The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized,
(relay works according to the assigned
signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized
energized" state. Forcing all relay output
contacts of an entire assembly group has
precedence to forcing a single relay output.
Normal
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-4Z X2]
Force ZI RO
Signal: Forced Zone Interlocking OUT
Normal,
Normal
De-Energized,
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
Energized
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-4Z X2]
Force RO1
By means of this function the normal Relay Normal,
Output State can be overwritten (forced).
The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized,
(relay works according to the assigned
signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized
energized" state.
Normal
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-4Z X2]
www.eaton.com
77
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Force RO2
By means of this function the normal Relay Normal,
Output State can be overwritten (forced).
The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized,
(relay works according to the assigned
signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized
energized" state.
Normal
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-4Z X2]
Force RO3
By means of this function the normal Relay Normal,
Output State can be overwritten (forced).
The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized,
(relay works according to the assigned
signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized
energized" state.
Normal
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-4Z X2]
Force RO4
By means of this function the normal Relay Normal,
Output State can be overwritten (forced).
The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized,
(relay works according to the assigned
signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized
energized" state.
Normal
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-4Z X2]
Global Protection Parameters of RO-4ZI X
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
t-Off Delay
Switch Off Delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.1 s
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Latched
Defines whether the Relay Output will be
latched when it picks up.
Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
78
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An
1..n, Assignment List
nt
acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges
the corresponding Relay Output) can be
assigned to each Relay Output. The
acknowledgment-signal is only effective if
the parameter "Latched" is set to active.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Only available if: Latched = Active
Inverting
Inverting of the Relay Output.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
Breaker
TripCmd
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
www.eaton.com
79
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Assignment 6
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Inverting 6
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
80
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 7
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
Inverting 7
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
t-Off Delay
Switch Off Delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.00 s
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Latched
Defines whether the Relay Output will be
latched when it picks up.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An
1..n, Assignment List
nt
acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges
the corresponding Relay Output) can be
assigned to each Relay Output. The
acknowledgment-signal is only effective if
the parameter "Latched" is set to active.
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Only available if: Latched = Active
Inverting
Inverting of the Relay Output.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
Prot.Pickup
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
www.eaton.com
81
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
82
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Assignment 6
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Inverting 6
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Assignment 7
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Inverting 7
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
t-Off Delay
Switch Off Delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.00 s
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
www.eaton.com
83
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Latched
Defines whether the Relay Output will be
latched when it picks up.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An
1..n, Assignment List
nt
acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges
the corresponding Relay Output) can be
assigned to each Relay Output. The
acknowledgment-signal is only effective if
the parameter "Latched" is set to active.
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Only available if: Latched = Active
Inverting
Inverting of the Relay Output.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
BF.Trip
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
84
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Assignment 6
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
www.eaton.com
85
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 6
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Assignment 7
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Inverting 7
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
t-Off Delay
Switch Off Delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.00 s
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Latched
Defines whether the Relay Output will be
latched when it picks up.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An
1..n, Assignment List
nt
acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges
the corresponding Relay Output) can be
assigned to each Relay Output. The
acknowledgment-signal is only effective if
the parameter "Latched" is set to active.
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Only available if: Latched = Active
Inverting
Inverting of the Relay Output.
Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
86
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
www.eaton.com
87
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Assignment 6
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Inverting 6
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Assignment 7
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Inverting 7
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
88
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
DISARMED
Ctrl
Enables and disables the disarming of the Inactive,
relay output contacts. This is the first step
of a two step process, to inhibit the
Active
operation or the relay output contacts.
Please refer to "DISARMED" for the second
step.
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/DISARMED
/RO-4Z X2]
Disarm Mode
CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to Permanent,
safely perform maintenance while
eliminating the risk of taking an entire
Timeout
process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking
and Supervision Contact cannot be
disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that
the relays are ARMED AGAIN after
maintenance.
Permanent
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/DISARMED
/RO-4Z X2]
t-Timeout
DISARM
The relays will be armed again after
expiring of this time.
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.03 s
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
Only available if: Mode = Timeout
DISARM
/WARNING! Cont?
/DISARMED
/RO-4Z X2]
Force Mode
By means of this function the normal Relay Permanent,
Output States can be overwritten (forced) in
case that the Relay Output is not in a
Timeout
disarmed state. The relays can be set from
normal operation (relay works according to
the assigned signals) to "force energized"
or "force de-energized" state.
Permanent
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-4Z X2]
t-Timeout
Force
The Output State will be set by force for the 0.00 – 300.00 s
duration of this time. That means, for the
duration of this time, the Relay Output does
not show the state of the signals that are
assigned on it.
0.03 s
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
Only available if: Mode = Timeout
DISARM
/Force RO
/RO-4Z X2]
www.eaton.com
89
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Input States of RO-4ZI X
Name
Description
Assignment Via
RO1.1
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
RO1.2
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
RO1.3
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
RO1.4
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
RO1.5
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
RO1.6
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
RO1.7
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 1]
90
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
Ack signal RO 1
Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para
for the Relay Output. If latching is set to
active, the Relay Output can only be
/Relay Outputs
acknowledged if those signals that initiated
the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-4Z X2
is expired.
/RO 1]
RO2.1
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
RO2.2
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
RO2.3
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
RO2.4
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
RO2.5
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
RO2.6
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
www.eaton.com
91
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
RO2.7
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 2]
Ack signal RO 2
Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para
for the Relay Output. If latching is set to
active, the Relay Output can only be
/Relay Outputs
acknowledged if those signals that initiated
the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-4Z X2
is expired.
/RO 2]
RO3.1
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
RO3.2
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
RO3.3
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
RO3.4
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
RO3.5
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
92
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
RO3.6
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
RO3.7
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 3]
Ack signal RO 3
Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para
for the Relay Output. If latching is set to
active, the Relay Output can only be
/Relay Outputs
acknowledged if those signals that initiated
the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-4Z X2
is expired.
/RO 3]
RO4.1
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
RO4.2
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
RO4.3
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
RO4.4
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
www.eaton.com
93
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
RO4.5
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
RO4.6
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
RO4.7
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-4Z X2
/RO 4]
Ack signal RO 4
Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para
for the Relay Output. If latching is set to
active, the Relay Output can only be
/Relay Outputs
acknowledged if those signals that initiated
the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-4Z X2
is expired.
/RO 4]
Signals of RO-4ZI X
Name
Description
ZI OUT
Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT
RO 1
Signal: Relay Output
RO 2
Signal: Relay Output
RO 3
Signal: Relay Output
RO 4
Signal: Relay Output
DISARMED!
Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform
maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire process
off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot
be disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that the relays are
ARMED AGAIN after maintenance
Outs forced
Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by
force. That means that the state of at least one Relay is forced
and hence does not show the state of the assigned signals.
94
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
RO-6 X Settings
RO-6 X5
Direct Commands of RO-6 X
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
DISARMED
This is the second step, after the
"DISARMED Ctrl" has been activated, that
is required to DISARM the relay output
contacts. This will DISARM those relay
output contacts that are currently not
latched and that are not timing out.
CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order
to safely perform maintenance while
eliminating the risk of taking an entire
process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking
and Supervision Contact cannot be
disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that
the relays are ARMED AGAIN after
maintenance.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Service
Active
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/DISARMED
/RO-6 X5]
Only available if: DISARMED Ctrl = Active
Force all Outs
By means of this function the normal Relay Normal,
Output State can be overwritten (forced).
The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized,
(relay works according to the assigned
signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized
energized" state. Forcing all relay output
contacts of an entire assembly group has
precedence to forcing a single relay output.
Normal
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-6 X5]
Force RO1
By means of this function the normal Relay Normal,
Output State can be overwritten (forced).
The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized,
(relay works according to the assigned
signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized
energized" state.
Normal
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-6 X5]
Force RO2
By means of this function the normal Relay Normal,
Output State can be overwritten (forced).
The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized,
(relay works according to the assigned
signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized
energized" state.
Normal
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-6 X5]
www.eaton.com
95
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Force RO3
By means of this function the normal Relay Normal,
Output State can be overwritten (forced).
The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized,
(relay works according to the assigned
signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized
energized" state.
Normal
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-6 X5]
Force RO4
By means of this function the normal Relay Normal,
Output State can be overwritten (forced).
The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized,
(relay works according to the assigned
signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized
energized" state.
Normal
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-6 X5]
Force RO5
By means of this function the normal Relay Normal,
Output State can be overwritten (forced).
The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized,
(relay works according to the assigned
signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized
energized" state.
Normal
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-6 X5]
Force RO6
By means of this function the normal Relay Normal,
Output State can be overwritten (forced).
The relay can be set from normal operation De-Energized,
(relay works according to the assigned
signals) to "force energized" or "force deEnergized
energized" state.
Normal
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-6 X5]
96
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Parameters of RO-6 X
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
t-Off Delay
Switch Off Delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.00 s
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Latched
Defines whether the Relay Output will be
latched when it picks up.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An
1..n, Assignment List
nt
acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges
the corresponding Relay Output) can be
assigned to each Relay Output. The
acknowledgment-signal is only effective if
the parameter "Latched" is set to active.
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Only available if: Latched = Active
Inverting
Inverting of the Relay Output.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
www.eaton.com
97
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
98
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 6
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Inverting 6
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Assignment 7
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Inverting 7
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
t-Off Delay
Switch Off Delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.00 s
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Latched
Defines whether the Relay Output will be
latched when it picks up.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An
1..n, Assignment List
nt
acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges
the corresponding Relay Output) can be
assigned to each Relay Output. The
acknowledgment-signal is only effective if
the parameter "Latched" is set to active.
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Only available if: Latched = Active
www.eaton.com
99
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Inverting
Inverting of the Relay Output.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
100
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Assignment 6
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Inverting 6
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Assignment 7
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
www.eaton.com
101
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 7
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
t-Off Delay
Switch Off Delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.00 s
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Latched
Defines whether the Relay Output will be
latched when it picks up.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An
1..n, Assignment List
nt
acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges
the corresponding Relay Output) can be
assigned to each Relay Output. The
acknowledgment-signal is only effective if
the parameter "Latched" is set to active.
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Only available if: Latched = Active
Inverting
Inverting of the Relay Output.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
102
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
www.eaton.com
103
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Assignment 6
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Inverting 6
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Assignment 7
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Inverting 7
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
t-Off Delay
Switch Off Delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.00 s
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Latched
Defines whether the Relay Output will be
latched when it picks up.
Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
104
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An
1..n, Assignment List
nt
acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges
the corresponding Relay Output) can be
assigned to each Relay Output. The
acknowledgment-signal is only effective if
the parameter "Latched" is set to active.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Only available if: Latched = Active
Inverting
Inverting of the Relay Output.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
www.eaton.com
105
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Assignment 6
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Inverting 6
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
106
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 7
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Inverting 7
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
t-Off Delay
Switch Off Delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.00 s
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Latched
Defines whether the Relay Output will be
latched when it picks up.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An
1..n, Assignment List
nt
acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges
the corresponding Relay Output) can be
assigned to each Relay Output. The
acknowledgment-signal is only effective if
the parameter "Latched" is set to active.
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Only available if: Latched = Active
Inverting
Inverting of the Relay Output.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
www.eaton.com
107
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
108
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Assignment 6
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Inverting 6
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Assignment 7
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
Inverting 7
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
t-Off Delay
Switch Off Delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.00 s
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
www.eaton.com
109
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Latched
Defines whether the Relay Output will be
latched when it picks up.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Acknowledgme Acknowledgment Signal - An
1..n, Assignment List
nt
acknowledgment signal (that acknowledges
the corresponding Relay Output) can be
assigned to each Relay Output. The
acknowledgment-signal is only effective if
the parameter "Latched" is set to active.
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Only available if: Latched = Active
Inverting
Inverting of the Relay Output.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
110
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Assignment 6
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
www.eaton.com
111
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 6
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Assignment 7
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Inverting 7
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
DISARMED
Ctrl
Enables and disables the disarming of the Inactive,
relay output contacts. This is the first step
of a two step process, to inhibit the
Active
operation or the relay output contacts.
Please refer to "DISARMED" for the second
step.
Inactive
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/DISARMED
/RO-6 X5]
Disarm Mode
CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to Permanent,
safely perform maintenance while
eliminating the risk of taking an entire
Timeout
process off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking
and Supervision Contact cannot be
disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that
the relays are ARMED AGAIN after
maintenance.
Permanent
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/DISARMED
/RO-6 X5]
t-Timeout
DISARM
The relays will be armed again after
expiring of this time.
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.03 s
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
Only available if: Mode = Timeout
DISARM
/WARNING! Cont?
/DISARMED
/RO-6 X5]
112
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Force Mode
By means of this function the normal Relay Permanent,
Output States can be overwritten (forced) in
case that the Relay Output is not in a
Timeout
disarmed state. The relays can be set from
normal operation (relay works according to
the assigned signals) to "force energized"
or "force de-energized" state.
Default
Menu Path
Permanent
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Force RO
/RO-6 X5]
t-Timeout
Force
The Output State will be set by force for the 0.00 – 300.00 s
duration of this time. That means, for the
duration of this time, the Relay Output does
not show the state of the signals that are
assigned on it.
0.03 s
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
Only available if: Mode = Timeout
DISARM
/Force RO
/RO-6 X5]
Input States of RO-6 X
Name
Description
Assignment Via
RO1.1
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
RO1.2
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
RO1.3
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
RO1.4
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
www.eaton.com
113
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
RO1.5
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
RO1.6
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
RO1.7
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 1]
Ack signal RO 1
Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para
for the Relay Output. If latching is set to
active, the Relay Output can only be
/Relay Outputs
acknowledged if those signals that initiated
the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-6 X5
is expired.
/RO 1]
RO2.1
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
RO2.2
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
RO2.3
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
114
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
RO2.4
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
RO2.5
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
RO2.6
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
RO2.7
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 2]
Ack signal RO 2
Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para
for the Relay Output. If latching is set to
active, the Relay Output can only be
/Relay Outputs
acknowledged if those signals that initiated
the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-6 X5
is expired.
/RO 2]
RO3.1
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
RO3.2
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
www.eaton.com
115
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
RO3.3
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
RO3.4
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
RO3.5
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
RO3.6
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
RO3.7
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 3]
Ack signal RO 3
Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para
for the Relay Output. If latching is set to
active, the Relay Output can only be
/Relay Outputs
acknowledged if those signals that initiated
the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-6 X5
is expired.
/RO 3]
RO4.1
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
116
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
RO4.2
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
RO4.3
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
RO4.4
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
RO4.5
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
RO4.6
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
RO4.7
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 4]
Ack signal RO 4
Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para
for the Relay Output. If latching is set to
active, the Relay Output can only be
/Relay Outputs
acknowledged if those signals that initiated
the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-6 X5
is expired.
/RO 4]
www.eaton.com
117
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
RO5.1
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
RO5.2
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
RO5.3
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
RO5.4
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
RO5.5
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
RO5.6
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
RO5.7
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 5]
118
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
Ack signal RO 5
Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para
for the Relay Output. If latching is set to
active, the Relay Output can only be
/Relay Outputs
acknowledged if those signals that initiated
the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-6 X5
is expired.
/RO 5]
RO6.1
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
RO6.2
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
RO6.3
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
RO6.4
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
RO6.5
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
RO6.6
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
www.eaton.com
119
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
RO6.7
Module Input State: Assignment
[Device Para
/Relay Outputs
/RO-6 X5
/RO 6]
Ack signal RO 6
Module Input State: Acknowledgment signal [Device Para
for the Relay Output. If latching is set to
active, the Relay Output can only be
/Relay Outputs
acknowledged if those signals that initiated
the setting are fallen back and the hold time /RO-6 X5
is expired.
/RO 6]
Signals of RO-6 X
Name
Description
RO 1
Signal: Relay Output
RO 2
Signal: Relay Output
RO 3
Signal: Relay Output
RO 4
Signal: Relay Output
RO 5
Signal: Relay Output
RO 6
Signal: Relay Output
DISARMED!
Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform
maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire process
off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot
be disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that the relays are
ARMED AGAIN after maintenance
Outs forced
Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by
force. That means that the state of at least one Relay is forced
and hence does not show the state of the assigned signals.
LED Configuration
The LEDs can be configured within menu:
[Device Para/LEDs/Group X]
Attention must be paid to insure that there are no overlapping functions
due to double or multiple LED assignment of colors and flashing codes.
If LEDs are configured as »Latched=active«, they will keep (return to) their
blink code and color even if there is a power outage within the power
supply of the protective device.
If the LEDs are configured as »Latched=active«, they will also retain their
blink code and color even if the LEDs are reprogrammed in another way.
This also applies if the LEDs are set to »Latched = inactive«. Resetting a
LED that has latched a signal will always require an acknowledgement.
120
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
This chapter contains information on the LEDs that are placed on the left
hand side of the display (Group A).
If your device is also equipped with LEDs on the right hand side of the
display (Group B), the analog information in this chapter is valid. The only
difference between “Group A” and “Group B” is within the menu paths.
Via the »INFO« push-button, it is always possible to display the current pickups and alarm texts that are
assigned to an LED. Please refer to the Navigation section for a description of the »INFO« push-button
functionality.
Set the following parameters for each LED.
•
»Latching (self holding function)«: If »Latching« is set to »Active«, the state that is set by the pickups will
be stored until it is reset. If »Latching« is set to »Inactive«, the LED always adopts the state of those
pickups that were assigned.
•
»Acknowledgement«: Signal that will reset the LED.
•
»LED active color«: LED lights up in this color when at least one of the allocated functions is valid (red,
red-flashing, green, green flashing, off).
•
»LED inactive color«: LED lights up in this color when none of the allocated functions is valid (red, redflashing, green, green flashing, off).
•
»Assignment 1...n« Apart from the LED for System OK, each LED can be assigned up to five functions
(e.g. pickups) out of the »Assignment list«.
•
»Inverting an Assignment 1...n«: This will invert the input signal.
Acknowledgment Options
LEDs can be acknowledged by:
•
The push-button »C« at the operating panel;
•
A signal from the »LED Reset list« (e.g. digital inputs or communication signals) (If »Latched = active«);
•
The »Ex Acknowledge« module - all LEDs can be acknowledged at once, if the signal for external
acknowledgment becomes true (e.g.: the state of a digital input); and
•
Communication (Comm) - all LEDs can be acknowledged at once.
www.eaton.com
121
122
www.eaton.com
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
Acknowledge-Comm
Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List
Acknowledge -HMI
Active
Inactive
Latched
Inverting 5
Assignment 5
Inverting 4
Assignment 4
Inverting 3
Assignment 3
Inverting 2
Assignment 2
Inverting 1
Assignment 1
OR
OR
AND
Q
Q
S
R1
OR
LED Inactive Color
LED Active Color
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
The »System OK« LED
This LED flashes green while the device is booting. After booting is complete, the LED for System OK lights up
in green signaling that the protection (function) is »activated«. If, however, in spite of successful booting, or after
the third unsuccessful reboot caused by the self supervision module, the System OK – LED flashes in red or is
solidly illuminated in red, please contact your Eaton Corporation Customer Service Representative (also see the
Self Supervision section).
The System OK LED cannot be configured.
LED Settings
LEDs group A ,LEDs group B
Device Parameters of the LEDs
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Latched
Defines whether the LED will be latched
when it picks up.
Inactive,
LEDs group A:
Active
[Device Para
Active
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
Inactive
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Ack signal
Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If
1..n, Assignment List
latching is set to active the LED can only be
acknowledged if all signals that initiated the
setting of the LED are no longer present.
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
Dependency Only available if: Latched =
Active
LED Active
Color
/LED 1]
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is true.
Red,
Red flash,
LEDs group A:
Red
[Device Para
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
Green
Green flash,
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
LED Inactive
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is false.
Red,
-
[Device Para
/LEDs
Red flash,
/LEDs group A
Green flash,
/LED 1]
-
www.eaton.com
123
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
LEDs group A: [Device Para
51P[1].TripCmd
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
Breaker.Pos
/LEDs group A
OPEN
/LED 1]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
Menu Path
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
124
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Latched
Defines whether the LED will be latched
when it picks up.
Inactive,
LEDs group A:
Active
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
Inactive
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Ack signal
Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If
1..n, Assignment List
latching is set to active the LED can only be
acknowledged if all signals that initiated the
setting of the LED are no longer present.
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
Only available if: Latched = Active
/LED 2]
LED Active
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is true.
Red,
Red
[Device Para
/LEDs
Red flash,
/LEDs group A
Green flash,
/LED 2]
LED Inactive
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is false.
Red,
-
[Device Para
/LEDs
Red flash,
/LEDs group A
Green flash,
/LED 2]
-
www.eaton.com
125
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
LEDs group A: [Device Para
51X[1].TripCmd
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
Breaker.Pos
/LEDs group A
CLOSE
/LED 2]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
Menu Path
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
LEDs group A: [Device Para
51R[1].TripCmd
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
-./LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
126
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
Latched
Defines whether the LED will be latched
when it picks up.
Inactive,
Active
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Ack signal
Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If
1..n, Assignment List
latching is set to active the LED can only be
acknowledged if all signals that initiated the
setting of the LED are no longer present.
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
Only available if: Latched = Active
/LED 3]
LED Active
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is true.
Red,
Red
[Device Para
/LEDs
Red flash,
/LEDs group A
Green flash,
/LED 3]
LED Inactive
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is false.
Red,
-
[Device Para
/LEDs
Red flash,
/LEDs group A
Green flash,
/LED 3]
-
www.eaton.com
127
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
LEDs group A: [Device Para
50P[1].TripCmd
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
27M[1].TripCmd /LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
LEDs group A:
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
59M[1].TripCmd /LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
128
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Latched
Defines whether the LED will be latched
when it picks up.
Inactive,
Active
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Ack signal
Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If
1..n, Assignment List
latching is set to active the LED can only be
acknowledged if all signals that initiated the
setting of the LED are no longer present.
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
Only available if: Latched = Active
/LED 4]
LED Active
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is true.
Red,
Red
[Device Para
/LEDs
Red flash,
/LEDs group A
Green flash,
/LED 4]
LED Inactive
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is false.
Red,
-
[Device Para
/LEDs
Red flash,
/LEDs group A
Green flash,
/LED 4]
-
www.eaton.com
129
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
LEDs group A: [Device Para
50X[1].TripCmd
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
81[1].TripCmd
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
LEDs group A: [Device Para
50R[1].TripCmd
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
81[3].TripCmd
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
LEDs group A:
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
81[5].TripCmd
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
130
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Latched
Defines whether the LED will be latched
when it picks up.
Inactive,
LEDs group A:
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
Active
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Ack signal
Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If
1..n, Assignment List
latching is set to active the LED can only be
acknowledged if all signals that initiated the
setting of the LED are no longer present.
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
Only available if: Latched = Active
/LED 5]
LED Active
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is true.
Red,
Red flash,
LEDs group A:
Red flash
[Device Para
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
Red
Green flash,
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
LED Inactive
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is false.
Red,
-
[Device Para
/LEDs
Red flash,
/LEDs group A
Green flash,
/LED 5]
-
www.eaton.com
131
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
LEDs group A:
Prot.Pickup
[Device Para
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
ZI.TripCmd
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
132
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Latched
Defines whether the LED will be latched
when it picks up.
Inactive,
Active
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Ack signal
Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If
1..n, Assignment List
latching is set to active the LED can only be
acknowledged if all signals that initiated the
setting of the LED are no longer present.
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
Only available if: Latched = Active
/LED 6]
LED Active
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is true.
Red,
Red
[Device Para
/LEDs
Red flash,
/LEDs group A
Green flash,
/LED 6]
LED Inactive
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is false.
Red,
-
[Device Para
/LEDs
Red flash,
/LEDs group A
Green flash,
/LED 6]
-
www.eaton.com
133
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
LEDs group A:
BF.Trip
[Device Para
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
LOP.LOP Blo
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
134
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Latched
Defines whether the LED will be latched
when it picks up.
Inactive,
LEDs group A:
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
Active
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Ack signal
Acknowledgment signal for the LED. If
1..n, Assignment List
latching is set to active the LED can only be
acknowledged if all signals that initiated the
setting of the LED are no longer present.
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
Only available if: Latched = Active
/LED 7]
LED Active
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is true.
Red,
Red flash,
LEDs group A:
Green flash
[Device Para
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
Red
Green flash,
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
LED Inactive
Color
The LED lights up in this color if the state of Green,
the OR-assignment of the signals is false.
Red,
-
[Device Para
/LEDs
Red flash,
/LEDs group A
Green flash,
/LED 7]
-
www.eaton.com
135
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Assignment 1
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
LEDs group A: [Device Para
Sys.Maint Mode
Active
/LEDs
LEDs group B:
Prot.Trip
Menu Path
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Inverting 1
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Assignment 2
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Inverting 2
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Assignment 3
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Inverting 3
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Assignment 4
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
136
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Inverting 4
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Assignment 5
Assignment
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Inverting 5
Inverting of the state of the assigned signal. Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
LED Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
LED1.1
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
LED1.2
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
LED1.3
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
LED1.4
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
www.eaton.com
137
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
LED1.5
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
Acknow Sig 1
Module Input State: Acknowledgment
Signal (only for automatic
acknowledgment).
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 1]
LED2.1
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
LED2.2
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
LED2.3
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
LED2.4
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
LED2.5
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
138
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
Acknow Sig 2
Module Input State: Acknowledgment
Signal (only for automatic
acknowledgment).
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 2]
LED3.1
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
LED3.2
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
LED3.3
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
LED3.4
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
LED3.5
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
Acknow Sig 3
Module Input State: Acknowledgment
Signal (only for automatic
acknowledgment).
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 3]
www.eaton.com
139
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
LED4.1
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
LED4.2
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
LED4.3
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
LED4.4
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
LED4.5
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
Acknow Sig 4
Module Input State: Acknowledgment
Signal (only for automatic
acknowledgment).
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 4]
LED5.1
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
140
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
LED5.2
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
LED5.3
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
LED5.4
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
LED5.5
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
Acknow Sig 5
Module Input State: Acknowledgment
Signal (only for automatic
acknowledgment).
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 5]
LED6.1
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
LED6.2
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
www.eaton.com
141
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
LED6.3
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
LED6.4
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
LED6.5
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
Acknow Sig 6
Module Input State: Acknowledgment
Signal (only for automatic
acknowledgment).
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 6]
LED7.1
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
LED7.2
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
LED7.3
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
142
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
LED7.4
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
LED7.5
Module Input State: LED
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
Acknow Sig 7
Module Input State: Acknowledgment
Signal (only for automatic
acknowledgment).
[Device Para
/LEDs
/LEDs group A
/LED 7]
www.eaton.com
143
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Front Panel
Programmable LEDs
LED »System OK«
Display
2
3
1
Programmable LEDs
4
Protective
Device
5
Softkeys
6
7
INFO Key
ACK/RST-key
(Signals/Messages)
144
8
RS232 Interface
(PowerPort-E Connection)
www.eaton.com
9
10
OK-key
Control
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Item Graphic
Name
Description
1
Group A:
Programmable
LEDs
Basically, there are 14
programmable LEDs (7 on the
left, 7 on the right side)
provided for User to configure.
The choice for each
programmable LED can be
any signal from the global
assignment list, which
includes all internal operation
states of each function
activated. Based on the
application need, up to 14 (but
not necessarily all)
programmable LEDs can be
activated. By properly
configuring some or all 14
LEDs, the User will be able to
view the relay's overall
operation and some critical
information immediately and
intuitively without having to
access any menu.
2
LED »System
OK«
Should the LED »System OK«
flash red during operation,
contact Customer Support
immediately.
3
Display
Via the display, the User can
view operational data and edit
the parameters.
(Example for an insert)
www.eaton.com
145
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Item Graphic
Name
Description
4
Group B:
Programmable
LEDs
Basically, there are 14
programmable LEDs (7 on the
left, 7 on the right side)
provided for User to configure.
The choice for each
programmable LED can be
any signal from the global
assignment list, which
includes all internal operation
states of each function
activated. Based on the
application need, up to 14 (but
not necessarily all)
programmable LEDs can be
activated. By properly
configuring some or all 14
LEDs, the User will be able to
view the relay's overall
operation and some critical
information immediately and
intuitively without having to
access any menu.
Softkeys
The function of the
»SOFTKEYS« changes.
Their active functions appear
on the bottom line of the
display.
(Example for an insert)
5
Possible functions are:
146
www.eaton.com
•
Navigation;
•
Parameter
decrement/increment;
•
Scrolling up/down a menu
page;
•
Moving to a digit; and
•
Change into the parameter
setting mode »Wrench
Symbol«.
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Item Graphic
Name
Description
6
INFO Key
Looking through the present
(Signals/Message LED assignment. The Direct
s)
Select key can be activated at
any time. If the INFO key is
actuated again, the User will
leave the LED menu.
Here only the first
assignments of the LEDs will
be shown. Every three
seconds the »SOFTKEYs« will
be shown (flashing).
Displaying the Multiple
Assignments
If the INFO key is pressed,
only the first assignments of
any LED is shown. Every
three seconds the
»SOFTKEYs« will be shown
(flashing).
If there is more than one
signal assigned to an LED
(indicated by three dots), the
User can check the state of
the multiple assignments by
proceeding as follows.
In order to show all (multiple)
assignments, select an LED
by means of the
»SOFTKEYs« »up« and
»down«.
Via the »Softkey« »right«, call
up a sub-menu of this LED
that gives the User detailed
information on the state of all
signals assigned to this LED.
An arrow symbol points to the
LED whose assignments are
currently displayed.
Via the »SOFTKEYs« »up«
and »down«, the User can call
up the next / previous LED.
In order to leave the LED
menu, press the »SOFTKEY«
»left« multiple times.
www.eaton.com
147
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Item Graphic
Name
Description
7
»ACK/RST- Key« Used to abort changes and to
acknowledge messages as
well as resetting counters.
In order to reset, press the
Softkey »Wrench« and enter
the password.
The User can exit the reset
menu by pressing the Softkey
»Arrow-left«
8
RS232 Interface
(PowerPort-E
Connection)
Connection to the
computer/software PowerPortE is done via the RS232
interface.
9
»OK Key«
When using the »OK« key,
parameter changes are
temporarily stored. If the
»OK« key is pressed again,
those changes are stored
indefinitely.
10
»CTRL Key«
Access to the Control menu
(not available in all devices)
Basic Menu Control
The graphic User interface is equivalent to a hierarchical structured menu tree. For access to the individual submenus, the »SOFTKEYS«/Navigation Keys are used. The function of the »SOFTKEYS« can be found near the
bottom of the display.
Softkey
148
Description
•
Via »SOFTKEY« »Up«, the User will be taken to the prior menu point/one parameter up by
scrolling upwards.
•
Via »SOFTKEY« »Left«, the User will be taken one step back.
•
Via »SOFTKEY« »Down«, the User will be taken to the next menu point/one parameter down
by scrolling downwards.
•
Via »SOFTKEY« »Right«, the User will be taken to a sub-menu.
•
Via »SOFTKEY« »Top of List«, the User will be taken directly to the top of a list.
•
Via »SOFTKEY« »Bottom of List«, the User will be taken directly to the end of a list.
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Softkey
Description
•
Via »SOFTKEY« »+«, the related digit will be incremented. (Continuous pressure -> fast).
•
Via »SOFTKEY« »-«, the related digit will be decremented. (Continuous pressure -> fast)
•
Via »SOFTKEY« »Left«, the User will be taken one digit to the left.
•
Via »SOFTKEY« »Right«, the User will be taken one digit to the right.
•
Via »SOFTKEY« »Parameter Setting«, the User will call up the parameter setting mode.
•
Via »SOFTKEY« »Delete«, data will be deleted.
In order to return to the main menu, just keep pressing the Softkey »Arrow-Left« until you arrive at the »Main
Menu».
PowerPort-E Keyboard Commands
The User can control PowerPort-E alternatively by means of keyboard commands (instead of the mouse).
Key
Description
á
Move up within the navigation tree or parameter list.
â
Move down within the navigation tree or parameter list.
ß
Collapse the tree item or select a folder on a higher level.
à
Expands the tree item or selects a sub-folder.
Numpad +
Expands the tree item.
Numpad -
Collapses the tree item.
Home
Moves to the top of the active window.
End
Moves to the bottom of the active window.
Ctrl+O
Opens the file opening dialog. Allows browsing through the file system for an existing
device file.
Ctrl+N
Creates a new parameter file by means of a template.
Ctrl+S
Saves the actual loaded parameter file.
F1
Displays the on-line help information.
www.eaton.com
149
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Key
Description
F2
Loads device data.
F5
Reloads the displayed data of a device.
Ctrl+F5
Enables the automatic refresh.
Ctrl+Shift+T
Moves back to the navigation window.
Ctrl+F6
Walks through the tabular forms (detail windows).
Page á
Moves to the previous value (parameter setting).
Page â
Moves to the next value (parameter setting).
150
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
PowerPort-E
PowerPort-E is software that is used to configure a device and read data from a device. PowerPort-E provides
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Menu controlled parameter setting including validity checks;
Off-line configuration of all relay types;
Reading and evaluation of statistical data and measuring values;
Commissioning Support (Forcing Relays, Disarming Relays);
Display of the device status; and
Fault analysis via event and fault recorder.
Installation of PowerPort-E
Port 52152 must not be blocked by a Firewall. If it is, the connection will be
blocked.
If the Windows Vista User Access Control pops up while installing
PowerPort-E, please “Allow” all installation requirements concerning
PowerPort-E.
System Requirements: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, or Windows 7).
To install PowerPort-E:
•
Double-click on the installation file with the left mouse button.
•
Confirm by pressing the »Continue« button in the INFO frame.
•
Select an installation path or confirm the standard installation path by mouse click on the »Continue«
button.
•
Confirm the entry for the suggested installation folder by mouse click on the »Continue« button.
•
Start the installation process by mouse click on the »Install« button.
•
Finish the installation procedure by mouse click on the »Complete« button.
If the suggested installation folder was chosen in the procedure above, the User can now call up the program via
[Start > Programs > Eaton Relays> PowerPort-E].
Uninstalling PowerPort-E
Via the [Start>System Control >Software] menu, the PowerPort-E application can be uninstalled from the computer.
www.eaton.com
151
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Setting up the Serial Connection PC - Device
Set Up a Connection Via Serial Interface Under Windows 2000
After installation of the software, the »Connection PC/Notebook to the Device« has to be initially configured so
that the User is able to read device data or re-write them into the device by means of the PowerPort-E
application.
To connect the device to the User's PC/notebook, a special null modem
cable is needed (no serial cable!- -please refer to the section »Null Modem
Cable«).
If the PC/notebook does not have a serial interface, the User will need a
special USB-to-serial-adapter. If the USB-to-serial-adapter is correctly
installed, communication with the device can be established using the CD
provided (see the next section).
The connection of the PC/notebook to the device MUST NOT be
protected/encrypted via a smartcard.
If the network connection wizard asks to encrypt the connection via a
smartcard or not, please choose »Do not use the smartcard«.
Setting Up/Configuring the Connection
•
Connect the PC/notebook with the device via a null modem cable.
•
Start the PowerPort-E application.
•
•
Select the menu point »Device Connection« in the »Settings« menu.
•
Click on »Serial Connection«.
•
Click the »Settings« button.
•
When initially setting up the connection, a dialog window appears with the information that, so far, a
direct connection with your protection device has not been established. Click on »Yes«.
•
If, to this point, a location has not been set up on your PC, your location information has to be put in.
Confirm the pop-up window »Telephone and Modem Options« with »OK«.
•
The Windows network connection assistant appears after the location information is set up. Select the
connection type »Establish direct connection to another computer«.
•
Select the serial interface (COM-Port) where the device shall be connected.
•
Select »To be used for all Users« in the »Availability of the connection« window.
•
Do not change the connection name appearing in window »Name of the connection« and click the
button »Complete«.
•
Finally, you arrive again in the window »Device Installation« from where you started establishing the
connection. Confirm the adjustments by clicking the »OK« button.
152
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Due to a problem in Windows 2000, it is possible that the automatically
made communication settings are not correctly adopted. In order to
overcome this problem, proceed as follows after setting up the serial
connection.
•
Select the menu point »Device Connection« in the »Settings« menu.
•
Select »Serial Connection«.
•
Click on the »Settings« button.
•
Change the register card to »General«.
•
Ensure that »Communication cable between two computers Com X«
is selected in the »Drop Down Menu«. X = the interface number
where the User has connected the null modem cable.
•
Click the »Configure« button.
•
Ensure that the »Hardware Flowing Control« is activated.
•
Ensure that a baud rate »115200« is selected.
Set Up a Serial Connection Via Serial Interface Under Windows XP
After installation of the software, the »Connection PC/Notebook to the Device« has to be initially configured so
that the User is able to read device data or re-write them into the device by means of the PowerPort-E
application.
To connect the device to the User's PC/notebook, a special null modem
cable is needed (no serial cable!- -please refer to the section »Null Modem
Cable«).
If the PC/notebook does not have a serial interface, the User will need a
special USB-to-serial-adapter. If the USB-to-serial-adapter is correctly
installed, communication with the device can be established using the CD
provided (see the next section).
Setting Up/Configuring the Connection
•
Connect your PC/notebook with the device via a null modem cable.
•
Start the PowerPort-E application.
•
Select the menu point »Device Connection« in the »Settings« menu.
•
Click on »Serial Connection«.
•
Click the »Settings« button.
•
When initially setting up the connection, a dialog window appears with the information that, so far, a
direct connection with your protection device has not been established. Click on »Yes«.
www.eaton.com
153
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
•
If, to this point, a location has not been set up on your PC, your location information has to be put in.
Confirm the following pop-up window »Telephone and Modem Options« by selecting »OK«.
•
The Windows network connection assistant appears after the location information is set up. Select the
connection type »Establish direct connection to another computer«.
•
Select the serial interface (COM-Port) where the device will be connected.
•
Select »To be used for all Users« in the »Availability of the connection« window.
•
Do not change the connection name appearing in the »Name of the connection« window and click the
»Complete« button.
•
Finally, you arrive again in the »Device Installation« window where you started establishing the
connection. Confirm the adjustments by clicking the »OK« button.
Parameter Setting and Evaluation via Serial/RS232
Device
Example
Protective
Relay
RS232
PowerPort-E
Set up a Connection Via Serial Interface Under Windows Vista or Windows 7
Establishing the connection between PowerPort-E and the device is a three step procedure.
1.Installing PowerPort-E (the application itself)
2.Installing a (virtual) modem (that is a precondition for TCP/IP communication via a null modem cable)/
(to be done within the Windows Phone and Modem dialog).
154
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
3.Establishing a network connection between PowerPort-E and the device (to be done within
PowerPort-E).
1. Installation of PowerPort-E (the application itself).
•
Refer to the “Installation of PowerPort-E” (earlier in this section).
2. Installation of the (virtual) modem.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Open the Windows Start menu and type “Phone and Modem” and RETURN.
This opens the “Phone and Modem” Dialog.
Go to the »Modem« tab.
Click on the »Add« button.
The Hardware Wizard window “Install New Modem” pops up.
Set the check box “Don´t detect my modem; I will select it from a list”.
Click on the »Next« button.
Select Communications cable between two computers.
Click on the »Next« button.
Choose the correct COM-Port.
Click on the »Next« button.
Click on the »Finish« button.
Select the new added modem and click on the »Properties« button.
Go to the »General« tab.
Click on the »Change settings« button.
Go to the »Modem« tab.
Within the Drop-Down Menu, set the correct baud rate = 115200.
Close this dialog with the »OK« button.
Close the Phone and Modem dialog with the »OK« button.
You have to reboot your computer now!
3. Establishing a network connection between PowerPort-E and the device.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connect the device to the PC/notebook via a correct null modem cable.
Run PowerPort-E.
Call up »Device Connection« within the menu »Device Connection«.
Click on the »Settings« button.
A connection wizard will pop up asking you How do you want to connect.
Choose »Dial-up«.
The telephone number must not be empty. Please enter any number (e.g. 1).
The User name and password can be ignored.
Click on the »OK« button.
Calling Up Web Site While Connected to a Device
In principle, it is possible to call up web sites while there is an active connection to the device.
If your computer has no direct connection to the Internet, that means that it is placed behind a proxy server. In
certain circumstances, the device connection has to be modified. The device connection has to be provided with
www.eaton.com
155
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
the proxy settings.
Internet Explorer
For each connection, the proxy settings have to be set manually. Please proceed as follows.
•
Start your Internet Explorer.
•
Call up the »Tools« menu.
•
Call up the »Internet options« menu.
•
Call up the »Connections« tab.
•
Left click on the »Settings« button on the right of the »Device-Connection«.
•
Set the check box »Use Proxy Server for this connection«.
•
Enter the proxy settings that are available from your network administrator.
•
Confirm the settings by pressing »OK«.
Firefox
The proxy settings are centrally managed, so there is no need to modify any settings.
Establishing the Serial Connection Via a USB-/RS232-Adapter
If your PC/notebook does not have an RS-232 interface, an USB-/RS232-Adapter+Null Modem Cable can be
used.
Only an adapter approved by Eaton Corporation may be used. First install
the adapter (with the related driver that you can find on the CD) and then
establish the connection (PowerPort-E => Device). The adapters must
support very high speed data transfer.
Set-up a Connection Via Ethernet - TCP/IP
Warning: Mixing up IP Addresses
(In case there is more than one protective device within the TCP/IP network
or establishing an unintentional wrong connection to a protective device
based on a wrong entered IP address.
Transferring parameters into the wrong protective device might lead to
death, personal injury, or damage of electrical equipment.
In order to prevent faulty connections, the User MUST document and
maintain a list with the IP addresses of any switchboard/protective devices.
The User MUST double check the IP addresses of the connection that is to
be established. That means, the User MUST first read out the IP address at
the HMI of the device (within menu [Device para/TCP IP]) then compare the
IP address with the list. If the addresses are identical, establish the
connection. If they are not, DO NOT establish the connection.
156
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if your
device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45).
Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection.
Part 1: Set the TCP/IP Parameters at the panel (Device).
Call up the »Device parameter/TCP/IP« menu at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters:
•
TCP/IP address
•
Subnet mask
•
Gateway
Part 2: Setting the IP address within PowerPort-E.
•
Call up the menu Settings/Device Connection within PowerPort-E.
•
Set the radio button Network Connection.
•
Enter the IP-Address of the device that should be connected.
PowerPort-E
IP-Address
TCP/IP
Device
Example
Parameter Setting and Evaluation via TCP/IP
www.eaton.com
157
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Or:
PowerPort-E
TCP/IP
Ethernet
TCP/IP
Device
Example
TCP/IP
...
IP-Address
Protective
Relay
IP-Address
IP-Address
TCP/IP
Device
Example
Protective
Relay
Device
Example
Parameter Setting and Evaluation via TCP/IP
Set-up a Connection Via Modbus Tunnel
Establishing a connection via a Gateway (TCP/IP)/Modbus RTU to the
device is only possible if your device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface
(RJ45).
Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection.
Part 1: If you do not know the Slave ID of the device that should be connected via Modbus Tunnel, it can be
read out at the device.
158
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
•
IM02602007E
Call up the menu »Device parameter/Modbus« at the HMI (panel) and read out the Slave ID.
Part 2: Setting the IP address of the gateway and the Slave ID of the device that is to be connected via Modbus
tunnel using PowerPort-E.
•
Call up the menu Settings/Device Connection within PowerPort-E.
•
Set the radio button Modbus TCP Gateway.
•
Enter the IP-Address of the device that should be connected.
•
Enter the Slave ID of the device.
www.eaton.com
159
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
PowerPort-E
TCP/IP
Power Xpert Gateway
IP-Address
Modbus RTU
Device
Example
...
SLAVE ID n
Protective
Relay
Modbus RTU
SLAVE ID 3
SLAVE ID 2
Modbus RTU
Device
Example
Protective
Relay
Device
Example
Parameter Setting and Evaluation via Modbus Tunnel
PowerPort-E Troubleshooting
•
Make sure that the Windows service Telephony is started. In [Start>System Control >Administration
>Services] the service »Telephony« must be visible and must have been started. If not, the service has
to be started.
•
For establishing the connection, the User needs to have sufficient rights (administration rights).
•
If a firewall is installed on your computer, TCP/IP port 52152 must have been released.
160
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
•
If your computer does not have a serial interface, the User needs a USB-to-serial-adapter, approved by
Eaton Corporation. This adapter has to be properly installed.
•
Ensure that a null modem cable is used (a standard serial cable without control wires does not enable
communication).
If a serial interface connection can not be established, and the User is
running a Windows XP Operating System, the following may be the cause.
If a serial interface was selected in the connection assistant, it may be that
this is not entered correctly in the dial-up network due to a bug in the
Windows operating system. Your attention is drawn to this problem by the
operational software and the error message »Warning, invalid connection
setting« will be shown.
To solve this problem, you need administration rights.
Please proceed as follows.
•
Select the menu item »Device Connection« in the »Settings« menu.
•
Select »Serial Connection«.
•
Click the »Settings« button.
•
Change the register card to »General«.
•
Ensure that »Communication cable between two computers (Com X)« is
selected in the Drop Down menu. »X« = the interface number where the
null modem cable is connected.
If the message »Warning, invalid connection settings« appears during
establishment of the connection, it indicates that the connection
adjustments chosen are not correct.
If this warning is displayed, the User may respond as follows.
»Yes«: (to set up a completely new connection).
By selecting »Yes«, all adjustments are canceled and the connection
assistant is opened again for renewed adjustment of the connection to the
device.
This procedure is advisable in case basic adjustments cannot be modified
via the characteristics dialog (e.g.: if a new additional serial interface has
been installed on the system).
»No«: (to modify the existing dial-up network entry).
Selecting »No« opens the dialog for characteristics of the connection
settings. During the dialog, it is possible to correct invalid settings (e.g.:
the recommended baud rate).
»Cancel«:
The warning is ignored and the connection adjustments remain as they are
set. This procedure is accepted for a limited time, but the User is required
to establish a correct connection at a later time.
www.eaton.com
161
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
PowerPort-E Persistent Connection Problems
In the case of persistent connection problems, the User should remove all connection settings and establish
them again. In order to remove all connection settings, please proceed as follows.
1.
Remove the Settings for the Dial-up Network.
•
Close PowerPort-E.
•
Call up the »Control Panel«.
•
Choose »Network & Internet«.
•
On the left side, click on »Manage Network Connections«.
•
Right click on »"Protective Device Name" Direct Connection«.
•
Choose »Delete« from the shortcut menu.
•
Click on the »OK« button.
2.
Remove the (Virtual) Modem.
•
Call up the »Control Panel«.
•
Choose »Hardware & Sound«.
•
Choose »Phone & Modem Options«.
•
Go to the »Modem« tab.
•
Click on the correct (in case there is more than one) entry »Connection cable between two computers«.
•
Click on the »Remove« button.
Loading of Device Data When Using PowerPort-E
•
Start the PowerPort-E application.
•
Make sure the connection has been established properly.
•
Connect your PC with the device via a null modem cable.
•
Select »Receiving Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu.
162
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Restoring Device Data When Using PowerPort-E
By selecting the »Transfer only modified parameters into the device«
button, only modified parameters are transmitted into the device.
Parameter modifications are indicated by a red “star symbol” in front of the
parameter.
The star symbol (in the device tree window) indicates that parameters in the
opened file (within PowerPort-E) differ from parameters stored on your
local hard disk.
By selecting the »Transfer only modified parameters into the device«
button, the User can transmit all parameters that are marked by this
symbol.
If a parameter file is saved on the local hard drive, these parameters are no
longer classified to be modified and cannot be transmitted via the »Transfer
only modified parameters into the device« button.
In case the User has loaded and modified a parameter file from the device
and saved it to the local hard drive without transferring the parameters into
the device before hand, the User cannot use the »Transfer only modified
parameters into the device« button. In this case, use the »Transfer all
parameters into the device« button.
The »Transfer only modified parameters into the device« button only works
if modified parameters are available in the PowerPort-E application.
In contrast, all parameters of the device are transferred when the »Transfer
all parameters into the device« button is pressed (provided all device
parameters are valid).
•
In order to (re-)transfer changed parameters into the device, select »Transfer all parameters into the
device« in the »Device« menu.
•
Confirm the safety inquiry »Shall the parameters be overwritten into the device?«.
•
Enter the password for setting parameters in the pop-up window.
•
The changed data is transferred to the device and adopted.
•
Confirm the inquiry »Parameters successfully updated?«. It is recommended to save the parameters
into a local file on your hard drive. Confirm »Shall The Data Be Saved Locally?“« with »Yes«
(recommended). Select a suitable folder on the hard disk.
•
Confirm the chosen folder by clicking »Save«.
•
The changed parameter data are now saved in the chosen folder.
www.eaton.com
163
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Backup and Documentation When Using PowerPort-E
How to Save Device Data on a PC
Click on »Save as ...« in the »File« menu. Specify a name, choose a folder on the hard disk, and save the
device data accordingly.
Printing of Device Data When Using PowerPort-E (Setting List)
The »Printing« menu offers the following options:
•
•
•
•
Printer settings;
Page preview;
Printing; and
Exporting the selected print range into a "txt" file.
The printing menu of the PowerPort-E software offers different types of printing ranges.
•
Printing of the complete parameter tree:
All values and parameters of the present parameter file are printed.
•
Printing of the displayed working window:
Only the data shown on the relevant working window are printed (i.e.: this applies, if at least one window
is opened).
•
Printing of all opened working windows:
The data shown on all windows are printed (i.e.: this applies only if more than one window is opened).
•
Printing of the device parameter tree as from a shown position on:
All data and parameters of the device parameter tree are printed as from the position/marking in the
navigation window. Below this selection, the complete name of the marking is additionally displayed.
Exporting Data as a “txt” File Via PowerPort-E
Within the print menu [File>Print], the User can choose »Export into File« in order to export the device data into
a “txt” file.
When exporting data, only the actual selected printing range will be
exported into a “txt” file. That means that if the User has chosen the
“Complete device parameter tree” printing range, then the “Complete
device parameter tree” will be exported. But, if the User has chosen the
“Actual working window” printing range, only that range of data will be
exported.
This is the only method available to export data via PowerPort-E.
If the User exports a “txt” file, the content of this file is encoded as
Unicode. That means that, if the User wants to edit this file, the application
must support Unicode encoded files (e.g.: Microsoft Office 2003 or higher).
164
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Off-line Device Planning Via PowerPort-E
In order to be able to transmit a parameter file (e.g.: created off-line) into
the device, the following information must be located:
•
Type code (written on the top of the device/type label); and
•
Version of the device model (can be found in menu [Device
Parameters\Version].
The PowerPort-E application also enables the User to create a configuration/parameter file off-line using a
“Device Model”. The advantage of using a device model is that the User can pre-configure a device by setting
parameters in advance.
The User can also read the parameter file out of the device, further process it off-line (e.g.: from the office) and
finally re-transfer it to the device.
The User can either:
•
•
•
Load an existing parameter file from a device (please refer to the Section “Loading Device Data When
Using PowerPort-E");
Create a new parameter file (see below); or
Open a locally saved parameter file (backup).
In order to create a new device/parameter file by way of a device template off-line.
•
In order to create a new off-line parameter file, select »Create new parameter file« within the »File«
menu.
•
A working window pops- up. Please make sure that you select the right device type with the correct
version and configuration.
•
Finally click on »Apply«.
•
In order to save the device configuration, select »Save« out of the »File« menu.
•
Within the »Modify Device Configuration (Typecode)« menu, the User can modify the device
configuration or simply find out the type code of the current selection.
If the User wants to transfer the parameter file into a device, please refer to Section “Restoring Device Data
When using PowerPort-E”.
Measuring Values
Read Out Measured Values
In the »Operation/Measured Values« menu, both measured and calculated values can be viewed. The
measured values are ordered by »Standard values« and »Special values« (depending on the type of device).
www.eaton.com
165
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Read Out of Measured Values Via PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
If the device data have not been loaded, select »Receive Data From The Device« from the »Device«
menu.
•
Double click on the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click on the »Measured Values« icon within the »Operation« navigation tree.
•
Double click the »Standard Values« or »Special values« within the »Measured values« tree.
•
The measured and calculated values are now shown in tabular form in the window.
To have the measuring data read in a cyclic manner, select »Auto refresh«
in the »View« menu. The measured values are read out about every two
seconds.
Current - Measured Values
If the device is not equipped with an voltage measuring card the first measuring input on the first current
measuring card (slot with the lowest number) will be used as the reference angle (»IA«).
Value
Description
Menu Path
IA Fund.
Measured value: Phase current
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
IB Fund.
Measured value: Phase current
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
IC Fund.
Measured value: Phase current
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
IX meas Fund.
Measured value (measured): IX
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
IR calc Fund.
Measured value (calculated): IR
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
166
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
I0 Fund.
Measured value (calculated): Zero current
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
I1 Fund.
Measured value (calculated): Positive
phase sequence current (Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
I2 Fund.
Measured value (calculated): Unbalanced
load current (Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle IA
Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of
Phasor IA
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle IB
Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of
Phasor IB
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle IC
Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of
Phasor IC
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle IX meas
Measured Value: Angle of Phasor IX meas
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle IR calc
Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of
Phasor IR calc
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle I0
Measured Value (calculated): Angle of Zero [Operation
Sequence System
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Angle I1
Measured Value (calculated): Angle of
Positive Sequence System
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
www.eaton.com
167
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
Angle I2
Measured value (calculated): Angle of
Negative Sequence System
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
IA RMS
Measured value: Phase current (RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IB RMS
Measured value: Phase current (RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IC RMS
Measured value: Phase current (RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IX meas RMS
Measured value (measured): IX (RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IR calc RMS
Measured value (calculated): IR (RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
%IA THD
Measured Value (Calculated): IA Total
Harmonic Distortion
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
%IB THD
Measured Value (Calculated): IB Total
Harmonic Distortion
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
%IC THD
Measured Value (Calculated): IC Total
Harmonic Distortion
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IA THD
Measured Value (Calculated): IA Total
Harmonic Current
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
168
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
IB THD
Measured Value (Calculated): IB Total
Harmonic Current
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
IC THD
Measured Value (Calculated): IC Total
Harmonic Current
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current RMS]
%(I2/I1)
Measured value (calculated): I2/I1 if ABC,
I1/I2 if CBA
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Current Fund.]
Voltage - Measured Values
The first measuring input on the first measuring card (slot with the lowest number) is used as the reference
angle.
E.g. »VA« respectively »VAB«.
Value
Description
Menu Path
f
Measured Value: Frequency
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VAB Fund.
Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
VBC Fund.
Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
VCA Fund.
Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
VA Fund.
Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
www.eaton.com
169
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
VB Fund.
Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
VC Fund.
Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
VX meas Fund.
Measured value (measured): VG measured [Operation
(Fundamental)
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
VR calc Fund.
Measured value (calculated): VR
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
V0 Fund.
Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical
components Zero voltage(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
V1 Fund.
Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical
components positive phase sequence
voltage(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
V2 Fund.
Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical
components negative phase sequence
voltage(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
VAB RMS
Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage
(RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VBC RMS
Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage
(RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VCA RMS
Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage
(RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
170
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
VA RMS
Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage
(RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VB RMS
Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage
(RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VC RMS
Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage
(RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VX meas RMS
Measured value (measured): VG measured [Operation
(RMS)
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VR calc RMS
Measured value (calculated): VR (RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
Angle VAB
Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of
Phasor VAB
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle VBC
Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of
Phasor VBC
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle VCA
Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of
Phasor VCA
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle VA
Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of
Phasor VA
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle VB
Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of
Phasor VB
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
www.eaton.com
171
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
Angle VC
Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of
Phasor VC
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle VX meas
Measured Value: Angle of Phasor VX meas [Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle VR calc
Measured Value (Calculated): Angle of
Phasor VR calc
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle V0
Measured Value (calculated): Angle of Zero [Operation
Sequence System
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle V1
Measured Value (calculated): Angle of
Positive Sequence System
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
Angle V2
Measured value (calculated): Angle of
Negative Sequence System
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
%(V2/V1)
Measured value (calculated): %V2/V1 if
ABC, %V1/V2 if CBA
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage Fund.]
% VAB THD
Measured value (calculated): VAB Total
Harmonic Distortion / fundamental
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
% VBC THD
Measured value (calculated): VBC Total
Harmonic Distortion / fundamental
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
% VCA THD
Measured value (calculated): VCA Total
Harmonic Distortion / fundamental
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
172
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
% VA THD
Measured value (calculated): VA Total
Harmonic Distortion / fundamental
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
% VB THD
Measured value (calculated): VB Total
Harmonic Distortion / fundamental
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
% VC THD
Measured value (calculated): VC Total
Harmonic Distortion / fundamental
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VAB THD
Measured value (calculated): VAB Total
Harmonic Distortion
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VBC THD
Measured value (calculated): VBC Total
Harmonic Distortion
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VCA THD
Measured value (calculated): VCA Total
Harmonic Distortion
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VA THD
Measured value (calculated): VA Total
Harmonic Distortion
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VB THD
VB THD
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
VC THD
VC THD
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Voltage RMS]
www.eaton.com
173
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Power - Measured Values
Value
Description
Menu Path
Disp PF
Measured Value (Calculated): 55D Displacement Power Factor Power factor
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Power]
Wh Fwd
Positive Active Power is consumed active
energy
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
Wh Rev
Negative Active Power (Fed Energy)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
VArh Lag
Positive Reactive Power is consumed
Reactive Energy
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
VArh Lead
Negative Reactive Power (Fed Energy)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
VAh Net
Net VA Hours
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
Wh Net
Net Watt Hours
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
VArh Net
Net VAr Hours
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
Start Date/Time
Energy counters run since ... (Date and
time of last reset)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Energy]
Syst VA RMS
Measured VAs (RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Power]
174
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
Syst W RMS
Measured Watts. Active power (P- = Fed
Active Power, P+ = Consumpted Active
Power) (RMS)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Power]
Syst VAr RMS
Measured VARs. Reactive power (Q- = Fed [Operation
Reactive Power, Q+ = Consumpted
Reactive Power) (RMS)
/Measured Values
/Power]
Apt PF
Measured Value (Calculated): 55A Apparent Power Factor
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Power]
Energy Counter
EnergyCr
Direct Commands of the Energy Counter Module
Parameter
Description
Res all Energy Reset of all Energy Counters
Cr
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
/Reset]
Signals of the Energy Counter Module (States of the Outputs)
Name
Description
Cr Overflow VAh Net
Signal: Counter Overflow VAh Net
Cr Overflow Wh Net
Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Net
Cr Overflow Wh Fwd
Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Fwd
Cr Overflow Wh Rev
Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Rev
Cr Overflow VArh Net
Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Net
Cr Overflow VArh Lag
Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Lag
Cr Overflow VArh Lead
Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Lead
VAh Net Res Cr
Signal: VAh Net Reset Counter
Wh Net Res Cr
Signal: Wh Net Reset Counter
Wh Fwd Res Cr
Signal: Wh Fwd Reset Counter
Wh Rev Res Cr
Signal: Wh Rev Reset Counter
VArh Net Res Cr
Signal: VArh Net Reset Counter
VArh Lag Res Cr
Signal: VArh Lag Reset Counter
www.eaton.com
175
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
VArh Lead Res Cr
Signal: VArh Lead Reset Counter
Res all Energy Cr
Signal: Reset of all Energy Counters
Cr OverflwWarn VAh Net
Signal: Counter VAh Net will overflow soon
Cr OverflwWarn Wh Net
Signal: Counter Wh Net will overflow soon
Cr OverflwWarn Wh Fwd
Signal: Counter Wh Fwd will overflow soon
Cr OverflwWarn Wh Rev
Signal: Counter Wh Rev will overflow soon
Cr OverflwWarn VArh Net
Signal: Counter VArh Net will overflow soon
Cr OverflwWarn VArh Lag
Signal: Counter VArh Lag will overflow soon
Cr OverflwWarn VArh Lead
Signal: Counter VArh Lead will overflow soon
176
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Statistics
Statistics
In the »Operation/Statistics« menu, the minimum, maximum, and mean values of the measured and calculated
quantities can be found. The statistics are ordered by »Standard values« and »Special values« (depending on
the type of device and the device planning).
In the »Device Parameter/Statistics« menu, the User can either set a fixed synchronization time and a
calculation interval or start and stop the statistics via a function (e.g.: digital input).
Read Out Statistics
•
Call up the main menu.
•
Call up the »Operation/Statistics« sub-menu.
•
Call up either the »Standard values« or »Special values«.
Statistics to Be Read Out Via PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
If device data have not been downloaded recently, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the
»Device« menu.
•
Double click on the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click on the »Statistics« icon within the »Operation« navigation tree.
•
Double click on the »Standard values« or »Special values« icon.
•
In the window, the statistical data are shown in tabular form.
The values can be read out cyclically. For this purpose, please select »Auto Refresh« out of the »View« menu.
Statistics (Configuration)
The Statistics module can be configured within the »Device Parameter/Statistics« menu.
The time interval, that is taken into account for the calculation of the statistics, can either be limited by a fixed
duration or it can be limited by a start function (freely assignable signal from the »assignment list« menu).
Fixed Duration:
If the statistics module is set to a fixed duration/time interval, the minimum, maximum, and average values
will be calculated and displayed continuously on the basis of this duration/time interval.
Start Function (Flexible Duration):
If the statistics module is to be initiated by a start function, the statistics will not be updated until the start
function becomes true (rising edge). At the same time, a new time interval will be started.
www.eaton.com
177
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Statistics (Configuration) Via PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
If device data have not been downloaded recently, click »Receive Data From The Device« in
the»Device« menu.
•
Double click on the »Device Parameter« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click on the »Statistics« icon within the »Device Parameter« navagation tree.
•
Configure the Statistics module.
Direct Commands
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
ResFc all
Resetting of all Statistic values (Current
Demand, Power Demand, Min, Max)
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
ResFc I
Demand
Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand
(avg, peak avg)
Inactive,
/Reset]
Inactive
Active
ResFc P
Demand
Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand
(avg, peak avg)
Inactive,
/Reset]
Inactive
Active
ResFc Min
Resetting of all Minimum values
Inactive,
Resetting of all Maximum values
Inactive,
[Operation
/Reset]
Inactive
Active
ResFc Max
[Operation
[Operation
/Reset]
Inactive
Active
[Operation
/Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Statistics Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
ResFc Max
Resetting of all Maximum values
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Statistics
/Min / Max]
ResFc Min
Resetting of all Minimum values
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Statistics
/Min / Max]
178
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Start I Demand Start Current demand by:
via:
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Duration,
Duration
[Device Para
StartFct
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Start I Demand Start of the calculation, if the assigned
Fc
signal becomes true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Statistics
Only available if: Start I Demand via: =
StartFct
/Demand
/Current Demand]
ResFc I
Demand
Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand
(avg, peak avg)
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
www.eaton.com
179
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Duration I
Demand
Recording time
2 s,
15 s
[Device Para
Only available if: Start I Demand via: =
Duration
5 s,
/Statistics
10 s,
/Demand
15 s,
/Current Demand]
30 s,
1 min,
5 min,
10 min,
15 min,
30 min,
1 h,
2 h,
6 h,
12 h,
1 d,
2 d,
5 d,
7 d,
10 d,
30 d
Window I
Demand
Window configuration
Sliding,
Fixed
Fixed
[Device Para
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Start P
Demand via:
Start Active Power demand by:
Duration,
StartFct
Duration
[Device Para
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
180
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Start P
Demand Fc
Start of the calculation, if the assigned
signal becomes true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Statistics
Only available if: Start P Demand via: =
StartFct
/Demand
/Power Demand]
ResFc P
Demand
Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand
(avg, peak avg)
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Duration P
Demand
Recording time
2 s,
15 s
[Device Para
Only available if: Start P Demand via: =
Duration
5 s,
/Statistics
10 s,
/Demand
15 s,
/Power Demand]
30 s,
1 min,
5 min,
10 min,
15 min,
30 min,
1 h,
2 h,
6 h,
12 h,
1 d,
2 d,
5 d,
7 d,
10 d,
30 d
www.eaton.com
181
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Window P
Demand
Window configuration
Sliding,
Sliding
[Device Para
Fixed
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
States of the Inputs of the Statistics Module
Name
Description
Assignment Via
StartFc 1-I
State of the module input: Start of Statistics [Device Para
1 (Update the displayed Demand )
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
StartFc 2-I
State of the module input: Start of Statistics [Device Para
2 (Update the displayed Demand )
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
ResFc I Demand-I
State of the module input: Resetting of
[Device Para
Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak avg)
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
ResFc P Demand-I
State of the module input: Resetting of
Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg)
[Device Para
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
ResFc Max-I
State of the module input: Resetting of all
Maximum values
[Device Para
/Statistics
/Min / Max]
ResFc Min-I
State of the module input: Resetting of all
Minimum values
[Device Para
/Statistics
/Min / Max]
182
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Signals of the Statistics Module
Name
Description
ResFc all
Signal: Resetting of all Statistic values (Current Demand, Power
Demand, Min, Max)
ResFc I Demand
Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand (avg., peak avg.)
ResFc P Demand
Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg., peak avg.)
ResFc Max
Signal: Resetting of all Maximum values
ResFc Min
Signal: Resetting of all Minimum values
Counters of the Module Statistics
Value
Description
Menu Path
MeasPointNo
Each measuring point that is taken over by
the statistics increments this counter. By
means of this counter, the User can check
whether the statistics are alive and if data
are being acquired.
[Operation
Each measuring point that is taken over by
the statistics increments this counter. By
means of this counter, the User can check
whether the statistics are alive and if data
are being acquired.
[Operation
Number of resets since last booting. The
time stamp shows date and time of the last
reset.
[Operation
MeasPointNo2
Res Cr I Demand
/Count and RevData
/Statistics]
/Count and RevData
/Statistics]
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Res Cr P Demand
Number of resets since last booting. The
time stamp shows date and time of the last
reset.
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Res Cr Min values
Number of resets since last booting. The
time stamp shows date and time of the last
reset.
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
Res Cr Max values
Number of resets since last booting. The
time stamp shows date and time of the last
reset.
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
www.eaton.com
183
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Current - Statistic Values
Value
Description
Menu Path
I1 max Fund.
Maximum value positive phase sequence
current (Fundamental)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
I1 min Fund.
Minimum value positive phase sequence
current (Fundamental)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
I2 max Fund.
Maximum value unbalanced load current
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
I2 min Fund.
Minimum value unbalanced load current
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IA max RMS
IA maximum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IA avg RMS
IA average value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
IA min RMS
IA minimum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
184
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
IB max RMS
IB maximum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IB avg RMS
IB average value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
IB min RMS
IB minimum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IC max RMS
IC maximum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IC avg RMS
IC average value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
IC min RMS
IC minimum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IX meas max RMS
Measured value: IX maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
www.eaton.com
185
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
IX meas min RMS
Measured value: IX minimum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IR calc max RMS
Measured value (calculated): IR maximum
value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
IR calc min RMS
Measured value (calculated): IR minimum
value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
%(I2/I1) max
Measured value (calculated): I2/I1
maximum value if ABC, I1/I2 if CBA
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Current]
%(I2/I1) min
%(I2/I1) min
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Current]
IA Peak demand
IA Peak value, RMS value
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
IB Peak demand
IB Peak value, RMS value
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
186
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
IC Peak demand
IC Peak value, RMS value
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Voltage - Statistic Values
Value
Description
Menu Path
f max
Max. frequency value
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
f min
Min. frequency value
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
V1 max Fund.
Maximum value: Symmetrical components
positive phase sequence voltage
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
V1 min Fund.
Minimum value: Symmetrical components
positive phase sequence voltage
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
V2 max Fund.
Maximum value: Symmetrical components
negative phase sequence voltage
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
V2 min Fund.
Minimum value: Symmetrical components
negative phase sequence voltage
(Fundamental)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
www.eaton.com
187
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
VAB max RMS
VAB maximum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VAB min RMS
VAB minimum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VBC max RMS
VBC maximum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VBC min RMS
VBC minimum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VCA max RMS
VCA maximum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VCA min RMS
VCA minimum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VA max RMS
VA maximum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
188
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
VA min RMS
VA minimum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VB max RMS
VB maximum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VB min RMS
VB minimum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VC max RMS
VC maximum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VC min RMS
VC minimum value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
VX meas max RMS
Measured value: VX maximum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VX meas min RMS
Measured value: VX minimum value (RMS) [Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
www.eaton.com
189
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
VR calc max RMS
Measured value (calculated): VR maximum [Operation
value (RMS)
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
VR calc min RMS
Measured value (calculated): VR minimum
value (RMS)
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
%(V2/V1) max
Measured value (calculated): %V2/V1
maximum value
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Voltage]
%(V2/V1) min
Measured value (calculated): %V2/V1
minimum value
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Voltage]
Power - Statistic Values
Value
Description
Menu Path
Disp PF max
Maximum value of the 55D - Displacement
Power Factor power factor
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
Disp PF min
Minimum value of the 55D - Displacement
Power Factor power factor
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
Syst VA max
Maximum value of the apparent power
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
190
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
Syst VA avg
Average of the apparent power
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Syst VA min
Minimum value of the apparent power
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
Syst W max
Maximum value of the active power
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
Syst W avg
Average of the active power
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Syst W min
Minimum value of the active power
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
Syst VAr max
Maximum value of the reactive power
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
Syst VAr avg
Average of the reactive power
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
www.eaton.com
191
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
Syst VAr min
Minimum value of the reactive power
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
Apt PF max
Maximum value of the 55A - Apparent
Power Factor
[Operation
/Statistics
/Max
/Power]
Apt PF min
Minimum value of the 55A - Apparent
Power Factor
[Operation
/Statistics
/Min
/Power]
VA Peak demand
VA Peak value, RMS value
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
Watt Peak demand
WATTS Peak value, RMS value
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
VAr Peak demand
VARs Peak value, RMS value
[Operation
/Statistics
/Demand
/Power Demand]
192
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
System Alarms
Available Elements:
System Alarms
Within the System Alarms menu [System Para/System Alarms], the User can configure:
•
General Settings (activate/inactivate the Demand Management, optional assign a signal, that will block
the Demand Management);
•
Power Protection (please refer to section 32, 32V, 32VA);
•
Demand Management (Power and Current); and
•
THD Protection.
Demand Management
Demand is the average of system current or power over a time interval (window). Demand management
supports the User to keep energy demand below target values bound by contract (with the energy supplier). If
the contractual target values are exceeded, extra charges are to be paid to the energy supplier.
Therefore, demand management helps the User detect and avoid averaged peak loads that are taken into
account for the billing. In order to reduce the demand charge respective to demand rate, peak loads, if possible,
should be diversified. That means, if possible, avoiding large loads at the same time. In order to assist the User
in analyzing the demand, demand management might inform the User by an alarm. The User might also use
demand alarms and assign them on relays in order to perform load shedding (where applicable).
Demand management comprises:
Watt Demand (Active Power);
VAr Demand (Reactive Power);
VA Demand (Apparent Power); and
Current Demand.
•
•
•
•
Configuring the Demand
Configuring the demand is a two step procedure. Proceed as follows.
Step1. Configure the general settings within the [Device Para/Demand] menu:
•
•
•
Set the trigger source to »Duration«.
Select a time base for the »window«.
Determine if the window is »fixed« or »sliding«.
The interval time (window) can be set to fixed or sliding.
Example for a fixed window: If the range is set for 15 minutes, the protective device calculates
the average current or power over the past 15 minutes and updates the value every 15 minutes.
Example for a sliding window: If the sliding window is selected and the interval is set to 15
minutes, the protective device calculates and updates the average current or power continuously,
for the past 15 minutes (the newest measuring value replaces the oldest measuring value
continuously).
www.eaton.com
193
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Window configuration = Sliding
Duration
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
t-Delay
0
Average Calculation
15
16
17
18
15
16
17
18
16
17
18
Pickup
Sliding
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
t-Delay
0
Average Calculation
Pickup
Sliding
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
t-Delay
0
Average Calculation
Pickup
Window configuration = Fixed
Average Calculation
Average Calculation
Duration
1
2
3
4
5
6
Average Calculation
7
Average Calculation
Duration
8
9
10
Average Calculation
Duration
11
12
13
14
Average Calculation
Average Calculation
194
Average Calculation
www.eaton.com
15
16
17
18
Average Calculation
t-Delay
0
Pickup
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Step 2. In addition, the Demand specific settings have to be configured in the [System Para/System
Alarms/Demand] menu:
Determine if the demand should generate an alarm or if it should run in the silent mode
(Alarm active/inactive);
Set the threshold; and
Where applicable, set a delay time for the alarm.
•
•
•
Peak Demand
The protective device also saves the peak demand values for current and power. The quantities represent the
largest demand value since the demand values were last reset. Peak demands for current and system power
are date and time stamped.
Within the [Operation/Demand] menu, the current Demand and Peak demand values can be seen.
Min. and Max. Values.
Within the Operation menu the minimum (min.) and maximum (max.) values can be seen.
Minimum values since last reset: The minimum values are continuously compared to the last minimum value
for that measuring value. If the new value is less than the last minimum, the value is updated. Within the
[Device Para/Statistics] menu, a reset signal can be assigned.
Maximum values since last reset: The maximum values are continuously compared to the last maximum
value for that measuring value. If the new value is greater than the last maximum, the value is updated. Within
the [Device Para/Statistics] menu, a reset signal can be assigned.
THD Protection
In order to supervise power quality, the protective device can monitor the voltage (phase-to-phase) and current
THDs.
Within the [System Para/System Alarms/THD] menu:
•
•
•
Determine if an alarm is to be issued or not (Alarm active/inactive);
Set the threshold; and
Where applicable, set a delay time for the alarm.
Device Planning Parameters of the Demand Management
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
www.eaton.com
195
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Signals of the Demand Management (States of the Outputs)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Alarm Watt Power
Signal: Alarm WATTS peak
Alarm VAr Power
Signal: Alarm VArs peak
Alarm VA Power
Signal: Alarm VAs peak
Alarm Watt Demand
Signal: Alarm WATTS demand value
Alarm VAr Demand
Signal: Alarm VARs demand value
Alarm VA Demand
Signal: Alarm VAs demand value
Alarm Current Demand
Signal: Alarm Current demand value
Alarm I THD
Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Current
Alarm V THD
Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
Trip Watt Power
Signal: Trip WATTS peak
Trip VAr Power
Signal: Trip VArs peak
Trip VA Power
Signal: Trip VAs peak
Trip Watt Demand
Signal: Trip WATTS demand value
Trip VAr Demand
Signal: Trip VARs demand value
Trip VA Demand
Signal: Trip VAs demand value
Trip Current Demand
Signal: Trip Current demand value
Trip I THD
Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Current
Trip V THD
Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
Global Protection Parameter of the Demand Management
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[System Alarms
Active
ExBlo Fc
Alarm
/General Settings]
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
1..n, Assignment List
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
-.-
Threshold
Inactive
Inactive,
Active
[System Alarms
/General Settings]
[System Alarms
/Power
/Watt]
196
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Threshold
Alarm
1 – 40000000 kW
10000 kW
[System Alarms
/Power
/Watt]
t-Delay
Tripping Delay
0 – 60 min
0 min
[System Alarms
/Power
/Watt]
Alarm
Threshold
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[System Alarms
/Power
/VAr]
Threshold
Alarm
1 – 40000000 kVAr
10000 kVAr
[System Alarms
/Power
/VAr]
t-Delay
Tripping Delay
0 – 60 min
0 min
[System Alarms
/Power
/VAr]
Alarm
Threshold
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[System Alarms
/Power
/VA]
Threshold
Alarm
1 – 40000000 kVA
10000 kVA
[System Alarms
/Power
/VA]
t-Delay
Tripping Delay
0 – 60 min
0 min
[System Alarms
/Power
/VA]
Alarm
Threshold
Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[System Alarms
/Demand
/Power Demand
/Watt Demand]
www.eaton.com
197
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Threshold
Alarm
1 – 40000000 kW
10000 kW
[System Alarms
/Demand
/Power Demand
/Watt Demand]
t-Delay
Tripping Delay
0 – 60 min
0 min
[System Alarms
/Demand
/Power Demand
/Watt Demand]
Alarm
Threshold
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[System Alarms
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VAr Demand]
Threshold
Alarm
1 – 40000000 kVAr
20000 kVAr
[System Alarms
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VAr Demand]
t-Delay
Tripping Delay
0 – 60 min
0 min
[System Alarms
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VAr Demand]
Alarm
Threshold
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[System Alarms
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VA Demand]
Threshold
Alarm
1 – 40000000 kVA
20000 kVA
[System Alarms
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VA Demand]
198
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
t-Delay
Tripping Delay
0 – 60 min
0 min
[System Alarms
/Demand
/Power Demand
/VA Demand]
Alarm
Threshold
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[System Alarms
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Threshold
Alarm
10 – 500000 A
500 A
[System Alarms
/Demand
/Current Demand]
t-Delay
Tripping Delay
0 – 60 min
0 min
[System Alarms
/Demand
/Current Demand]
Alarm
Threshold
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[System Alarms
/THD
/I THD]
Threshold
Alarm
1 – 500000 A
500 A
[System Alarms
/THD
/I THD]
t-Delay
Tripping Delay
0 – 3600 s
0s
[System Alarms
/THD
/I THD]
Alarm
Threshold
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[System Alarms
/THD
/U THD]
Threshold
Alarm
1 – 500000 V
10000 V
[System Alarms
/THD
/U THD]
t-Delay
Tripping Delay
0 – 3600 s
0s
[System Alarms
/THD
/U THD]
www.eaton.com
199
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
States of the Inputs of the Demand Management
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
[System Alarms
/General Settings]
System Alarm Signals (States of the Outputs)
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
System Alarms.Active
Signal: Active
System Alarms.ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
System Alarms.Alarm Watt Power
Signal: Alarm WATTS peak
System Alarms.Alarm VAr Power
Signal: Alarm VArs peak
System Alarms.Alarm VA Power
Signal: Alarm VAs peak
System Alarms.Alarm Watt Demand
Signal: Alarm WATTS demand value
System Alarms.Alarm VAr Demand
Signal: Alarm VARs demand value
System Alarms.Alarm VA Demand
Signal: Alarm VAs demand value
System Alarms.Alarm Current Demand
Signal: Alarm Current demand value
System Alarms.Alarm I THD
Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Current
System Alarms.Alarm V THD
Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
System Alarms.Trip Watt Power
Signal: Trip WATTS peak
System Alarms.Trip VAr Power
Signal: Trip VArs peak
System Alarms.Trip VA Power
Signal: Trip VAs peak
System Alarms.Trip Watt Demand
Signal: Trip WATTS demand value
System Alarms.Trip VAr Demand
Signal: Trip VARs demand value
System Alarms.Trip VA Demand
Signal: Trip VAs demand value
System Alarms.Trip Current Demand
Signal: Trip Current demand value
System Alarms.Trip I THD
Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Current
System Alarms.Trip V THD
Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
200
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Resets
Collective Acknowledgments for Latched Signals:
Collective Acknowledgments
LEDs
Relay Outputs
SCADA
All SCADA
Via PowerPort-E or All LEDs at once: All Relay Outputs
at once:
signals at once:
at the panel all...
Where?
can be
[Operation\
Where?
Where?
acknowledged.
Acknowledge]
[Operation\
[Operation\
Acknowledge]
Acknowledge]
At the panel, the
[Operation\
Acknowledge] menu
can directly be
accessed via the
»C« key.
Pending
Trip Command
LEDs+
Relay Outputs+
SCADA+
Pending
Trip Command
All pending trip
commands at
once:
All at once:
Where?
[Operation\
Acknowledge]
External
All LEDs at once: All Relay Outputs at All SCADA signals at
All Pending Trip
Acknowledg-ment:
once:
once:
commands at once:
Via a signal from the
Where?
Where?
Where?
Where?
assignment list (e.g.:
Within the
Within the
Within the
Within the
a digital Input) all... Ex Acknowledge
Ex Acknowledge Ex Acknowledge Ex Acknowledge
menu.
can be
menu.
menu.
menu.
acknowledged.
Where?
[Operation\
Acknowledge]
All at once:
Where?
Within the
Ex Acknowledge
menu.
Options for Individual Acknowledgments for Latched Signals:
Individual Acknowledgment
Via a signal from the
assignment list (e.g.: a digital
Input), a single... can be
acknowledged.
LEDs
Relay Output
Pending
Trip Command
Single LED:
Relay Output:
Pending Trip Command.
Where?
Within the Configuration menu
of this single LED.
Where?
Within the Configuration menu
of this single Relay Output.
Where?
Within the module
TripControl
If the User is within the parameter setting mode, the User cannot
acknowledge.
In case of a fault during parameter setting via the operating panel, the User
must first leave the parameter mode by pressing either the push-buttons
»C« or »OK« before accessing the »Acknowledgements« menu via the
push-button.
www.eaton.com
201
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Manual Acknowledgment
Press the »C« button on the panel.
Select the item to be acknowledged via the softkeys:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Relay Outputs;
LEDs;
SCADA;
A trip command; or
All the above mentioned items at once.
Press the Softkey with the »Wrench-Symbol«.
Enter the password.
•
•
Manual Acknowledgment Via PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
If device data have not been downloaded recently, select »Receive Data From The Device« from the
»Device« menu.
•
Double click on the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click on the »Acknowledgment« icon within the operation menu.
•
Double click the entry within the pop-up that is to be acknowledged.
•
Press the »Execute immediately« button.
•
Enter the password.
External Acknowledgments
Within the [Ex Acknowledge] menu, the User can assign a signal (e.g.: the state of a digital input) from the
assignment list that:
Acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) LEDs at once;
Acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) Output Relays at once; or
Acknowledges all (acknowledgeable) SCADA signals at once.
•
•
•
Ack LED
Ex Acknowledge.Ack LED
1..n, Assignment List
Ack RO
Ex Acknowledge.Ack RO
1..n, Assignment List
Ack Comm
Ex Acknowledge.Ack Comm
1..n, Assignment List
Within the [Protection Para\Global Prot Para\TripControl] menu, the User can assign a signal that acknowledges
a pending trip command.
202
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
For details, please refer to the Trip Control section.
External Acknowledge Via PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
If device data have not been downloaded recently, select »Receive Data From The Device« from the
»Device« menu.
•
Double click on the »Device Parameter« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click on the »Ex Acknowledge« icon within the operation menu.
•
In the working window, the User can now assign each signal that resets all acknowledgeable LEDs, a
signal that resets all Relay Outputs, a signal that resets the SCADA signals respectively, and a signal
that acknowledges a pending trip command.
External LED - Acknowledgment Signals
The following signals can be used for external acknowledgment of latched LEDs.
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
DI-8P X1.DI 1
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 2
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 3
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 4
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 5
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 6
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 7
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 8
Signal: Digital Input
Modbus.Comm Cmd 1
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 2
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 3
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 4
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 5
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 6
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 7
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 8
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 9
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 10
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 11
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 12
Communication Command
www.eaton.com
203
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Modbus.Comm Cmd 13
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 14
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 15
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 16
Communication Command
Manual Resets
In the »Operation/Reset« menu, the User can:
•
•
•
Reset counters;
Delete records (e.g.: disturbance records); and
Reset special things (like statistics, thermal replica, etc.).
The description of the reset commands can be found within the
corresponding modules.
Manual Resets Via PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
If device data have not been downloaded recently, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the
»Device« menu.
•
Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click the »Reset icon« within the operation menu.
•
Double click the entry within the pop-up that is to be reset or deleted.
The description of the reset commands can be found within the
corresponding modules.
204
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Status Display
In the status display within the »Operation« menu, the present state of all signals can be viewed. This means
the User is able to see if the individual signals are active or inactive at that moment. The User can see all
signals sorted by protective elements/modules.
State of the Module Input / Signal Is ...
Is Shown at the Panel as ...
false / »0«
true / »1«
Status Display via PowerPort E
•
If PowerPort E is not running, please start the application.
•
If the device data have not been downloaded recently, select »Receive Data From The Device« from
»Device« menu.
•
Double click on the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click on the »Status Display« icon within the operational data.
•
Double click on a subfolder (e.g. Prot) in order to see e.g. the states of the general alarms.
To have the status display updated in a cyclic manner, select »Automatic
Up-Date« in the »VIEW« menu.
State of the Module Input / Signal Is ...
Is Shown in PowerPort-E as ...
false / »0«
0
true / »1«
1
No connection to the device
?
www.eaton.com
205
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Operating Panel (HMI)
HMI
Special Parameters of the Panel
The »Device Parameter/HMI« menu is used to define the contrast of the display, the maximum admissible edit
time, and the menu language (after expiration, all unsaved parameter changes will be rejected).
Direct Commands of the Panel
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Contrast
Contrast
30 - 60
50
[Device Para
/HMI]
Global Protection Parameters of the Panel
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
t-max Edit
If no other key(s) is pressed at the panel,
after expiration of this time, all cached
(changed) parameters are canceled
20 – 3600 s
180 s
[Device Para
206
/HMI]
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Recorders
Disturbance Recorder
Disturb rec
The disturbance recorder works with 32 samples per cycle. It can be started by one of eight start events
(selection from the »Assignment list«/OR-Logic).
The disturbance record contains the measuring values including the pre-trigger time. By means of PowerPort-E/
Quality Manager (option), the oscillographic curves of the analog (current, voltage) and digital channels/traces
can be shown and evaluated in a graphical form.
The disturbance recorder has a storage capacity of 120 s (duration). The amount of records depends on the file
size of each record.
The disturbance recorder can be configured in the»Device Parameter/Recorder/Disturb rec« menu.
Determine the maximum recording time to register a disturbance event. The maximum total length of a
recording is 10 s (including pre-trigger and post-trigger time).
To trigger the disturbance recorder, up to eight signals can be selected from the »Assignment list«. The trigger
events are OR-linked. If a disturbance record is written, a new disturbance record cannot be triggered until all
trigger signals, which have triggered the previous disturbance record, are gone.
Recording is only done for the time the assigned event exists (event controlled), plus the time for the pre- and
post-trigger, but not longer than 10 s. The time for the pre- and post-trigger is to be entered as percent of the
maximum file size.
The post-trigger time will be up to the "Post-trigger time" depending on the duration of
the trigger signal. The post-trigger will be the remaining time of the "Max file size" but,
at maximum, the "Post-trigger time".
Example
The disturbance recorder is started by the general activation facility. After the fault has been cleared (plus
follow-up time), the recording process is stopped (but after 10 s at the latest).
The parameter »Auto Delete« defines how the device will react if a location to which to save the disturbance
record is not available. In case »Auto Delete« is »Active«, the first recorded disturbance will be overwritten
according to the FIFO principle. If the parameter is set to »Inactive«, recording of the disturbance events will be
stopped until the storage location is manually released.
www.eaton.com
207
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Start: 1
Trigger
Start: 2
Trigger
Start: 3
Trigger
Start: 4
Trigger
OR
Start: 5
Trigger
OR
Start: 6
Trigger
Start: 7
Trigger
Start: 8
Trigger
Man. Trigger
208
www.eaton.com
Recording
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Start 1 = Prot.Pickup
Start 2 = -.Start 3 = -.Start 4 = -.Start 5 = -.Start 6 = -.Start 7 = -.Start 8 = -.Auto overwriting = Active
Post-trigger time = 25%
t-rec = Max file size
Pre-trigger time = 15%
Max file size = 2s
Start 1
1335 ms
1
0
t
Pre-trigger time
300 ms
1
0
t
Post-trigger time
365 ms
1
0
t
t-rec
2000 ms
1
0
t
Max file size
2000 ms
1
0
t
www.eaton.com
209
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Start 1 = Prot.Trip
Start 2 = -.Start 3 = -.Start 4 = -.Start 5 = -.Start 6 = -.Start 7 = -.Start 8 = -.-
t-rec < Max file size
Auto overwriting = Active
Post-trigger time = 25%
Pre-trigger time = 15%
Start 1
Max file size = 2s
200 ms
1
0
t
Pre-trigger time
300 ms
1
0
t
Post-trigger time
500 ms
1
0
t
t-rec
1000 ms
1
0
t
Max file size
2000 ms
1
0
t
210
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Read Out of Disturbance Records
Within the »Operation/Disturb rec« menu, the User can:
•
Detect the accumulated disturbance records.
Within the »Operation/Recorders/Man Trigger« menu, the User can trigger
the disturbance recorder manually.
To Read Out the Disturbance Recorder with PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
If the device data have not been loaded, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu.
•
Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click the »Recorders« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click the »Disturb rec« icon.
•
In the window, the disturbance records are shown in tabular form.
•
A pop-up will appear by double clicking on a disturbance record. Choose a folder where the
disturbance record is to be saved.
•
The User can analyze the disturbance records by means of the optionally available Quality Manager by
clicking on »Yes« when asked “Shall the received disturbance record be opened by the Quality
Manager?"
Deleting Disturbance Records
Within the »Operation/Disturb rec« menu, the User can:
•
Delete disturbance records;
•
Choose the disturbance record that is to be deleted via »SOFTKEY« »up« and »SOFTKEY« »down«;
•
Call up the detailed view of the disturbance record via »SOFTKEY« »right«;
•
Confirm by pressing »SOFTKEY« »delete«;
•
Enter the User password followed by pressing the »OK« key;
•
Choose whether only the current or all disturbance records should be deleted; and
•
Confirm by pressing »SOFTKEY« »OK«.
www.eaton.com
211
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Deleting Disturbance Records Via PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
If the device data have not been loaded, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu.
•
Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click the »Recorders« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click the »Disturb rec« icon.
•
In the window, the disturbance records are shown in tabular form.
•
In order to delete a disturbance record, double click on
(the red x) in front of the disturbance record and confirm.
Direct Commands of the Disturbance Recorder Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Man. Trigger
Manual Trigger
False,
False
[Operation
True
/Recorders
/Man. Trigger]
Res all rec
Reset all records
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Operation
/Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Start: 1
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
Default
Menu Path
Prot.Pickup
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start: 2
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start: 3
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
212
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Start: 4
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start: 5
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start: 6
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start: 7
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start: 8
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Auto
overwriting
If there is no more free memory capacity
left, the oldest file will be overwritten.
Inactive,
Active
Active
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Post-trigger
time
The post trigger time is settable up to a
maximum of 50% of the Maximum file size
setting. The post-trigger will be the
remaining time of the "Max file size" but at
maximum "Post-trigger time"
0 - 50%
Pre-trigger time The pre trigger time is settable up to a
maximum of 50% of the maximum file size
setting.
0 - 50%
20%
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
20%
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Max file size
The maximum storage capacity per record 0.1 – 10.0 s
is 10 seconds, including pre-trigger and
post-trigger time. The disturbance recorder
has a total storage capacity of 120 seconds.
2s
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
www.eaton.com
213
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Disturbance Recorder Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
Start1-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start2-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start3-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start4-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start5-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start6-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start7-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Start8-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Disturb rec]
Disturbance Recorder Module Signals
Name
Description
Recording
Signal: Recording
Memory full
Signal: Memory Full
Clear fail
Signal: Clear Failure in Memory
Res all rec
Signal: All records deleted
214
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Res record
Signal: Delete Record
Man. Trigger
Signal: Manual Trigger
Special Parameters of the Disturbance Recorder
Value
Description
Default
Size
Menu Path
Rec state
Recording state
Ready
Ready,
[Operation
Recording,
/Status display
Writing file,
/Disturb rec]
Trigger Blo
Error code
Error code
OK
OK,
[Operation
Write err,
/Status display
Clear fail,
/Disturb rec]
Calculation
err,
File not
found,
Auto
overwriting
off
Fault Recorder
Fault rec
The fault recorder can be started by one of eight start events (selection from the »Assignment list«/OR-Logic). It
can register up to 20 faults. The last of the recorded faults is stored in a fail-safe manner.
If one of the assigned trigger events becomes true, the fault recorder will be started. When a trigger event
happens, each fault is saved including the module and name, fault number, number of grid faults and record
number at that time. For each of the faults, the measuring values (at the time when the trigger event became
true) can be viewed.
Up to eight signals to trigger the fault recorder can be selected from the »Assignment list«. The trigger events
are OR-linked.
The parameter »Auto Delete« defines how the device will react if there is no saving place available. In case
»Auto Delete« is »Active«, the first recorded fault will be overwritten according to the FIFO principle. If the
parameter is set to »Inactive«, recording of the fault events will be stopped until the storage location is released
manually.
www.eaton.com
215
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Start: 1
Trigger
Start: 2
Trigger
Start: 3
Trigger
Start: 4
Trigger
OR
Start: 5
Trigger
OR
Recording
Start: 6
Trigger
Start: 7
Trigger
Start: 8
Trigger
Man. Trigger
Read Out the Fault Recorder
The measured values at the time of tripping are saved (fail-safe) within the fault recorder. If there is no more
memory free, the oldest record will be overwritten (FIFO).
In order to read out a failure record:
•
Call up the main menu;
•
Call up the sub-menu »Operation/Recorders/Fault rec.«;
•
Select a fault record; and
•
Analyze the corresponding measured values.
To Read Out the Fault Recorder Via PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
If the device data have not been loaded, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu.
•
Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.
216
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
•
Double click the »Fault Rec« icon within the »Operation/Recorders« tree.
•
In the window, the fault recordings are shown in tabular form.
•
In order to receive more detailed information on a fault, click the »Plus Sign« in front of the fault number.
Via the print menu, the User can export the data into a file. Please proceed
as follows.
•
Call up the data as described above.
•
Call up the »File/Print« menu.
•
Choose »Print Actual Working Window« within the pop-up.
•
Press the »Print« button.
•
Press the »Export to File« button.
•
Enter a file name.
•
Choose a location where to save the file.
•
Confirm the »Save« button.
Direct Commands of the Fault Recorder Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Res all rec
Reset all records
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
Man. Trigger
Manual Trigger
False,
/Reset]
False
True
[Operation
/Recorders
/Man. Trigger]
Global Protection Parameters of the Fault Recorder Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Start: 1
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
Default
Menu Path
Prot.Trip
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
www.eaton.com
217
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Start: 2
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 3
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 4
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 5
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 6
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 7
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start: 8
Start recording if the assigned signal is true. 1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Auto
overwriting
If there is no more free memory capacity
left, the oldest file will be overwritten.
Inactive,
Active
Active
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Fault Recorder Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
Start1-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
218
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
Start2-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start3-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start4-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start5-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start6-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start7-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Start8-I
State of the module input: Trigger event /
start recording if:
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Fault rec]
Fault Recorder Module Signals
Name
Description
Res record
Signal: Delete Record
Man. Trigger
Signal: Manual Trigger
Fault Recorder Trigger Functions
These events (Pickups, Trips, Digital Inputs, Relay Output states) will start the fault recorder.
www.eaton.com
219
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Event Recorder
Event rec
The event recorder can register up to 300 events and the last 50 (minimum) saved events are stored in nonvolatile memory, and therefore retailed when power is lost to the unit. The following information is provided for
any of the events.
Events are logged as follows:
Record No.
Fault No.
No of grid faults
Sequential Number
Number of the
ongoing fault.
A grid fault No. can have Time stamp
several Fault Nos.
This counter will be
incremented by each
General Pickup
(Prot.Pickup).
This counter will be
incremented by each
General Pickup.
(Exception AR: this
applies only to devices
that offer auto reclosing).
Date of Record
Module Name
State
What has changed?
Changed Value
There are three different classes of events.
•
Alternation of binary states are shown as:
0->1 if the signal changes physically from »0« to »1«.
•
1->0 if the signal changes physically from »1« to »0«.
•
•
•
Counters increment is shown as:
•
Old Counter state -> New Counter state (e.g.: 3->4)
Alternation of multiple states are shown as:
Old state -> New state (e.g.: 0->2)
•
Read Out the Event Recorder
•
Call up the »main menu«.
•
•
Call up the sub-menu »Operation/Recorders/Event rec«.
•
Select an event.
To Read Out the Event Recorder via PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
If the device data have not been loaded, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device menu.
•
Double click the »Operation« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click the »Event Rec« icon within the »Operation/Recorders« menu.
220
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
•
In the window, the events are shown in tabular form.
To have the event recorder updated in a cyclic manner, select »Automatic
Up-Date« in the »View« menu.
PowerPort-E is able to record more events than the device itself, if the
window of the event recorder is opened and »Automatic Up-Date« is set to
active.
Via the print menu, the User can export the data into a file. Please proceed
as follows.
•
Call up the data as described above.
•
Call up the »File/Print« menu.
•
Choose »Print Actual Working Window« within the pop-up.
•
Press the »Print« button.
•
Press the »Export to File« button.
•
Enter a file name.
•
Choose a location where to save the file.
•
Confirm the »Save« button.
Direct Commands of the Event Recorder Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Res all rec
Reset all records
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
/Reset]
Event Recorder Module Signals
Name
Description
Res all rec
Signal: All records deleted
Trend Recorder
Available Elements:
Trend rec
Functional Description
The Trend Data are data points stored by the Trend Recorder on the relay device over fixed intervals of time,
and can be downloaded from the device using PowerPort-E. A Trend Record is viewable using the Quality
www.eaton.com
221
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Monitor software by selecting files saved by PowerPort-E with a file extension of “.ErTr”. The list of available
trend recorder data is viewable by selecting [Operation/ Recorders/Trend Recorder] on the front panel of the
relay.
When viewed within the Quality Manager, the trend record will show the observed values (up to 10) that the User
has specified. The available values are dependent on the ordered protective device.
Managing Trend Records
To download information from the Trend Recorder, select [Operation/Recorder/Trend Rec] from the menu tree.
The User will find three options within the Trend Recorder window that will allow the User to:
•
•
•
Receive Trend Records,
Refresh the Trend Recorder, and
Delete Trend Records.
Selecting the »Receive Trend Record« button will download data from the relay to the User's PC. By selecting
the »Refresh Trend Recorder«”, PowerPort-E updates the list of the Trend Recorder. The »Delete Trend
Recorder« function will clear all trend data from the relay, leaving the data files on the User's PC.
To view data using the Quality Manager, first the User must open the desired “.ErTr” file to be viewed from a
folder location previously designated by the User. Once the “.ErTr” file is open, the User will see the “Analog
Channels” that are monitored by the Trend Recorder. By clicking on the “Analog Channels”, all monitored
parameters are listed. To view a channel, the User must click on the left mouse key, then drag and drop the
channel onto the right side of the Quality Manager screen. The channel is then listed under the »Displayed
Channels«.
To remove a channel from view, the User must select the Trend Data to be removed in the »Displayed
Channels« menu tree, then click on the right mouse button to bring up the menu options. Here, the User will
find the »Remove« menu option that, when selected, will remove the trend data.
Configuring the Trend Recorder
The Trend Recorder is to be configured within [Device Para/Recorders/Trend Recorder] menu.
The User has to set the time interval. This defines the distance between two measuring points.
The User can select up to ten values that will be recorded.
Selection List for Trending
Name
Description
-
No assignment
IA RMS
Measured value: Phase current (RMS)
IB RMS
Measured value: Phase current (RMS)
IC RMS
Measured value: Phase current (RMS)
IX meas RMS
Measured value (measured): IX (RMS)
IR calc RMS
Measured value (calculated): IR (RMS)
I0 Fund.
Measured value (calculated): Zero current (Fundamental)
I1 Fund.
Measured value (calculated): Positive phase sequence current
(Fundamental)
222
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
I2 Fund.
Measured value (calculated): Unbalanced load current
(Fundamental)
IA avg RMS
IA average value (RMS)
IB avg RMS
IB average value (RMS)
IC avg RMS
IC average value (RMS)
VA RMS
Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS)
VB RMS
Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS)
VC RMS
Measured value: Phase-to-neutral voltage (RMS)
VX meas RMS
Measured value (measured): VG measured (RMS)
VAB RMS
Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS)
VBC RMS
Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS)
VCA RMS
Measured value: Phase-to-phase voltage (RMS)
V0 Fund.
Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components Zero
voltage(Fundamental)
V1 Fund.
Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components positive
phase sequence voltage(Fundamental)
V2 Fund.
Measured value (calculated): Symmetrical components negative
phase sequence voltage(Fundamental)
VA avg RMS
VA average value (RMS)
VB avg RMS
VB average value (RMS)
VC avg RMS
VC average value (RMS)
VAB avg RMS
VAB average value (RMS)
VBC avg RMS
VBC average value (RMS)
VCA avg RMS
VCA average value (RMS)
f
Measured Value: Frequency
Disp PF
Measured Value (Calculated): 55D - Displacement Power Factor
Power factor
Apt PF
Measured Value (Calculated): 55A - Apparent Power Factor
IA THD
Measured Value (Calculated): IA Total Harmonic Current
IB THD
Measured Value (Calculated): IB Total Harmonic Current
IC THD
Measured Value (Calculated): IC Total Harmonic Current
VA THD
Measured value (calculated): VA Total Harmonic Distortion
VB THD
VB THD
VC THD
VC THD
VAB THD
Measured value (calculated): VAB Total Harmonic Distortion
VBC THD
Measured value (calculated): VBC Total Harmonic Distortion
VCA THD
Measured value (calculated): VCA Total Harmonic Distortion
www.eaton.com
223
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Global Protection Parameters of the Trend Recorder
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Resolution
Resolution (recording frequency)
60 min,
15 min
[Device Para
30 min,
/Recorders
15 min,
/Trend rec]
10 min,
5 min
Observed
Value1
Observed Value1
1..n, TrendRecList
IA RMS
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed
Value2
Observed Value2
1..n, TrendRecList
IB RMS
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed
Value3
Observed Value3
1..n, TrendRecList
IC RMS
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed
Value4
Observed Value4
1..n, TrendRecList
IX meas RMS
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed
Value5
Observed Value5
1..n, TrendRecList
VA RMS
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed
Value6
Observed Value6
1..n, TrendRecList
VB RMS
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed
Value7
Observed Value7
1..n, TrendRecList
VC RMS
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed
Value8
Observed Value8
1..n, TrendRecList
VX meas RMS
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
224
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Observed
Value9
Observed Value9
1..n, TrendRecList
-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Observed
Value10
Observed Value10
1..n, TrendRecList
-
[Device Para
/Recorders
/Trend rec]
Trend Recorder Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Hand Reset
Hand Reset
Direct Commands of the Trend Recorder
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Reset
Delete all entries
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
www.eaton.com
/Reset]
225
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Communication Protocols
Modbus®
Modbus
Modbus® Protocol Configuration
The time-controlled Modbus® protocol is based on the master-slave working principle. This means that the
substation control and protection system sends an inquiry or instruction to a certain device (slave address) that
will then be answered or carried out accordingly. If the inquiry/instruction cannot be answered/carried out (e.g.:
because of an invalid slave address), a failure message is returned to the master.
The master (substation control and protection system) can query information from the device, such as:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Type of unit version;
Measuring values/statistical measured values;
Switch operating position (in preparation);
State of device;
Time and date;
State of the device’s digital inputs; and
Protection-/state pickups.
The master (control system) can give commands/instructions to the device, such as:
•
•
•
•
•
Control of switchgear (where applicable, i.e.: each according to the applied device version);
Change-over of parameter set;
Reset and acknowledgment of pickups/signals;
Adjustment of the date and time; and
Control of pickup relays.
For detailed information on data point lists and error handling, please refer to the Modbus® documentation.
To allow configuration of the devices for Modbus® connection, some default values of the control system must be
available.
Device Planning Parameters of the Modbus
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
RTU,
RTU
[Device Planning]
TCP
Modbus RTU
Part 1: Configuration of the Devices
Call up »Device parameter/Modbus« and set the following communication parameters:
•
Slave address, to allow clear identification of the device; and
•
Baud rate.
226
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Also, select the RS485 interface-related parameters such as:
•
Number of data bits;
•
One of the following supported communication variants:
•
Number of data bits,
•
Even,
•
Odd,
•
Parity or no parity, or
•
Number of stop bits;
•
»t-timeout«: communication errors are only identified after expiration of a supervision time »t-timeout«;
and
•
Response time (defining the period within which an inquiry from the master has to be answered).
Part 2: Hardware Connection
•
For hardware connection to the control system, there is an RS485 interface at the rear side of the device
(RS485, fiber optic or terminals).
•
Connect the bus and the device (wiring).
•
Up to 32 devices can be connected to the bus (point to point connection/spurs).
•
Connect a terminating resistor to the bus.
Error Handling - Hardware Errors
Information on physical communication errors, such as:
•
•
Baud rate error and
Parity error;
can be obtained from the event recorder.
Error Handling – Errors on Protocol Level
If, for example, an invalid memory address is inquired, error codes will be returned by the device that need to be
interpreted.
Modbus TCP
Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if the
device is equipped with an Ethernet Interface (RJ45).
Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection.
Part 1: Setting the TCP/IP Parameters
www.eaton.com
227
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Call up »Device parameter/TCP/IP« at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters:
•
TCP/IP address;
•
Subnetmask; and
•
Gateway.
Part 2: Configuration of the Devices
Call up »Device parameter/Modbus« and set the following communication parameters.
•
Setting a unit identifier is only necessary if a TCP network should be coupled to a RTU network.
•
If a different port than the default port 502 should be used, please proceed as follows:
•
Choose “Private” within the TCP-Port-Configuration.
•
Set the port number.
•
Set the maximum acceptable time out for “no communication”. If this time has expired without any
communication, the device concludes a failure has occurred within the master system.
•
Allow or disallow the blocking of SCADA commands.
Part 3: Hardware Connection
•
There is a RJ45 interface at the rear side of the device for the hardware connection to the control
system.
•
Establish the connection to the device by means of a proper Ethernet cable.
Direct Commands of the Modbus®
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Res Diagn Cr
All Modbus Diagnosis Counters will be
reset.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
/Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Modbus®
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Slave ID
Device address (Slave ID) within the bus
system. Each device address has to be
unique within a bus system.
1 - 247
1
[Device Para
/Modbus]
Only available if:Device Planning = RTU
228
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Unit ID
The Unit Identifier is used for routing. This
parameter is to be set, if a Modbus RTU
and a Modbus TCP network should be
coupled.
1 - 255
255
[Device Para
/Modbus]
Only available if:Device Planning = TCP
TCP Port
Config
TCP Port Configuration. This parameter is
to be set only if the default Modbus TCP
Port should not be used.
Default,
Default
Private
[Device Para
/Modbus]
Only available if:Device Planning = TCP
Port
Port number
502 - 65535
502
Only available if:Device Planning = TCP
And Only available if: TCP Port Config =
Private
t-timeout
Within this time the answer has to be
received by the Communication system,
otherwise the request will be disregarded.
In that case, the Communication system
detects a communication failure and the
Communication System has to send a new
request.
[Device Para
/Modbus]
0.01 – 10.00 s
1s
[Device Para
/Modbus]
Only available if:Device Planning = RTU
Baud rate
Baud rate
1200,
Only available if:Device Planning = RTU
2400,
19200
[Device Para
/Modbus]
4800,
9600,
19200,
38400
Physical
Settings
Digit 1: Number of bits. Digit 2: E=even
parity, O=odd parity, N=no parity. Digit 3:
Number of stop bits. More information on
the parity: It is possible that the last data bit
is followed by a parity bit which is used for
recognition of communication errors. The
parity bit ensures that with even parity
("EVEN") always an even number of bits
with valence "1" or with odd parity ("ODD")
an odd number of "1" valence bits are
transmitted. But it is also possible to
transmit no parity bits (here the setting is
"Parity = None"). More information on the
stop-bits: The end of a data byte is
terminated by the stop-bits.
8E1,
8O1,
8E1
[Device Para
/Modbus]
8N1,
8N2
Only available if:Device Planning = RTU
www.eaton.com
229
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
t-call
If there is no request message sent from
1 – 3600 s
Communication to the device after expiry of
this time, the device concludes a
communication failure within the
Communication system.
Comm CmdBlo Activating (allowing)/ Deactivating
(disallowing) the blocking of the
Communication Commands
Disable
Latching
AllowGap
Inactive,
Default
Menu Path
10 s
[Device Para
/Modbus]
Inactive
Active
[Device Para
/Modbus]
Disable Latching: If this parameter is active Inactive,
(true), none of the Modbus states will be
latched. That means that trip signals wont Active
be latched by Modbus.
Inactive
If this parameter is active (True), the User Inactive,
can request a set of modbus register
without getting an exception, because of
Active
invalid address in the requested array. The
invalid addresses have a special value
0xFAFA, but the User is responsible for
ignoring invalid addresses. Attention: This
special value can be valid, if address is
valid.
Inactive
[Device Para
/Modbus]
[Device Para
/Modbus]
Modbus® Module Signals (Output States)
Some signals (that are active for a short time only) have to be
acknowledged separately (e.g.: trip signals) by the communication system.
Name
Description
Transmission
Signal: Communication Active
Comm Cmd 1
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 2
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 3
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 4
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 5
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 6
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 7
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 8
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 9
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 10
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 11
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 12
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 13
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 14
Communication Command
230
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Comm Cmd 15
Communication Command
Comm Cmd 16
Communication Command
Modbus® Module Values
Value
Description
Default
Size
Menu Path
NoOfRequestsTotal
Total number of requests. Includes
requests for other slaves.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfRequestsForM Total Number of requests for this
e
slave.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfResponse
Total number of requests having
been responded.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfResponsTimeO Total number of requests with
0
verruns
exceeded response time. Physically
corrupted Frame.
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfOverrunErros
Total Number of Overrun Failures.
Physically corrupted Frame.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfParityErrors
Total number of parity errors.
Physically corrupted Frame.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfFrameErrors
Total Number of Frame Errors.
Physically corrupted Frame.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfBreaks
Number of detected communication
aborts
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
NoOfQueryInvalid
Total Number of Request errors.
Request could not be interpreted
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
www.eaton.com
231
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Default
NoOfInternalError
Total Number of Internal errors while 0
interpreting the request.
Size
Menu Path
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/Modbus]
IEC 61850
IEC61850
Introduction
To understand the functioning and mode of operation of a substation in an IEC 61850 automation environment, it
is useful to compare the commissioning steps with those of a conventional substation in a Modbus TCP
environment. In a conventional substation, the individual Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs) communicate in a
vertical direction with the higher level control center via Communication. The horizontal communication is
exclusively realized by wiring relay output contacts (RO) and digital inputs (DI) together.
In an IEC 61850 environment, communication between the IEDs takes place digitally (via Ethernet) by a service
called Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE). By means of this service, information about events
is submitted between each IED. Therefore each IED has to know about the functional capability of all other
connected IEDs.
Each IEC 61850 capable device includes a description of its own functionality and communications skills (IED
Capability Description, *.ICD). By means of a Substation Configuration Tool to describe the structure of the
substation, assignment of the devices to the primary technique, etc., virtual wiring of the IEDs between each
other and with other switch gear of the substation can be achieved. A description of the substation configuration
will be generated in the form of a *.SCD file. Finally, this file has to be submitted to each device. Now the IEDs
are able to communicate with each other, react to interlockings, and operate switch gear.
232
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Ethernet
IED1
DI
IED2
RO
DI
IED3
RO
DI
Ethernet
IED1
IED2
IED3
RO
Conventional hard wiring
GOOSE IEC61850 soft wiring
Commissioning steps for a conventional substation
with modbus TCP environment:
•
•
•
•
Comm
IEC61850
IEC61850
Master
Comm
ModbusTCP
Modbus-TCP
Master
Parameter setting of the IEDs;
Ethernet installation;
TCP/IP settings for the IEDs; and
Wiring according to wiring scheme.
Commissioning steps for a substation with IEC 61850
environment:
1. Parameter setting of the IEDs
Ethernet installation
TCP/IP settings for the IEDs
2. IEC 61850 configuration (software wiring)
a) Exporting an ICD file from each device
b) Configuration of the substation
(generating a SCD file)
c) Transmit SCD file to each device.
Generation/Export of a Device Specific ICD File
Each Eaton IEC 61850 capable device includes a description of its own functionality and communications skills
in the form of an IED Capability Description (*.ICD) file. This file can be exported as follows and be used for the
configuration of the substation.
•
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
A change of the devices parameters has an influence on the content
of the ICD file.
Connect the device with your PC/Notebook.
Start PowerPort E.
Click on »Receive data from Device« in the »Device« menu.
Click on »IEC 61850« in the »Device Para« menu.
Click on the ICD icon in the IEC 61850 window.
Select a drive and file name for the ICD file and click "save".
Repeat the steps 1 to 6 for all connected devices in this IEC 61850 environment.
Substation Configuration,
Generation of a Station Configuration Description (SCD) File
The substation configuration (i. e. connection of all logical nodes of protection and control devices) as well as
switch gear usually is done with a ”Substation Configuration Tool“. Therefore the ICD files of all connected IEDs
in the IEC 61850 environment have to be available. The result of the station wide “software wiring” can be
exported in the form of a Station Configuration Description (SCD) file.
www.eaton.com
233
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Suitable Substation Configuration Tools (SCT) are available by the following Companies:
H&S, Hard- & Software Technologie GmbH & Co. KG, Dortmund (Germany) (www.hstech.de).
Applied Systems Engineering Inc. (www.ase-systems.com)
Kalki Communication Technologies Limited (www.kalkitech.com)
•
•
•
Import of the *.SCD File into the Device
When the substation configuration is completed, the *.SCD file has to be transmitted to all connected devices.
This is has to be done as follows.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Connect the device with your PC/notebook.
Start PowerPort E.
Click on »Receive data from Device« in the »Device« menu.
Click on »IEC 61850« in the »Device Para« menu.
Switch the parameter »IEC 61850 Communication« to »OFF« and submit the changed parameter set
into the device.
Click on the SCD icon in the IEC 61850 window.
Select the folder where the *.SCD file is stored. Select the *.SCD file and click "Open".
A password is requested. Enter the same password, which you use for parameter setting of the device.
Following Step 5, again switch on the IEC Communication and submit the changed parameter set into
the device.
Repeat Steps 1 through 9 for all devices connected to this IEC 61850 environment.
If no error message occurs, the configuration has been completed successfully.
•
When changing the substation configuration, usually a new *.SCD
file has to be generated. This *.SCD file must be transmitted to all
devices by means of PowerPort E. If the file is not transmitted to all
devices, IEC 61850 malfunctions will be the result.
•
If the parameters of the devices are changed after the completion of
the substation configuration, changes in the corresponding *.ICD
file may result. This, in turn, may make an update of the *.SCD file
necessary.
IEC 61850 Virtual Outputs
In addition to the standardized logical node status information, up to 16 free configurable status information
items can be assigned to the 16 Virtual Outputs. This can be done in the [Device Para/IEC61850] menu.
Device Planning Parameters of the IEC 61850
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
234
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Direct Commands of the IEC 61850
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
ResetStatistic
Reset of all IEC61850 diagnostic counters
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
Global Protection Parameters of the IEC 61850
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Active,
Inactive
[Device Para
Inactive
VirtualOutput1
/IEC61850]
Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
VirtualOutput10 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
VirtualOutput11 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
VirtualOutput12 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
VirtualOutput2
VirtualOutput3
VirtualOutput4
VirtualOutput5
VirtualOutput6
VirtualOutput7
VirtualOutput8
VirtualOutput9
www.eaton.com
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
235
IM02602007E
Parameter
EDR-5000
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
VirtualOutput13 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
[Device Para
VirtualOutput14 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
VirtualOutput15 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
VirtualOutput16 Virtual Output. This signal can be assigned 1..n, Assignment List
or visualized via the SCD file to other
devices within the IEC61850 substation.
-.-
/IEC61850]
/IEC61850]
Description
Assignment Via
VirtualOutput1-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput3-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput4-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput5-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput6-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput7-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput8-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput9-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput10-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput11-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
236
www.eaton.com
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
Name
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
States of the Inputs of the IEC 61850
VirtualOutput2-I
[Device Para
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
VirtualOutput12-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput13-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput14-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput15-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
VirtualOutput16-I
Module input state: Binary state of the
Virtual Output (GGIO)
[Device Para
/IEC61850]
IEC 61850 Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
VirtualInput1
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput2
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput3
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput4
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput5
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput6
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput7
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput8
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput9
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput10
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput11
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput12
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput13
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput14
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput15
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
VirtualInput16
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC 61850 Module Values
Value
Description
Default
Size
Menu Path
NoOfGooseRxAll
Total number of received GOOSE
messages including messages for
other devices (subscribed and not
subscribed messages).
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
www.eaton.com
237
IM02602007E
Value
EDR-5000
Description
Default
NoOfGooseRxSubsc Total Number of subscribed GOOSE 0
ribed
messages including messages with
incorrect content.
Size
Menu Path
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfGooseRxCorre Total Number of subscribed and
ct
correctly received GOOSE
messages.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfGooseRxNew
Number of subscribed and correctly
received GOOSE messages with
new content.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfGooseTxAll
Total Number of GOOSE messages 0
that have been published by this
device.
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfGooseTxNew
Total Number of new GOOSE
0
messages (modified content) that
have been published by this device.
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfServerRequest Total number of MMS Server
sAll
requests including incorrect
requests.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfDataReadAll
Total Number of values read from
this device including incorrect
requests.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfDataReadCorre Total Number of correctly read
ct
values from this device.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfDataWrittenAll
Total Number of values written by
this device including incorrect ones.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
NoOfDataWrittenCor Total Number of correctly written
rect
values by this device.
0
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
238
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Default
NoOfDataChangeNo Number of detected changes within 0
tification
the data sets that are published with
GOOSE messages.
Size
Menu Path
0[Operation
9999999999
/Count and RevData
/IEC61850]
Values of the IEC 61850
Value
Description
GoosePublisherStat State of the GOOSE Publisher (on
e
or off)
GooseSubscriberSta State of the GOOSE Subscriber (on
te
or off)
MmsServerState
State of MMS Server (on or off)
Default
Size
Menu Path
Off
Off,
[Operation
On,
/Status display
Error
/IEC61850]
Off,
[Operation
On,
/Status display
Error
/IEC61850]
Off,
[Operation
On,
/Status display
Error
/IEC61850]
Off
Off
IRIG-B00X
IRIG-B
Requirement: A IRIG-B00X time code receiver is needed. IRIG-B004 and
higher will support/transmit the “year” information.
If you are using an IRIG time code that does not support the “year”
information (IRIG-B000, IRIG-B001, IRIG-B002, IRIG-B003), you have to set
the “year” manually within the device. In these cases the correct year
information is a precondition for a properly working IRIG-B.
Principle - General Use
This standard is the most used standard to synchronize the time of protection devices in medium voltage
applications.
www.eaton.com
239
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
GPS Satellite Signal (optional)
GPS Conncection (optional)
IRIG-B
Time Code Generator
Protective Relay
-
+
Twisted Pair Cable
To Other Devices
Based on the IRIG STANDARD 200-04, the device interface and software provides all time synchronization
formats IRIG-B00X (IRIG-B000 / B001 / B002 / B003 / B004 / B005 / B006 / B007) as described in the standard.
IRIG-B004 and higher will support/transmit the “year” information.
Time code B has a time frame of 1 second with an index count of 10 milliseconds and contains time-of-year and
year information in a binary code decimal (BCD) format, and seconds-of-day in straight binary seconds (SBS)
format.
Time accuracy of ±1ms is a requirement to synchronize the different protection devices.
The location of the IRIG-B interface depends to the device type. Please see the wiring diagram supplied with the
protective device.
Function
The following IRIG-B parameters can be set within the Device Parameters menu.
•
Set the IRIG-B type (choose B000 through B007).
•
Set the time synchronization via IRIG-B to Active or Inactive.
•
Set the time zone parameter (choose one of the 36 UTC Time Zones).
•
Activate or deactivate the “Daylight Savings Time” function.
Parameter for Daylight Savings Time (summer-winter time) has to be set
manually.
240
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Check the wiring (wiring error) if no IRIG signal can be detected.
A signal will be issued if no IRIG-B time code is received for longer than 60 s.
IRIG-B Control Commands
In addition to the date and time information, the IRIB-B code offers the option to transmit up to 18 control
commands that can be processed by the protective device. They have to be set and issued by the Time Code
Generator.
The protective devices offer up to 18 IRIG-B assignment options for those control commands in order to carry
out the assigned action. That means if the IRIG-B time code is fed with the corresponding state of those control
commands, than they can be used for further processing within the devices (e.g.: in order to start statistics,
switch on or off street lighting).
Device Planning Parameters of the IRIG-B00X
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Direct Commands of the IRIG-B00X
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Res IRIG-B Cr
Resetting of the Diagnosis Counters: IRIGB
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
/Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the IRIG-B00X
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Device Para
Active
IRIG-B00X
Determination of the Type: IRIG-B00X.
IRIG-B types differ in types of included
“Coded Expressions” (year, controlfunctions, straight-binary-seconds).
IRIB-000,
IRIB-001,
/IRIG-B]
IRIB-000
[Device Para
/IRIG-B]
IRIB-002,
IRIB-003,
IRIB-004,
IRIB-005,
IRIB-006,
IRIB-007
www.eaton.com
241
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Time Zones
Time Zones
UTC+14 Kiritimati,
UTC+0 London
UTC+13 Rawaki,
UTC+12.75 Chatham Island,
UTC+12 Wellington,
UTC+11.5 Kingston,
UTC+11 Port Vila,
UTC+10.5 Lord Howe Island,
UTC+10 Sydney,
UTC+9.5 Adelaide,
UTC+9 Tokyo,
UTC+8 Hong Kong,
UTC+7 Bangkok,
UTC+6.5 Rangoon,
UTC+6 Colombo,
UTC+5.75 Kathmandu,
UTC+5.5 New Delhi,
UTC+5 Islamabad,
UTC+4.5 Kabul,
UTC+4 Abu Dhabi,
UTC+3.5 Tehran,
UTC+3 Moscow,
UTC+2 Athens,
UTC+1 Berlin,
UTC+0 London,
UTC-1 Azores,
UTC-2 Fern. d. Noronha,
UTC-3 Buenos Aires,
UTC-3.5 St. John’s,
UTC-4 Santiago,
UTC-5 New York,
UTC-6 Chicago,
UTC-7 Salt Lake City,
UTC-8 Los Angeles,
UTC-9 Anchorage,
UTC-9.5 Taiohae,
UTC-10 Honolulu,
UTC-11 Midway Islands
[Device Para
Inactive,
[Device Para
Daylight Saving Daylight Saving Time
Time
Default
Inactive
Active
Signals of the IRIG-B00X (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
Inverted
Signal: IRIG-B inverted
Control Signal1
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal2
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal4
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal5
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal6
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
242
www.eaton.com
Menu Path
/IRIG-B]
/IRIG-B]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Control Signal7
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal8
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal9
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal10
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal11
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal12
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal13
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal14
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal15
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal16
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal17
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Control Signal18
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B00X Values
Value
Description
Default
Size
Menu Path
NoOfFramesOK
Total number valid Frames.
0
0 - 65535
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/IRIG-B]
NoOfFrameErrors
Total Number of Frame Errors.
Physically corrupted Frame.
0
0 - 65535
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/IRIG-B]
Edges
Edges
0
0 - 65535
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/IRIG-B]
www.eaton.com
243
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameters
Parameter setting and planning can be done:
•
Directly at the device; or
•
By way of the PowerPort-E software application.
Parameter Definitions
Device Parameters
Device Parameters are part of the Device Parameter tree. By modifying the Device Parameters, the User may
(depending on the type of device):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Set cutoff levels;
Configure digital inputs, Assign LEDs;
Configure Relay Outputs;
Assign acknowledgment signals;
Configure statistics;
Configure general Protocol Settings;
Adapt HMI settings;
Configure recorders (reports);
Set date and time;
Change passwords; and/or
Check the version (build) of the device.
System Parameters
System Parameters are part of the Device Parameter tree. System Parameters comprise the essential, basic
settings of your switchboard such as rated frequency and transformer ratios.
Protection Parameters
Protection Parameters are part of the Device Parameter tree. This Protection Parameters include the
following.
•
Global Protection Parameters are part of the Protection Parameters: All settings and assignments
that are done within the Global Parameter tree are valid independent of the Setting Groups. They have
to be set only once. In addition, Global Protection Parameters include the parameters used for Breaker
Management.
•
The Parameter Setting Switch is part of the Protection Parameters: The User may either directly
switch to a certain parameter setting group or determine the conditions for switching to another
parameter setting group.
•
Setting Group Parameters are part of the Protection Parameters: By means of the Setting Group
Parameters, the User may individually adapt the protective device to the current conditions or grid
conditions. The Setting Group Parameters may be individually set in each Settings group.
244
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Device Planning Parameters
Device Planning Parameters are part of the Device Parameter tree.
•
Improving the Usability (Clarity): All protection modules that are currently unused can be hidden
(switched to invisible) through Device Planning. In the Device Planning menu, the User can adapt the
scope of functionality of the protective device exactly as needed. The User can improve the usability by
hiding all modules that are not currently needed.
•
Adapting the device to the application: For those modules that are needed, determine how they
should be set up (e.g.: directional, non-directional, <, >...).
Direct Commands
Direct Commands are part of the Device Parameter tree but NOT part of the parameter file. They will be
executed directly (e.g.: Resetting of a Counter).
State of the Module Inputs
Module Inputs are part of the Device Parameter tree. The State of the Module Input is context-dependent.
By means of the Module Inputs, information can be passed to and acted upon by the modules. The User can
assign signals to Module Inputs. The state of the signals that are assigned to an input can be viewed from the
Status Display. Module Inputs can be identified by an ”-I” at the end of the name.
Signals
Signals are part of the Device Parameter tree. The state of the signal is context-dependent.
•
Signals represent the state of the installation/equipment (e.g.: position indicators of the breaker).
•
Signals are assessments of the state of the grid and the equipment (System OK, Transformer failure
detected, ...).
•
Signals represent decisions that are taken by the device (e.g.: Trip Command) based on the User
parameter settings.
www.eaton.com
245
246
www.eaton.com
PSS via Comm
PSS via Inp fct
PS4
PS3
PS2
PS1
PSet-Switch.Mode
ExBlo Fc
Active/
Inactive
Active/
Inactive
Active/
Inactive
Active/
Inactive
Active/
Inactive
Active/
Inactive
Active/
Inactive
Active/
Inactive
Parameter Set 1
Parameter Set 2
Parameter Set 3
Parameter Set 4
&
AND
Function
1..n, Assignment List
AdaptSet 1
1..n, Assignment List
AdaptSet 2
1..n, Assignment List
AdaptSet 3
1..n, Assignment List
AdaptSet 4
Rvs Blo Fc
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
&
AND
Active/Inactive
&
AND
Protection Para/Global Prot Para / I-Prot / I[1]...[n] / AdaptSet...
Active/
Inactive
Active/
Inactive
Active/
Inactive
Active/
Inactive
Blo TripCmd
&
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
ExBlo TripCmd Fc
AdaptSet 4
AdaptSet 3
AdaptSet 2
AdaptSet 1
Standard
AND
PSet-Switch
[0…*In]
[0…*In]
[0…*In]
[0…*In]
Pickup
Standard
[1...n]
[1...n]
[1...n]
[1...n]
Curve Shape
Standard
[0…s]
[0…s]
[0…s]
[0…s]
t
Standard
[0.05...n]
[0.05...n]
[0.05...n]
[0.05...n]
t-multiplier
Standard
[1...n]
[1...n]
[1...n]
[1...n]
Reset Mode
Standard
[0…s]
[0…s]
[0…s]
[0…s]
t-reset
Standard
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
IH2 Blo
Standard
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
Nondir Trip at V=0
Standard
[0…*In]
[1...n]
[0…s]
[0.05...n]
[1...n]
[0…s]
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
[0…*In]
[1...n]
[0…s]
[0.05...n]
[1...n]
[0…s]
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
[0…*In]
[1...n]
[0…s]
[0.05...n]
[1...n]
[0…s]
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
[0…*In]
[1...n]
[0…s]
[0.05...n]
[1...n]
[0…s]
Active/Inactive
Active/Inactive
Protection Para
et
tS
ap
Ad
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Adaptive Parameter Sets
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Adaptive Parameter Sets are part of the Device Parameter tree.
By means of Adaptive Parameter Sets, the User can temporarily modify single parameters within the
Parameter Setting groups.
Adaptive Parameters drop-out automatically if the acknowledged signal that
has activated them has dropped-out. Please take into account that
Adaptive Set 1 is dominant to Adaptive Set 2. Adaptive Set 2 is dominant to
Adaptive Set 3. Adaptive Set 3 is dominant to Adaptive Set 4.
In order to increase the usability (clarity), Adaptive Parameter Sets become
visible if a corresponding activation signal has been assigned (PowerPort-E
V. 1.2 and higher).
Example: In order to use Adaptive Parameters within Protective Element
I [1], please proceed as follows.
•
Assign within the Global Parameter tree, within Protective Element
I[1], an activation signal for Adaptive Parameter Set 1.
•
Adaptive Parameter Set 1 becomes now visible within the Protection
Parameter Sets for element I[1].
By means of additional activation signals, further Adaptive Parameter Sets
can be used.
The functionality of the IED (relay) can be enhanced / adapted, by means of Adaptive Parameters in order to
meet the requirements of modified states of the grid or the power supply system respectively, to manage
unpredictable events.
Moreover, the adaptive parameter can also be used to realize various special protective functions or to expand
the existing function modules in a simple way, without costly redesign the existing hardware or software platform.
The Adaptive Parameter feature allows, besides a standard parameter set, one of the four parameter sets
labeled from 1 to 4, to be used, for example, in a time overcurrent element under the control of the configurable
Set Control Logic. The dynamic switch-over of the adaptive parameter set is only active for a particular element
when its adaptive set control logic is configured and only as long as the activation signal is true.
For some protection elements, such as time overcurrent and instantaneous overcurrent ( 50P, 51P, 50G, 51G,
…), besides the “default” setting there exists another four “alternative” settings for pickup value, curve type, time
dial, and reset mode set values that can dynamically be switched-over by means of the configurable adaptive
setting control logic in the single set parameter.
If the Adaptive Parameter feature is not used, the adaptive set control logic will not be selected (assigned). The
protective elements work, in this case, just like a normal protection using the “Default” settings. If one of the
Adaptive Set Control logic is assigned to a logic function, the protective element will be “switched-over” to the
corresponding adaptive settings if the assigned logic function is asserted and will drop-out to the “Default” setting
if the assigned signal that has activated the Adaptive Set has dropped-out.
Adaptive Parameters via HMI
The use of Adaptive Parameters via the HMI (panel) differs a bit to the use
via PowerPort-E.
www.eaton.com
247
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Adaptive Parameters can be also used via the HMI (instead of using the recommended PowerPort-E). The
principle method of using them via the HMI is as follows.
1. Assign an activation signal for an Adaptive Parameter Set within the Global Parameters »Global Para«
for a protective element (available for current functions only).
2. Call up this protective element within a Setting Group.
3. Go to the parameter that should be modified adaptively and call it up for editing (arrow-right-key).
4. Choose the corresponding Adaptive Set.
5. Set the modified parameter for the selected Adaptive Set.
Application Example
The tripping time »t« for the 50[1] element of »Parameter Set 1« should be desensitized (reduced) in case
Digital Input 2 becomes active.
1. Call up the menu [Protection Para/Global Protection Para/I-Prot/50[1]/Adaptive Para1] and assign Digital
Input 2 as activation signal.
2. Call up the 50[1] element within the menu [Protection Para/Set[1]/I-Port/50[1].
3. Go to the tripping time parameter »t« by means of the softkey (arrow-down) and call up the submenu by
means of the softkey (arrow-right).
4. Call up the corresponding parameter set (Adaptive Set 1 in this example).
5. Set the reduced tripping time for »Adaptive Set 1«.
Check and confirm that the functionality is in compliance with your protection plan via a commissioning test.
Application Example
During a “Switch-OnTo-Fault” condition, the User is usually requested to make the embedded protective function
tripping of the faulted line faster, instantaneous, or sometimes non-directional.
Such a “Switch-OnTo-Fault” application can easily be realized using the Adaptive Parameter features
mentioned previously. The standard time overcurrent protection element (e.g.: 51P) should trip instantaneously
in case of SOTF condition,. If the SOTF logic function »SOTF ENABLED« is detecting a manual breaker close
condition, the relay switches to Adaptive Set 1 if the signal »SOTF.ENABLED« is assigned to Adaptive Set 1. The
corresponding Adaptive Set 1 will become active and than »t = 0« sec.
248
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
The screen shot above shows the adaptive setting configurations following applications based on only one
simple overcurrent protection element:
1.Standard Set: Default settings;
2.Adaptive Set 1: SOTF application (Switch-OnTo-Fault);
3.Adaptive Set 2: CLPU application (Cold Load Pickup);
Application Examples
•
The output signal of the Switch OnTo Fault module can be used to activate an Adaptive Parameter Set
that sensitizes the overcurrent protection.
•
The output signal of the Cold Load Pickup module can be used to activate an Adaptive Parameter Set
that desensitizes the overcurrent protection.
•
By means of Adaptive Parameter Sets, an Adaptive Auto Reclosure can be realized. After a reclosure
attempt, the tripping thresholds or tripping curves of the overcurrent protection can be adapted.
•
Depending on undervoltage, the overcurrent protection can be modified (voltage controlled). This
applies to devices that offer voltage protection only.
•
The ground overcurrent protection can be modified by the residual voltage. This applies to devices that
offer voltage protection only.
www.eaton.com
249
IM02602007E
•
EDR-5000
Dynamic and automatic adaption of the ground current settings in order to adapt the settings to different
loads (single-phase load diversity).
Adaptive Parameter Sets are only available for devices with current
protection modules.
Adaptive Parameter Set Activation Signals
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
27M[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
27M[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
59M[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
59M[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
47[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry
47[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry
SOTF.enabled
Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to
modify Overcurrent Protection Settings.
CLPU.enabled
Signal: Cold Load enabled
AR.Running
Signal: Auto Reclosing Running
AR.Pre Shot
Pre Shot Control
AR.Shot 1
Shot Control
AR.Shot 2
Shot Control
AR.Shot 3
Shot Control
AR.Shot 4
Shot Control
AR.Shot 5
Shot Control
AR.Shot 6
Shot Control
DI-8P X1.DI 1
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 2
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 3
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 4
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 5
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 6
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 7
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 8
Signal: Digital Input
Logic.LE1.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE1.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE1.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE1.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE2.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE2.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
250
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE2.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE2.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE3.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE3.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE3.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE3.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE4.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE4.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE4.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE4.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE5.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE5.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE5.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE5.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE6.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE6.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE6.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE6.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE7.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE7.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE7.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE7.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE8.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE8.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE8.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE8.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE9.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE9.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE9.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE9.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE10.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE10.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE10.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE10.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE11.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE11.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE11.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE11.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE12.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
www.eaton.com
251
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE12.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE12.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE12.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE13.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE13.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE13.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE13.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE14.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE14.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE14.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE14.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE15.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE15.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE15.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE15.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE16.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE16.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE16.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE16.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE17.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE17.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE17.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE17.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE18.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE18.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE18.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE18.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE19.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE19.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE19.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE19.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE20.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE20.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE20.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE20.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE21.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE21.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE21.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE21.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
252
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE22.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE22.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE22.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE22.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE23.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE23.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE23.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE23.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE24.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE24.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE24.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE24.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE25.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE25.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE25.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE25.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE26.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE26.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE26.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE26.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE27.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE27.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE27.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE27.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE28.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE28.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE28.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE28.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE29.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE29.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE29.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE29.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE30.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE30.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE30.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE30.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE31.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE31.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE31.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
www.eaton.com
253
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE31.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE32.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE32.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE32.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE32.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE33.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE33.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE33.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE33.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE34.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE34.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE34.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE34.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE35.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE35.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE35.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE35.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE36.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE36.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE36.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE36.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE37.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE37.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE37.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE37.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE38.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE38.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE38.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE38.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE39.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE39.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE39.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE39.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE40.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE40.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE40.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE40.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE41.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE41.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
254
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE41.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE41.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE42.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE42.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE42.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE42.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE43.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE43.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE43.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE43.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE44.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE44.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE44.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE44.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE45.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE45.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE45.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE45.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE46.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE46.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE46.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE46.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE47.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE47.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE47.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE47.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE48.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE48.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE48.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE48.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE49.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE49.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE49.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE49.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE50.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE50.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE50.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE50.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE51.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
www.eaton.com
255
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE51.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE51.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE51.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE52.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE52.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE52.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE52.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE53.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE53.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE53.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE53.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE54.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE54.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE54.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE54.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE55.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE55.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE55.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE55.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE56.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE56.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE56.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE56.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE57.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE57.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE57.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE57.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE58.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE58.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE58.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE58.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE59.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE59.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE59.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE59.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE60.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE60.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE60.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE60.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
256
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE61.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE61.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE61.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE61.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE62.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE62.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE62.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE62.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE63.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE63.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE63.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE63.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE64.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE64.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE64.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE64.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE65.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE65.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE65.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE65.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE66.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE66.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE66.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE66.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE67.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE67.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE67.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE67.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE68.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE68.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE68.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE68.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE69.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE69.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE69.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE69.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE70.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE70.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE70.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
www.eaton.com
257
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE70.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE71.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE71.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE71.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE71.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE72.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE72.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE72.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE72.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE73.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE73.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE73.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE73.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE74.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE74.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE74.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE74.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE75.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE75.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE75.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE75.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE76.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE76.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE76.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE76.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE77.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE77.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE77.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE77.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE78.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE78.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE78.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE78.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE79.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE79.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE79.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE79.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE80.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE80.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
258
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE80.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE80.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Sys.Maint Mode Active
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Active
Sys.Maint Mode Inactive
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Inactive
Operational Modes (Access Authorization)
Operational Mode – »Display Only«
•
The protection is activated.
•
All data, measuring values, records, and counters/meters can be viewed.
Operation Mode – »Parameter Setting and Planning«
In this mode, the User is able to:
•
Edit and set parameters;
•
Change device planning details; and
•
Configure and reset operational data (event recorder/fault recorder/power meter/switching cycles).
If the device was not active within the parameter setting mode for a longer
time (can be set between 20 – 3600 seconds), the device will automatically
reset to »Display Only« mode (Please refer to the Appendix Module Panel).
As long as the User is within the parameter setting mode, the device cannot
acknowledge.
In order to change into the operation mode (»Parameter Setting«) please proceed as follows.
1.Mark the parameter to be changed in the device display.
2.Press the »Wrench« soft key to temporarily change into the Parameter Setting mode.
3.Enter the parameter password.
4.Change the parameter.
5.Change any additional parameters that are needed.
As long as the User is within the parameter setting mode, a wrench icon
will be shown in the upper right corner of the display.
6.
For saving the altered parameter(s):
www.eaton.com
259
IM02602007E
•
•
EDR-5000
Press the »OK« key; and
Confirm by pressing the »Yes« soft key.
7.Then the device changes into the »Display Only« mode.
Password
Password Entry at the Panel
Passwords can be entered by way of the soft keys
1
2
3
4
Example: For password (3244) press successively:
•
•
•
•
Soft key 3;
Soft key 2;
Soft key 4; and
Soft key 4.
Password Changes
Passwords can be changed at the device in the »Device Para/Password« menu or by means of the PowerPort-E
software.
A password must be a User-defined combination of the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4.
All other characters and keys WILL NOT be accepted.
The password for the operation mode »Parameter setting and planning« enables the User to transfer
parameters from the PowerPort-E software into the device.
When the User wants to change a password, the existing one has to be entered first. The new password (up to
8 digits) is then to be confirmed twice. Please proceed as follows.
•
•
•
In order to change the password, please enter the old password followed by pressing the »OK« key.
Next, enter the new password and press the »OK« key.
Finally, confirm your new password and press the »OK« key.
Password Forgotten
All passwords can be reset to the fail-safe adjustment (1234) by pressing the »Ack/Rst« key during cold booting.
For this procedure, confirm the inquiry »Reset Passwords?« with »Yes«.
260
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Changing of Parameters - Example
•
Move to the parameter to be change by using the soft keys.
•
Press the »Wrench« soft key.
•
Enter the password for parameter setting.
•
Edit/change the parameter.
Now the User can:
•
Save the change made and have it adopted by the system; or
•
Change additional parameters and save all the altered parameters and have them adopted by the
system.
To Save Parameter Changes Immediately
•
Press the »OK« key to save the changed parameters directly and to have them adopted by the device.
Confirm the parameter changes by pressing the »Yes« soft key or dismiss by pressing »No« soft key.
To Change Additional Parameters and Save Afterwards
•
Move to other parameters and change them.
A star symbol in front of the changed parameters indicates that the
modifications have only temporarily been saved. They are not yet stored
and adopted by the device.
In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex
parameter changes are involved, on every superior/higher-ranking menu
level, the intended change of the parameter is indicated by the star symbol
(star trace). This makes it possible to control or follow from the main menu
level at any time where parameter changes have been made and have not
been saved.
In addition to the star trace to the temporarily saved parameter changes, a
general parameter changing symbol is faded in at the left corner of the
display. It is possible from each point of the menu tree to see that there are
parameter changes still not adopted by the device.
Press the »OK« key to initiate the final storage of all parameter changes. Confirm the parameter changes by
pressing the »Yes« soft key or dismiss by pressing the »No« soft key.
www.eaton.com
261
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Plausibility Check
In order to prevent obvious incorrect settings, the device constantly
monitors all temporarily saved parameter changes. If the device detects a
conflict, it is indicated by a question mark in front of the respective
parameter.
In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex
parameter changes are involved, a question mark appears above the
temporarily saved parameters (on every superior /higher - ranking
menu level). This makes it possible to control or follow, from the
main menu level, where conflicts are intended to be saved. This can
be done at any time.
In addition to the question mark trace to the temporarily saved conflict
parameter changes, a general conflict symbol/question mark is faded-in at
the left corner of the display, and so it is possible to see from each point of
the menu tree that conflicts have been detected by the device.
A star/parameter change indication is always overwritten by the question
mark/conflict symbol.
If a device detects a conflict, it rejects saving and adopting of the
parameters.
Example: If the residual voltage has been configured as »calculated«
(»EVTcon = calculated«), then the device recognizes a conflict in case
voltage measuring is configured as »Phase to Phase« (»VTcon = Phase to
Phase«). The calculation of the residual voltage is physically not possible
by means of phase-to-phase voltages.
Changing of Parameters When Using the PowerPort-E - Example
Example: Changing of a protective parameter (to alter the characteristic for the overcurrent protection function
I[1] in Parameter Set 1).
•
If PowerPort-E is not in operation, please start the application.
•
If the device data have not been loaded, select »Data To Be Received From The Device« in the
»Device« menu.
•
Double-click the »Protection Para Icon« in the navigation tree.
•
Double-click the »Protection Para Set Icon« in the navigation tree.
•
Double-click the »Set 1 Icon« in the navigation tree.
•
Double-click the »protection stage I[1]« in the navigation tree.
•
In the working window, a tabulated overview appears showing the parameters assigned to this protective
function.
•
In this table, double-click the value/parameter to be changed (in this example: »Char«).
•
Another window (pop-up) is opened where the User can select the required characteristic.
262
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
•
IM02602007E
Close this window by clicking the »OK« key.
A star symbol in front of the changed parameters indicates that the
alterations have only temporarily been saved. They are not yet stored and
adopted by the software/device.
In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex
parameter changes are involved, on every superior/higher menu level, the
intended change of the parameter is indicated by the star symbol (star
trace). This makes it possible to control or follow, from the main menu
level, where parameter changes have been made and have not been saved.
This can be done at any time.
Plausibility Check
In order to prevent obvious incorrect settings, the application constantly
monitors all temporarily saved parameter changes. If the device detects a
conflict, it is indicated by a question mark in front of the respective
parameter.
In order to make things easier to follow, especially where complex
parameter changes are involved, on every superior/higher menu level
above of the temporarily saved parameters, a conflict is indicated by a
question mark (plausibility trace). This makes it possible to control or
follow, from the main menu level, where conflicts exist. This can be done
at any time.
So it is possible to see from each point of the menu tree that conflicts have
been detected by the application.
A star/parameter change indication is always overwritten by the question
mark/conflict symbol.
If the software detects a conflict, it rejects the saving and adopting of the
parameters.
Example: If the residual voltage has been configured as »Calculated«
(»EVTcon = calculated«), then the application recognizes a conflict in case
voltage measuring is configured as »Phase to Phase« (»VTcon = Phase to
Phase«). The calculation of the residual voltage is physically not possible
by means of phase-to-phase voltages.
•
Additional parameters can be changed if required.
•
In order to transfer changed parameters into the device, please select »Transfer all parameters into the
device« in the »Device« menu.
•
Confirm the safety inquiry »Shall The Parameters Be Overwritten?«.
•
Enter the password for setting parameters in the pop-up window.
•
Confirm the inquiry »Shall The Data Be Saved Locally?« with »Yes« (recommended). Select a suitable
storing location on your hard disk.
www.eaton.com
263
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
•
Confirm the selected storage location by clicking »Save«.
•
The changed parameter data is now saved in the data file chosen. Thereafter, the changed data is
transferred to the device and adopted.
Once the User has entered the parameter setting password, PowerPort-E
will not ask the User again for the password for at least 10 minutes. This
time interval will start again each time parameters are transmitted into the
device. If, for more than 10 minutes, no parameters are transmitted into the
device, PowerPort-E will again ask for the password when the User tries to
transmit parameters into the device.
Protection Parameters
Please note that by deactivating, for example protective functions, the User
also changes the functionality of the device.
The manufacturer does not accept liability for any personal or material
damage as a result of incorrect planning.
Contact your Eaton Customer Service representative for more information.
The protection parameters include the following protection parameter trees.
•
Global Protection Parameters »Global Prot Para«: Here the User can find all protection parameters that
are universally valid. That means they are valid independent of the protection parameter sets.
•
Setting Group Parameters »Set1..4«: The protection parameters that the User set within a parameter set
are only valid if the parameter set selected is switched to active.
Setting Groups
Setting Group Switch
Within the »Protection Para/P-Set Switch« menu, the User has the following possibilities:
•
•
•
To manually set one of the four setting groups active;
To assign a signal to each setting group that sets this group to active; and
Scada switches the setting groups.
Setting Group Switch
Manual Selection
Switching Options
264
Via Input Function
(e.g.: Digital Input)
Switch over, if another setting Switch over not until the request
group is chosen manually within
is clear.
the »Protection Para/P-Set That means if there is more or
Switch« menu.
less than one request signal
active, no switch over will be
executed.
www.eaton.com
Via Scada
Switch over if there is a
clear Scada request.
Otherwise no switch over
will be executed.
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
The description of the parameters can be found within the “System
Parameters” section.
Setting Group Switch Via PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
If the device data have not been loaded, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the »Device« menu.
•
Double click the »Protection Para« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click the »P-Set Switch« within the protection parameters.
•
To configure the Setting Group Switch respectively, manually choose an active set.
The description of the parameters can be found within the “System
Parameters” section.
Copying Setting Groups (Parameter Sets) Via PowerPort-E
Setting groups can only be copied if there are no conflicts (no red question
marks).
For applications using multiple settings groups, one can use the configuration file from the first group to create
the second group. With the help of PowerPort-E, the User can simply copy an existing setting group to another
(not yet configured) one. The User only needs to change those parameters where the two setting groups are
different.
To efficiently establish a second parameter set where only few parameters are different, proceed as follows.
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
Open a (off-line) parameter file of a device or load data of a connected device.
•
Carefully save the relevant device parameters by selecting [File\Save as].
•
Select »Copy Parameter Sets« out of the “Edit” menu.
•
Then define both source and destination of the parameter sets to be copied (source = copy from;
destination: copy to).
•
Click on »OK« to start the copy procedure.
•
The copied parameter set is now cached (not yet saved!).
•
Then, modify the copied parameter set(s), if applicable.
•
Assign a new file name to the revised device parameter file and save it on your hard disk (backup copy).
www.eaton.com
265
IM02602007E
•
EDR-5000
To transfer the modified parameters back to the device, click on the »Device« menu item and select
»Transfer All Parameters into the Device«.
Comparing Setting Groups Via PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
Click on menu item »Edit« and select »Compare Parameter Sets«.
•
Select the two parameter sets from the two drop down menus that are to be compared with each other.
•
Press the »Compare« button.
•
The values that are different from the set parameters will be listed in tabular form.
Comparing Parameter Files Via PowerPort-E
With the help of PowerPort-E, the User can simply compare/differentiate the currently open parameter/device file
against a file on the hard disk. The precondition is that the versions and type of devices match. To compare the
parameter files, please proceed as follows.
•
Click on »Compare with a Parameter File« within the »Device« menu.
•
Click on the Folder icon in order to select a file on your hard disk.
•
The differences will be shown in tabular form.
Converting Parameter Files Via PowerPort-E
Parameter files of the same type can be up- or down-graded (converted). During this process, the new
parameter file will keep all active settings from the source parameter file and, at the same time, remove all
inactive settings. As many parameters as possible will be converted.
•
Parameters that are newly added will be set to default.
•
Parameters that are not included in the target file version will be deleted.
•
In order to convert a parameter file please proceed as follows.
•
If PowerPort-E is not in operation, please start the application.
•
Open a parameter file or load the parameters from a device that should be converted.
•
Make a backup of this file in a fail-safe place.
•
Choose »Save as« from the »File« menu.
•
Enter a new file name (in order to prevent overwriting the original file).
266
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
•
Choose the new file type from drop down menu »File Type«.
•
Confirm the security check by clicking on »Yes« only if the User is sure that the file conversion should be
executed.
•
In tabular form the modifications will be shown as follows.
Added parameter:
Deleted parameter:
www.eaton.com
267
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Parameters
Sys
Date and Time
In the »Device parameters/Date/Time« menu, the User can set the date and time.
Synchronize Date and Time Via PowerPort-E
•
If PowerPort-E is not running, please start the application.
•
If device data have not been downloaded recently, click »Receive Data From The Device« in the
»Device« menu.
•
Double click the »Device parameters« icon in the navigation tree.
•
Double click the »Date/time« icon within the operational data.
•
From the working window, the User can now synchronize the date and time of the device with the PC
(i.e.: that means that the device accepts the date and time from the PC).
Version
Within the»Device parameters/Version« menu, the User can obtain information on the software and hardware
versions.
Version Via PowerPort-E
Within the »File/Properties« menu, the User can obtain detailed information on the currently opened file (e.g.:
software and hardware version).
In order to be able to transmit a parameter file (e.g.: created off line) into the
device, the following parameters must agree:
268
•
Type Code (written on the top of the device/type label); and
•
Version of the device model (can be found in the
»Device Parameters\Version« menu).
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
TCP/IP Settings
Warning: Mixing up IP Addresses
(In case there is more than one protective device within the TCP/IP network or
establishing an unintentional wrong connection to a protective device based on a
wrong entered IP address.
Transferring parameters into the wrong protective device might lead to death,
personal injury, or damage of electrical equipment.
In order to prevent faulty connections, the User MUST document and maintain a list
with the IP addresses of any switchboard/protective devices.
The User MUST double check the IP addresses of the connection that is to be
established. That means, the User MUST first read out the IP address at the HMI of
the device (within menu [Device para/TCP IP]) then compare the IP address with the
list. If the addresses are identical, establish the connection. If they are not, DO NOT
establish the connection.
Within »Device Para / TCP/IP« menu, the TCP/IP settings have to be set.
The first-time setting of the TCP/IP Parameters can be done at the panel (HMI) only.
Establishing a connection via TCP/IP to the device is only possible if the
device is equipped with an Ethernet interface (RJ45).
Contact your IT administrator in order to establish the network connection.
Set the TCP/IP Parameters:
Call up »Device parameter/TCP/IP« at the HMI (panel) and set the following parameters:
•
TCP/IP address;
•
Subnetmask; and
•
Gateway.
Direct Commands of the System Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Ack LED
All acknowledgeable LEDs will be
acknowledged.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
Ack RO
All acknowledgeable Relay Outputs will be
acknowledged.
Inactive,
Active
www.eaton.com
/Reset]
Inactive
[Operation
/Reset]
269
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Ack Comm
Communication will be acknowledged.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
Ack RO LED
Comm TCmd
Reset the Relay Outputs, LEDs,
Communication, and the Trip Command.
Inactive,
/Reset]
Inactive
Active
Reboot
Rebooting the device.
No,
/Reset]
No
Yes
MaintMode
Manually
Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Switch
Mode: Manual Activation of the Arc Flash
Reduction Mode
Maint Mode inactive,
Only available if: Maint Mode = Activation
Manually
Activation via DI,
[Operation
[Service
/General]
Inactive
Activation via Comm,
[Service
/MaintMode
Manually]
Inactive,
Active
CAUTION: Manually rebooting the device will release the Supervision
Contact.
Global Protection Parameters of the System
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
PSet-Switch
Switching Parameter Set
PS1,
PSS via Inp fct
[Protection Para
PS2,
/PSet-Switch]
PS3,
PS4,
PSS via Inp fct,
PSS via Comm
PS1: Activated This Setting Group will be the active one if: 1..n, PSS
by
The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set
to "Switch via Input" and the other three
input functions are inactive at the same
time. In case there is more than one input
function active, no Parameter Setting Group
Switch will be executed. In case all input
functions are inactive, the device will keep
working with the Setting Group that was
activated lastly.
Only available if: PSet-Switch = PSS via
Inp fct
270
www.eaton.com
Sys.Maint Mode [Protection Para
Inactive
/PSet-Switch]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
PS2: Activated This Setting Group will be the active one if: 1..n, PSS
by
The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set
to "Switch via Input" and the other three
input functions are inactive at the same
time. In case there is more than one input
function active, no Parameter Setting Group
Switch will be executed. In case all input
functions are inactive, the device will keep
working with the Setting Group that was
activated lastly.
Default
Menu Path
Sys.Maint Mode [Protection Para
Active
/PSet-Switch]
Only available if: PSet-Switch = PSS via
Inp fct
PS3: Activated This Setting Group will be the active one if: 1..n, PSS
by
The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set
to "Switch via Input" and the other three
input functions are inactive at the same
time. In case there is more than one input
function active, no Parameter Setting Group
Switch will be executed. In case all input
functions are inactive, the device will keep
working with the Setting Group that was
activated lastly.
-.-
[Protection Para
/PSet-Switch]
Only available if: PSet-Switch = PSS via
Inp fct
PS4: Activated This Setting Group will be the active one if: 1..n, PSS
by
The Parameter Setting Group Switch is set
to "Switch via Input" and the other three
input functions are inactive at the same
time. In case there is more than one input
function active, no Parameter Setting Group
Switch will be executed. In case all input
functions are inactive, the device will keep
working with the Setting Group that was
activated lastly.
-.-
[Protection Para
/PSet-Switch]
Only available if: PSet-Switch = PSS via
Inp fct
Ack LED
Ack RO
Ack Comm
All acknowledgeable LEDs will be
acknowledged if the state of the assigned
signal becomes true.
1..n, Assignment List
All acknowledgeable Relay Outputs will be
acknowledged if the state of the assigned
signal becomes true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Device Para
/Ex Acknowledge]
-.-
[Device Para
/Ex Acknowledge]
Communication will be acknowledged if the 1..n, Assignment List
state of the assigned signal becomes true.
-.-
[Device Para
/Ex Acknowledge]
Scaling
Display of the measured values as primary, Per unit values,
secondary, or per unit values.
Primary values,
Primary values
[Operation
/General Settings]
Secondary values
www.eaton.com
271
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Maint Mode
Activation Mode of the Arc Flash Reduction. Inactive,
Switching into another mode is only
possible when no Activation Signal is active Activation Manually,
(pending).
Activation via Comm,
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Service
/Maint Mode]
Activation via DI
Maint Mode
Activated by
Activation Signal for the Arc Flash
Reduction Maintenance Switch.
-.-,
DI-8P X1.DI 7
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
Only available if: Maint Mode Activated by
= Activation via DI
/Maint Mode]
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
System Module Input States
Name
Description
Ack LED-I
Module Input State: LEDs Acknowledgment [Device Para
by Digital Input.
/Ex Acknowledge]
Ack RO-I
Module Input State: Acknowledgment of the [Device Para
Relay Outputs.
/Ex Acknowledge]
Ack Comm-I
Module Input State: Acknowledge
Communication via Digital Input. The
replica that Communication has received
from the device is to be reset.
[Device Para
State of the module input, respectively of
the signal, that should activate this
Parameter Setting Group.
[Protection Para
State of the module input, respectively of
the signal, that should activate this
Parameter Setting Group.
[Protection Para
State of the module input, respectively of
the signal, that should activate this
Parameter Setting Group.
[Protection Para
State of the module input, respectively of
the signal, that should activate this
Parameter Setting Group.
[Protection Para
PS1-I
PS2-I
PS3-I
PS4-I
272
Assignment Via
www.eaton.com
[Service
/Ex Acknowledge]
/PSet-Switch]
/PSet-Switch]
/PSet-Switch]
/PSet-Switch]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
Maint Mode-I
Module Input State: Arc Flash Reduction
Maintenance Switch
[Service
/Maint Mode]
System Module Signals
Name
Description
Reboot
Signal: Rebooting the device: 1=Restart initiated by power supply;
2=Restart initiated by the User; 3=Set on defaults (Super Reset);
4=Restart by the debugger; 5=Restart because of configuration
change; 6=General failure; 7=Restart initiated by System Abort
(host side); 8=Restart initiated by watchdog timeout (host side);
9=Restart initiated by System Abort (dsp side); 10=Restart initiated
by watchdog timeout (dsp side); 11=Power supply failure (short
term interruption) or power supply voltage to low; 12=illegal
memory access.
Act Set
Signal: Active Parameter Set
PS 1
Signal: Parameter Set 1
PS 2
Signal: Parameter Set 2
PS 3
Signal: Parameter Set 3
PS 4
Signal: Parameter Set 4
PSS manual
Signal: Manual switch over of a Parameter Set
PSS via Comm
Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Communication
PSS via Inp fct
Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Input Function
Min. 1 param changed
Signal: At least one parameter has been changed
Maint Mode Active
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Active
Maint Mode Inactive
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Inactive
MaintMode Manually
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Manual Mode
Maint Mode Comm
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Comm Mode
Maint Mode DI
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Digital Input Mode
Param to be saved
Number of parameters to be saved. 0 means that all parameter
changes are overtaken.
Ack LED
Signal: LEDs Acknowledgment
Ack RO
Signal: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs
Ack Counter
Signal: Reset of all Counters
Ack Comm
Signal: Acknowledge Communication
Ack TripCmd
Signal: Reset Trip Command
Ack LED-HMI
Signal: LEDs Acknowledgment :HMI
Ack RO-HMI
Signal: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs :HMI
Ack Counter-HMI
Signal: Reset of all Counters :HMI
Ack Comm-HMI
Signal: Acknowledge Communication :HMI
Ack TripCmd-HMI
Signal: Reset Trip Command :HMI
Ack LED-Comm
Signal: LEDs Acknowledgment :Communication
www.eaton.com
273
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Ack RO-Comm
Signal: Acknowledgment of the Relay Outputs :Communication
Ack Counter-Comm
Signal: Reset of all Counters :Communication
Ack Comm-Comm
Signal: Acknowledge Communication :Communication
Ack TripCmd-Comm
Signal: Reset Trip Command :Communication
Res OperationsCr
Signal: Res OperationsCr
Res AlarmCr
Signal: Res AlarmCr
Res TripCr
Signal: Res TripCr
Res TotalCr
Signal: Res TotalCr
Special Values of the System Module
Value
Description
Menu Path
Build
Build
[Device Para
/Version]
Version
Version
[Device Para
/Version]
Operating hours Cr
Operating hours counter of the protective
device
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/Sys]
274
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
System Parameters
System Para
Within the system parameters, the User can set all parameters that are relevant for the primary side and the
mains operational method like frequency, primary and secondary values, and the star point treatment.
General System Parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Phase
Sequence
Phase Sequence direction
ABC,
ABC
[System Para
ACB
f
Nominal frequency
50Hz,
/General Settings]
60Hz
60Hz
[System Para
/General Settings]
Voltage Depending System Parameters
Parameter
Description
Main VT pri
Main VT sec
Main VT con
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Primary Voltage of Main VTs. The phase to 60 – 500000 V
phase voltage is to be entered even if the
load is in delta connection.
12000 V
[System Para
Secondary Voltage of Main VTs. The phase 60.00 – 600.00 V
to phase voltage is to be entered even if the
load is in delta connection.
120 V
Main VTs connection
Wye
Wye,
/General Settings]
/General Settings]
Phase-to-Phase, Open-Delta
Aux VT pri
Primary voltage of Aux VTs
60 – 500000 V
[System Para
[System Para
/General Settings]
12000 V
[System Para
/General Settings]
Aux VT sec
Secondary voltage of Aux VTs
35.00 – 600.00 V
120 V
[System Para
/General Settings]
V Sync
The fourth measuring input of the voltage
measuring card measures the voltage that
is to be synchronized.
A,
B,
A
[System Para
/General Settings]
C,
AB,
BC,
CA
www.eaton.com
275
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Phase MTA
IR Dir Cntrl
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Maximum Torque Angle: Angle between
0 - 360°
phase current and reference voltage in case
of a short circuit. This angle is needed to
determine the fault direction in case of short
circuits.
30°
[System Para
IOptions for direction detection
IR 3V0
IR 3V0,
/Direction]
IR IPol,
[System Para
/Direction]
IR Dual,
IR Neg
IX Dir Cntrl
Options for direction detection
IX 3V0,
IX 3V0
IX Neg,
[System Para
/Direction]
IX Dual
3V0 Source
Ground MTA
Earth overcurrent protection elements take Measured,
into account this parameter for direction
decisions. The User has to ensure, that this Calculated
parameter is set to "Measured" only if the
ground current is fed to the fourth
measuring input of the current measuring
card.
Calculated
Ground MTA
110°
0 - 360°
[System Para
/Direction]
Only available if: Star point treatment =
Solidly (Effectively) or Low-Resistance
Grounded
[System Para
/Direction]
Current Depending System Parameters
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
CT con
Current transformer connection
3-wire,
3-wire
[System Para
4th CT IN,
/General Settings]
4th CT IG
CT pri
Nominal current of the primary side of the
current transformers.
1 – 50000 A
500 A
[System Para
/General Settings]
CT sec
Nominal current of the secondary side of
the current transformers.
1 A,
5A
276
www.eaton.com
5A
[System Para
/General Settings]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
CT dir
XCT pri
XCT sec
XCT dir
Protection functions with directional feature 0°,
can only work properly if the connection of
the current transformers is free of wiring
180°
errors. If all current transformers are
connected to the device with an incorrect
polarity, the wiring error can be
compensated by this parameter. This
parameter turns the current vectors by 180
degrees.
0°
This parameter defines the primary nominal 1 – 50000 A
current of the connected ground current
transformer. If the ground current is
measured via the Residual connection, the
primary value of the phase current
transformer must be entered here.
50 A
This parameter defines the secondary
1 A,
nominal current of the connected ground
current transformer. If the ground current is 5 A
done via the Residual connection, the
primary value of the phase current
transformer must be entered here.
5A
Ground fault protection with directional
0°,
feature depends also on the correct wiring
of the ground current transformer. An
180°
incorrect polarity/wiring can be corrected by
means of the settings "0°" or "180°". The
operator has the possibility of turning the
current vector by "180°" (change of sign)
without modification of the wiring. This
means, that – in terms of figures - the
determined current indicator was turned by
"180°" by the device.
0°
www.eaton.com
[System Para
/General Settings]
[System Para
/General Settings]
[System Para
/General Settings]
[System Para
/General Settings]
277
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Blocking
The device provides a function for temporary blocking of the complete protection functionality or of single
protections.
Make absolutely sure that no illogical or even life-threatening blockings are
allocated.
Make sure not to carelessly deactivate protection functions that have to be
available according to the protection concept.
Permanent Blocking
Switching “On” or “Off” the Complete Protection Functionality
In the »Protection« module, the complete protection of the device can be switched “On” or “Off”. Set the
Function parameter to »Active« or »Inactive« in the »Prot« module.
Protection is activated only if in the »Prot« module the parameter Function
is = »Active« (i.e.: with »Function« = »Inactive«, no protection function are
operating). If »Function« = »Inactive«, then the device cannot protect any
components.
Switching Modules “On” or “Off”
Each of the modules can be switched “On” or “Off” (permanently). This is achieved when the »Function«
parameter is set to »Active« or »Inactive« in the respective module.
Activating or Deactivating the Tripping Command of a Protection Permanently
In each of the protections, the tripping command to the breaker can be permanently blocked. For this purpose,
the »TripCmd Blo« parameter has to be set to »Active«.
Temporary Blocking
To Block the Complete Protection of the Device Temporarily by a Signal
In the »Prot« module, the complete protection of the device can be blocked temporarily by a signal. On the
condition that a module-external blocking is permitted (»ExBlo Fc=active«). In addition to this, a related blocking
signal from the »Assignment list« must have been assigned. For the time the allocated blocking signal is active,
the module is blocked.
If the »Prot« module is blocked, the complete protection function does not
work. As long as the blocking signal is active, the device cannot protect
any components.
To Block a Complete Protection Module Temporarily by an Active Assignment
•
278
In order to establish a temporary blockage of a protection module, the parameter »ExBlo Fc« of the
module has to be set to »Active«. This gives the permission: »This module can be blocked«.
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
•
IM02602007E
Within the general protection parameters, a signal has to be additionally chosen from the »Assignment
list«. The blocking only becomes active when the assigned signal is active.
To Block the Tripping Command of a Protection Element Temporarily by an Active Assignment
The tripping command of any of the protection modules can be blocked from an external signal. In this case,
external does not only mean from outside the device, but also from outside the module. Not only real external
signals are permitted to be used as blocking signals (for example: the state of a digital input), but the User can
also choose any other signal from the »Assignment list«.
•
In order to establish a temporary blockage of a protection element, the parameter »ExBlo TripCmd Fc«
of the module has to be set to »Active«. This gives the permission: »The tripping command of this
element can be blocked«.
•
Within the general protection parameters, an additional signal has to be chosen and assigned to the
»ExBlo« parameter from the »Assignment list«. If the selected signal is activated, the temporary
blockage becomes effective.
www.eaton.com
279
280
www.eaton.com
TripCmd Fc
1..n, Assignment List
Name.ExBlo TripCmd
Active
Inactive
Name.ExBlo
Active
Inactive
Name.Blo TripCmd
Name = All Modules That Are Blockable
Trip Blockings
AND
OR
3
Name.ExBlo TripCmd-I
Name.ExBlo TripCmd
Name.Blo TripCmd
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
To Activate or Deactivate the Tripping Command of a Protection Module
1
www.eaton.com
1..n, Assignment List
Name.ExBlo 2
1..n, Assignment List
Name.ExBlo 1
Active
Inactive
Name.ExBlo Fc
Active
Inactive
Name.Function
(The General Protection module is not deactivated or blocked)
Prot. Active
Please Refer to Diagram: Prot
Name =All Modules That Are Blockable
Blockings
OR
AND
AND
2
Name.ExBlo2-I
Name.ExBlo1-I
Name.ExBlo
Name.Active
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Activate, Deactivate Respectively to Block Temporary Protection
Functions
For the Sync-check module the signal Sync.Active will not be deactivated
by an external blocking signal.
281
282
Blockings **
1
www.eaton.com
1..n, Assignment List
Name.Rvs Blo
Active
Inactive
Name.Rvs Blo Fc
1..n, Assignment List
Name.ExBlo 2
1..n, Assignment List
Name.ExBlo 1
Active
Inactive
Name.ExBlo Fc
Active
Inactive
Name.Function
(The General Protection module is not deactivated or blocked)
Please Refer to Diagram: Prot
Prot. Active
Name = I[1]...[n], IG[1]...[n]
AND
OR
AND
AND
4
Name.Rvs Blo-I
Name.Rvs Blo
Name.ExBlo2-I
Name.ExBlo1-I
Name.ExBlo
Name.Active
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Current protective functions cannot only be blocked permanently (»Function = Inactive«) or temporarily by any
blocking signal from the »Assignment list«, but also by »Reverse Interlocking«.
All other protection functions can be activated, deactivated, or blocked in the same manner.
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Protection (Prot) Module
Prot
The »Protection« module serves as the outer frame for all other protection modules (i.e.: they are all enclosed by
the »Protection« Module).
In the case where the »Protection« module is blocked, the complete
protective function of the device is disabled.
Module Prot Blocked - Protection Inactive:
If the master »Protection« module is allowed to be temporarily blocked and the allocated blocking signals are
active, then all protection functions will be disabled. In such a case, the protective function is »Inactive«.
Protection Active:
If the master »Protection« module was activated and a blockade for this module was not activated respectively,
the assigned blocking signals are inactive at that moment, then the »Protection« is »Active«.
How to Block All Protective and Supervisory Functions
In order to block all protective and supervisory functions, call up the menu [Protection/Para/Global Prot
Para/Prot]:
•
Set the parameter »ExBlo Fc = active«;
•
Choose an assignment for »ExBlo1«; and
•
Optionally choose an assignment for »ExBlo2«.
If the signal becomes true, then all protective and supervisory functions will be blocked as long as one of these
signals are true.
www.eaton.com
283
284
www.eaton.com
OR
AND
AND
**=Availability of third blocking input depends on device and module
Selection List
Prot.ExBlo 3**
1..n, Assignment List
Prot.ExBlo 2
1..n, Assignment List
Prot.ExBlo 1
Active
Inactive
Prot.ExBlo Fc
Measured Values: OK
At the moment, no parameter is being changed (except parameter set parameters).
Prot - Active
AND
1
Prot.ExBlo3-I
Prot.ExBlo2-I
Prot.ExBlo1-I
Prot.ExBlo
Prot.Active
Prot.Available
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Each protection element generates its own pickup and trip signals, which are automatically passed onto the
»Prot« module where the phase based and general (collective) pickup and trip signals are generated. The
»Prot« module serves as a top level and a common place to group all pickups and trips from each individual
protection element.
For instance, »PROT.PICKUP PHASE A« is the phase A pickup signal OR-ed from all protection elements; »PROT.TRIP
PHASE A« is the phase A trip signal OR-ed from all protection elements; »PROT.PICKUP« is the collective pickup
signal OR-ed from all protection elements; Prot.Trip is the collective Trip signal OR-ed from all protection
elements, and etc. The Tripping commands of the protection elements have to be fed to the »Bkr Manager«
module for further trip request processing.
The tripping commands are executed by the »Bkr Manager« module.
Tripping commands have to be assigned to a breaker. The Breaker Manager will
issue the trip command to the breaker.
If a protection element is activated and respectively decides to trip, two pickup signals will be created.
1.
The module or the protection element issues an pickup/alarm (e.g.: »50P[1].PICKUP or »50P[1].TRIP«).
2. The master »Prot« module collects/summarizes the signals and issues a pickup/alarm or a trip signal
»PROT.PICKUP« »PROT.TRIP«.
www.eaton.com
285
286
www.eaton.com
15
15
15
Name[n].Trip
Name.Trip
Name.Trip
...
OR
Name = Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip.
Prot.Trip
Prot.Trip
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
www.eaton.com
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup
14
14
14
...
OR
Name = Each pickup of a module (except from supervision modules but including BF) will lead to a general pickup (collective pickup).
Prot.Pickup
Prot.Pickup
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
287
288
www.eaton.com
*=Depending on the type of device
23
19d
19c
19b
19a
22
18b
18a
21
17b
17a
20
16b
16a
59[n].TripCmd*
51R[1]...[n].Trip*
50R[1]...[n].Trip*
51X[1]...[n].Trip*
50X[1]...[n].Trip*
V[n].Trip Phase C*
51P[1]...[n].Trip Phase C*
50P[1]...[n].Trip Phase C*
V[n].Trip Phase B*
51P[1]...[n].Trip Phase B*
50P[1]...[n].Trip Phase B*
V[n].Trip Phase A*
51P[1]...[n].Trip Phase A*
50P[1]...[n].Trip Phase A*
OR
OR
OR
OR
Each phase selective trip of a trip authorized module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the device type) will lead to a phase
selective general trip.
Prot.Trip
Prot.Trip IX or IR
Prot.Trip Phase C
Prot.Trip Phase B
Prot.Trip Phase A
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
www.eaton.com
31
27d
27c
27b
27a
30
26b
26a
29
25b
25a
28
24b
24a
59[n].Pickup*
51R[1]...[n].Pickup*
50R[1]...[n].Pickup*
51X[1]...[n].Pickup*
50X[1]...[n].Pickup*
V[n].Pickup Phase C*
51P[1]...[n].Pickup IC*
50P[1]...[n].Pickup IC*
V[n].Pickup Phase B*
51P[1]...[n].Pickup IB*
50P[1]...[n].Pickup IB*
V[n].Pickup Phase A*
51P[1]...[n].Pickup IA*
50P[1]...[n].Pickup IA*
OR
OR
OR
OR
Each phase selective pickup of a module (I, IG, V, VX depending on the
device type) will lead to a phase selective general pickup (collective
pickup).
Prot.Pickup
Prot.Pickup IX or IR
Prot.Pickup Phase C
Prot.Pickup Phase B
Prot.Pickup Phase A
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
*=Depending on the type of device
289
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Direct Commands of the Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Res Fault a
Mains No
Resetting of fault number and number of
grid faults.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
/Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo Fc
Activate (allow) the external blocking of the Inactive,
global protection functionality of the device.
Active
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Prot]
ExBlo1
ExBlo2
If external blocking of this module is
activated (allowed), the global protection
functionality of the device will be blocked if
the state of the assigned signal becomes
true.
1..n, Assignment List
If external blocking of this module is
activated (allowed), the global protection
functionality of the device will be blocked if
the state of the assigned signal becomes
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
/Global Prot Para
/Prot]
-.-
/Prot]
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Prot]
Module Input State: External Blocking2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Prot]
Protection Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Available
Signal: Protection is available.
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Pickup Phase A
Signal: General Pickup Phase A
290
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
Protection Module Input States
ExBlo2-I
[Protection Para
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Pickup Phase B
Signal: General Pickup Phase B
Pickup Phase C
Signal: General Pickup Phase C
Pickup IX or IR
Signal: General Pickup - Ground Fault
Pickup
Signal: General Pickup
Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
Trip IX or IR
Signal: General Trip Ground Fault
Trip
Signal: General Trip
Res Fault a Mains No
Signal: Resetting of fault number and number of grid faults.
I dir fwd
Signal: Phase current failure forward direction
I dir rev
Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction
I dir n poss
Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage
IR dir fwd
Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) forward
IR dir rev
Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) reverse direction
IR dir n poss
Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) direction detection not possible
IX dir fwd
Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) forward
IX dir rev
Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) reverse direction
IX dir n poss
Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) direction detection not possible
Protection Module Values
Value
Description
Menu Path
FaultNo
Disturbance No.
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/Prot]
No of grid faults
Number of grid faults: A grid fault, e.g. a
[Operation
short circuit, might cause several faults with
trip and autoreclosing, each fault being
/Count and RevData
identified by an increased fault number. In
this case, the grid fault number remains the /Prot]
same.
www.eaton.com
291
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Switchgear/Breaker - Manager
Breaker
WARNING: Misconfiguration of the Breaker could result in death or serious
injury.
Breaker Configuration
For the configuration of the breaker, great attention has to be payed to the following steps:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Wiring;
Switching Authority;
POS Indicators wiring;
General Settings;
Trip Manager;
Interlockings;
Ex OPEN/CLOSE (Option); and
Synchronous Switching.
It is recommended to use the status display in order to verify and analyze each of the steps.
Wiring
The User has to establish the wiring of the Position Indicators of the Breaker to the Digital Inputs of the
protective device (52a or 52b or (both recommended)).
The User has to wire a Relay Output for the Trip command.
In case the protective device is used for control purposes, two additional relay outputs have to be wired for the
control commands (issue the OPEN and CLOSE commands). That means the Relay Output for the Breaker
Open and the Relay Output for the Breaker Close command.
Switching Authority
For the Switching Authority [Control\General Settings], the following general settings are possible:
None:
Local:
Remote:
Local and Remote:
No switching authority (switching not allowed);
Switching only via push buttons at the panel;
Switching only via SCADA, digital inputs, or internal signals; and
Switching via push buttons, SCADA, digital inputs, or internal signals.
POS Indicators wiring
In the menu [Control/Breaker/Pos Indicators wiring], the signals for the switchgear status indication (position and
ready) are to be assigned.
Position Indication with two contacts - 52a and 52b (recommended)
To identify the current position of the switchgear, the switchgear contact outputs have to be used (called 52a/52b
292
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
at a breaker). The Position Indication can work on either one or both of these inputs. Nevertheless, it is
recommended that both are used.
The protective device monitors and evaluates continuously the Status of the Input Signals CinBkr52a-I and
CinBkr52b-I. These signals are validated based on the supervision timers »t-Move CLOSE« and »t-Move
OPEN« validation functions. As a result, the breaker position will be detected by the following signals:
•
•
•
•
•
Pos CLOSE;
Pos OPEN;
Pos Indeterm;
Pos Disturb; and
Pos State (0, 1, 2 or 3).
CLOSE initiated (Supervision)
When a CLOSE command is initiated, the »t-Move CLOSE« timer will be started. While the timer is running, the
»POS INDETERM« State will become true. If the command is executed and the breaker has reached the end
position before the timer has elapsed, »POS CLOSE« will become true. Otherwise, if the timer has elapsed »POS
DISTURB« will become true.
OPEN initiated (Supervision)
When an OPEN command is initiated, the »t-Move OPEN« timer will be started. While the timer is running, the
»POS INDETERM« State will become true. If the command is executed and the breaker has reached the end
position before the timer has elapsed, »POS OPEN« will become true. Otherwise, if the timer has elapsed »POS
DISTURB« will become true.
The following table shows how breaker positions are validated based on 52a and 52b.
Validated Breaker Positions
States of the Digital Inputs
CinBkr52a-I
CinBkr52b-I
Pos CLOSE
Pos OPEN
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
Pos Indeterm
Pos Disturb
Breaker
State
1
0
(While a Moving
timer is running)
(While a Moving
timer is running)
0
Intermediate
1
0
(While a Moving
timer is running)
(While a Moving
timer is running)
0
Intermediate
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
OFF
1
0
1
0
0
0
2
ON
0
0
0
0
0
1
(Moving timer
elapsed)
(Moving timer
elapsed)
3
Disturbed
1
1
0
0
0
1
(Moving timer
elapsed)
(Moving timer
elapsed)
3
Disturbed
If for any reason only one breaker contact (52a or 52b) is wired, the Single Contact Indication can be used.
Single Contact Indication
The moving time supervision works only in one direction. If the 52a signal is connected to the device, only the
“CLOSE command” can be supervised and if the 52b signal is connected to the device, only the “OPEN
command” can be supervised.
www.eaton.com
293
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
If the single contact indication is used, the »SI SINGLECONTACTIND« will become true.
NOTICE: In case of single contact indication, the protective device can monitor either the
52a or the 52b contact only. In case of the 52a, the device will monitor / supervise the
CLOSE command. In case of the 52b, the device will monitor / supervise the OPEN
command.
Single Contact Indication – 52a only
If only the 52a signal is used for the Status Indication of an “CLOSE command”, the switch command will also
start the moving time, the position indication indicates an INTERMEDIATE position during this time interval.
When the switchgear reaches the end position indicated by the Pos CLOSE signal, the moving time will be
terminated. If the moving time elapsed before the switchgear has reached the end position, the switching
operation was not successful and the Position Indication will change to Pos DISTURB.
An OPEN command also starts the moving time. Because the device does not receive an open signal by the
breaker, it assumes that the breaker is in open position after the moving time has elapsed.
The following table shows how breaker positions are validated based on 52a only.
Validated Breaker Positions
States of the Digital Input
CinBkr52a-I
CinBkr52b-I
Pos CLOSE
Pos OPEN
Pos Indeterm
0
Not wired
0
0
1
(While t-Move
Pos Disturb
Breaker
State
0
0
Intermediate
CLOSE is running)
(While t-Move
CLOSE is running)
0
Not wired
0
1
0
0
1
OFF
1
Not wired
1
0
0
0
2
ON
1
Not wired
0
0
0
1
(After t-Move
CLOSE is elapsed)
(After t-Move
CLOSE is elapsed)
3
Disturbed
Single Contact Indication – 52b only
If only the 52b signal is used for the monitoring of the “OPEN command”, the switch command will start the
moving timer. The Position Indication will indicate an INTERMEDIATE position. If the moving time elapsed
before the switchgear has reached the OPEN position, the switching operation was not successful and the
Position Indication will change to Pos DISTURB.
A CLOSE command also starts the moving time. Because the device does not receive a close signal by the
breaker, it assumes that the breaker is in close position after the moving time has elapsed.
The following table shows how breaker positions are validated based on 52b only.
294
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Validated Breaker Positions
States of the Digital Input
CinBkr52a-I
CinBkr52b-I
Pos CLOSE
Pos OPEN
Not wired
0
0
0
Pos Indeterm
Pos Disturb
Breaker
State
0
Intermediate
1
0
(While t-Move
OPEN is running)
(While t-Move
OPEN is running)
Not wired
0
0
1
0
0
1
OFF
Not wired
1
1
0
0
0
2
ON
Not wired
1
0
0
0
1
(After t-Move OPEN
is elapsed)
(After t-Move OPEN
is elapsed)
3
Disturbed
General Settings
In the menu [Control/Breaker/General Settings], the moving times for opening and closing of the breaker can be
set.
Trip Manager
The command for tripping will be triggered by each of the assigned protection modules. The tripping commands
of all protection modules are combined by an “OR” logic.
In addition to that, the User can set the minimum hold time of the tripping command within this module and
define whether the tripping command is latched or not.
www.eaton.com
295
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Breaker OPEN Command
Signal Breaker OPEN
Breaker CLOSE Command
Signal Breaker Ready
Protection Trip Command
Trigger [x]
B re a k e r
Signal Breaker CLOSE
Position Indication:
OPEN, CLOSE,
Indeterminated, Disturbed
Trigger [x]
Trigger [x]
HMI
Trip Command XX[x]
Trip Command 27[x]
Trip Command 59[x]
Trip Command XX[x]
296
I P r o te c tio n M o d u le
Trip Command 51P[x]
SCADA
Autoreclosure CLOSE
V P r o te c tio n M o d u le
Trip Command 50P[x]
www.eaton.com
Name.TripCmd
Name.TripCmd
15
15
Name.TripCmd
15
www.eaton.com
Inactive
Active
Bkr.Latched
Bkr.Res TripCmdCr
Acknowledge-Comm
Acknowledge-1..n, Assignment List
Acknowledge -HMI
Name.TripCmd
15
.
.
.
.
Name.TripCmd
15
OR
AND
OR
R1
S
Q
Q
Name =Each trip of an active, trip authorized protection module will lead to a general trip.
Bkr.Trip Bkr
OR
t
1
Bkr.t-TripCmd
OR
R
+
Counter
11
TripCmd Cr
Bkr.Trip Bkr
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
297
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Interlockings
www.eaton.com
Bkr OPEN Cmd
Bkr CLOSE Cmd
Switch command request via
Digital Input:
(Manual Switch Command)
Bkr OPEN Cmd
Bkr CLOSE Cmd
Communication issues the
following commands:
(Manual Switch Command)
Bkr OPEN Cmd
Bkr CLOSE Cmd
HMI issues the following
commands:
(Manual Switch Command)
Auto reclosure issues the
following commands:
(Automatic Switch Command)
Bkr CLOSE Cmd
Interlockings
Release by synchronizing unit
15
15
15
Protection issues Trip
Command (e.g. 50P)
Trip command
assigned and
configured within the
Trip manager
298
Breaker.OPEN Cmd
42
AND
AND
Breaker.CLOSE Cmd
Breaker.Prot CLOSE
41
Breaker.TripCmd
There are three interlocking inputs for each switching direction (OPEN/CLOSE) available. Switching into the
corresponding switching direction can be inhibited via these inputs. Please note: The Protection Trip commands
and the reclosure command of the auto reclosure module will be issued without interlocking. In cases when the
breaker must not be opened, the protection trip command has to be inhibited by a separate blocking signal.
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Ex OPEN/CLOSE
If the breaker should be opened or closed by an external signal, the User can assign one signal that will trigger
the CLOSE and one signal that will trigger the OPEN command (e.g.: digital inputs or output signals of the
Logic).
An applied CLOSE command will be overwritten by an upcoming OPEN command. An applied OPEN command
will not be overwritten by an upcoming CLOSE command, that means, the OPEN command is dominantly.
Synchronous Switching
If a signal is assigned to the »Synchronism« input, the closing of the switchgear will be performed only when this
signal gets active during the maximum allowed waiting time »t-MaxSyncSuperv«.
If no signal is assigned to the »Synchronism« input, the synchronism release is permanent.
Breaker OPEN Command
Signal Breaker OPEN
Breaker CLOSE Command
Signal Breaker Ready
Trigger [x]
Breaker
Signal Breaker CLOSE
Trigger [x]
Trip Command
CLOSE Request
Position Indication:
OPEN, CLOSE,
Indeterminated, Disturbed
Synchronism
HMI
SCADA
Ready to CLOSE
SyncCheck
Autoreclosure CLOSE
Breaker CLOSE
Initiative
www.eaton.com
299
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Direct Commands of the Switchgear/Breaker
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Res Bwear
Slow Breaker
Resetting the slow breaker alarm
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
Ack TripCmd
Acknowledge Trip Command
Inactive,
/Reset]
Inactive
Active
[Operation
/Reset]
Global Protection Parameters of the Switchgear/Breaker
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
CinBkr-52a
The breaker is in CLOSE-position if the
state of the assigned signal is true (52a).
-.-,
DI-8P X1.DI 5
[Control
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
/Breaker
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
/Pos Indicators
wiring]
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
CinBkr-52b
The breaker is in OPEN-position if the state -.-,
of the assigned signal is true (52b).
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
DI-8P X1.DI 6
[Control
/Breaker
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
/Pos Indicators
wiring]
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
Ready
300
Breaker is ready for operation if the state of 1..n, DI-LogicList
the assigned signal is true. This digital
input can be used by some protective
elements (if they are available within the
device) like Auto Reclosure (AR), e.g.: as a
trigger signal.
www.eaton.com
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Pos Indicators
wiring]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Interl CLOSE1
Interlocking of the CLOSE command
1..n, Assignment List
WiredInputs.Bkr. [Control
Trouble-I
/Breaker
/Interlockings]
Interl CLOSE2
Interlocking of the CLOSE command
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Interlockings]
Interl CLOSE3
Interlocking of the CLOSE command
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Interlockings]
Interl OPEN1
Interlocking of the OPEN command
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Interlockings]
Interl OPEN2
Interlocking of the OPEN command
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Interlockings]
Interl OPEN3
Interlocking of the OPEN command
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Interlockings]
SC CLOSE
Switching CLOSE Command, e.g.: the
state of the Logic or the state of the digital
input
1..n, DI-LogicList
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Ex OPEN/CLOSE
Cmd]
SC OPEN
Switching OPEN Command, e.g.: the state 1..n, DI-LogicList
of the Logic or the state of the digital input
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Ex OPEN/CLOSE
Cmd]
t-TripCmd
Minimum hold time of the OPEN-command 0 – 300.00 s
(Breaker, load break switch)
0.2 s
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Latched
Defines whether the Relay Output will be
Latched when it picks up.
Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
www.eaton.com
301
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Ack TripCmd
Ack TripCmd
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger1
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
50P[1].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger2
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
50P[2].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger3
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
50P[3].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger4
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
51P[1].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger5
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
51P[2].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger6
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
51P[3].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger7
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
50X[1].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger8
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
50X[2].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger9
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
51X[1].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
302
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Trigger10
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
51X[2].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger11
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
50R[1].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger12
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
50R[2].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger13
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
51R[1].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger14
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
51R[2].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger15
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
27M[1].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger16
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
27M[2].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger17
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
59M[1].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger18
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
59M[2].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger19
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
27A[1].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
www.eaton.com
303
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Trigger20
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
27A[2].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger21
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
59A[1].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger22
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
59A[2].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger23
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
59N[1].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger24
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
59N[2].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger25
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
46[1].TripCmd
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger26
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
46[2].TripCmd
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger27
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
47[1].TripCmd
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger28
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
47[2].TripCmd
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger29
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
81[1].TripCmd
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
304
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Trigger30
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
81[3].TripCmd
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger31
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
32[1].TripCmd
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger32
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
32[2].TripCmd
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger33
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
32V[1].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger34
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
32V[2].TripCmd [Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger35
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
PF-55D[1].TripC [Control
md
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger36
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
PF-55D[2].TripC [Control
md
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger37
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
PF-55A[1].TripC [Control
md
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger38
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
PF-55A[2].TripC [Control
md
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger39
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
81[5].TripCmd
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
www.eaton.com
305
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Trigger40
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger41
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger42
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger43
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger44
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger45
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger46
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger47
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger48
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Trigger49
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
306
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Trigger50
Open Command to the breaker if the state
of the assigned signal becomes true.
1..n, Trip Cmds
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Synchronism
Synchronism
1..n, In-SyncList
-.-
[Control
/Breaker
/Synchronous
Switching]
tSynchron-Run timer: Max. time allowed for 0 – 3000.00 s
MaxSyncSuper synchronizing process after a close initiate.
v
Only used for GENERATOR2SYSTEM
working mode.
0.2 s
[Control
/Breaker
/Synchronous
Switching]
t-Move CLOSE Time to move to the CLOSE Position.
0.01 – 100.00 s
0.1 s
[Control
/Breaker
/General Settings]
t-Move OPEN
Time to move to the OPEN Position.
0.01 – 100.00 s
0.1 s
[Control
/Breaker
/General Settings]
Synchronism release signals
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
Breaker.CLOSE request
Signal: Synchronous CLOSE request
DI-8P X1.DI 1
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 2
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 3
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 4
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 5
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 6
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 7
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 8
Signal: Digital Input
Logic.LE1.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE1.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE1.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE1.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE2.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
www.eaton.com
307
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE2.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE2.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE2.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE3.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE3.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE3.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE3.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE4.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE4.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE4.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE4.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE5.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE5.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE5.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE5.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE6.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE6.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE6.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE6.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE7.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE7.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE7.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE7.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE8.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE8.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE8.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE8.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE9.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE9.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE9.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE9.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE10.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE10.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE10.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE10.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE11.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE11.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE11.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE11.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
308
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE12.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE12.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE12.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE12.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE13.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE13.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE13.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE13.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE14.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE14.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE14.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE14.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE15.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE15.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE15.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE15.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE16.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE16.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE16.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE16.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE17.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE17.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE17.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE17.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE18.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE18.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE18.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE18.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE19.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE19.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE19.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE19.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE20.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE20.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE20.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE20.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE21.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE21.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE21.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
www.eaton.com
309
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE21.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE22.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE22.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE22.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE22.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE23.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE23.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE23.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE23.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE24.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE24.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE24.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE24.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE25.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE25.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE25.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE25.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE26.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE26.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE26.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE26.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE27.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE27.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE27.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE27.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE28.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE28.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE28.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE28.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE29.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE29.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE29.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE29.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE30.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE30.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE30.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE30.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE31.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE31.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
310
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE31.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE31.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE32.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE32.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE32.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE32.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE33.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE33.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE33.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE33.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE34.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE34.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE34.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE34.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE35.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE35.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE35.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE35.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE36.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE36.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE36.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE36.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE37.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE37.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE37.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE37.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE38.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE38.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE38.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE38.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE39.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE39.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE39.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE39.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE40.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE40.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE40.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE40.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE41.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
www.eaton.com
311
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE41.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE41.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE41.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE42.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE42.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE42.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE42.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE43.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE43.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE43.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE43.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE44.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE44.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE44.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE44.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE45.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE45.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE45.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE45.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE46.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE46.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE46.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE46.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE47.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE47.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE47.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE47.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE48.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE48.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE48.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE48.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE49.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE49.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE49.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE49.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE50.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE50.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE50.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE50.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
312
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE51.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE51.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE51.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE51.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE52.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE52.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE52.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE52.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE53.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE53.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE53.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE53.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE54.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE54.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE54.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE54.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE55.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE55.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE55.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE55.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE56.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE56.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE56.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE56.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE57.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE57.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE57.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE57.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE58.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE58.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE58.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE58.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE59.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE59.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE59.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE59.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE60.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE60.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE60.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
www.eaton.com
313
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE60.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE61.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE61.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE61.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE61.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE62.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE62.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE62.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE62.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE63.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE63.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE63.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE63.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE64.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE64.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE64.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE64.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE65.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE65.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE65.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE65.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE66.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE66.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE66.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE66.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE67.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE67.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE67.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE67.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE68.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE68.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE68.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE68.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE69.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE69.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE69.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE69.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE70.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE70.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
314
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE70.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE70.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE71.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE71.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE71.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE71.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE72.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE72.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE72.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE72.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE73.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE73.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE73.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE73.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE74.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE74.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE74.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE74.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE75.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE75.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE75.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE75.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE76.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE76.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE76.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE76.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE77.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE77.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE77.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE77.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE78.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE78.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE78.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE78.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE79.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE79.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE79.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE79.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE80.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
www.eaton.com
315
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE80.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE80.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE80.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Switchgear/Breaker Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
CinBkr-52a-I
Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52a)
[Control
/Breaker
/Pos Indicators wiring]
CinBkr-52b-I
Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the [Control
Bkr.. (52b)
/Breaker
/Pos Indicators wiring]
Ready-I
Module Input State: Breaker Ready
[Control
/Breaker
/Pos Indicators wiring]
Sys-in-Sync-I
State of the module input: This signals has [Control
to become true within the synchronization
time. If not, switching is unsuccessful.
/Breaker
/Synchronous Switching]
Ack TripCmd-I
State of the module input: Acknowledgment [Control
Signal (only for automatic
acknowledgment). Module input signal
/Breaker
/Trip Manager]
Interl CLOSE1-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of
the CLOSE command
[Control
/Breaker
/Interlockings]
Interl CLOSE2-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of
the CLOSE command
[Control
/Breaker
/Interlockings]
Interl CLOSE3-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of
the CLOSE command
[Control
/Breaker
/Interlockings]
316
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
Interl OPEN1-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of
the OPEN command
[Control
/Breaker
/Interlockings]
Interl OPEN2-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of
the OPEN command
[Control
/Breaker
/Interlockings]
Interl OPEN3-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of
the OPEN command
[Control
/Breaker
/Interlockings]
SC CLOSE-I
State of the module input: Switching
CLOSE Command, e.g.: the state of the
Logic or the state of the digital input.
[Control
/Breaker
/Ex OPEN/CLOSE Cmd]
SC OPEN-I
State of the module input: Switching OPEN [Control
Command, e.g.: the state of the Logic or
the state of the digital input.
/Breaker
/Ex OPEN/CLOSE Cmd]
Switchgear/Breaker Signals (Outputs States)
Name
Description
SI SingleContactInd
Signal: The Position of the Switchgear is detected by one auxiliary
contact (pole) only. Thus indeterminate and disturbed Positions
cannot be detected.
Pos not CLOSE
Signal: Pos not CLOSE
Pos CLOSE
Signal: Breaker is in CLOSE-Position
Pos OPEN
Signal: Breaker is in OPEN-Position
Pos Indeterm
Signal: Breaker is in Indeterminate Position
Pos Disturb
Signal: Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Breaker Position. The feedback signals (Position Indicators) contradict themselves. After
expiring of a supervision timer this signal becomes true.
State
Signal: Breaker Position (0 = Indeterminate, 1 = OPEN, 2 =
CLOSE, 3 = Disturbed)
Ready
Signal: Breaker is ready for operation.
CES succesf
Command Execution Supervision: Switching command executed
successfully.
CES Disturbed
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command
unsuccessful. Switchgear in disturbed position.
CES SAuthority
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
executed. No switching authority.
www.eaton.com
317
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
CES SwitchgDir
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Direction Control. A
switchgear that is already OPEN should be switched OPEN again
(doubly).
CES DoubleOperating
Command Execution Supervision: A second switch command is in
conflict with a pending one.
CES CLOSE durg OPEN Cmd
Command Execution Supervision: CLOSE Command during a
pending OPEN Command.
CES SG not ready
Command Execution Supervision: Switchgear not ready.
CES Field Interl
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
executed because of field interlocking.
CES SyncTimeout
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
executed No Synchronization signal while t-sync was running.
Prot CLOSE
Signal: CLOSE command issued by the Prot module.
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Ack TripCmd
Signal: Acknowledge Trip Command.
Bwear Slow Breaker
Signal: Slow Breaker Alarm.
Res Bwear Slow Breaker
Signal: Resetting the slow breaker alarm.
CLOSE Cmd
Signal: CLOSE command issued to the switchgear. Depending on
the setting the signal may include the CLOSE command of the
Prot module.
OPEN Cmd
Signal: OPEN command issued to the switchgear. Depending on
the setting the signal may include the OPEN command of the Prot
module.
CLOSE Cmd manual
Signal: CLOSE Cmd manual
OPEN Cmd manual
Signal: OPEN Cmd manual
CLOSE request
Signal: Synchronous CLOSE request
Switching the Breaker at the Panel
Control
Manually switching a switchgear at the device panel is possible at the following switching authorities:
Local; and
Local and Remote.
•
•
Assumed the device displays the main screen:
1. Press the »Menu« softkey.
2. Select the »Control« menu by using the »up« or »down« softkeys and press the »right« arrow softkey
button.
3. Select the »Control« menu by using the »up« or »down« softkeys and press the »right« arrow softkey
button.
4. A symbol for the switchgear and its status (ON, OFF, intermediate or disturbed) is displayed.
5.
318
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
6. Dependent on the status (ON/OFF), the switchgear can be switched ON or OFF by the corresponding
softkey.
The current position of the switchgear will be visualized by different symbols:
Breaker State
Symbol
0
(Intermediate)
1
(Off)
2
(ON)
3
(Disturbed)
Direct Commands of the Switching Authority
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Switching
Authority
Switching Authority
None,
Local
[Control
Local,
/General Settings]
Remote,
Local and Remote
Signals of the Switching Authority
Name
Description
Local
Switching Authority: Local
Remote
Switching Authority: Remote
Breaker Wear Features
The protective relay offers the following Breaker Wear features.
•
•
•
Monitoring of the accumulated interrupted currents.
Slow breaker alarm.
Calculation of the Breaker Open Capacity »Bkr OPEN capacity«. 100% means that breaker
maintenance is mandatory now.
www.eaton.com
319
IM02602007E
•
•
EDR-5000
Breaker Wear Curve.
Monitoring of total CLOSE/OPEN cycles and alarm for max allowed CLOSE/OPEN cycles per hour.
Slow Breaker Alarm
An increase of the closing or opening time of the breaker is an indication for the maintenance need of this
switchgear. If the measured time exceeds the time »t-Move OPEN« or »t-Move CLOSE«, the signal »BWEAR
SLOW BREAKER« will be activated. This signal will be active until it is reset manually.
Breaker Wear Curve
In order to keep the breaker in good working condition, the breaker needs to be monitored. The breaker health
(operation life) depends above all on:
•
•
•
The number of CLOSE/OPEN cycles;
The amplitudes of the interrupting currents; and
The frequency that the breaker operates (operations per hour).
The User has to maintain the breaker accordingly to the maintenance schedule that is to be provided by the
manufacturer (breaker operation statistics). By means of up to ten points that the User can replicate the breaker
wear curve within menu [Control/Breaker/BWear]. Each point has two settings: the interrupt current in kilo
amperes and the allowed operation counts. No matter how many points are used, the operation counts the last
point as zero. The protective relay will interpolate the allowed operations based on the breaker wear curve.
When the interrupted current is greater than the interrupt current at the last point, the protective relay will
assume zero operation counts.
320
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Breaker Maintenance Curve for a typical 25kV Breaker
4
1× 10
0.0
1.2
10000
10000
3
Number of Operations
1× 10
8.0
150
100
20.0
12
10
20.0
1
0.1
1
0
10
100
Interrupted Current in kA per operation
Global Protection Parameters of the Breaker Wear Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Operations
Alarm
Service Alarm, too many Operations
1 - 100000
9999
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Isum Intr Alarm Alarm, the Sum (Limit) of interrupting
currents has been exceeded.
0.00 – 2000.00 kA
100.00 kA
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
www.eaton.com
321
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Isum Intr per
hour Alarm
Alarm, the per hour Sum (Limit) of
interrupting currents has been exceeded.
0.00 – 2000.00 kA
100.00 kA
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Bwear Curve
Fc
WearLevel
Alarm
The Breaker Wear Curve defines the
Inactive,
maximum allowed CLOSE/OPEN cycles
depending on the brake currents. If the
Active
breaker maintenance curve is exceeded, an
alarm will be issued. The breaker
maintenance curve is to be taken from the
technical data sheet of the breaker
manufacturer. By means of the available
points this curve is to be replicated.
Inactive
Breaker Wear curve Alarm Level in %
80.00%
0.00 - 100.00%
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
WearLevel
Lockout
Breaker Wear Curve Lockout Level in %
0.00 - 100.00%
95.00%
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Current1
Interrupted Current Level #1
0.00 – 2000.00 kA
0.00 kA
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Count1
Open Counts Allowed #1
0 - 100000
10000
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Current2
Interrupted Current Level #2
0.00 – 2000.00 kA
1.20 kA
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Count2
Open Counts Allowed #2
0 - 100000
10000
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Current3
Interrupted Current Level #3
0.00 – 2000.00 kA
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
8.00 kA
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
322
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Count3
Open Counts Allowed #3
0 - 100000
150
[Control
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
/Breaker
/BWear]
Current4
Interrupted Current Level #4
0.00 – 2000.00 kA
20.00 kA
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Count4
Open Counts Allowed #4
0 - 100000
12
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Current5
Interrupted Current Level #5
0.00 – 2000.00 kA
20.00 kA
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Count5
Open Counts Allowed #5
0 - 100000
0
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Current6
Interrupted Current Level #6
0.00 – 2000.00 kA
20.00 kA
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Count6
Open Counts Allowed #6
0 - 100000
0
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Current7
Interrupted Current Level #7
0.00 – 2000.00 kA
20.00 kA
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Count7
Open Counts Allowed #7
0 - 100000
0
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
Current8
Interrupted Current Level #8
0.00 – 2000.00 kA
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
20.00 kA
[Control
/Breaker
/BWear]
www.eaton.com
323
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Count8
Open Counts Allowed #8
0 - 100000
0
[Control
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
/Breaker
/BWear]
Current9
Interrupted Current Level #9
0.00 – 2000.00 kA
20.00 kA
[Control
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
/Breaker
/BWear]
Count9
Open Counts Allowed #9
0 - 100000
0
[Control
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
/Breaker
/BWear]
Current10
Interrupted Current Level #10
0.00 – 2000.00 kA
20.00 kA
[Control
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
/Breaker
/BWear]
Count10
Open Counts Allowed #10
0 - 100000
0
[Control
Only available if:Bwear Curve Fc = Active
/Breaker
/BWear]
Breaker Wear Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Operations Alarm
Signal: Service Alarm, too many Operations
Isum Intr trip: IA
Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded: IA
Isum Intr trip: IB
Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded: IB
Isum Intr trip: IC
Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded: IC
Isum Intr trip
Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded in at least one phase.
Res TripCmdCr
Signal: Resetting of the Counter: total number of trip commands
Res Isum trip
Signal: Reset summation of the tripping currents
WearLevel Alarm
Signal: Breaker Wear curve Alarm Level in %
WearLevel Lockout
Signal: Breaker Wear Curve Lockout Level in %
Res Bwear Curve
Signal: Res Bwear Curve
Isum Intr per hour Alarm
Signal: Isum Intr per hour Alarm
Res Isum Intr per hour Alarm
Signal: Res Isum Intr per hour Alarm
324
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Breaker Wear Counter Values
Value
Description
Menu Path
TripCmd Cr
Counter: Total number of trips of the
[Operation
switchgear (breaker, load break switch … ).
Resettable with Total or All.
/Count and RevData
/Breaker]
Breaker Wear Values
Value
Description
Default
Size
Menu Path
Isum trip IA
Summation of the tripping currents
phase
0.00 A
0.00 –
1000.00 A
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/Breaker]
Isum trip IB
Summation of the tripping currents
phase
0.00 A
0.00 –
1000.00 A
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/Breaker]
Isum trip IC
Summation of the tripping currents
phase
0.00 A
0.00 –
1000.00 A
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/Breaker]
Isum Intr per hour
Sum per hour of interrupting
currents.
0.00 kA
0.00 –
1000.00 kA
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/Breaker]
Bkr OPEN capacity
Bkr. OPEN capacity. 100% means,
that the breaker is to be
maintenanced.
0.0%
0.0 - 100.0% [Operation
/Count and RevData
/Breaker]
Direct Commands of the Breaker Wear Module
Parameter
Description
Res TripCmdCr Resetting of the Counter: total number of
trip commands
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
Res Isum trip
Reset summation of the tripping currents
Inactive,
/Reset]
Inactive
Active
Res Isum Intr
per hour
Sum per hour of interrupting currents.
Inactive,
Active
www.eaton.com
[Operation
/Reset]
Inactive
[Operation
/Reset]
325
IM02602007E
Parameter
EDR-5000
Description
Setting Range
Res Bkr OPEN Resetting of the Bkr. OPEN capacity. 100% Inactive,
capacity
means, that the breaker is to be
maintenanced.
Active
326
www.eaton.com
Default
Menu Path
Inactive
[Operation
/Reset]
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Protective Elements
Directional Feature – Phase Current
All elements can be selected as »Non-directional/Forward/Reverse« operated. This has to be done in the
»Device Planning« menu.
For the direction detection it is mandatory, that the required voltages exceed
0.35 V and the required currents exceed 10 mA.
For the case, that the voltage drops below 0.35 V, the last angle between the
operating and polarizing quantity will be used for the directional detection.
Overcurrent protection elements, time inverse or instantaneous or time delay, etc., can trip in a specified fault
current direction. When the trip direction is set to »Non-directional«, the direction detection takes no effect.
When it is set to »Forward«, a trip is only permitted in the forward direction where fault current lies within ± 90°
around the maximum torque angle »Phase MTA«. When it is set to »Reverse«, a trip is only permitted in
reverse direction where fault current lies within ± 90° around the opposite of the maximum torque angle.
In the case of a 3-phase nearly zero voltage fault, the memorized voltage, or prefault voltages, is used to
establish the correct fault direction.
www.eaton.com
327
Prot - Phase failure Direction Detection
328
www.eaton.com
Prot.Pickup
Prot.Phase Sequence
IC
IB
IA
VC
VB
VA
VC
VCA
Voltage memory
VA
VAB
φ
VB
VBC
Forward
Phase MTA
VBC
Reverse
I1
Prot.I Phase MTA
AND
AND
AND
(Not possible)
Prot.I dir n poss
(Reverse)
Prot.I dir rev
(Forward)
Prot.I dir fwd
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
www.eaton.com
(Not possible)
Prot.I dir n poss
(Reverse)
Prot.I dir rev
(Forward)
Prot.I dir fwd
Name = I[1]...[n]
Active
Inactive
Name.Nondir Trip at V=0
Reverse
Forward
Non-directional
Name.Mode
Device Planning
Direction Decision Phase overcurrent
AND
AND
AND
OR
Name. Fault in Projected Direction
9
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Phase Directional Supervision Logic
329
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
50P/67P- DEFT Overcurrent Protection
Available Elements
50P[1] ,50P[2] ,50P[3]
If using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the current protection functions
must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings (applies only to
devices which are equipped with Inrush protection)..
All overcurrent protective elements are identically structured.
All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be displayed
as ANSI 50 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 50 element
wont change, if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional” to
“directional”.
For each element the following characteristic is available:
•
DEFT (definite time).
Explanation
t = Tripping delay
I = Fault current
Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip.
This element offers a criterion setting. The criterion setting tells if the threshold is based on the fundamental
(Phasor) or RMS.
For Tripping curves, please refer to the “Appendix/Instantaneous Current Curves (Phase)” section.
330
www.eaton.com
www.eaton.com
IC
IB
IA
3
7
6
5
9
4
Name.Pickup
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
φ
RMS
Fund.
Name.Criterion
IH2.Blo Phase C
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
IH2.Blo Phase B
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
IH2.Blo Phase A
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
Active
Inactive
Name.IH2 Blo
Name.* I[1]...[n] Fault in Projected Direction
AND
AND
AND
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Phase overcurrent
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings**
Name = 50P[1]...[n]
50P/67P[1]...[n]
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
Based on above parameters,
tripping times and reset modes will
be calculated by the device.
0
t
φ
DEFT
Name.t
Name.Pickup
AND
AND
AND
AND
14
26a
25a
15
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
18a
Name.Trip Phase C
17a
Name.Trip Phase B
16a
Name.Trip Phase A
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup IC
Name.Pickup IB
24a
Name.IH2 Blo*
Name.Pickup IA
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
*=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection
331
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the 50P/67P Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
50P[1]: Non-directional,
Nondirectional
[Device Planning]
Forward,
Reverse
50P[2]: Non-directional,
Forward,
Reverse
50P[3]: Do not use,
Non-directional,
Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 50P/67P Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
Rvs Blo
Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
332
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
AdaptSet 1
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
AdaptSet 2
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
AdaptSet 3
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
AdaptSet 4
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the 50P/67P Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
50P[1]: Active
[Protection Para
Active
50P[2]: Active
/<n>
50P[3]: Inactive /I-Prot
/50P[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Rvs Blo Fc
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
reverse blocking of the module/element.
This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/element are blocked
that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active".
Inactive
www.eaton.com
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
333
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Blo TripCmd
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
Criterion
True RMS
Measuring method: fundamental or Reset
Fundamental,
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
[Protection Para
True RMS,
/<n>
I2
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
Pickup
If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 40.00 In
element starts to time out to trip.
Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT Or
Characteristic = INV Minimum of the
setting range If: VRestraint = Active
Minimum of the setting range If: VRestraint
= Inactive
t
Tripping delay
50P[1]: 2 In
[Protection Para
50P[2]: 2.5 In
/<n>
50P[3]: 3.0 In
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
0.00 – 300.00 s
Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT
50P[1]: 0 s
[Protection Para
50P[2]: 0.25 s
/<n>
50P[3]: 0.25 s
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
50P/67P Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
334
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50P[1]]
www.eaton.com
335
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
50P/67P Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup IA
Signal: Pickup IA
Pickup IB
Signal: Pickup IB
Pickup IC
Signal: Pickup IC
Pickup
Signal: Pickup
Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Active AdaptSet
Active Adaptive Parameter
DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, directional [ANSI 50P/67P]
Object to be tested:
•
For each directional overcurrent element is to be measured: the total tripping time (recommendation) or
alternatively tripping delays and the drop-out ratios; each time 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase.
Especially in Holmgreen connections, wiring errors can happen easily and
these are then detected safely. By measuring the total tripping time, it can
be ensured that the secondary wiring is OK (from the terminal on, up to the
trip coil of the Breaker).
Eaton recommends measuring the total tripping time instead of the tripping
delay. The tripping delay should be specified by the User. The total
tripping time is measured at the position signaling contact of the breaker
(not at the relay output contacts!).
Total tripping time
= tripping delay (please refer to the tolerances of the
protection elements)
+ breaker operating time (about 50 ms)
Please take the breaker operating times from the technical data specified in
the relevant documentation provided by the breaker manufacturer.
336
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Necessary means
•
•
•
Synchronizable current and voltage sources
Optional: ampere meters
Timer
Procedure
Synchronize the 3-phase current and voltage sources with each other. Then simulate the tripping directions to
be tested by the angle between current and voltage.
Testing the threshold values (3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase)
Each time feed a current which is about 3-5% above the threshold value for activation/tripping. Then check the
threshold values.
Testing the total tripping delay (recommendation)
Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the Brk. (Brk. tripping).
Testing the trip delay (measured at the relay output)
Measure the tripping times at the relay output.
Testing the drop-out ratio
Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the dropout ratio.
Successful test result
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values and drop-out ratios correspond
with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under
Technical Data.
51P/67P - INV Overcurrent-Protection
Available Elements
51P[1]
If using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the current protection functions
must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent faulty trippings (applies only to
devices which are equipped with Inrush protection).
All overcurrent protective elements are identically structured.
All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be displayed as
ANSI 51 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 51 element wont
change, if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional” to
“directional”.
www.eaton.com
337
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
For each element, the following characteristics are available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NINV (IEC/XInv);
VINV (IEC/XInv);
LINV (IEC/XInv);
EINV (IEC/XInv);
MINV (ANSI/XInv);
VINV (ANSI/XInv);
EINV (ANSI/XInv);
Thermal Flat;
Therm Flat IT;
Therm Flat I2T; and
Therm Flat I4T.
For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Time Current Curves (PHASE)” section.
338
www.eaton.com
www.eaton.com
IC
IB
IA
3
7
6
5
9
4
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Imax
Name.Pickup
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
φ
RMS
Fund.
Name.Criterion
IH2.Blo Phase C
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
IH2.Blo Phase B
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
IH2.Blo Phase A
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
Active
Inactive
Name.IH2 Blo
Name.* I[1]...[n] Fault in Projected Direction
AND
AND
AND
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Phase overcurrent
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings**
Name = 51P/67P[1]...[n]
51P/67P[1]...[n]
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
Imax
Based on above parameters,
tripping times and reset modes will
be calculated by the device.
INV
φ
Name.Reset Mode
Name.t-reset
Name.t-multiplier
Name.Curve Shape
AND
AND
AND
AND
14
26b
25b
15
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
18b
Name.Trip Phase C
17b
Name.Trip Phase B
16b
Name.Trip Phase A
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup IC
Name.Pickup IB
24b
Name.IH2 Blo*
Name.Pickup IA
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
*=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection
339
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the 51P/67P Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Non-directional,
Nondirectional
[Device Planning]
Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 51P/67P Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
Rvs Blo
Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
AdaptSet 1
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
340
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
AdaptSet 2
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
AdaptSet 3
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
AdaptSet 4
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the 51P/67P Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Active
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Rvs Blo Fc
Blo TripCmd
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
reverse blocking of the module/element.
This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/element are blocked
that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active".
Inactive
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive
Inactive,
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
www.eaton.com
341
IM02602007E
Parameter
EDR-5000
Description
Default
Menu Path
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
[Protection Para
Criterion
True RMS
Measuring method: fundamental or Reset
Setting Range
Fundamental,
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
[Protection Para
True RMS,
/<n>
I2
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
Pickup
If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 40.00 In
element starts to time out to trip.
1.00 In
[Protection Para
/<n>
Minimum of the setting range If: VRestraint
= Active Minimum of the setting range If:
VRestraint = Inactive
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
Curve Shape
Characteristic
IEC NINV,
ANSI MINV
[Protection Para
IEC VINV,
/<n>
IEC EINV,
/I-Prot
IEC LINV,
/51P[1]]
ANSI MINV,
ANSI VINV,
ANSI EINV,
Therm Flat,
IT,
I2T,
I4T
t-multiplier
Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. 0.02 - 20.00
The setting range depends on the selected
tripping curve.
1
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
342
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Reset Mode
Reset Mode
Instantaneous,
Calculated
[Protection Para
t-delay,
/<n>
Calculated
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
t-reset
Reset time for intermittent phase failures
(INV characteristics only)
0.00 – 60.00 s
0s
[Protection Para
/<n>
Available if:Reset Mode = t-delay
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
51P/67P Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
www.eaton.com
343
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter3
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter4
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[1]]
51P/67P Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup IA
Signal: Pickup IA
Pickup IB
Signal: Pickup IB
Pickup IC
Signal: Pickup IC
Pickup
Signal: Pickup
Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Active AdaptSet
Active Adaptive Parameter
DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
344
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Commissioning: Overcurrent Protection, Non-directional [ANSI 51P/67P]
Object to be tested:
•
For each directional overcurrent element is to be measured: the total tripping time (recommendation) or
alternatively tripping delays and the drop-out ratios; each time 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase.
Especially in Holmgreen connections, wiring errors can happen easily and
these are then detected safely. By measuring the total tripping time, it can
be ensured that the secondary wiring is OK (from the terminal on, up to the
trip coil of the Breaker).
Eaton recommends measuring the total tripping time instead of the tripping
delay. The tripping delay should be specified by the User. The total
tripping time is measured at the position signaling contact of the breaker
(not at the relay output contacts!).
Total tripping time
= tripping delay (please refer to the tolerances of the
protection elements)
+ breaker operating time (about 50 ms)
Please take the breaker operating times from the technical data specified in
the relevant documentation provided by the breaker manufacturer.
Necessary means
•
•
•
Synchronizable current and voltage sources;
Optional: ampere meters; and
Timer.
Procedure
Synchronize the 3-phase current and voltage sources with each other. Then simulate the tripping directions to
be tested by the angle between current and voltage.
Testing the threshold values (3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase)
Each time feed a current which is about 3-5% above the threshold value for activation/tripping. Then check the
threshold values.
Testing the total tripping delay (recommendation)
Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the Brk. (Brk. tripping).
Testing the trip delay (measured at the relay output)
Measure the tripping times at the relay output.
Testing the drop-out ratio
Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the dropout ratio.
Successful test result
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values and drop-out ratios correspond
with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under
Technical Data.
www.eaton.com
345
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
51V – Voltage Restraint Overcurrent-Protection
The 51P[2] and 51P[3] elements can be used for Voltage Restraint if the Parameter »VRestraint« is set to
»active« within the Parameter Set.
51P[2] ,51P[3]
All voltage restraint overcurrent protective elements are identically structured.
All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be displayed as ANSI
51 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 51 element wont change, if it is
set within the device planning from “non-directional” to “directional”.
The 51V element restrains operation which reduces pickup levels. This allows the User to lower the pickup
value of the 51V elements with the corresponding phase input voltage (phase-to-phase or phase-to-ground,
depending on the setting of »Main VT con« within the System Parameters). When the minimum fault phase
current is close to the load current, it may make the phase time overcurrent protection coordination difficult. In
this case, an undervoltage function may be used to alleviate this situation. When the voltage (RMS) is low, the
phase time overcurrent pickup threshold may be set low accordingly, so that the phase time overcurrent
protection may achieve adequate sensitivity and better coordination. The device uses a simple linear model to
determine the effective pickup by characterizing the relationship between the voltage and the phase time
overcurrent pickup threshold.
Once the voltage restraint is activated, the effective phase time overcurrent pickup threshold will be the
calculated Pickup% times the phase time overcurrent pickup setting. The effective pickup threshold must be
within the setting range allowed and, if it is less, the minimum pickup value will be used.
Pickup%
100%
25%
VRestraint max
25% VRestraint max
That means:
Vmin = 0.25*Vmax;
•
Pickup%min = 25%;
•
Pickup% = 25%, if V <= Vmin;
•
Pickup% = 1/Vmax*(V - Vmin) + 25%, if Vmin < V < Vmax;
•
Pickup% = 100%, if V >= Vmax;
346
www.eaton.com
V
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
For tripping curves, please refer to the“Appendix/Instantaneous Current Curves (Phase)” section.
If this element should be blocked in case of a Loss Of Potential, »LOP BLO« has to be set to »active«.
Definition of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System Parameter setting of "Main VT
con".
In case that within the System Parameters "Main VT con" is set to "Open-Delta":
Vn=Main VT sec .
In case that "Main VT con" is set to "Wye":
Vn=
MainVT sec
3
51V[1]...[n]
Name = 51V[1]...[n]
4
Name.IH2 Blo*
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings**
Name.Pickup IA
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Name.Pickup IB
Name.Pickup IC
Name.Pickup
Name.IH2 Blo
AND
Inactive
Active
AND
24b
25b
26b
14
Name.Trip Phase A
16b
*=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection
5
AND
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
Name.Trip Phase B
IH2.Blo Phase A
AND
6
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
Name.Curve Shape
IH2.Blo Phase B
Name.t-multiplier
7
17b
AND
AND
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
Name.Trip Phase C
AND
18b
Name.t-reset
AND
IH2.Blo Phase C
Name.Reset Mode
φ
INV
OR
AND
51V Pickup =
%Pickup * 51P
Name.Trip
OR
Pickup
IA
RMS
IB
AND
RMS
IC
Name.TripCmd
Based on above parameters ,
tripping times and reset modes will
be calculated by the device.
RMS
Imax
AND
15
Imax
φ
Pickup%
VA
RMS
100%
VB
RMS
VC
%Pickup
25%
V
RMS
25%
VRestraint max
3
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
www.eaton.com
347
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the 51V Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Nondirectional
[Device Planning]
Non-directional,
Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 51V Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
Rvs Blo
Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
AdaptSet 1
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
348
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
AdaptSet 2
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
AdaptSet 3
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
AdaptSet 4
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
Setting Group Parameters of the 51V Module
In the case that Voltage Restraint is active (Vrestraint=active), the minimum
pickup that can be set is 0.1 In.
In the case that Voltage Restraint is inactive (Vrestraint=inactive), the
minimum pickup that can be set is 0.01 In.
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
51P[2]: Active
[Protection Para
Active
51P[3]: Inactive /<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
ExBlo Fc
Rvs Blo Fc
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
reverse blocking of the module/element.
This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/element are blocked
that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active".
Inactive
www.eaton.com
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
349
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Blo TripCmd
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
Criterion
True RMS
Measuring method: fundamental or Reset
Fundamental,
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
[Protection Para
True RMS,
/<n>
I2
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
Pickup
If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 40.00 In
element starts to time out to trip.
1.00 In
[Protection Para
/<n>
Minimum of the setting range If: VRestraint
= Active Minimum of the setting range If:
VRestraint = Inactive
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
Curve Shape
Characteristic
IEC NINV,
[Protection Para
IEC VINV,
/<n>
IEC EINV,
/I-Prot
IEC LINV,
/51P[2]]
ANSI MINV,
ANSI VINV,
ANSI EINV,
Therm Flat,
IT,
I2T,
I4T
350
ANSI MINV
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
t-multiplier
Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. 0.02 - 20.00
The setting range depends on the selected
tripping curve.
Default
Menu Path
51P[2]: 2
[Protection Para
51P[3]: 3
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
Reset Mode
Reset Mode
Instantaneous,
Calculated
[Protection Para
t-delay,
/<n>
Calculated
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
t-reset
Reset time for intermittent phase failures
(INV characteristics only).
0.00 – 60.00 s
0s
[Protection Para
/<n>
Available if:Reset Mode = t-delay
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
VRestraint
Voltage Restraint Protection
Inactive,
Active
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
VRestraint max Maximum voltage restraint level. Definition 0.04 – 1.30 Vn
of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System
Parameter setting of "Main VT con". When
the System Parameters "Main VT con" is
set to "Open-Delta" , "Vn = Main VT sec ".
When the System Parameters "Main VT
con" is set to "Wye", "Vn = Main VT
sec/SQRT(3)".
1.00 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
Only available if: VRestraint = Active
LOP Blo
Blocking if voltage transformer failure
detected. LOP (Loss of Potential)
Inactive,
Active
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: VRestraint = Active
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
www.eaton.com
351
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
51V Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
352
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51P[2]]
51V Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup IA
Signal: Pickup IA
Pickup IB
Signal: Pickup IB
Pickup IC
Signal: Pickup IC
Pickup
Signal: Pickup
Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Active AdaptSet
Active Adaptive Parameter
DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
Commissioning: Voltage Restraint [ANSI 51V]
Object to be tested:
Signals to be measured for Voltage Restraint element: the threshold values, total tripping time (recommended),
or alternatively tripping delays and the dropout ratios; each time 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase.
www.eaton.com
353
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Eaton recommends measuring the total tripping time instead of the tripping
delay. The tripping delay should be specified by the customer. The total
tripping time is measured at the position signaling contact of the breaker
(not at the relay output contacts!).
Total tripping time
= tripping delay (please refer to the tolerances of the
protection stages)
+ breaker operating time (about 50 ms)
Please take the breaker operating times from the technical data specified in
the relevant documentation provided by the breaker manufacturer.
Necessary means:
Current source;
Voltage Source;
Current and Voltage meters; and
Timer.
•
•
•
•
Procedure:
Testing the threshold values (3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase)
Feed %Pickup voltage. For each test performed, feed a current that is about 3-5% above the threshold value for
activation/tripping. Then check if the pickup values are %Pickup of the value according to 51P protection.
Testing the total tripping delay (recommendation)
Measure the total tripping times at the auxiliary contacts of the breakers (breaker tripping).
Testing the tripping delay (measuring at the relay output contact)
Measure the tripping times at the relay output contact.
Testing the dropout ratio
Reduce the current to 97% below the trip value and check the dropout ratio.
Successful test result
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found under
Technical Data.
Directional Features for Measured (IX) Ground Fault Elements 50X/51X
All ground fault elements can be selected as »Non-directional/Forward/Reverse« operated. This has to be done
in the »Device Planning« menu.
For the direction detection, it is mandatory that the required voltages
exceed 0.35 V and the required currents exceed 10 mA. An exception is the
measured sensitive ground current which has to exceed 1 mA.
For the case that the voltage drops below 0.35 V, the last angle between the
operating and polarizing quantity will be used for the directional detection.
354
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Important Definitions
Polarizing Quantity: This is the quantity that is used as a reference value. The polarizing quantity can be
selected by the parameter »IX Direction Control« in the [System Para/Direction] menu as
follows:
•
»IX 3V0«: The neutral voltage selected by the parameter »3V0 Source« will be
used as the polarizing quantity. The traditional way to polarize a ground fault
element is to use neutral voltage (3V0). The neutral voltage can, however, be
either »measured« or »calculated«. This can be selected by the parameter »3V0
Source« in the [System Para/Direction] menu.
•
»IX Neg«: With this selection, the negative phase sequence voltage and current
(Polarizing: V2/Operating: I2) will be used to detect direction. The monitored
current is still the measured residual current IX.
•
»IX Dual«: For this method, the negative phase sequence voltage »V2« will be
used as polarizing quantity if »V2« and »I2« are available, otherwise 3V0 will be
used. The operating quantity is either I2 if »V2« and »I2« are available, else IX.
The following table gives the User a quick overview of the all possible directional settings.
50X/51X Direction Decision
by Angle Between:
[System Para/
Direction]
[System
Para/Direction]:
[System
Para/Direction]:
The Following
Angle Has to Be
Set:
IX Dir Cntrl =
3V0 Source =
Measured ground current and neutral voltage:
IX, 3V0 (measured)
Ground MTA
IX 3V0
Measured
Measured ground current and neutral voltage:
IX, 3V0 (calculated)
Ground MTA
IX 3V0
Calculated
Negative sequence voltage and current
I2, V2
90° + Phase MTA
IX Neg
N.A.
Negative phase sequence current and voltage
(preferred), measured ground current and neutral
voltage (alternatively):
I2, V2 (if available)
or else:
IX, 3V0 (measured)
If V2 and I2 are
available:
90° + Phase MTA
IX Dual
Measured
Negative phase sequence current and voltage
(preferred), measured ground current and neutral
voltage (alternatively):
I2, V2 (if available)
or else:
IX, 3V0 (calculated)
If V2 and I2 are
available:
90° + Phase MTA
IX Dual
Calculated
else:
Ground MTA
else:
Ground MTA
www.eaton.com
355
356
www.eaton.com
V2
3V0
V2
3V0
If V2 and I2 are available, MTA = 90° +
Phase MTA, otherwise MTA = Ground
MTA
90° + Phase MTA
Ground MTA
System Para
IX Dual
IX Neg
IX 3V0
IX Dir Cntrl
System Para
If V2 and I2 are available, I2 is the operating quantity, else IX is the operating quantity
I2
IG = IX meas
VX meas
VR calc
Calculated
Measured
3V0 Source
System Para
Prot - 50X/51X - Direction Detection
Reverse
operating
polarizing
MTA
g
tin
era
polarizing
op
Forward
50X/51X - Direction Detection
(Not possible)
Prot.IX dir n poss
(Reverse)
Prot.IX dir rev
(Forward)
Prot.IX dir fwd
10b
10b
10b
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
50X/67X DEFT Measured Ground Fault Protection
Elements
50X[1] ,50X[2]
If using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the ground current
protection functions must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent
faulty trippings.
All ground current elements are identically structured.
The following table shows the application options of the earth overcurrent protection element
Applications of the IG-Protection Module
Setting in
Option
ANSI 50X – Ground overcurrent protection, nondirectional
Device Planning menu
Setting: Non-directional
Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS
ANSI 67X – Ground overcurrent protection,
directional
Device Planning menu
Setting: Forward/Reverse
Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS
VX Selection: measured/calculated
Criterion
For all protection elements it can be determined, whether the measurement is done on basis of the
»Fundamental« or if »TrueRMS« measurement is used.
VX Selection
Within the parameter menu, this parameter determines, whether the earth current and the residual voltage is
»measured« or »calculated«.
Calculation is only possible, when phase to neutral voltage is applied to the
voltage inputs.
At setting »measured« the quantities to be measured, i. e.: residual voltage
and the measured ground current have to be applied to the corresponding
4th measuring input.
All ground current protective elements can be planned User defined as non-directional or as directional stages.
This means, for instance, all elements can be projected in forward/reverse direction.
For each element the following characteristics are available:
•
DEFT (definite time).
For tripping curves, please refer to the “Appendix/Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Measured)”
section.
The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual
connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents. However, this is only
possible if the current transformers are Wye-connected.
www.eaton.com
357
358
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings**
IH2.Blo IG
www.eaton.com
*=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection
3
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
φ
RMS
Fund.
Name.Criterion
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
Active
Inactive
Name.IGH2 Blo
Name.* Fault in Projected Direction
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground Fault
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
IX Measured
8
10
4
Name = 50X[1]...[n]
50X[1]...[n]
Name.Pickup
AND
AND
AND
Based on above parameters,
tripping times and reset modes
will be calculated by the device.
0
t
DEFT
φ
Name.t
Name.Pickup
AND
Name.TripCmd
Name.Pickup
27a
15
19a
Name.Trip
14
Name.IGH2 Blo*
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the 50X/67X Ground Fault Protection
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Non-directional,
Nondirectional
[Device Planning]
Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 50X/67X Ground Fault Protection
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
Rvs Blo
Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
AdaptSet 1
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
AdaptSet 2
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
www.eaton.com
359
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
AdaptSet 3
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
AdaptSet 4
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the 50X/67X Ground Fault Protection
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Active
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Rvs Blo Fc
Blo TripCmd
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
reverse blocking of the module/element.
This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/element are blocked
that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active".
Inactive
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive
Inactive,
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
360
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
[Protection Para
Criterion
True RMS
Measuring method: fundamental or Reset
Fundamental,
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
True RMS
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
Pickup
If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 20.00 In
element will be started.
50X[1]: 1 In
[Protection Para
50X[2]: 2 In
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
Pickup
If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.002 – 2.000 In
element will be started.
0.02 In
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
t
Tripping delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.5 s
Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
50X/67X Ground Fault Protection Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
www.eaton.com
361
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50X[1]]
362
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
50X/67X Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Active AdaptSet
Active Adaptive Parameter
DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – Non-directional [ANSI 50X/67X]
Please test the non-directional ground overcurrent analog to the non-directional phase overcurrent protection.
www.eaton.com
363
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
51X/67X INV Measured Ground Fault Protection
Elements
51X[1] ,51X[2]
All ground current elements are identically structured.
The following table shows the application options of the earth overcurrent protection element
Applications of the IG-Protection Module
Setting in
Option
ANSI 51X – Ground overcurrent protection, nondirectional
Device Planning menu
Setting: Non-directional
Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS
ANSI 67X – Ground overcurrent protection,
directional
Device Planning menu
Setting: Forward/Reverse
Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS
VX Selection: measured/calculated
Criterion
For all protection elements it can be determined, whether the measurement is done on basis of the
»Fundamental« or if »TrueRMS« measurement is used.
VX Selection
Within the parameter menu, this parameter determines, whether the earth current and the residual voltage is
»measured« or »calculated«.
Calculation is only possible, when phase to neutral voltage is applied to the
voltage inputs.
At setting »measured« the quantities to be measured, i. e. Residual voltage
and the measured ground current have to be applied to the corresponding
4th measuring input.
All ground current protective elements can be planned User defined as non-directional or as directional stages.
This means, for instance, all elements can be projected in forward/reverse direction.
For each element the following characteristics are available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NINV (IEC/XInv);
VINV (IEC/XInv);
LINV (IEC/XInv);
EINV (IEC/XInv);
MINV (ANSI/XInv);
VINV (ANSI/XInv);
EINV (ANSI/XInv);
Thermal Flat;
Therm Flat IT;
Therm Flat I2T; and
Therm Flat I4T.
For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Time Current Curves (Ground Current)” section.
The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual
connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents. However, this is only
possible if the current transformers are Wye-connected.
364
www.eaton.com
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings**
IH2.Blo IG
www.eaton.com
3
Active
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
φ
RMS
Fund.
Name.Criterion
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
Inactive
Name.IGH2 Blo
Name.* Fault in Projected Direction
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground Fault
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
IX Measured
8
10
4
Name = 51X[1]...[n]
51X[1]...[n]
Name.Pickup
AND
AND
AND
Based on above parameters, tripping
times and reset modes will be calculated
by the device.
INV
φ
Name.Reset Mode
Name.t-reset
Name.t-multiplier
Name.Curve Shape
AND
Name.TripCmd
Name.Pickup
27b
15
19b
Name.Trip
14
Name.IGH2 Blo*
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
*=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection
365
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the 51X/67X Ground Fault Protection
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
51X[1]: Non-directional,
Nondirectional
[Device Planning]
Forward,
Reverse
51X[2]: Do not use,
Non-directional,
Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 51X/67X Ground Fault Protection
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
Rvs Blo
Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
AdaptSet 1
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
366
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
AdaptSet 2
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
AdaptSet 3
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
AdaptSet 4
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the 51X/67X Ground Fault Protection
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Active
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Rvs Blo Fc
Blo TripCmd
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
reverse blocking of the module/element.
This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/element are blocked
that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active".
Inactive
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive
Inactive,
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
www.eaton.com
367
IM02602007E
Parameter
EDR-5000
Description
Default
Menu Path
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
[Protection Para
Criterion
True RMS
Measuring method: fundamental or Reset
Setting Range
Fundamental,
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
True RMS
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
Pickup
If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 20.00 In
element will be started.
0.5 In
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
Pickup
If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.002 – 2.000 In
element will be started.
0.02 In
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
Curve Shape
Characteristic
IEC NINV,
[Protection Para
IEC VINV,
/<n>
IEC EINV,
/I-Prot
IEC LINV,
/51X[1]]
ANSI MINV,
ANSI VINV,
ANSI EINV,
Therm Flat,
IT,
I2T,
I4T
368
ANSI MINV
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
t-multiplier
Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. 0.02 - 20.00
The setting range depends on the selected
tripping curve.
Default
Menu Path
51X[1]: 1
[Protection Para
51X[2]: 2
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
Reset Mode
Reset Mode
Instantaneous,
Calculated
[Protection Para
t-delay,
/<n>
Calculated
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
t-reset
Reset time for intermittent phase failures
(INV characteristics only)
0.00 – 60.00 s
0.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if:Reset Mode = t-delay
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
51X/67X Ground Fault Protection Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
www.eaton.com
369
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51X[1]]
51X/67X Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Active AdaptSet
Active Adaptive Parameter
DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
370
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – Non-directional [ANSI 51X/67X]
Please test the non-directional ground overcurrent analog to the non-directional phase overcurrent protection.
www.eaton.com
371
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Directional Features for Calculated (IR) Ground Fault Elements 50R/51R
All ground fault elements can be selected as »Non-directional/Forward/Reverse« operated. This has to be done
in the »Device Planning« menu.
For the direction detection, it is mandatory that the required voltages
exceed 0.35 V and the required currents exceed 10 mA. An exception is the
measured sensitive ground current which has to exceed 1 mA.
For the case that the voltage drops below 0.35 V, the last angle between the
operating and polarizing quantity will be used for the directional detection.
Important Definitions
Polarizing Quantity: This is the quantity that is used as a reference value. The polarizing quantity can be
selected by the parameter »IR Direction Control« in the [System Para/Direction] menu as
follows:
Operating Quantity:
•
»IR 3V0«: The neutral voltage selected by the parameter »3V0 Source« will be
used as the polarizing quantity. The traditional way to polarize a ground fault
element is to use neutral voltage (3V0). The neutral voltage can, however, be
either »measured« or »calculated«. This can be selected by the parameter »3V0
Source« in the [System Para/Direction] menu.
•
»IR IPol«: The measured neutral current (usually = IX) will be used as polarizing
quantity.
•
»IR Dual«: For this method, the measured neutral current IPol=IX will be used as
polarizing quantity, if available, otherwise 3V0 will be used.
•
»IR Neg«: With this selection, the negative phase sequence voltage and current
will be used to detect the direction. The monitored current is still the calculated
residual current IR.
For the directional IR elements, the operating quantity is in general the calculated neutral
current IR (except from »IR Neg« mode, where »I2« is the operating quantity).
The ground maximum torque angles (MTA) can be adjusted from 0° to 360°, except, if »IR IPol« is selected. In
this case, it is set to 0° (fixed).
The following table gives the User a quick overview of the all possible directional settings.
50R/51R Direction Decision
by Angle Between:
[System Para/
Direction]
[System
Para/Direction]:
[System
Para/Direction]:
The Following
Angle Has to Be
Set:
IR Dir Cntrl =
3V0 Source =
Residual current and neutral voltage:
IR, 3V0 (measured)
Ground MTA
IR 3V0
Measured
Residual current and neutral voltage:
IR, 3V0 (calculated)
Ground MTA
IR 3V0
Calculated
Residual current and neutral/ground current
IR, IX
0° (fixed)
IR IPol
N.A.
372
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
50R/51R Direction Decision
by Angle Between:
[System Para/
Direction]
[System
Para/Direction]:
[System
Para/Direction]:
The Following
Angle Has to Be
Set:
IR Dir Cntrl =
3V0 Source =
Residual current and neutral/ground current
(preferred), residual current and neutral voltage
(alternatively):
IR, IX (if available)
or else:
IR, 3V0 (measured)
If Ipol (=IX) is
available, MTA = 0°
(fixed); else
MTA=Ground MTA
IR Dual
Measured
Residual current and neutral/ground current
(preferred), residual current and neutral voltage
(alternatively):
IR, IX (if available)
or else:
IR, 3V0 (calculated)
If Ipol (=IX) is
available, MTA = 0°
(fixed); else
MTA=Ground MTA
IR Dual
Calculated
Negative sequence voltage and current
I2, V2
90° + Phase MTA
IR Neg
N.A.
www.eaton.com
373
374
www.eaton.com
90° + Phase MTA
If IPol is available, MTA = 0°; else
MTA=Ground MTA
0° (fixed)
Ground MTA
System Para
I2
I0 = IR calc
VX meas
VR calc
Calculated
Measured
3V0 Source
System Para
V2
IX meas
3V0
IX meas
3V0
Prot - 50R/51R - Direction Detection
IR Neg
IR Dual
IR IPol
IR 3V0
IR Dir Cntrl
System Para
Reverse
operating
polarizing
op
MTA
g
tin
era
polarizing
Forward
50R/51R - Direction Detection
(Not possible)
Prot.IR Neg dir n poss
(Reverse)
Prot.IR Neg rev dir
(Forward)
Prot.IR Neg dir fwd
(Not possible)
Prot.IR dir n poss
(Reverse)
Prot.IR dir rev
(Forward)
Prot.IR dir fwd
10a
10a
10a
10a
10a
10a
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
50R/67R DEFT Calculated Ground Fault Protection
Elements
50R[1] ,50R[2]
If using inrush blockings, the tripping delay of the ground current
protection functions must be at least 30 ms or more in order to prevent
faulty trippings.
All ground current elements are identically structured.
The following table shows the application options of the earth overcurrent protection element
Applications of the IG-Protection Module
Setting in
Option
ANSI 50R – Ground overcurrent protection, nondirectional
Device Planning menu
Setting: Non-directional
Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS
ANSI 67R – Ground overcurrent protection,
directional
Device Planning menu
Setting: Forward/Reverse
Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS
VX Selection: measured/calculated
Criterion
For all protection elements it can be determined, whether the measurement is done on basis of the
»Fundamental« or if »TrueRMS« measurement is used.
VX Selection
Within the parameter menu, this parameter determines, whether the earth current and the residual voltage is
»measured« or »calculated«.
•
Calculation is only possible, when phase to neutral voltage is applied to
the voltage inputs.
At setting »measured« the quantities to be measured, i. e.: residual
voltage and the measured ground current have to be applied to the
corresponding 4th measuring input.
All ground current protective elements can be planned User defined as non-directional or as directional stages.
This means, for instance, all elements can be projected in forward/reverse direction.
For each element the following characteristics are available:
•
DEFT (definite time).
For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Calculated)”
section.
The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual
connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents. However, this is only
possible if the current transformers are Wye-connected.
www.eaton.com
375
376
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings**
IH2.Blo IG
www.eaton.com
*=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection
3
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
φ
RMS
Fund.
Name.Criterion
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
Active
Inactive
Name.IGH2 Blo
Name.* Fault in Projected Direction
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground Fault
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
IX Calculated
8
10
4
Name = 50R[1]...[n]
50R[1]...[n]
Name.Pickup
AND
AND
AND
t
0
0
Based on above parameters, tripping
times and reset modes will be calculated
by the device.
t
φ
DEFT
Name.t
Name.Pickup
AND
Name.TripCmd
Name.Pickup
27c
15
19c
Name.Trip
14
Name.IGH2 Blo*
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the 50R/67R Ground Fault Protection
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Non-directional,
Nondirectional
[Device Planning]
Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 50R/67R Ground Fault Protection
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
Rvs Blo
Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
AdaptSet 1
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
AdaptSet 2
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
www.eaton.com
377
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
AdaptSet 3
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
AdaptSet 4
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the 50R/67R Ground Fault Protection
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Active
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Rvs Blo Fc
Blo TripCmd
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
reverse blocking of the module/element.
This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/element are blocked
that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active".
Inactive
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive
Inactive,
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
378
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
[Protection Para
Criterion
True RMS
Measuring method: fundamental or Reset
Fundamental,
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
True RMS
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
Pickup
If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 20.00 In
element will be started.
50R[1]: 1 In
[Protection Para
50R[2]: 2 In
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
t
Tripping delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.5 s
Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
50R/67R Ground Fault Protection Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
www.eaton.com
379
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter3
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter4
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/50R[1]]
50R/67R Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
380
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Active AdaptSet
Active Adaptive Parameter
DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – Non-directional [ANSI 50R/67R]
Please test the non-directional ground overcurrent using the procedure for non-directional phase overcurrent
protection.
www.eaton.com
381
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
51R/67R INV Calculated Ground Fault Protection
Elements
51R[1] ,51R[2]
All ground current elements are identically structured.
The following table shows the application options of the earth overcurrent protection element
Applications of the IG-Protection Module
Setting in
Option
ANSI 51R – Ground overcurrent protection, nondirectional
Device Planning menu
Setting: Non-directional
Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS
ANSI 67R – Ground overcurrent protection,
directional
Device Planning menu
Setting: Forward/Reverse
Measuring Mode: Fundamental/TrueRMS
VX Selection: measured/calculated
Criterion
For all protection elements it can be determined, whether the measurement is done on basis of the
»Fundamental« or if »TrueRMS« measurement is used.
VX Selection
Within the parameter menu, this parameter determines, whether the earth current and the residual voltage is
»measured« or »calculated«.
•
Calculation is only possible, when phase to neutral voltage is applied to
the voltage inputs.
At setting »measured« the quantities to be measured, i. e.: residual
voltage and the measured ground current have to be applied to the
corresponding 4th measuring input.
All ground current protective elements can be planned User defined as non-directional or as directional stages.
This means, for instance, all elements can be projected in forward/reverse direction.
For each element the following characteristics are available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NINV (IEC/XInv);
VINV (IEC/XInv);
LINV (IEC/XInv);
EINV (IEC/XInv);
MINV (ANSI/XInv);
VINV (ANSI/XInv);
EINV (ANSI/XInv);
Thermal Flat;
Therm Flat IT;
Therm Flat I2T; and
Therm Flat I4T.
For tripping curves please refer to the “Appendix/Time Current Curves (Ground Current)” section.
The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual
connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents. However, this is only
possible if the current transformers are Wye-connected.
382
www.eaton.com
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings**
IH2.Blo IG
www.eaton.com
3
Active
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
φ
RMS
Fund.
Name.Criterion
Please Refer to Diagram: IH2*
Inactive
Name.IGH2 Blo
Name.* Fault in Projected Direction
Please Refer to Diagram: Direction Decision Ground Fault
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
IX Calculated
8
10
4
Name = 51R[1]...[n]
51R[1]...[n]
Name.Pickup
AND
AND
AND
Based on above parameters, tripping
times and reset modes will be calculated
by the device.
INV
φ
Name.Reset Mode
Name.t-reset
Name.t-multiplier
Name.Curve Shape
AND
Name.TripCmd
Name.Pickup
27d
15
19d
Name.Trip
14
Name.IGH2 Blo*
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
*=Applies only to devices that offer Inrush Protection
383
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the 51R/67R Ground Fault Protection
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
51R[1]: Non-directional,
Nondirectional
[Device Planning]
Forward,
Reverse
51R[2]: Do not use,
Non-directional,
Forward,
Reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the 51R/67R Ground Fault Protection
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
Rvs Blo
Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
AdaptSet 1
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
384
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
AdaptSet 2
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
AdaptSet 3
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
AdaptSet 4
Assignment Adaptive Parameter 4
AdaptSet
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the 51R/67R Ground Fault Protection
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Active
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Rvs Blo Fc
Blo TripCmd
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
reverse blocking of the module/element.
This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/element are blocked
that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active".
Inactive
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive
Inactive,
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
www.eaton.com
385
IM02602007E
Parameter
EDR-5000
Description
Default
Menu Path
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
[Protection Para
Criterion
True RMS
Measuring method: fundamental or Reset
Setting Range
Fundamental,
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
True RMS
[Protection Para
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
Pickup
If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.02 – 20.00 In
element will be started.
51R[1]: 0.1 In
[Protection Para
51R[2]: 0.5 In
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
Curve Shape
Characteristic
IEC NINV,
ANSI MINV
[Protection Para
IEC VINV,
/<n>
IEC EINV,
/I-Prot
IEC LINV,
/51R[1]]
ANSI MINV,
ANSI VINV,
ANSI EINV,
Therm Flat,
IT,
I2T,
I4T
t-multiplier
Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor. 0.02 - 20.00
The setting range depends on the selected
tripping curve.
51R[1]: 1
[Protection Para
51R[2]: 2
/<n>
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
386
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Reset Mode
Reset Mode
Instantaneous,
Calculated
[Protection Para
t-delay,
/<n>
Calculated
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
t-reset
Reset time for intermittent phase failures
(INV characteristics only)
0.00 – 60.00 s
0.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if:Reset Mode = t-delay
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
51R/67R Ground Fault Protection Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
www.eaton.com
387
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/I-Prot
/51R[1]]
51R/67R Ground Fault Protection Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Active AdaptSet
Active Adaptive Parameter
DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
Commissioning: Ground Fault Protection – Non-directional [ANSI 51R/67R]
Please test the non-directional ground overcurrent analog to the non-directional phase overcurrent protection.
388
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
ZI - Zone Interlocking
Elements
ZI
Principle – General Use
The purpose of zone interlocking is to speed up tripping for some faults without sacrificing the coordination of the
system and interjecting nuisance trips into the system. Zone interlocking devices can communicate across
distribution zones to determine whether or not a device sees a fault condition.
Zone interlocking is a communication scheme used with breakers and protective relays to improve the level of
protection in a power distribution system. This is achieved through communication between the downstream
and upstream devices in a power system. The zones are classified by their location downstream of the main
circuit protective device which is generally defined as Zone 1.
By definition, a selectively coordinated system is one where by adjusting the trip unit pickup and time delay
settings, the breaker closest to the fault trips first. The upstream breaker serves two functions: (1) back-up
protection to the downstream breaker and (2) protection of the conductors between the upstream and
downstream breakers.
For faults which occur on the conductors between the upstream and downstream breakers, it is ideal for the
upstream breaker to trip with no time delay. This is the feature provided by Zone Selective Interlocking.
The zone interlocking information can be transferred to or received from other compatible zone interlocking
devices by means of suitable communication cables. The single zone interlock terminal block, with its 3-wire
scheme, can be used for either phase zone interlocking, ground zone interlocking, or a combination of the two.
If phase and ground zone interlocking are combined, the potential consequences must be understood before
implementation.
Systems containing multiple sources, or where the direction of power flow varies,
require special considerations, or may not be suitable for this feature.
The breaker failure pickup signal »BF.PICKUP« is implicitly connected to zone
interlocking, so that NO zone interlock output signal can be sent to the upstream
device if a breaker failure on a downstream device is detected.
Description of the Functions and Features
•
Configurable protection functions to initiate the zone interlocking OUTPUT signal (start functions).
•
Remove zone interlocking OUTPUT signal immediately after detection of a breaker failure.
•
Reset time (about ten cycles - settable) to interrupt OUTPUT signal for durable trip signal.
•
Small trip delay (about three cycles – settable) to wait for downstream devices interlocking signals.
•
Zone interlocking trip signal only possible by absence of zone interlocking INPUT signals.
•
Configurable zone interlocking trip functions (protective functions serve as zone interlocking trip
functions).
•
Zone interlocking trip function pickup and tripping characteristic adaption using adaptive settings
controlled by the zone interlocking input signals.
www.eaton.com
389
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Zone Interlocking
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Use
Use
[Device Planning]
Global Protection Parameters of the Zone Interlocking
In the global parameter menu for zone interlocking, two external blocking inputs (»Ex Block1/Ex Block2«), as
with other protection modules, can be assigned to the input of the zone interlocking function so that the zone
interlock function can be blocked by an assigned functions
Via an external input signal, the zone interlocking can also be blocked if the parameter »ExtBlockTripCMD« is
assigned.
Breaker Failure Pickup flag BF.Pickup is implicitly connected to zone
interlocking, so that NO zone interlock output signal can be sent to the
upstream device if a breaker failure on downstream device is detected.
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ZI]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ZI]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ZI]
Setting Group Parameters of the Zone Interlocking
The zone interlocking Setting Group Parameters consists of three groups of setting to configure the zone
interlocking module to adapt to various application philosophies accordingly:
•
General: This group comprises the settings used to control the general usage of the zone interlocking
module.
•
OUTPUT: What should be assigned to the Zone Out?
- Phase,
- Ground, or
- Both.
•
The OUTPUT group comprises the settings to configure the zone interlocking output logic. If the zone
interlocking application is used to a downstream device, the settings in OUTPUT group should be
programmed accordingly. If the zone interlocking application is only used for an upstream device (main
390
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
breaker or Zone 1), the setting ZoneInterlockOut within the OUTPUT group should be disabled.
•
TRIP: Activate the Zone Trip.
The TRIP group comprises the settings used to configure the zone interlocking TRIP logic. If the zone
interlocking application is applied to an upstream device, (main breaker or Zone 1), the settings in the
TRIP group should be programmed accordingly. If the zone interlocking application is only used for a
downstream device (feeder breaker or Zone 2), the setting ZoneInterlockTrip in TRIP group should be
disabled.
Setting the above mentioned setting groups accordingly the zone interlocking module can be configured as:
•
Downstream device application (using only OUTPUT logic);,
•
Upstream device application (using only TRIP logic); or
•
Midstream device application (using both OUTPUT and TRIP logic together).
The following menu and tables show the detailed information about the settings.
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/ZI
/General Settings]
ExBlo Fc
Blo TripCmd
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive
Inactive,
[Protection Para
/<n>
/ZI
/General Settings]
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/ZI
/General Settings]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
www.eaton.com
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
/ZI
/General Settings]
391
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
ZI OUT Fc
Zone Interlocking Out activate (allow) /
inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Active
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/ZI
/Zone Out]
Fault Type
Fault Type
Phase,
Both
[Protection Para
Ground,
/<n>
Both
/ZI
/Zone Out]
Trip
Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip
Inactive,
Active
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/ZI
/Zone Trip]
Fault Type
Fault Type
Phase,
Both
[Protection Para
Ground,
/<n>
Both
/ZI
/Zone Trip]
Zone Interlocking Output Logic [X2]
The following current protective function elements serve as the Phase Zone Interlock OUTPUT start functions:
•
•
•
51P[1];
50P[1]; and
50P[2].
The following current protective function serves as the Ground Zone Interlock OUTPUT start functions:
•
•
•
•
392
51X[1];
50X[1];
51R[1]; and
50R[1].
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Zone Interlocking OUTPUT Logic Timing
51P[1].Pickup
1
0
t
51P[1].Trip
1
0
t
Reset Timer
10 Cycles
1
0
t
ZI.Bkr Blo
1
0
t
ZI.OUT
1
0
t
STATE
TRANSFER
STANDBY
STARTED
TRIPPED
www.eaton.com
RESET
STANDBY
393
394
Ground
Phase
Both
www.eaton.com
51R[1].Pickup
50R[1].Pickup
51X[1].Pickup
50X[1].Pickup
51P[1].Pickup
50P[2].Pickup
50P[1].Pickup
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Fault Type
2
X2: ZI.Zone Out
Inactive
Active
ZI OUT Fc
51R[1].TripCmd
50R[1].TripCmd
51X[1].TripCmd
50X[1].TripCmd
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
BF[1].Trip
50P[1].TripCmd
51P[1].TripCmd
50P[2].TripCmd
OR
AND
AND
t
t
166 ms
166 ms
AND
AND
OR
ZI[1].Ground OUT
ZI[1].Bkr Blo
ZI[1].OUT
ZI[1].Phase OUT
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Zone Interlocking Trip Logic [X2]
The following overcurrent protection elements trigger Phase Zone-Interlock trip functions:
1.5 * 51P[1];
50P[1]; and
50P[2].
•
•
•
The following overcurrent protection elements trigger Ground Zone Interlock trip functions:
51X[1];
50X[1];
51R[1]; and
50R[1].
•
•
•
•
Zone Interlocking TRIP Logic Timing
51P[1].Pickup
1
0
t
ZI.IN
1
0
t
Trip Delay Timer
3 Cycles
1
0
t
ZI.Pickup
1
0
t
ZI.Trip
1
t
0
STANDBY
STARTED
TRIPPED
STANDBY
INTERLOCKED
STANDBY
STATE
TRANSFER
www.eaton.com
395
396
3
2
www.eaton.com
51R[1].Pickup
50R[1].Pickup
51X[1].Pickup
50X[1].Pickup
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
Ground
Phase
Both
Fault Type
1.5*51P[1].Pickup
50P[2].Pickup
50P[1].Pickup
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
X2: ZI.Zone Trip
Inactive
Active
Trip
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
ZI.IN
AND
AND
t
t
50 ms
50 ms
OR
OR
ZI[1].Pickup
14
14
ZI[1].Ground Trip
15
ZI[1].TripCmd
ZI[1].Trip
ZI[1].Ground Pickup
AND
14
ZI[1].Phase Trip
ZI[1].Phase Pickup
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Zone Interlocking Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ZI]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ZI]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/ZI]
Bkr Blo-I
Signal: Blocked by Breaker Failure
[]
Zone Interlocking Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Bkr Blo
Signal: Blocked by Breaker Failure
Phase Pickup
Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Pickup
Phase Trip
Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Trip
Ground Pickup
Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Pickup
Ground Trip
Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Trip
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Zone Interlocking
Trip
Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Command
Phase OUT
Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase OUT
Ground OUT
Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground OUT
OUT
Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT
IN
Signal: Zone Interlocking IN
Zone Interlocking Wiring
The ZI Outputs are for use with connection to electronic inputs only.
The zone interlocking connection between relays is done by means of a twisted shielded cable. Downstream
www.eaton.com
397
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
zone interlock outputs may be paralleled from up to ten devices (FP-5000 or DT-3000 or a combination of both)
for connection to upstream zone interlocked relays.
Zone 1
FP-X000
J3
Out
1
In
4
Com
2
Zone 2
EDR-X000
FP-X000
X2
Zone 3
Shield
13
Out
1
Out
14
In
4
Com
2
Com
15
Shield
16
In
17
Com
18
DT-3000
Ground
Phase
J3
EDR-X000
FP-X000
Out
13
In
14
Out
15
Shield
13
In
16
Out
14
Com
18
Com
15
Shield
16
In
17
Com
18
J3
X2
Out
1
In
4
Com
2
Hardware Terminals for Zone Interlocking
By means of the zone interlocking terminals, the device can be connected to other Eaton protective devices such
as an FP5000, DT3000, etc.
As an upstream device, the terminals - Phase/Ground IN should be connected to the OUT terminals of up to ten
downstream device(s) by means of a dedicated cable wired in parallel. As a downstream device, the terminals Phase/Ground OUT should be connected to the IN terminals of an upstream device by means of a dedicated
cable.
398
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Terminal Marking X2 for Device: EDR-3000
X?.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
IRIG-B+
IRIG-B-
RO3
SC
OUT
COM
IN
COM
www.eaton.com
399
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Terminal Marking X2 for Device: EDR-4000 and EDR-5000
X?.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
400
Do not use
Do not use
RO1
RO2
RO3
RO4
OUT
COM
IN
COM
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
79 - Automatic Reclosure
AR
The autoreclosure is used to minimize outages on overhead lines. The majority1 (>60% in medium voltage and
>85% in high voltage) of faults (arc flash over) on overhead lines are temporary and can be cleared by means of
the autoreclosure element.
De-select the autoclosure element within the device planning menu if the
protective device is used in order to protect cables, generators, or
transformers.
Features
The autoreclose function is designed with diverse, very comprehensive yet flexible features which meet all
requirements of different utility concepts and technical applications.
The available features of the autoreclose function can be summarized as follows.
•
Flexible assignment of initiate functions for individual shots.
•
Maximum of six autoreclose shots.
•
Dynamic adjustment of protection setting values (e.g.: pickup, time delay tripping curve, etc.) during
autoreclose process via adaptive set concept.
•
Reclose shots per hour limit.
•
Autorecloser wear monitor with maintenance alarm.
•
Programmable reclosing blocking feature.
•
Auto zone coordination with downstream reclosers.
•
Automatic manual-breaker-close blocking feature.
•
Manual/Auto reset lockout (panel, contact input, communications, etc.).
•
Autoreclose with Sync-check (Only in conjunction with internal Sync-check and Control modules).
•
External AR shot counter increment is possible.
•
Automatic autoreclose result evaluation (successful/unsuccessful).
•
Separate counters to register total, successful/unsuccessful reclosing numbers.
1: Protective Relaying: Principles and Applications, ISBN 978-0824799182
www.eaton.com
401
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Via the pre shot (fast trip), the AR-module is able to trip the breaker ahead
of the protection stage that has activated the AR-module. As a general rule,
a fast trip is either issued before the first reclosure attempt or after the last
permitted reclosure attempt.
1. At the beginning of the sequence, a “Pre shot” (Fast trip) is
executed before the time overcurrent protection element of any
device on the line completely times out. Purpose: to clear the fault
before any of the circuit protection trips or blows open. A short
time after the pre-shot occurs, the breaker can be re-closed into the
line and all circuits connected on the line will still be energized.
80%-90% of the faults are not permanent. After a period from 0.5 up
to 1 sec., the line is probably no longer faulty and the complete line
can be re-energized. If the line is still faulty, segments of the line
will be switched off selectively by the time overcurrent protection
module as a result of the system coordination.
2. A Pre shot (Fast trip) at the end of the reclosure sequence occurs
after the last permitted reclosure shot. Purpose: To prevent
unnecessary damage from the electrical equipment in case of
permanent faults. If the last reclosure attempt is executed and the
fault is still present, then the breaker can be tripped quickly before
the time overcurrent protection module has completely timed out.
The following table gives a folder (structure) overview.
AR Menu Folder
Purpose
AR
Within this menu, external blockings, external lockings, external shot increments
and external resets can be assigned. Those external events can only become
effective, if they have been activated (allowed) within the General Settings.
Please see table row below.
Path:
[Protection Para\Global Prot Para\AR]
General Settings
Within this menu several general settings can be activated: the function itself,
external blocking, zone coordination, external locking, and external shot increment
Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\General can be set to active. The corresponding trigger events (e.g.: digital inputs)
Settings]
have to be assigned within the corresponding global protection parameters.
Please see table row above.
Furthermore, this menu contains some timers, the number of permitted reclosure
attempts, the alarm mode (trip/alarm), and the reset mode can be set.
Shot Manager
Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\Shot
Manager]
In Shot manager setting menu, the control logic between individual shots and
protective functions will be specified. For each shot (inclusive the pre shot), the
trigger (start) events can be assigned.
For each shot, a maximum of four initiate functions (protective functions which are
dedicated to start this shot) can be selected from a list of available protective
functions.
When the autoreclosure process is running in the shot X stage, the corresponding
protection and control settings will be used to control the operation during this stage.
In addition, the dead times have to be set. For each shot, its dead time will be set
individually, except for the shot 0, for which no dead timer setting is necessary. The
shot 0 is just a virtual state to define the time before the first shot is to issue. Each
dead timer specifies the time duration which has to be expired before the reclosure
command for this shot can be issued.
402
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
AR Wear Supervision
Path: [Protection Para\Set[x]\AR\AR
Wear Superv]
BlockFct
Path: [Protection
Para\Set[x]\AR\BlockFct]
IM02602007E
In this setting menu two Service Alarms can be set as well as the number of
permissible reclosure attempts per hour.
This group of settings specifies the protection functions by which the autoreclosure
function must be blocked even if the autoreclosure function is already initiated.
Note the difference between the protection function which can be blocked by
autorecloser and the function(s) here to block the autorecloser.
AR States
The following diagram shows the state transitions between the various states of the autoreclosure function. This
diagram visualizes the run time logic and timing sequence according to the state transition direction and the
events which trigger the transitions.
www.eaton.com
403
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
State transition diagram.
Initiate AR
1
Bkr=Pos CLOSE
& t-ManualCloseBlock=timer elapsed
Bkr=Pos OPEN
Ready
successful
InitiateFc=True
Blo=False
Lock=True
t-Reset Lockout=timer elapsed
3
Bkr=Pos CLOSE
Bkr=Pos OPEN
& t-ManualCloseBlock=timer elapsed
Standby
4
t-ManualCloseBlock
Blo=True
AR Cycle
2
Start
6
Lock=True
Lockout
t-dead
t-Run2Ready
AR.Blo=True
Lock=True
Reset Lockout=True
Blo=True
5
7
Blocked
t-Reset Lockout
In general, the autoreclosure function is only active (will be initiated) when all of the following conditions are met:
•
404
Autoreclosure function is enabled (In AR General Setting: Function =active);
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
•
Breaker contact(s) (52a or/and 52b) is (are) installed and has (have) been programmed; and
•
Autoreclosure is not blocked by the blocking inputs (ExBlo1/2).
IM02602007E
1 Standby
The autoreclosure is in this state when the following conditions are met:
•
•
•
The breaker is in the open position;
The autoreclose function is not initiated from any initiate (start) functions; and
No external or internal AR blocking signals are present.
No autoreclose shot operation is possible if the autoreclose function is within
Standby state.
2 t-manual close block
Suppose that the breaker is open and the AR state is in Standby state. Then the breaker is closed manually.
The event “CB Pos On” starts a Manual-Close-Blocking timer and results in a state transition from »STANDBY« to
a transit state - »T-BLO AFTER CB MAN ON«. The autoreclosure function changes into the »READY« state only as the
Manual-Close-Blocking timer elapses and the breaker is closed. By means of the manual close blocking timer, a
faulty starting of the autoreclose function in case of a Switch-OnTo-Fault condition is prevented.
3 Ready
An activated autoreclose function is considered to be in »READY« state when all of the following conditions are
true:
•
The breaker is in closed position;
•
The Manual-Close-Block-timer elapses after a breaker manual/remote close operation;
•
The autoreclose function is not initiated from any initiate (start) functions; and
•
No external or internal AR blocking signals are present.
An autoreclose start is only possible if the autoreclose function is in Ready state.
4 Run (Cycle)
The »RUN« state can only be reached if the following conditions are fulfilled:
www.eaton.com
405
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
•
The autoreclose was in »READY« state before;
•
The breaker was in closed position before;
•
No external or internal AR Blocking signals exist; and
•
At least one of the assigned initiate functions is true (triggers the Autoreclosure).
A complete autoreclose process with multi-shot reclosing will be accomplished
inside the Run state.
If the autoreclose gets into the »RUN« state, the autoreclose function transfers its control to a »RUN« state control
automatically with several subordinate states which will be described in detail in the next section (AR Cycle).
5 Blocked
An activated autoreclose function goes into the »BLOCKED« state when one of the assigned blocking functions is
true.
The autoreclose function exits the »BLOCKED« state if the assigned blocking signal is no longer present.
6 Lockout
An activated autoreclose function goes into the »LOCKOUT« state when one of the following conditions is true:
•
An unsuccessful autoreclose is detected after all programmed autoreclose shots. The fault is of
permanent nature;
•
Reclose failure (incomplete sequence);
•
Autoreclose rate per hour exceeds the limit;
•
Breaker failure during AR starting;
•
Manual breaker close operation during autoreclose process;
•
At least one protective function is still tripping before the reclose command is issued; or
The autoreclose function exits the »LOCKOUT« state if the programmed lockout reset signal asserts and
programmed Lockout Reset timer elapses.
A Service Alarm (Service Alarm 1 or Service Alarm 2) will not lead to a lockout of
the AR function.
406
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
AR Cycle (Shot)
4 Run (Cycle)
The following drawing shows the state transitions in detail inside an AR run cycle.
11
Ready
Initiate AR: InitiateFc=Trip
----------------------------------tCB-Open start
13
Waiting Bkr Open
AR.Lock=True
AR.Blo=True
Bkr=Pos OPEN
-----------------t-D: timer started
14
Initiate AR: InitiateFc=Trip
&&(ShotCounter<set)
-----------------------------------t-CB open start
AR.Blo=True
t-dead
AR.Lock=True
tD=OUT&
CB=OFF&
CB_READY=TRUE&
Trip
=False
--------------------------------------------Shot=Shot+1 &
tCI start & Shot=Shot+1 &
tCI start & CB_CLOSE=True
15
AR.Lock=True
AR.Blo=True
Reclosing
Bkr=Pos CLOSE
----------------------------------------tR2R start&
CB_CLOSE=False
16
t-Run2Ready
AR.Lock=True
AR.Blo=True
tR2R=OUT&&
Bkr=Pos CLOSE
-------------------------AR.successful
11
Ready
www.eaton.com
407
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
11 Ready
An activated autoreclose function is considered to be in »READY« state when all of the following conditions are
true:
•
The breaker is in closed position;
•
The Manual-Close-Block-timer elapses after a breaker manual/remote close operation;
•
The autoreclose function is not initiated from any initiate (start) functions; and
•
No external or internal AR blocking signals are present.
13 Waiting Bkr Open
While in the »W AITING BKR OPEN« state, the autoreclosure supervises if the breaker is really tripped (open) after
receiving the trip flag of the initiate protection function within a pre-set breaker supervision time (200 ms). If this
is the case, the autoreclosure starts the programmed dead timer and goes to the dead timing state »t-dead«.
14 t-dead
While in the dead timing state »t-dead«, the pre-set dead timer for current AR shot is timing and cannot be
interrupted unless there are any blocking or lockout conditions coming.
After dead timer elapses, the autoreclosure issues the breaker reclosing command and goes into the next state:
»RECLOSING«, only if the following conditions are met:
The breaker is in open position;
The breaker is ready for next reclosing operation (if the Bkr. Ready logic input is used);
No pickup from current (assigned) AR initiate function(s);
No trip from current (assigned) AR initiate function(s); and
No general tipping command.
•
•
•
•
•
Before issuing the breaker reclosing command, the current shot counter will be incremented. This is very
important for the shot-controlled initiate and blocking functions. Before entering into the »RECLOSING« state, the
pre-set breaker reclosing supervision timer (»t-Brk-ON-cmd«) will also be started.
15 Reclosing
If there is no other blocking or lockout conditions and the breaker is closed while the breaker reclosing
supervision timer is timing, the autoreclosure starts the »t-Run2Ready« timer and goes into the state: »TRUN2READY«.
408
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
16 t-Run2Ready
Successful Autoreclosure:
While in »T-RUN2READY« state, if there is no other blocking or lockout conditions and no more faults detected
within the »t-Run2Ready« timer, the autoreclosure logic will leave the »RUN« state and goes back to the »READY«
state. The flag “successful” is set.
Unsuccessful Autoreclose:
If a fault is detected again (the shot-controlled initiate function is triggering) while »t-Run2Ready« timer is still
timing, the autoreclosure control again transfers to the »RUNNING« state. For a permanent fault, the process
described before will be repeated until all programmed shots were operated and the autoreclose process
changes into the »LOCKOUT« state. The flag “failed” is set.
Timing Diagrams
Auto Reclosing timing diagram for unsuccessful 2-shot auto reclosing scheme with acceleration at pre-shot.
Fault
Inception
1
Clearance
0
t
Protection
Pickup
1
Reset
0
50P[1].DefaultSet
50P[1]. AdaptSet1
51P[1]
t
Protection
Trip
1
Reset
0
50P[1].Fasttrip
50P[1].Trip
51P[1].Trip
t
Bkr State
Pos CLOSE
1
Pos OPEN
0
t
Reclosing
1
t-D1
t-D2
t-Run2Ready
0
t
Shot
Pre Shot
Shot 1
Shot 2
AR.Running
1
0
t
AR - Module states
Ready
Running
www.eaton.com
Lockout
409
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Auto Reclosing timing diagram for successful 2-shot auto reclosing scheme with acceleration at pre-shot.
Fault
Inception
1
Clearance
0
t
Protection
Pickup
1
Reset
0
50P[1].DefaultSet
50P[1]. AdaptSet1
t
Protection
Trip
1
Reset
0
50P[1].Fasttrip
50P[1].Trip
t
Bkr State
Pos CLOSE
1
Pos OPEN
0
t
Reclosing
1
t-D1
t-D2
t-Run2Ready
0
t
Shot
Pre Shot
Shot 1
Shot 2
AR.Running
1
0
t
AR - Module states
Ready
Ready
Running
Auto Reclosing States during manual breaker closing.
Bkr State
Pos CLOSE
1
Pos OPEN
0
t
Manual Breaker Close
1
t-ManualCloseBlock
0
t
AR - Module states
Standby
t-Man Close Blo
Ready
Protection Trip while Manual Close Blocking time is Timing
What happens if while the timer manual close block time is timing down the protective device gets a trip signal?
While the timer manual close block time is timing, any trip during this time period trips the breaker. The manual
410
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
close block timer does not care about that and timing continues until it times out.
After it times out, the AR-module looks at the breaker status again and sees that the breaker is open. The AR
goes to the »STANDBY« state, no autoreclosure is possible. Note: The AR Does Not go to »LOCKOUT«
state!)
Bkr State
Pos CLOSE
1
Pos OPEN
0
t
Manual Breaker Close
1
0
t
Protection Trip
1
0
t
t-ManualCloseBlock
AR - Module states
Standby
t-Man Close Blo
Standby
AR Lockout Reset Logic in case lockout Reset coming before manual breaker closed.
Bkr State
Pos CLOSE 1
Pos OPEN 0
t
Manual Breaker Close
1
t-ManualCloseBlock
0
t
Lockout Reset
1
Lockout Reset Time
0
t
AR - Module states
Lockout
t-Reset Lockout
Standby
www.eaton.com
t-Man Close Blo
Ready
411
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
AR Lockout Reset Logic in case lockout Reset coming after manual breaker closed.
Bkr State
Pos CLOSE 1
Pos OPEN 0
t
Manual Breaker Close
1
0
t
Lockout Reset
1
t-Lock2Ready
t-ManualCloseBlock
0
t
AR - Module states
Lockout
t-Reset Lockout
t-Man Close Blo
Ready
Zone Coordination
General Description
What does Zone Coordination mean?
Zone Coordination means that the upstream protection device is doing a virtual autoreclosure while the
downstream protective device is doing a “real” autoreclosure. By means of the zone coordination, selectivity can
be kept even if a downstream protective device changes its tripping characteristic after a reclosure cycle. The
virtual autoreclosure of the upstream device follows the downstream autoreclosure.
What application can be realized by means of Zone Coordination?
A radial distribution system is protected by an upstream protective device (with a breaker) and a downstream
protective device with a reclosure and fuse. By means of the zone coordination, a “fuse saving scheme” might
be realized. In order to “save fuses”, the downstream protective device might trip for the first reclosure attempt
at low tripping values (under-grade the fuse, trying to avoid a damaging of the fuse). If the reclosure attempt
fails, the tripping values might be raised (over-grade the fuse) for the second reclosure attempt (using higher
tripping values/characteristics).
What is essential?
The triggering thresholds of the upstream and the downstream devices have to be the same but the tripping
times have to be selectively.
How is Zone Coordination activated?
The zone coordination function is part of the autoreclosure element and it can be enabled by setting the
parameter »Zone coordination« as »active« within the [Protection Para/AR/General Settings] menu for an
upstream feeder protection device.
How does the Zone Coordination work (within the upstream protection device)?
When the zone coordination function is enabled, it works similar to a normal autoreclose function with the same
setting parameters: maximum reclosure attempts, dead timer for each shot, initiate functions for each shot, and
other timers for autoreclose process, but with the following zone coordination features to coordinate with the
downstream reclosers.
•
412
The corresponding dead timer for each shot will be started even if the breaker of the upstream feeder
relay is NOT tripped from the assigned initiate protective functions.
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
•
The dead timer begins timing once the autoreclose senses a drawback of the assigned overcurrent
protection pickup signal. This exhibits that the fault current was tripped by the downstream recloser
opening.
•
The shot counter of an enabled zone coordination will be incremented after the dead timer elapses, even
there is no breaker reclosing command issued. Meanwhile, the »T-RUN2READY« timer is started.
•
If a permanent fault exists after the downstream recloser is reclosed, the fault current makes the
upstream overcurrent protection pick up again, but with the pickup thresholds or operating curves
controlled by the incremented shot number. In this way, the upstream feeder will “follow” the protective
settings of downstream recloser shot by shot.
•
For a transient fault, the autoreclose with zone coordination will not be initiated again because of
absence of the fault current and will be reset normally after the expiration of the reset timer »tRun2Ready«.
www.eaton.com
413
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
t
Protective
Device
Shot 2
(triggered by: I [2])
Shot 1
(triggered by: I [1])
I
t
Shot 2
(triggered by: I [2])
Recloser
Shot 1
(triggered by: I [1])
I
t
Tripping Curve of the Fuse
I
414
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Direct Commands of the Automatic Reclosure Module
Parameter
Description
Default
Menu Path
Res TotNo suc Reset all statistic AR counters: Total
Inactive,
unsuc
number of AR, successful and unsuccessful
no of AR.
Active
Inactive
[Operation
Res ServiceCr
Inactive
Reset the Service Counters
Setting Range
/Reset]
Inactive,
[Operation
Active
Reset Lock via Reset the AR Lockout via the panel.
HMI
/Reset]
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
Res Max Shots Resetting the Counter for the maximum
/ h Cr
allowed shots per hour.
/Reset]
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
/Reset]
Device Planning Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
Ex Shot Inc
The AR Shot counter will be incremented by 1..n, DI-LogicList
this external Signal. This can be used for
Zone Coordination (of upstream Auto
Reclosure devices).
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
Ex Lock
The auto reclosure will locked out by this
external Signal (set into the lockout state).
1..n, DI-LogicList
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
www.eaton.com
415
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
DI Reset Ex
Lock
The Lockout State of the AR can be reset
by a digital input.
1..n, DI-LogicList
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
Comm Reset
Ex Lock
The Lockout State of the AR can be reset
by Communication.
-.-,
-.-
[Protection Para
Modbus.Comm Cmd 1,
/Global Prot Para
Modbus.Comm Cmd 2,
/AR]
Modbus.Comm Cmd 3,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 4,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 5,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 6,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 7,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 8,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 9,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 10,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 11,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 12,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 13,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 14,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 15,
Modbus.Comm Cmd 16
Setting Group Parameters of the Module Automatic Reclosure
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/AR
/General Settings]
416
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
ExBlo Fc
Zone
coordination
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
[Protection Para
Zone coordination: Sequence coordination Inactive,
is to keep upstream reclosers in step with
the downstream ones for fast and delay
Active
curve operation, thus avoiding over-tripping
Inactive
/<n>
/AR
/General Settings]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/General Settings]
Ex Shot Inc Fc The AR Shot counter will be incremented by Inactive,
this external Signal. This can be used for
Zone Coordination (of upstream Auto
Active
Reclosure devices). Note: This parameter
enables the functionality only. The
assignment has to be set within the global
parameters.
Inactive
Ex Lock Fc
Inactive
The auto reclosure will locked out by this
external Signal. Note: This parameter
enables the functionality only. The
assignment has to be set within the global
parameters.
Inactive,
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/General Settings]
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/General Settings]
Reset Mode
Reset Mode
Auto,
Auto
[Protection Para
HMI,
/<n>
DI,
/AR
Comm,
/General Settings]
HMI And Comm,
HMI And DI,
Comm And DI,
HMI And DI
Attempts
Maximum number of permitted reclosure
attempts.
1-6
1
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/General Settings]
www.eaton.com
417
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
t-D1
Dead time between trip and reclosure
attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase
or a ground fault.
0.01 – 9999.00 s
1s
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 1-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 1]
t-D2
Dead time between trip and reclosure
attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase
or a ground fault.
0.01 – 9999.00 s
1s
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 2-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 2]
t-D3
Dead time between trip and reclosure
attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase
or a ground fault.
0.01 – 9999.00 s
1s
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 3-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 3]
t-D4
Dead time between trip and reclosure
attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase
or a ground fault.
0.1 – 9999.00 s
1s
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 4-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 4]
t-D5
Dead time between trip and reclosure
attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase
or a ground fault.
0.01 – 9999.00 s
1s
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 5-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 5]
t-D6
Dead time between trip and reclosure
attempt. Can be initiated either by a phase
or a ground fault.
0.01 – 9999.00 s
1s
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 6]
418
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
tThis timer will be started if the Breaker was 0.01 – 9999.00 s
ManualCloseBl switched on manually. While this timer is
ock
running, AR cannot be started.
Default
Menu Path
10.0 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/General Settings]
t-Lock2Ready
This timer is started by the lockout reset
signal, and before the timer expire the AR
cannot go to any other state.
0.01 – 9999.00 s
10.0 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/General Settings]
t-Run2Ready
Examination Time: If the Breaker remains 0.01 – 9999.00 s
after an reclosure attempt (shot) for the
duration of this timer in the Closed position,
the AR has been successful and the AR
module returns into the ready state.
10.0 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/General Settings]
t-Block2Ready The release (de-blocking) of the AR will be
delayed for this time, if there is no blocking
signal anymore.
0.01 – 9999.00 s
10.0 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/General Settings]
t-AR
Supervision
AR Overall supervision time (> sum of all
the timers used by AR)
1.00 – 9999.00 s
100.0 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/General Settings]
Service Alarm
1
As soon as the AR-Counter exceeds this
1 - 65535
number of reclosure attempts, an alarm will
be given out (overhauling of the Bkr.)
1000
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/AR Wear Superv]
Service Alarm
2
Too many auto reclosure attempts. If the
1 - 65535
configured number of AR cycles is reached,
an alarm will be given out.
65535
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/AR Wear Superv]
www.eaton.com
419
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Max AR/h
Maximum Number of permitted
Autoreclosure Cycles per hour.
1 - 20
10
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/AR Wear Superv]
Initiate AR:
InitiateFc1
Initiate Auto Reclosure : Initiate Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Initiate AR]
Initiate AR:
InitiateFc2
Initiate Auto Reclosure : Initiate Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Initiate AR]
Initiate AR:
InitiateFc3
Initiate Auto Reclosure : Initiate Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Initiate AR]
Initiate AR:
InitiateFc4
Initiate Auto Reclosure : Initiate Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Initiate AR]
Shot 1:
InitiateFc1
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 1-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 1]
420
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Shot 1:
InitiateFc2
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 1-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 1]
Shot 1:
InitiateFc3
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 1-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 1]
Shot 1:
InitiateFc4
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 1-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 1]
Shot 2:
InitiateFc1
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 2-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 2]
Shot 2:
InitiateFc2
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 2-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 2]
Shot 2:
InitiateFc3
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 2-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 2]
www.eaton.com
421
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Shot 2:
InitiateFc4
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 2-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 2]
Shot 3:
InitiateFc1
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 3-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 3]
Shot 3:
InitiateFc2
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 3-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 3]
Shot 3:
InitiateFc3
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 3-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 3]
Shot 3:
InitiateFc4
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 3-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 3]
Shot 4:
InitiateFc1
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 4-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 4]
422
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Shot 4:
InitiateFc2
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 4-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 4]
Shot 4:
InitiateFc3
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 4-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 4]
Shot 4:
InitiateFc4
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 4-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 4]
Shot 5:
InitiateFc1
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 5-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 5]
Shot 5:
InitiateFc2
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 5-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 5]
Shot 5:
InitiateFc3
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 5-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 5]
www.eaton.com
423
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Shot 5:
InitiateFc4
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 5-6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 5]
Shot 6:
InitiateFc1
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 6]
Shot 6:
InitiateFc2
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 6]
Shot 6:
InitiateFc3
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 6]
Shot 6:
InitiateFc4
Automatic Reclosure Attempt : Initiate
Function
Start fct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Attempts = 6
/AR
/Shot Manager
/Shot 6]
Module Automatic Reclosure Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
424
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
Ex Shot Inc-I
Module input state: The AR Shot counter
[Protection Para
will be incremented by this external Signal.
This can be used for Zone Coordination (of /Global Prot Para
upstream Auto Reclosure devices). Note:
This parameter enables the functionality
/AR]
only. The assignment has to be set within
the global parameters.
Ex Lock-I
Module input state: External AR lockout.
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
DI Reset Ex Lock-I
Module input state: Resetting the lockout
state of the AR (if the resetting via digital
inputs has been selected).
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
Comm Reset Ex Lock-I
Module input state: Resetting the Lockout
State of the AR by Communication.
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/AR]
Module Automatic Reclosure Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Standby
Signal: Standby
t-Man Close Blo
Signal: AR blocked after breaker was switched on manually. This
timer will be started if the breaker was switched on manually.
While this timer is running, AR cannot be started.
Ready
Signal: Ready to shoot
Running
Signal: Auto Reclosing Running
t-dead
Signal: Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt
Bkr CLOSE Cmd
Signal: Bkr. Switch ON (CLOSE) Command
t-Run2Ready
Signal: Examination Time: If the Breaker remains after a reclosure
attempt (shot) for the duration of this timer in the Closed position,
the AR has been successful and the AR module returns into the
ready state.
Lock
Signal: Auto Reclosure is locked out
t-Reset Lockout
Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR lockout. The reset of the
AR lockout state will be delayed for this time after the reset signal
(e.g digital input or Scada) has been detected.
www.eaton.com
425
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Blo
Signal: Auto Reclosure is blocked
t-Blo Reset
Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR blocking. The release
(de-blocking) of the AR will be delayed for this time, if there is no
blocking signal anymore.
successful
Signal: Auto Reclosing successful
failed
Signal: Auto Reclosing Failure
t-AR Supervision
Signal: AR Supervision
Pre Shot
Pre Shot Control
Shot 1
Shot Control
Shot 2
Shot Control
Shot 3
Shot Control
Shot 4
Shot Control
Shot 5
Shot Control
Shot 6
Shot Control
Service Alarm 1
Signal: AR - Service Alarm 1, too many switching operations
Service Alarm 2
Signal: AR - Service Alarm 2, too many switching operations
Max Shots / h exceeded
Signal: The maximum allowed number of shots per hour has been
exceeded.
Res Statistics Cr
Signal: Reset all statistic AR counters: Total number of AR,
successful and unsuccessful no of AR.
Res Service Cr
Signal: Reset the Service Counters for pickup and blocking.
Reset Lockout
Signal: The AR Lockout has been reset via the panel.
Res Max Shots / h
Signal: The Counter for the maximum allowed shots per hour has
been reset.
ARRecCState
Signal: AutoReclosing states defined by IEC61850:1=Ready/2=In
Progress/3=Successful
Automatic Reclosure Module Values
Value
Description
Default
Size
Menu Path
AR Shot No.
Counter - Auto Reclosure Attempts
0
0-6
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Total number Cr
Total number of all executed
Automatic Reclosures Attempts
0
0 - 65536
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Cr successfl
Total number of successfully
executed Automatic Reclosures
0
0 - 65536
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/AR]
426
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Default
Size
Menu Path
Cr failed
Total number of unsuccessfully
executed automatic reclosure
attempts
0
0 - 65536
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Cr Service Alarm1
Remaining numbers of ARs until
Service Alarm 1
1000
0 - 1000
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Cr Service Alarm2
Remaining numbers of ARs until
Service Alarm 2
65536
0 - 65536
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Max Shots / h Cr
Counter for the maximum allowed
shots per hour.
0
0 - 65536
[Operation
/Count and RevData
/AR]
Setting Group Parameters of the AR Abort Functions
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment: 1
Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the
assigned signal is true. If the state of this
function is true the AR will be aborted.
BlockFct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/BlockFct]
Assignment: 2
Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the
assigned signal is true. If the state of this
function is true the AR will be aborted.
BlockFct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/BlockFct]
Assignment: 3
Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the
assigned signal is true. If the state of this
function is true the AR will be aborted.
BlockFct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/BlockFct]
Assignment: 4
Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the
assigned signal is true. If the state of this
function is true the AR will be aborted.
BlockFct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/BlockFct]
www.eaton.com
427
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Assignment: 5
Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the
assigned signal is true. If the state of this
function is true the AR will be aborted.
BlockFct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/BlockFct]
Assignment: 6
Abort the AR-cycle, if the state of the
assigned signal is true. If the state of this
function is true the AR will be aborted.
BlockFct
-.-
[Protection Para
/<n>
/AR
/BlockFct]
AR Abort Functions
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
50P[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50P[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50P[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50X[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50X[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51X[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51X[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50R[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50R[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51R[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51R[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27M[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27M[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59M[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59M[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27A[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27A[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59A[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59A[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59N[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59N[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
428
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
46[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
46[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
47[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
47[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[4].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[5].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[6].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32V[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32V[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32V[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55D[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55D[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55A[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55A[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[4].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
AR Start Functions
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
50P[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50P[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50P[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50X[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50X[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51X[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51X[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
www.eaton.com
429
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
50R[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50R[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51R[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51R[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
46[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
46[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[4].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
430
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
46 - Current Unbalance Protection
Elements:
46[1] ,46[2]
This is the 46 device Current Unbalance setting, which works similar to the 47 device Voltage Unbalance setting.
The positive and negative sequence currents are calculated from the 3-phase currents. The Threshold setting
defines a minimum operating current magnitude of either I1 or I2 for the 46 function to operate, which insures
that the relay has a solid basis for initiating a current unbalance trip. The »%(I2/I1)« setting is the unbalance trip
pickup setting. It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current »%(I2/I1)« for
ABC rotation and »%(I1/I2)« for ACB rotation. The device will automatically select the correct ratio based on the
Phase Sequence setting in the System Configuration group described above.
This function requires positive or negative sequence current magnitude above the threshold setting and the
percentage current unbalance above the »%(I2/I1)« setting before allowing a current unbalance trip. Therefore,
both the threshold and percent settings must be met for the specified Delay time setting before the relay initiates
a trip for current unbalance.
All elements are identically structured.
www.eaton.com
431
432
www.eaton.com
IC
IB
IA
3
2
%(I2/I1)
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
PPS
NPS
Filter
I2
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Name = 46[1]...[n]
46[1]...[n]
Name.%(I2/I1)
Name.Threshold
AND
AND
0
t
Name.t
AND
14
Name.TripCmd
15
Name.Trip
Name.Pickup
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Current Unbalance Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Current Unbalance Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the Current Unbalance Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
www.eaton.com
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
433
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Blo TripCmd
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
Threshold
0.1 In
The Threshold setting defines a minimum
0.01 – 4.00 In
operating current magnitude of I2 for the 46
function to operate, which ensures that the
relay has a solid basis for initiating a current
unbalance trip. This is a supervisory
function and not a trip level.
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
%(I2/I1)
The %(I2/I1) setting is the unbalance trip
pickup setting. It is defined by the ratio of
negative sequence current to positive
sequence current (% Unbalance=I2/I1), or
%(I2/I1) for ABC rotation and %(I1/I2) for
ACB rotation.
2 - 40%
46[1]: 40%
[Protection Para
46[2]: 20%
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
Only available if: %(I2/I1) = Use
t
Tripping delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
Only available if: Characteristic = DEFT
46[1]: 10 s
[Protection Para
46[2]: 20 s
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
Current Unbalance Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
434
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/46[1]]
Current Unbalance Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Negative Sequence
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Commissioning: Current Unbalance Module
Object to be tested:
Test of the unbalanced load protection function.
Necessary means:
•
Three-phase current source with adjustable current unbalance; and
•
Timer.
Procedure:
Check the phase sequence:
•
Ensure that the phase sequence is the same as that set in the system parameters.
•
Feed-in a three-phase nominal current.
•
Change to the »Measuring Values« menu.
•
Check the measuring value for the unbalanced current »I2 Fund.«. The measuring value displayed for
»I2 Fund.« should be zero (within the physical measuring accuracy).
www.eaton.com
435
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
If the displayed magnitude for I2 Fund. is the same as that for the balanced
nominal currents fed to the relay, it implies that the phase sequence of the
currents seen by the relay is reversed.
•
Now turn-off phase A.
•
Again check the measuring value of the unbalanced current »I2 Fund.« in the »Measuring Values«
menu.
The measuring value of the unbalanced current »I2 Fund.« should now be 33%.
•
Turn-on phase A, but turn-off phase B.
•
Once again check the measuring value of the unbalanced current I2 Fund. in the »Measuring Values«
menu. The measuring value of the asymmetrical current »I2 Fund.« should be again 33%.
•
Turn-on phase B, but turn-off phase C.
•
Again check the measuring value of unbalanced current »I2 Fund.« in the »Measuring Values« menu.
The measuring value of the unbalanced current »I2 Fund.« should still be 33%.
Testing the trip delay:
•
Apply a balanced three-phase current system (nominal currents).
•
Switch off IA (the threshold value »Threshold« for »I2 Fund.« must be below 33%).
•
Measure the tripping time.
The present current unbalance »I2 Fund.« corresponds with 1/3 of the existing phase current displayed.
Testing the threshold values
•
Configure minimum »%(I2/I1)« setting (2%) and an arbitrary threshold value »Threshold« (I2 Fund.).
•
For testing the threshold value, a current has to be fed to phase A which is lower than three times the
adjusted threshold value »Threshold« (I2 Fund.).
•
Feeding only phase A results in »%(I2/I1) = 100%«, so the first condition »%(I2/I1) >= 2%« is always
fulfilled.
•
Now increase the phase A current until the relay is activated.
Testing the drop-out ratio of the threshold values
Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A current. The drop-out ratio must not be
higher than 0.97 times the threshold value.
Testing %(I2/I1)
•
436
Configure minimum threshold value »Threshold« (I2 Fund.) (0.01 x In) and set »%(I2/I1)« greater or
equal to 10%.
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
•
Apply a balanced three-phase current system (nominal currents). The measuring value of »%(I2/I1)«
should be 0%.
•
Now increase the phase A current. With this configuration, the threshold value »Threshold« (I2 Fund.)
should be reached before the value »%(I2/I1)« reaches the set »%(I2/I1)« ratio threshold.
•
Continue increasing the phase 1 current until the relay is activated.
Testing the drop-out ratio of %(I2/I1)
Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A current. The drop-out of »%(I2/I1)« has
to be 1% below the »%(I2/I1)«setting.
Successful test result:
The measured trip delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios are within the permitted deviations/tolerances,
specified under Technical Data.
www.eaton.com
437
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
LOP – Loss of Potential
Available elements:
LOP
LOP function detects the loss of voltage in any of the voltage input measuring circuits and uses the following
measured values and information to detect an LOP condition:
•
Three-phase voltages;
•
Ratio of negative-to-positive sequence voltages;
•
Zero sequence voltage;
•
Three-phase currents;
•
Residual current (I0);
•
Pickup flags from all overcurrent elements; and
•
Breaker status.
Once an LOP condition is detected and it lasts longer than an adjustable minimum pickup time, the LOP Pickup
will be set. The LOP Block will only be set if the LOP-Block control setting is set to enabled (activated). The
LOP Pickup and LOP Block signals can both be used as logical signal to block the protective functions which
use the voltage information such as voltage restraint. The minimum pickup timer is used to prevent short time
incorrect operation of the LOP function during breaker switching-on operation.
438
www.eaton.com
2
Name = LOP
www.eaton.com
Bkr state = closed
No IOC Pickup
3*I0
IC
IB
IA
V0
%(V2/V1)
VC/VCA
VB/VBC
VA/VAB
IOC = Instantaneous Overcurrent
3*I0 < 0.1 x In
I < 2 x In
V0 < 1.0 V
%(V2/V1) > 40%
V < 1.0 V
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Active
Inactive
LOP Blo Enable
LOP[1]...[n]
AND
OR
OR
AND
0
t-Pickup
0.0 9999 s
R
S
Q
0
t-Min Hold Time
50 ms
t-ResetDelay
0
100 ms
AND
AND
Name.LOP Blo
38
Name.Pickup
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
439
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the LOP Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Use
Use
[Device Planning]
Global Protection Parameters of the LOP Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
Setting Group Parameters of the LOP Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Supervision
/LOP]
ExBlo Fc
LOP Blo
Enable
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
blocking by the module LOP.
Inactive
Inactive,
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Supervision
/LOP]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Supervision
/LOP]
440
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
t-Pickup
Pickup Delay
0 – 9999.0 s
0.1 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Supervision
/LOP]
LOP Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/LOP]
State
Module input state: Breaker Position (0 =
Indeterminate, 1 = OPEN, 2 = CLOSE, 3 =
Disturbed)
[]
LOP Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Loss of Potential
LOP Blo
Signal: Loss of Potential blocks other elements
Commissioning: Loss of Potential
Object to be tested:
Testing the LOP.
Necessary means:
•
Three-phase current source and
•
Three-phase voltage source.
www.eaton.com
441
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Procedure part 1:
Examine if the output signals »LOP BLO « (200ms delay) and »LOP« only become true if:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Any of the three-phase voltages becomes less 1 Volt;
and
The residual voltage is less than 1 Volt or the %V2/V1 ratio is greater 40%
and
All three-phase currents are less than 2 * Ipu (rated current);
and
The residual current is less than 0.1 Ipu (rated current);
and
No pickup of an IOC element;
and
The breaker is closed.
Successful test result part 1:
The output signals only become true if all the above mentioned conditions are fulfilled.
Procedure part 2:
Assign the »LOP« or »LOP BLO« output signals to all protection element that should be blocked by LOP (e.g.:
Undervoltage Protection, Voltage Restraint … ).
Test if those elements are blocked if the LOP modules issue a blocking signal.
Successful test result part 2:
All elements that should be blocked in case of LOP are blocked if the conditions (Procedure part 1) are fulfilled.
442
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
SOTF - Switch Onto Fault Protection
SOTF
In case a faulty line is energized (e.g.: when an grounding switch is in the CLOSE position), an instantaneous trip
is required. The SOTF module is provided to generate a permissive signal for other protection functions such as
overcurrents to accelerate their trips. The SOTF condition is recognized according to the User’s operation mode
that can be based on:
•
•
•
•
•
The breaker state;
No current flowing;
Breaker state and no current flowing;
Breaker switched on manually; and/or
An external trigger.
This protection module can initiate a high speed trip of the overcurrent protection modules. The module can be
started via a digital input that indicates that the breaker is manually closed.
This module issues a signal only (the module is not armed and does not
issue a trip command).
In order to influence the trip settings of the overcurrent protection in case
of switching onto a fault, the User has to assign the signal “SOTF.ENABLED“
to an Adaptive Parameter Set. Please refer to Parameter / Adaptive
Parameter Sets sections. Within the Adaptive Parameter Set, the User has
to modify the trip characteristic of the overcurrent protection according to
the User's needs.
www.eaton.com
443
444
www.eaton.com
SOTF.I<
Breaker.Prot CLOSE
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
*Applies only for devices with Auto Reclosure
AR.Running*
Ext SOTF
Bkr[x].Ex Man CLOSE Cmd
IC
IB
IA
41
2
Name = SOTF
SOTF
AND
AND
Ext SOTF
Bkr manual CLOSE
Bkr State And I<
I<
Bkr State
SOTF.Mode
OR
T
t
SOTF.
t-enable
0
OR
AND
SOTF.AR Blo *
SOTF.enabled
SOTF.I<
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Bkr State,
Bkr manual
CLOSE
[Protection Para
I<,
/Global Prot Para
Bkr State And I<,
/SOTF]
Bkr manual CLOSE,
Ext SOTF
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
Rvs Blo
Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
Ext SOTF
External Switch Onto Fault
1..n, DI-LogicList
-.-
Only available if: Mode = Ext SOTF
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
Setting Group Parameters of the Switch Onto Fault Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/SOTF]
www.eaton.com
445
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
ExBlo Fc
Rvs Blo Fc
I<
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
[Protection Para
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
reverse blocking of the module/element.
This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/element are blocked
that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active".
Inactive
The breaker is in the OPEN Position, if the
measured current is less than this
parameter.
0.01 In
/<n>
/SOTF]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/SOTF]
0.01 – 1.00 In
[Protection Para
/<n>
/SOTF]
t-enable
While this timer is running, and while the
module is not blocked, the Switch Onto
Fault Module is effective (SOTF is armed).
0.10 – 10.00 s
2s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/SOTF]
Switch Onto Fault Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
Ex Man CLOSE Cmd-I
Module Input State: External manual
breaker CLOSE command (NOT for AR!)
[]
Bkr Pos-I
Module input state: Breaker Position by now []
(switching position)
Ext SOTF-I
Module Input State: External Switch Onto
Fault Alarm
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/SOTF]
446
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Signals of the Switch Onto Fault Module (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
enabled
Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to
modify Overcurrent Protection Settings.
I<
Signal: No Load Current.
Commissioning: Switch Onto Fault [ANSI 50HS]
Object to be tested:
Testing the module Switch Onto Fault according to the configured operating mode:
•
•
•
•
I< (No current);
Bkr. state (Breaker position);
I< (No current) and Bkr. state (Breaker position); and
Bkr. manual CLOSE.
Necessary means:
•
•
•
Three-phase current source (if the Enable Mode depends on current);
Ampere meters (may be needed if the Enable Mode depends on current); and
Timer.
Test Example for Mode Bkr. Manual CLOSE
Mode I< (In order to test the effectiveness): Initially, do not feed any current.
Start the timer and feed with an abruptly changing current that is distinctly
greater than the I<-threshold to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Mode I< and Bkr. state: Simultaneously, manually switch on the breaker
and feed with an abrupt change current that is distinctly greater than the
I<-threshold.
Mode Bkr. state: The breaker has to be in the OFF position. The signal
„SOTF.ENABLED“=0 is false. If the breaker is switched on, the signal
„SOTF.ENABLED“=1 becomes true as long as the timer t-effective is running.
•
The breaker has to be in the OPEN position. There must be no load current.
•
The status display of the device shows the signal "SOTF.ENABLED“=1.
Testing:
•
Manually switch the breaker to the CLOSE position and start the timer at the same time.
www.eaton.com
447
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
•
After the hold time t-enable is expired, the state of the signal has to change to "SOTF.enabled“=0.
•
Write down the measured time.
Successful test result:
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios correspond
with those values, specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section.
448
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
CLPU - Supervision Module Cold Load Pickup
Available Elements:
CLPU
When manually or automatically closing a breaker after it has been open for a prolonged time, a greater than
normal load current may be experienced due to the load inrush . This high starting current causes some
overcurrent elements to unnecessarily trip the breaker. The cold load pickup (CLPU) function prevents this from
happening.
The cold load pickup function detects a warm-to-cold load transition according to the four selectable cold load
detection modes:
•
•
•
•
Breaker state;
Undercurrent (I<);
Breaker state AND undercurrent; and
Breaker state OR undercurrent.
After a warm-to-cold load transition has been detected, a specified load-off timer will be started. This Usersettable load-off timer is used in some cases to make sure that the load is really “cold” enough. After the loadoff timer times out, the CLPU function issues an “enable” signal »CLPU.ENABLED« that can be used to block Userselected, sensitive protection elements such as instantaneous overcurrent elements, current unbalance, or
power protection elements. Using this enable signal, some User-selected time inverse overcurrent elements
may also be desensitized by means of activating adaptive settings of the corresponding overcurrent elements.
When a cold load condition is finished (a cold-to-warm load condition is detected) due to, for example, breaker
closing or load current injection, a load inrush detector will be initiated that supervises the coming and going of
the load inrush current process. A load inrush is detected if the coming load current exceeds a User-specified
inrush current threshold. This load inrush is considered as finished if the load current is decreased to 90% of the
inrush current threshold.
After the inrush current is diminished, a settle timer starts. The cold load pickup enable signal can only be reset
after the settle timer times out. Another max-Block timer, which is started parallel with the load inrush detector
after a cold load condition is finished, may also terminate the CLPU enable signal if a load inrush condition is
prolonged abnormally.
The cold load pickup function can be blocked manually by external or internal signal at the User´s choice. For
the devices with the Auto-Reclosing function, the CLPU function will be blocked automatically if auto-reclosure is
initiated (AR is running).
This module issues a signal only (it is not armed).
In order to influence the tripping settings of the overcurrent protection, the
User has to assign the signal “CLPU.ENABLED“ to an adaptive parameter set.
Please refer to the Parameter / Adaptive Parameter Sets section. Within the
adaptive parameter set, the User has to modify the tripping characteristic of
the overcurrent protection according to the needs.
www.eaton.com
449
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Please be aware of the meaning of the two delay timers.
t load Off (Pickup Delay): After this time expires, the load is no longer
diversified.
t Max Block (Release Delay): After the starting condition is fulfilled (e.g.:
breaker switched on manually), the “CLPU.enabled” signal will be issued
for this time. That means for the duration of this time, the tripping
thresholds of the overcurrent protection can be desensitized by means of
adaptive parameters (please refer to the Parameters section). This timer
will be stopped if the current falls below 0.9 times of the threshold of the
load inrush detector and remains below 0.9 times of the threshold for the
duration of the settle time.
450
www.eaton.com
CLPU
www.eaton.com
CLPU.I<
Cold Load
*Applies only for devices with Auto Reclosure
0.9 * Threshold
0.9 * Threshold
1.0 * Threshold
1.0 * Threshold
Load Inrush Detector
CLPU.detected
CinBkr-52a
Imax
0
1
0
1
0
1
Name = CLPU
CLPU
AR.Running*
IC
IB
IA
AND
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Bkr[x].Pos OPEN
2
Name = CLPU
Settle Time+e
0
t-Max Block
OR
AND
AND
t-Load Off
0
Settle Time
Bkr State Or I<
Bkr State And I<
I<
Bkr State
CLPU.Mode
0
t-Max Block
OR
0
OR
t-Load Off
R1
S
Q
Q
AND
CLPU.Load Inrush
CLPU.Settle Time
CLPU.enabled
CLPU.detected
CLPU.I<
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Example Mode: Breaker Position
451
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Cold Load Pickup Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameter of the Cold Load Pickup Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Bkr State,
Bkr State
[Protection Para
I<,
/Global Prot Para
Bkr State Or I<,
/CLPU]
Bkr State And I<
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
Rvs Blo
Reverse Blocking, if Reverse Blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
Set Parameters of the Cold Load Pickup Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/CLPU]
ExBlo Fc
452
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
www.eaton.com
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
/CLPU]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Rvs Blo Fc
t-Load Off
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
reverse blocking of the module/element.
This parameter is only effective if a signal is Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/element are blocked
that are configured "Rvs Blo Fc = active".
Inactive
[Protection Para
Select the outage time required for a load to 0.00 – 7200.00 s
be considered cold. If the Pickup Timer
(Delay) has run out, a Cold Load Signal will
be issued.
10 s
/<n>
/CLPU]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/CLPU]
t-Max Block
Select the maximum amount of time
0.00 – 300.00 s
allowed for cold load pickup to be active; if
the time has elapsed a warm load signal will
be issued.
10 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/CLPU]
I<
The breaker is in the OPEN Position, if the
measured current is less than this
parameter.
0.01 – 1.00 In
0.01 In
[Protection Para
/<n>
/CLPU]
Threshold
Set the load current inrush threshold.
0.10 – 4.00 In
1.2 In
[Protection Para
/<n>
/CLPU]
Settle Time
Select the time for the cold load inrush.
0.00 – 300.00 s
1.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/CLPU]
States of the Inputs of the Cold Load Pickup Module
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/CLPU]
www.eaton.com
453
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
Bkr Pos-I
Module input state: Breaker Position by now []
(switching position).
Signals of the Cold Load Pickup Module (States of the Outputs)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
enabled
Signal: Cold Load enabled
detected
Signal: Cold Load detected
I<
Signal: No Load Current.
Load Inrush
Signal: Load Inrush
Settle Time
Signal: Settle Time
Commissioning of the Cold Load Pickup Module
Object to be tested:
Testing the Cold Load Pickup module according to the configured operating mode:
•
•
•
•
I< (No current);
Bkr. state (Breaker position);
I< (No Current) and Bkr. state (Breaker position); and
I< (No Current) or Bkr. state (Breaker position).
Necessary means:
Three-phase current source (if the Enable Mode depends on current);
Ampere meters (may be needed if the Enable Mode depends on current); and
•
Timer.
•
Test Example for Mode Bkr. State (Breaker Position)
Mode I<: In order to test the tripping delay, start the timer then feed with an
abruptly changing current that is distinctly less than the I<-threshold.
Measure the tripping delay. In order to measure the drop-out ratio, feed an
abruptly changing current that is distinctly above the I<-threshold.
Mode I< and Bkr state: Combine the abruptly changing current(switching
the current ON and OFF) with the manual switching ON and OFF of the
breaker.
Mode I< or Bkr state: Initially carry out the test with an abruptly changing
current that is switched ON and OFF (above and below the I<-threshold).
Measure the tripping times. Finally, carry out the test by manually
switching the breaker ON and OFF.
454
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
•
The breaker has to be in the OFF position. There must not be any load current.
•
The Status Display of the device shows the signal "CLPU.ENABLED“=1.
•
The Status Display of the device shows the signal ”CLPU.I<“=1.
IM02602007E
Testing the tripping delay and the resetting ratio:
•
Manually switch the breaker ON and simultaneously start the timer.
•
•
After the the »t Max Block (Release Delay)« timer has expired, the signal "CPLU.Enabled “=0 has to be
false.
•
•
Write down the measured time.
•
•
Manually switch the breaker OFF and simultaneously start the timer.
•
•
After the »t load Off« timer has expired, the signal ”CPLU.ENABLED “=1 has to become true.
•
Write down the measured time.
Successful test result:
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section.
www.eaton.com
455
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
27M - Undervoltage Protection
Available elements:
27M[1] ,27M[2]
M is for “Main” referring to protection metered by the Main Voltage transformer in
the System Configuration.
All undervoltage elements are identically structured.
Definition of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System Parameter setting of "Main VT
con".
In case that within the System Parameters "Main VT con" is set to "Open-Delta":
Vn=Main VT sec .
In case that "Main VT con" is set to "Wye":
Vn=
MainVT sec
3
This is the 27 device undervoltage setting for the main three phase VT. This function consists of a Phase, a
Pickup, a Delay setting. The Phase setting allows the User to select at which phase (any one, any two, or all)
the undervoltage function operates. The Pickup setting is the magnitude at which the undervoltage element
operates. The Delay setting is the time period an undervoltage must occur before the device initiates a trip.
Depending on the settings within the System Parameters, the element works based on phase-to-phase (»OpenDelta«) or phase-to-ground (»wye«) voltages. This element will operate depending on the phase setting: if any
one, any two, or all of the voltage(s) that is/are selected by the Phase setting drop(s) below the set point. This
element works based on RMS values.
An undervoltage pickup occurs when the measured voltage drops below the UV Threshold setting. The
undervoltage trip is set when the voltage stays below the threshold setting for the delay time specified (within the
number of phases specified by the phase setting). The undervoltage pickup and trip is reset when the voltage
rises above the drop-out ratio specified in Specifications section for the undervoltage protection.
If the element should be blocked in the event of a “Loss of Potential”, the »LOP BLO« parameter must be set to
»active«.
If the VT measurement location is not at the bus bar side but at the output
side, the following has to be taken into account.
When disconnecting the line, it has to be ensured by an »External Blocking«
that undervoltage tripping cannot happen. In order to block the 27M element
in case that the breaker is open:
•
•
Assign the »Bkr.POS OPEN« signal to a blocking input (»ExBlo1« or
»ExBlo2« within the Global Parameters) of the 27M element,
and
»ExBlo Fc« has to be set to “active” within the parameter sets of the
the 27M element.
When the auxiliary voltage is switched on and the measuring voltage has not
yet been applied, undervoltage tripping has to be prevented by an »External
456
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Blocking«. Otherwise a continuous tripping would occur, disabling the ability
to energize again.
If phase voltages are applied to the measuring inputs of the device and system
parameter »VT con« is set to »Phase-to-ground«, the messages issued by the
voltage protection module in case of actuation or trip should be interpreted as
follows:
»27M[1].PICKUP A« or »27M[1].TRIP A« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage
»VA«.
»27M[1].PICKUP B« or »27M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage
»VB«.
»27M[1].PICKUP C« or »27M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage
»VC«.
However, if line-to-line voltages are applied to the measuring inputs and system
parameter »VT con« is set to »Phase to Phase«, then the messages should be
interpreted as follows:
»27M[1].PICKUP A« or »27M[1].TRIP A« => pickup or trip caused by phase-to-phase
voltage »VAB«.
»27M[1]. PICKUP B« or »27M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase-to-phase
voltage »VBC«.
»27M[1]. PICKUP C« or »27M[1].TRIP C« => pickup or trip caused by phase-to-phase
voltage »VCA«
www.eaton.com
457
458
www.eaton.com
3
VC
VB
VA
38
2
RMS
RMS
RMS
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
LOP.LOP Blo
Active
Inactive
Name.LOP Blo
V<
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Name = 27M[1]...[n]
27M[1]...[n]
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
AND
all
any two
any one
Name.Mode
AND
AND
OR
0
t
Name.t
AND
AND
AND
AND
14
30
29
28
15
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
22
Name.Trip Phase C
21
Name.Trip Phase B
20
Name.Trip Phase A
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup Phase C
Name.Pickup Phase B
Name.Pickup Phase A
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Undervoltage Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Undervoltage Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the Undervoltage Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
www.eaton.com
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
459
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Blo TripCmd
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
Phases
Any one
Indicates if one, two of three or all phases
are required for operation
Any one,
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
[Protection Para
Any two,
/<n>
All
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
Pickup
If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.01 – 1.30 Vn
element will be started. Definition of Vn: Vn
is dependent on the System Parameter
setting of "Main VT con". In case that within
the System Parameters "Main VT con" is
set to "Open-Delta" , "Vn = Main VT sec ".
In case that "Main VT con" is set to "Wye",
"Vn = Main VT sec/SQRT(3)".
27M[1]: 0.80 Vn [Protection Para
27M[2]: 0.90 Vn /<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V<
t
Tripping delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
27M[1]: 10 s
[Protection Para
27M[2]: 2.00 s
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
LOP Blo
Blocking if voltage transformer failure
detected. LOP (Loss of Potential)
Inactive,
Active
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
Vstart<
If the voltage falls below this voltage, the
Time Depending Voltage Protection will be
started.
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= Vstart<
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
460
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
V(t)<1
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.01 Vn
[Protection Para
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
t1
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
0.00 s
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
V(t)<2
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.01 Vn
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
t2
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
0.15 s
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
V(t)<3
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.70 Vn
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
t3
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
0.15 s
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
V(t)<4
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
0.70 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
www.eaton.com
461
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
t4
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
0.70 s
[Protection Para
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
V(t)<5
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
t5
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
1.50 s
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
V(t)<6
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
t6
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
3.00 s
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
V(t)<7
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
t7
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
3.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
462
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
V(t)<8
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
[Protection Para
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
t8
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
3.00 s
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
V(t)<9
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
t9
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
3.00 s
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
V(t)<10
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
t10
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
3.00 s
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V(t)<
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
Undervoltage Protection Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
www.eaton.com
463
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/27M[1]]
Undervoltage Protection Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup Phase A
Signal: Pickup Phase A
Pickup Phase B
Signal: Pickup Phase B
Pickup Phase C
Signal: Pickup Phase C
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Commissioning: Undervoltage Protection [27M]
This test can be carried out similar to the test for overvoltage protection 59M (by using the related undervoltage
values).
Please consider the following deviations:
•
For testing the threshold values, the test voltage has to be decreased until the relay is activated.
•
For detection of the dropout ratio, the measuring quantity has to be increased to achieve more than
103% of the trip value. At 103% of the trip value, the relay is to dropout at the earliest moment.
464
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
59M - Overvoltage Protection
Available elements:
59M[1] ,59M[2]
M is for “Main” referring to protection metered by the Main Voltage transformer in
the System Configuration.
All elements are identically structured.
Definition of Vn: Vn is dependent on the System Parameter setting of "Main VT
con".
In case that within the System Parameters "Main VT con" is set to "Open-Delta":
Vn=Main VT sec .
In case that "Main VT con" is set to "Wye":
Vn=
MainVT sec
3
This is the 59 device Overvoltage setting for the Main VT. This element consists of a Phase, a Pickup, and a
Delay setting. The Phase setting allows the User to select which phase (any one, any two, or all) the
Overvoltage function operates. Depending on the settings within the System Parameters, the element works
based on phase-to-phase (»Open-Delta«) or phase-to-ground (»wye«) voltages. This element will operate
depending on the phase setting: if any one, any two, or all of the voltage(s) that is/are selected by the Phase
setting rise(s) above the set point. This element works based on RMS values.
An overvoltage pickup occurs when the measured voltage rises above the overvoltage threshold setting. The
overvoltage trip is set when the voltage stays above the threshold setting for the delay time specified (within the
number of phases specified by the phase setting).. The overvoltage pickup and trip is reset when the voltage
falls below the drop-out ratio specified in Specifications section for the overvoltage protection.
If phase voltages are applied to the measuring inputs of the device and system
parameter »VT con« is set to »Phase-to-ground«, the messages issued by the
voltage protection module in case of actuation or trip should be interpreted as
follows:
»59M[1].PICKUP A« or »59M[1].TRIP A« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage
»VA«.
»59M[1].PICKUP B« or »59M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage
»VB«.
»59M[1].PICKUPC« or »59M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by phase voltage
»VC«.
However,if line-to-line voltages are applied to the measuring inputs and system
parameter »VT con« is set to »Phase to Phase«, then the messages should be
interpreted as follows:
»59M[1].PICKUP A« or »59M[1].TRIP A« => pickup or trip caused by line-to-line
voltage »VAB«.
»59M[1]. PICKUP B« or »59M[1].TRIP B« => pickup or trip caused by line-to-line
voltage »VBC«.
»59M[1]. PICKUP C« or »59M[1].TRIP C« => pickup or trip caused by line-to-line
voltage »VCA«
www.eaton.com
465
466
www.eaton.com
3
VC
VB
VA
2
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
RMS
RMS
RMS
V>
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Name = 59M[1]...[n]
59M[1]...[n]
AND
AND
AND
OR
AND
all
any two
any one
Name.Mode
AND
AND
OR
0
t
Name.t
AND
AND
AND
AND
14
30
29
28
15
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
22
Name.Trip Phase C
21
Name.Trip Phase B
20
Name.Trip Phase A
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup Phase C
Name.Pickup Phase B
Name.Pickup Phase A
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Overvoltage Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Overvoltage Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the Overvoltage Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
www.eaton.com
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
467
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Blo TripCmd
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
Phases
Any one
Indicates if one, two of three or all phases
are required for operation
Any one,
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
[Protection Para
Any two,
/<n>
All
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
Pickup
If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/ 0.01 – 1.30 Vn
element will be started. Definition of Vn: Vn
is dependent on the System Parameter
setting of "Main VT con". In case that within
the System Parameters "Main VT con" is
set to "Open-Delta" , "Vn = Main VT sec ".
In case that "Main VT con" is set to "Wye",
"Vn = Main VT sec/SQRT(3)".
59M[1]: 1.2 Vn
[Protection Para
59M[2]: 1.1 Vn
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V>
t
Tripping delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
Only available if: Device Planning: V.Mode
= V> Or V<
59M[1]: 10 s
[Protection Para
59M[2]: 2.00 s
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
Vstart<
If the voltage falls below this voltage, the
Time Depending Voltage Protection will be
started.
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
V(t)<1
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.01 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
468
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
t1
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
0.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
V(t)<2
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.01 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
t2
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
0.15 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
V(t)<3
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.70 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
t3
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
0.15 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
V(t)<4
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.70 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
t4
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
0.70 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
www.eaton.com
469
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
V(t)<5
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
t5
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
1.50 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
V(t)<6
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
t6
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
3.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
V(t)<7
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
t7
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
3.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
V(t)<8
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
470
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
t8
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
3.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
V(t)<9
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
t9
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
3.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
V(t)<10
Pickup value
0.01 – 1.30 Vn
0.90 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
t10
Tripping delay
0.00 – 10.00 s
3.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
Overvoltage Protection Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
www.eaton.com
471
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/Main-V-Prot
/59M[1]]
Overvoltage Protection Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup Phase A
Signal: Pickup Phase A
Pickup Phase B
Signal: Pickup Phase B
Pickup Phase C
Signal: Pickup Phase C
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Commissioning: Overvoltage Protection [59M]
Object to be tested:
Test of the overvoltage protection elements, 3 x single-phase and 1 x three-phase (for each element).
Necessary means:
•
Three phase AC voltage source;
•
Timer for measuring of the tripping time; and
•
Voltmeter.
Procedure (3 x single-phase, 1 x three-phase, for each element)
Testing the threshold values:
For testing the threshold values and drop-out values, the test voltage has to be increased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the deviation must be within the permissible tolerances.
Testing the trip delay:
For testing the trip delay, a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay. The timer is
started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay trips.
472
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Testing the drop-out ratio:
Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97% of the trip value. The relay must only drop-out at a minimum of
97% of the trip value.
Successful test result:
The measured threshold values, trip delays, and drop-out ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment
list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.
www.eaton.com
473
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
27A - Auxiliary Undervoltage Protection
Available elements:
27A[1] ,27A[2]
All elements are identically structured.
This is the 27A device Undervoltage setting for the Auxiliary VT. This device setting works exactly the same as
the 27M except it is a single-phase element only operating from the Auxiliary VT input. The Alarm Delay is the
time period a LOP must occur before the device initiates a »LOP BLO« signal that can be used to block other
elements like 51V (Voltage Restraint).
474
www.eaton.com
V
3
2
www.eaton.com
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
RMS
Name.V<
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Name = 27A[1]...[n]
27A[1]...[n]
AND
0
t
Name.t
AND
Name.TripCmd
Name.Pickup
15 23
Name.Trip
14 31
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
475
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Aux. Undervoltage Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Aux. Undervoltage Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the Aux. Undervoltage Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
ExBlo Fc
476
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
www.eaton.com
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Blo TripCmd
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
Pickup
27A[1]: 0.8 Vn
[Protection Para
27A[2]: 0.9 Vn
/<n>
Vn refers to either the primary or secondary 0.01 – 1.30 Vn
voltage of the aux VT.
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
Only available if: Device Planning: 59.Mode
= V<
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
t
Tripping delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
27A[1]: 10 s
[Protection Para
27A[2]: 2.00 s
/<n>
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
Aux. Undervoltage Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
www.eaton.com
477
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/27A[1]]
Aux. Undervoltage Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Commissioning: Aux. Undervoltage
Object to be tested:
Aux. undervoltage protection elements.
Necessary components:
•
One-phase AC voltage source;
•
Timer for measuring of the tripping time; and
•
Voltmeter.
Procedure (for each element):
Testing the threshold values
For testing the threshold and dropout values, the test voltage at the measuring input for the residual voltage has
to be decreased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter,
the deviation must be within the permissible tolerances.
Testing the trip delay
For testing the trip delay, a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay. The timer is
started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is reached and it is stopped when the relay trips.
Testing the dropout ratio
Increase the measuring quantity to more than 103% of the trip value. The relay must only dropout at a
maximum of 103% of the trip value.
Successful test result
The measured threshold values, trip delays, and dropout ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.
478
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
59A - Auxiliary Overvoltage Protection
Available elements:
59A[1] ,59A[2]
All elements are identically structured.
This is the 59 device Overvoltage setting for the Auxiliary VT. This device setting works exactly the same as the
59M, except it is a single-phase element only operating from the Auxiliary VT input.
www.eaton.com
479
480
V
3
2
www.eaton.com
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
RMS
Name.Pickup
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Name = 59A[1]...[n]
59A[1]...[n]
AND
0
t
Name.t
AND
Name.TripCmd
Name.Pickup
15 23
Name.Trip
14 31
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Aux. Overvoltage Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Aux. Overvoltage Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the Aux. Overvoltage Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
www.eaton.com
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
481
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Blo TripCmd
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
Pickup
59A[1]: 1.2 Vn
[Protection Para
59A[2]: 1.1 Vn
/<n>
Vn refers to either the primary or secondary 0.01 – 1.30 Vn
voltage of the aux VT.
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
Only available if: Device Planning: 59.Mode
= V>
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
t
Tripping delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
59A[1]: 10 s
[Protection Para
59A[2]: 2.00 s
/<n>
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
Aux. Overvoltage Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
482
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/Aux-V-Prot
/59A[1]]
Aux. Overvoltage Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Commissioning: Aux. Overvoltage
Object to be tested:
Aux. Overvoltage protection elements.
Necessary components:
•
One-phase AC voltage source;
•
Timer for measuring of the tripping time; and
•
Voltmeter.
Procedure (for each element):
Testing the threshold values
For testing the threshold and dropout values, the test voltage at the measuring input for the voltage has to be increased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the deviation must be within the permissible tolerances.
Testing the trip delay
For testing the trip delay a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay. The timer is
started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay trips.
Testing the dropout ratio
Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97% of the trip value. The relay must only dropout at a minimum of
97% of the trip value.
Successful test result
The measured threshold values, trip delays, and dropout ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.
www.eaton.com
483
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
59N - Neutral Overvoltage
Available elements:
59N[1] ,59N[2]
All elements are identically structured.
This is the 59 device for the Neutral Overvoltage settings. This element offers a criterion setting. The criterion
setting tells if the threshold is based on the fundamental (Phasor) or RMS.
484
www.eaton.com
www.eaton.com
3
VX
2
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
Fund.
Name.Pickup
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Name = 59N[1]...[n]
59N[1]...[n]
AND
0
t
Name.t
AND
Name.TripCmd
Name.Pickup
15 23
Name.Trip
14 31
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
485
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Neutral Overvoltage Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Neutral Overvoltage Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
Setting Group Parameters of the Neutral Overvoltage Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
ExBlo Fc
486
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
www.eaton.com
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Blo TripCmd
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
Pickup
59N[1]: 0.4 Vn
[Protection Para
59N[2]: 0.3 Vn
/<n>
Vn refers to either the primary or secondary 0.01 – 1.30 Vn
voltage of the aux VT.
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
Only available if: Device Planning: 59.Mode
= V>
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
t
Tripping delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
59N[1]: 5.00 s
[Protection Para
59N[2]: 2.00 s
/<n>
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
Neutral Overvoltage Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
www.eaton.com
487
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/Neutral-V-Prot
/59N[1]]
Neutral Overvoltage Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Commissioning: Neutral Overvoltage Protection
Object to be tested:
Neutral overvoltage protection elements.
Necessary components:
•
One-phase AC voltage source;
•
Timer for measuring of the tripping time; and
•
Voltmeter.
Procedure (for each element):
Testing the threshold values
For testing the threshold and dropout values, the test voltage at the measuring input for the voltage has to be increased until the relay is activated. When comparing the displayed values with those of the voltmeter, the deviation must be within the permissible tolerances.
Testing the trip delay
For testing the trip delay, a timer is to be connected to the contact of the associated trip relay. The timer is
started when the limiting value of the tripping voltage is exceeded and it is stopped when the relay trips.
Testing the dropout ratio
Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 97% of the trip value. The relay must only dropout at a minimum of
97% of the trip value.
Successful test result
The measured threshold values, trip delays, and dropout ratios comply with those specified in the adjustment list.
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.
488
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
25 - Sync-check
Available Elements:
Sync
The sync-check function can be bypassed by external sources. In this
case, synchronization has to be secured by other synchronizing systems
before breaker closing!
The Bus voltages are to be measured by the first three measuring inputs of the
voltage measuring card (VA/VAB, VB/VBC, VC/VCA). The line voltage is to be
measured by the fourth measuring input of the voltage measuring card (VX). In
the menu [System Para/General Settings/V Sync] the User has to define to which
phase the fourth measuring input is compared.
Sync-check
The sync-check function is provided for the applications where a line has two-ended power sources. The synccheck function has the abilities to check voltage magnitude, angle differences, and frequency difference (slip
frequency) between the bus and the line. If enabled, the sync-check may supervise the closing operation
manually, automatically, or both.. This function can be overridden by certain bus-line operation conditions and
can be bypassed with an external source.
Voltage Difference ΔV
The first condition for paralleling two electrical systems is that their voltage phasors have the same magnitude.
This can be controlled by the generator's AVR.
Bus VA
Line VA
Bus VC
Line VB
Line VC
Bus VB
Frequency Difference (Slip Frequency) ΔF
The second condition for paralleling two electrical systems is that their frequencies are nearly equal. This can be
controlled by the generator's speed governor.
www.eaton.com
489
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Line VA
Bus VA
Bus f
Line f
Bus VC
Line VB
Line VC
Bus VB
If the generator frequency fBus is not equal to the mains frequency fLine, it results in a slip frequency
ΔF = |fBus -fLine| between the two system frequencies.
∆ v(t)
t
Voltage Curve with Enlarged Resolution.
v(t)Line
v(t)Busbar
v(t)
∆ v(t)
t
490
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Angular or Phase Difference.
Even if the frequency of both systems is exactly identical, usually an angular difference of the voltage phasors is
the case.
Bus VA
Line VA
Angle Diff
Bus f = Line f
Bus VC
Line VB
Line VC
Bus VB
At the instant of synchronization, the angular difference of the two systems should be nearly zero because,
otherwise, unwanted load inrushes occur. Theoretically, the angular difference can be regulated to zero by
giving short pulses to the speed governors. When paralleling generators with the grid, in practice,
synchronization is requested as quick as possible and so usually a slight frequency difference is accepted. In
such cases, the angular difference is not constant but changes with the slip frequency ΔF.
By taking the breaker closing time into consideration, a lead of the closing release impulse can be calculated in a
way that breaker closing takes place at exactly the time when both systems are in angular conformity.
Basically the following applies:
•
Where large rotating masses are concerned, the frequency difference (slip frequency) of the two
systems should possibly be nearly zero, because of the very high load inrushes at the instant of breaker
closing. For smaller rotating masses, the frequency difference of the systems can be higher.
Synchronization Modes
The sync-check module is able to check the synchronization of two electrical systems (system-to-system) or
between a generator and an electrical system (generator-to-system). For paralleling two electrical systems, the
station frequency, voltage, and phase angle should be exactly the same as the utility grid. Whereas the
synchronization of a generator to a system can be done with a certain slip-frequency, depending on the size of
the generator used. Therefore the maximum breaker closing time has to be taken into consideration. With the
set breaker closing time, the sync-check module is able to calculate the moment of synchronization and gives
the paralleling release.
When paralleling two systems, it has to be verified that the system-tosystem mode is selected. Paralleling two systems in generator-to-system
mode can cause severe damage!
Working Principle Sync-check (Generator-to-System)
(Please refer to the block diagram following this section.)
The sync-check element measures the three phase-to-neutral voltages »VA«, »VB«, and »VC« or the three
phase-to-phase voltages »VAB«, »VBC«, and »VCA« of the generator busbar. The line voltage Vx is measured
www.eaton.com
491
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
by the fourth voltage input. If all synchronous conditions are fulfilled (i. e.: ΔV [VoltageDiff], ΔF [SlipFrequency],
and Δφ [AngleDiff]) are within the limits, a signal will be issued that both systems are synchronous. An
advanced Close Angle Evaluator function takes the breaker closing time into consideration.
492
www.eaton.com
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
www.eaton.com
t
t-MaxBkrCloseDelay
Angle difference: Line to Bus
Frequency difference: Line to
Bus
Voltage difference: Line to Bus
Line VX
Bus VCA
Bus VC
Bus VBC
Bus VB
Bus VAB
Wye
Open-Delta
Main VT con
Advanced Close
Angle Calculator
MaxAngleDiff
MaxSlipFrequency
MaxVoltageDiff
MaxDeadLineVoltage
MinLiveLineVoltage
MaxDeadBusVoltage
MinLiveBusVoltage
BkrCloseInitiate
SyncMode=
Generator2System
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Bus VA
2
Sync=: SyncMode= Generator2System
LL
DB
LB
0
t-VoltDead
AND
AND
AND
DL
LBLL
DBDL=Active
AND
0
t-VoltDead
Bypass-I
Bypass= Active
DBLL =
Active
LBDL=Active
Bkr=Open
AND
AND
AND
AND
DBDL
DBLL
AND
LBDL
AND
AND
Bypass override
AND
AND
Sync override
OR
Bkr=Open
0
t-MaxSyncSuperv
Ext. Blocked
OR
AND
AND
AND
AngleDiffTooHigh
Sys-in-Sync
SlipTooHigh
VDiffTooHigh
LiveLine
In-Sync Allowed
LiveBus
SyncOverridden
SynchronFailed
SynchronRunTiming
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
493
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Working Principle Sync-check (System-to-System)
(Please refer to the block diagram on next page.)
The sync-check function for two systems is very similar to the sync-check function for generator-to-system
except there is no need to take the breaker closing time into account. The sync-check element measures the
three phase-to-neutral voltages »VA«, »VB«, and »VC« or the three phase-to-phase voltages »VAB«, »VBC«,
and »VCA« of the station voltage bus bar. The line voltage Vx is measured by the fourth voltage input. If all
synchronous conditions are fulfilled (i. e.: ΔV [VoltageDiff], ΔF [SlipFrequency], and Δφ [AngleDiff]) are within the
limits, a signal will be issued that both systems are synchronous.
494
www.eaton.com
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
www.eaton.com
Angle difference: Line to Bus
Frequency difference: Line to
Bus
Voltage difference: Line to Bus
Line VX
Bus VCA
Bus VC
Bus VBC
Bus VB
Bus VAB
Wye
Open-Delta
Main VT con
MaxAngleDiff
MaxSlipFrequency
MaxVoltageDiff
MaxDeadLineVoltage
MinLiveLineVoltage
MaxDeadBusVoltage
MinLiveBusVoltage
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Bus VA
2
Sync=: SyncMode= System2System
LL
DB
LB
0
t-VoltDead
AND
AND
DL
LBLL
DBDL=Active
AND
0
t-VoltDead
Bypass-I
Bypass= Active
DBLL =
Active
LBDL=Active
AND
AND
AND
AND
DBDL
DBLL
AND
LBDL
AND
AND
Bypass override
AND
Sync override
OR
Ext. Blocked
OR
AND
AngleDiffTooHigh
Sys-in-Sync
SlipTooHigh
VDiffTooHigh
LiveLine
In-Sync Allowed
LiveBus
SyncOverridden
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
495
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Sync-check Override Conditions
If enabled the following conditions can override the sync-check function:
•
•
•
LBDL = Live Bus – Dead Line
DBLL = Dead Bus – Live Line
DBDL = Dead Bus – Dead Line
Also the sync-check function can be bypassed by an external source.
When the sync-check function is overridden or bypassed, synchronization
has to be secured by other synchronizing systems before breaker closing!
Device Planning Parameters of the Sync-check Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Trigger Signals for Sync-check
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
DI-8P X1.DI 1
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 2
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 3
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 4
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 5
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 6
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 7
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 8
Signal: Digital Input
Logic.LE1.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE1.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE1.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE1.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE2.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE2.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE2.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE2.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE3.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE3.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE3.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE3.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
496
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE4.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE4.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE4.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE4.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE5.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE5.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE5.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE5.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE6.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE6.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE6.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE6.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE7.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE7.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE7.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE7.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE8.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE8.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE8.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE8.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE9.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE9.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE9.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE9.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE10.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE10.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE10.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE10.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE11.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE11.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE11.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE11.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE12.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE12.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE12.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE12.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE13.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE13.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE13.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
www.eaton.com
497
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE13.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE14.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE14.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE14.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE14.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE15.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE15.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE15.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE15.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE16.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE16.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE16.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE16.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE17.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE17.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE17.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE17.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE18.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE18.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE18.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE18.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE19.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE19.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE19.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE19.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE20.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE20.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE20.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE20.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE21.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE21.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE21.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE21.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE22.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE22.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE22.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE22.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE23.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE23.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
498
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE23.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE23.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE24.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE24.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE24.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE24.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE25.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE25.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE25.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE25.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE26.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE26.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE26.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE26.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE27.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE27.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE27.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE27.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE28.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE28.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE28.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE28.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE29.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE29.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE29.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE29.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE30.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE30.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE30.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE30.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE31.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE31.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE31.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE31.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE32.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE32.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE32.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE32.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE33.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
www.eaton.com
499
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE33.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE33.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE33.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE34.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE34.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE34.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE34.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE35.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE35.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE35.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE35.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE36.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE36.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE36.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE36.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE37.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE37.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE37.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE37.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE38.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE38.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE38.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE38.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE39.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE39.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE39.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE39.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE40.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE40.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE40.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE40.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE41.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE41.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE41.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE41.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE42.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE42.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE42.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE42.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
500
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE43.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE43.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE43.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE43.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE44.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE44.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE44.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE44.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE45.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE45.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE45.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE45.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE46.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE46.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE46.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE46.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE47.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE47.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE47.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE47.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE48.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE48.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE48.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE48.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE49.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE49.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE49.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE49.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE50.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE50.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE50.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE50.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE51.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE51.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE51.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE51.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE52.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE52.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE52.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
www.eaton.com
501
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE52.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE53.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE53.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE53.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE53.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE54.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE54.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE54.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE54.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE55.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE55.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE55.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE55.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE56.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE56.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE56.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE56.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE57.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE57.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE57.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE57.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE58.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE58.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE58.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE58.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE59.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE59.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE59.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE59.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE60.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE60.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE60.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE60.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE61.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE61.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE61.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE61.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE62.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE62.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
502
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE62.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE62.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE63.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE63.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE63.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE63.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE64.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE64.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE64.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE64.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE65.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE65.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE65.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE65.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE66.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE66.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE66.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE66.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE67.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE67.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE67.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE67.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE68.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE68.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE68.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE68.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE69.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE69.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE69.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE69.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE70.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE70.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE70.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE70.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE71.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE71.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE71.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE71.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE72.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
www.eaton.com
503
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE72.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE72.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE72.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE73.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE73.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE73.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE73.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE74.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE74.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE74.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE74.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE75.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE75.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE75.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE75.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE76.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE76.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE76.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE76.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE77.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE77.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE77.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE77.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE78.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE78.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE78.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE78.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE79.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE79.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE79.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE79.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE80.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE80.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE80.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE80.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Sys.Maint Mode Active
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Active
Sys.Maint Mode Inactive
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Inactive
504
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Sync-check Release Signals
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
Sync.In-Sync Allowed
Signal: In-Sync Allowed
DI-8P X1.DI 1
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 2
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 3
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 4
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 5
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 6
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 7
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 8
Signal: Digital Input
Logic.LE1.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE1.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE1.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE1.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE2.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE2.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE2.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE2.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE3.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE3.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE3.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE3.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE4.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE4.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE4.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE4.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE5.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE5.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE5.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE5.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE6.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE6.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE6.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE6.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE7.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE7.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE7.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE7.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
www.eaton.com
505
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE8.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE8.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE8.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE8.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE9.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE9.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE9.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE9.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE10.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE10.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE10.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE10.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE11.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE11.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE11.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE11.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE12.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE12.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE12.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE12.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE13.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE13.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE13.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE13.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE14.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE14.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE14.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE14.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE15.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE15.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE15.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE15.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE16.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE16.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE16.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE16.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE17.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE17.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE17.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
506
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE17.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE18.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE18.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE18.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE18.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE19.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE19.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE19.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE19.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE20.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE20.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE20.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE20.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE21.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE21.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE21.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE21.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE22.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE22.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE22.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE22.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE23.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE23.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE23.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE23.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE24.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE24.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE24.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE24.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE25.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE25.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE25.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE25.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE26.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE26.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE26.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE26.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE27.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE27.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
www.eaton.com
507
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE27.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE27.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE28.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE28.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE28.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE28.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE29.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE29.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE29.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE29.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE30.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE30.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE30.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE30.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE31.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE31.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE31.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE31.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE32.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE32.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE32.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE32.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE33.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE33.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE33.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE33.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE34.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE34.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE34.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE34.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE35.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE35.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE35.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE35.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE36.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE36.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE36.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE36.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE37.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
508
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE37.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE37.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE37.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE38.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE38.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE38.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE38.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE39.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE39.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE39.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE39.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE40.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE40.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE40.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE40.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE41.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE41.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE41.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE41.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE42.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE42.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE42.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE42.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE43.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE43.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE43.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE43.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE44.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE44.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE44.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE44.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE45.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE45.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE45.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE45.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE46.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE46.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE46.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE46.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
www.eaton.com
509
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE47.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE47.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE47.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE47.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE48.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE48.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE48.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE48.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE49.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE49.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE49.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE49.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE50.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE50.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE50.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE50.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE51.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE51.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE51.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE51.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE52.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE52.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE52.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE52.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE53.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE53.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE53.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE53.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE54.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE54.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE54.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE54.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE55.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE55.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE55.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE55.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE56.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE56.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE56.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
510
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE56.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE57.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE57.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE57.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE57.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE58.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE58.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE58.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE58.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE59.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE59.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE59.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE59.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE60.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE60.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE60.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE60.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE61.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE61.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE61.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE61.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE62.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE62.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE62.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE62.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE63.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE63.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE63.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE63.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE64.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE64.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE64.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE64.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE65.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE65.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE65.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE65.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE66.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE66.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
www.eaton.com
511
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE66.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE66.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE67.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE67.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE67.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE67.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE68.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE68.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE68.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE68.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE69.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE69.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE69.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE69.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE70.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE70.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE70.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE70.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE71.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE71.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE71.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE71.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE72.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE72.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE72.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE72.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE73.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE73.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE73.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE73.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE74.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE74.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE74.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE74.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE75.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE75.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE75.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE75.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE76.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
512
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE76.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE76.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE76.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE77.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE77.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE77.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE77.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE78.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE78.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE78.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE78.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE79.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE79.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE79.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE79.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE80.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE80.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE80.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE80.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Global Protection Parameter of the Sync-check Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Sync]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Sync]
Bypass
The Sync-check will be bypassed if the
state of the assigned signal (logic input)
becomes true.
1..n, DI-LogicList
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Sync]
BkrCloseInitiate Breaker Close Initiate with sync-check from 1..n, SyncRequestList
any control sources (e.g.: HMI / SCADA). If
the state of the assigned signal becomes
true, a Breaker Close will be initiated
(Trigger Source).
www.eaton.com
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Sync]
513
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Set Parameters of the Sync-check Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Sync
/General Settings]
ExBlo Fc
Bypass Fc
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Allowing to bypass the Sync-check, if the
state signal that is assigned to the
parameter with the same name within the
Global Parameters (logic input) becomes
true.
Inactive
Inactive,
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/General Settings]
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/General Settings]
SyncMode
Sync-check mode: GENERATOR2SYSTEM System2System,
= Synchronizing generator to system
(breaker close initiate needed).
Generator2System
SYSTEM2SYSTEM = Sync-check between
two systems (Stand-Alone, no breaker info
needed).
System2System [Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/Mode / Times]
tMaximum breaker close time delay (Only
MaxBkrCloseD used for GENERATOR-SYSTEM working
elay
mode and is critical for a correct
synchronized switching) .
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.05 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
Only available if: SyncMode =
System2System
/Mode / Times]
tSynchron-Run timer: Max. time allowed for 0.00 – 3000.00 s
MaxSyncSuper synchronizing process after a close initiate.
v
Only used for GENERATOR2SYSTEM
working mode.
30.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
Only available if: SyncMode =
System2System
/Mode / Times]
MinLiveBusVolt Minimum Live Bus voltage (Live bus
0.10 – 1.30 Vn
age
detected, when all three phase bus voltages
are above this limit).
0.65 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
514
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
MaxDeadBusV Maximum Dead Bus voltage (Dead bus
0.01 – 1.00 Vn
oltage
detected, when all three phase bus voltages
are below this limit).
0.03 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
MinLiveLineVol Minimum Live Line voltage (Live line
tage
detected, when line voltage above this
limit).
0.10 – 1.30 Vn
0.65 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
MaxDeadLineV Maximum Dead Line voltage (Dead Line
0.01 – 1.00 Vn
oltage
detected, when line voltage below this limit).
0.03 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
t-VoltDead
Voltage dead time (A Dead Bus/Line
0.000 – 300.000 s
condition will be accepted only if the voltage
falls below the set dead voltage levels
longer than this time setting).
0.167 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/DeadLiveVLevels]
MaxVoltageDiff Maximum voltage difference between bus
and line voltage phasors (Delta V) for
synchronism (Related to bus voltage
secondary rating).
0.01 – 1.00 Vn
0.24 Vn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/Conditions]
MaxSlipFreque Maximum frequency difference (Slip: Delta
ncy
f) between bus and line voltage allowed for
synchronism
0.01 – 2.00 Hz
0.20 Hz
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/Conditions]
MaxAngleDiff
Maximum phase angle difference (Delta-Phi 1 - 60°
in degree) between bus and line voltages
allowed for synchronism.
20°
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/Conditions]
www.eaton.com
515
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
DBDL
Enable/disable Dead-Bus AND Dead-Line
synchronism overriding.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Sync
/Override]
DBLL
Enable/disable Dead-Bus AND Live-Line
synchronism overriding.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/Override]
LBDL
Enable/disable Live-Bus AND Dead-Line
synchronism overriding.
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Sync
/Override]
States of the Inputs of the Sync-check Module
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Sync]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Sync]
Bypass-I
State of the module input: Bypass
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Sync]
BkrCloseInitiate-I
516
State of the module input: Breaker Close
Initiate with synchronism check from any
control sources (e.g. HMI / SCADA). If the
state of the assigned signal becomes true,
a Breaker Close will be initiated (Trigger
Source).
www.eaton.com
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Sync]
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Signals of the Sync-check Module (States of the Outputs)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
LiveBus
Signal: Live-Bus or Dead-Bus flag: 1=Live-Bus, 0=Dead-Bus
LiveLine
Signal: Live-Line or Dead-Line flag: 1=Live-Line, 0=Dead-Line
Sync-check RunTiming
Signal: Sync-check RunTiming
Sync-checkFailed
Signal: This signal indicates a failed synchronization. It is set for
5s when the breaker is still open after the Sync-check Run-timer
has timed out.
SyncOverridden
Signal:Sync-check is overridden because one of the Sync-check
overriding conditions (DB/DL or ExtBypass) is met.
VDiffTooHigh
Signal: Voltage difference between bus and line too high.
SlipTooHigh
Signal: Frequency difference (slip frequency) between bus and line
voltages too high.
AngleDiffTooHigh
Signal: Phase Angle difference between bus and line voltages too
high.
Sys-in-Sync
Signal: Bus and line voltages are in synchronism according to the
system synchronism criteria.
In-Sync Allowed
Signal: In-Sync Allowed.
Sync-check Statistic Values
Value
Description
Menu Path
Slip Freq
Slip frequency
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
Volt Diff
Voltage difference
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
Angle Diff
Angle difference
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
f Bus
Bus frequency
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
www.eaton.com
517
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Value
Description
Menu Path
f Line
Line frequency
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
V Bus
Bus Voltage
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
V Line
Line Voltage
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
Angle Bus
Bus Angle (Reference)
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
Angle Line
Line Angle
[Operation
/Measured Values
/Synchronism]
518
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
47 - Voltage Unbalance Protection
Available elements:
47[1] ,47[2]
This is the 47 device Voltage Unbalance setting, which consists of the threshold, %(V2/V1), and delay settings.
The voltage unbalance function is based on the Main VT system 3-phase voltages.
The positive and negative sequence voltages are calculated from the 3-phase voltages. The threshold setting
defines a minimum operating voltage magnitude of either V1 or V2 for the 47 function to operate, which ensures
that the relay has a solid basis for initiating a voltage unbalance trip. This is a supervisory function and not a trip
level.
The %(V2/V1) setting is the unbalance trip pickup setting. It is defined by the ratio of negative sequence voltage
to positive sequence voltage (% Unbalance=V2/V1), or %(V2/V1) for ABC rotation and %(V1/V2) for ACB
rotation. The device will automatically select the correct ratio based on the phase sequence setting in the
System Configuration group described above.
This function requires positive or negative sequence voltage magnitude above the threshold setting and the
percentage voltage unbalance above the %(V2/V1) setting before allowing a voltage unbalance trip. Therefore,
both the threshold and percent settings must be met for the specified Delay time setting before the relay initiates
a trip for voltage unbalance.
The voltage unbalance pickup and trip functions are reset when the positive and negative sequence voltages V1
and V2 drop below the threshold setting or (V2/V1) drops below the %(V2/V1) setting minus 1%.
www.eaton.com
519
520
3
2
www.eaton.com
NPS
Filter
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
VC
VB
VA
PPS
Filter
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Threshold
V1<
V1>
Name.Mode
Device Planning
Name = 47[1]...[n]
47[1]...[n]
V2
V1
Name.%(V2/V1)
Name.Threshold
AND
AND
0
t
Name.t
AND
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
15
14
Name.Pickup
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Voltage Unbalance Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Mode
Unbalance Protection: Supervision of the Voltage System Do not use,
Default
Menu Path
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Voltage Unbalance Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.1
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.2
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
Parameter Set Parameters of the Voltage Unbalance Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
www.eaton.com
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
521
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Blo TripCmd
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
Threshold
0.2 Vn
The threshold defines a minimum operating 0.01 – 1.30 Vn
voltage magnitude of either V1 or V2 for the
47 function to operate, which ensures that
the relay has a solid basis for initiating a
voltage unbalance trip. This is a
supervisory function and not a trip level.
The meaning of Vn: Phase to Phase: Vn =
Main VT sec. Phase to Ground: Vn = Main
VT / SQRT(3).
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
Only available if: Device Planning: 47.Mode
= Threshold
%(V2/V1)
The %(V2/V1) setting is the unbalance trip 2 - 40%
pickup setting. It is defined by the ratio of
negative sequence voltage to positive
sequence voltage (% Unbalance=V2/V1), or
%(V2/V1) for ABC rotation and %(V1/V2) for
ACB rotation.
47[1]: 40%
[Protection Para
47[2]: 20%
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
Only available if: %(V2/V1) = Use
t
Tripping delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
47[1]: 10.0 s
[Protection Para
47[2]: 20 s
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
LOP Blo
Blocking if voltage transformer failure
detected. LOP (Loss of Potential)
Inactive,
Active
Only available if: Device Planning: 47.Mode
= Threshold
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
522
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
States of the Inputs of the Voltage Unbalance Module
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/Unbalance-Prot
/47[1]]
Signals of the Voltage Unbalance Module (States of the Outputs)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Commissioning: Voltage Unbalance Module
Object to be tested:
Test of the unbalanced load protection function.
Necessary means:
•
Three-phase AC voltage source with adjustable voltage unbalance; and
•
Timer.
Procedure:
Check the phase sequence:
www.eaton.com
523
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
•
Ensure that the phase sequence is the same as that set in the system parameters.
•
Feed-in a three-phase nominal voltage.
•
Change to the [Measured Values/Voltage] menu.
•
Check the measuring value for the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.«. The measuring value displayed for
»V2 Fund.« should be zero (within the physical measuring accuracy).
If the displayed magnitude for V2 Fund. is the same as that for the balanced
nominal voltages fed to the relay, it implies that the phase sequence of the
voltages seen by the relay is reversed.
•
Now turn-off phase A.
•
Again check the measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« in the [Measured
Values/Voltage] menu.
The measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« should now be 33% of the nominal voltage.
•
Turn-on phase A, but turn-off phase B.
•
Once again check the measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« in the [Measured Values/
Voltage] menu. The measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« should be again 33%.
•
Turn-on phase B, but turn-off phase C.
•
Again check the measuring value of unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« in the [Measured Values/Voltage]
menu. The measuring value of the unbalanced voltage »V2 Fund.« should still be 33%.
•
Testing the trip delay:
•
Apply a balanced three-phase voltage system (nominal voltages).
•
Switch off VA (the threshold value »Threshold« for »V2 Fund.« must be below 33% of the nominal
voltage Vn).
•
Measure the tripping time.
The present voltage unbalance »V2 Fund.« corresponds with 1/3 of the existing phase voltage displayed.
Testing the threshold values
•
Configure minimum »%(V2/V1)« setting (2%) and an arbitrary threshold value »Threshold« (V2 Fund.).
•
For testing the threshold value, a voltage has to be fed to phase A which is lower than three times the
adjusted threshold value »Threshold« (V2 Fund.).
•
Feeding only phase A results in »%(V2/V1) = 100%«, so the first condition »%(V2/V1) >= 2%« is always
fulfilled.
•
Now increase the phase A voltage until the relay is activated.
524
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Testing the drop-out ratio of the threshold values
Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A voltage. The drop-out ratio must not be
higher than 0.97 times the threshold value.
Testing %(V2/V1)
•
Configure minimum threshold value »Threshold« (V2 Fund.) (0.01 x Vn) and set »%(V2/V1)« greater or
equal to 10%.
•
Apply a balanced three-phase voltage system (nominal voltages). The measuring value of »%(V2/V1)«
should be approximately 0%.
•
Now increase the phase A voltage. With this configuration, the threshold value »Threshold« (V2 Fund.)
should be reached before the value »%(V2/V1)« reaches the set »%(V2/V1)« ratio threshold.
•
Continue increasing the phase 1 voltage until the relay is activated.
Testing the drop-out ratio of %(V2/V1)
Having tripped the relay in the previous test, now decrease the phase A voltage. The drop-out of »%(V2/V1)«
has to be 1% below the »%(V2/V1)«setting.
Successful test result:
The measured trip delays, threshold values, and drop-out ratios are within the permitted deviations/tolerances,
specified under Technical Data.
www.eaton.com
525
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
81O/U, 81R, 78V Frequency Protection
Available elements:
81[1] ,81[2] ,81[3] ,81[4] ,81[5] ,81[6]
All frequency protective elements are identically structured.
Frequency - Measuring Principle
The frequency is calculated as the average of the measured values of the
three phase frequencies. Only valid measured frequency values are taken
into account. If a phase voltage is no longer measurable, this phase will be
excluded from the calculation of the average value.
The measuring principle of the frequency supervision is based in general on the time measurement of complete
cycles, whereby a new measurement is started at each zero passage. The influence of harmonics on the
measuring result is thus minimized.
V(t)
T
t
T
Frequency tripping is sometimes not desired by low measured voltages which, for instance. occur during
alternator acceleration. All frequency supervision functions are blocked if the voltage is lower 0.15 times Vn.
Frequency Functions
Due to its various frequency functions, the device is very flexible. That makes it suitable for a wide range of
applications where frequency supervision is an important criterion.
In the Device Planning menu, the User can decide how to use each of the six frequency elements.
f[1] to f[6] can be assigned as:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
526
81U – Under-frequency;
81O – Over-frequency;
81R – Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt);
81UR – Under-frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt);
81OR – Over-frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt);
81UΔR – Under-frequency and DF/DT (absolute frequency change per definite time interval);
81OΔR – Over-frequency and DF/DT (absolute frequency change per definite time interval); and
78V – Vector Surge.
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
81U – Under-frequency
This protection element provides a pickup threshold and a tripping delay. If the frequency falls below the set
pickup threshold, an alarm will be issued instantaneously. If the frequency remains under the set pickup
threshold until the tripping delay has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
With this setting, the frequency element protects electrical generators, loads, or electrical operating equipment in
general against under-frequency.
81O – Over-frequency
This protection element provides a pickup threshold and a tripping delay. If the frequency exceeds the set
pickup threshold, an alarm will be issued instantaneously. If the frequency remains above the set pickup
threshold until the tripping delay has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
With this setting, the frequency element protects electrical generators, loads, or electrical operating equipment in
general against over-frequency.
Working Principle
(Please refer to the block diagram on next page.)
The frequency element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If any of the three phase
voltages is below 15% Vn, the frequency calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode
set in the Device Planning (81U or 81O), the phase voltages are compared to the set pickup threshold for overor under-frequency. If in any of the phases, the frequency exceeds or falls below the set pickup threshold and if
there are no blocking commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously and the tripping
delay timer is started. When the frequency still exceeds or is below the set pickup threshold after the tripping
delay timer has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
www.eaton.com
527
528
3
2
Or 81O-Over
www.eaton.com
<15%Vn
<15%Vn
<15%Vn
Frequency Calculation
f
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
VC
VB
VA
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Name = 81[1]...[n]
81[1]...[n]:81U-Under
AND
Name.f
(81O-Over|81UUnder)
81O-Over: 81U-Under
81U-Under: 81O-Over
Name.Mode
Device Planning
AND
0
t
Name.t
AND
15
Name.Blo by V<
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
Name.Trip 81
14
Name.Pickup 81
Name.Pickup
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
81R Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt)
Electrical generators running in parallel with the mains (e. g.: industrial internal power supply plants) should be
separated from the mains when failure in the intra-system occurs for the following reasons:
•
Damage to electrical generators must be prevented when mains voltage is recovering asynchronously
(e. g.: after a short interruption).
•
The industrial internal power supply must be maintained.
A reliable criterion of detecting mains failure is the measurement of the rate of change of frequency 81R (df/dt).
The precondition for this is a load flow via the mains coupling point. At mains failure, the load flow change
spontaneously leads to an increasing or decreasing frequency. At active power deficit of the internal power
station, a linear drop of the frequency occurs and a linear increase occurs at power excess. Typical frequency
gradients during application of "mains decoupling" are in the range of 0.5 Hz/s up to over 2 Hz/s.
The protective device detects the instantaneous frequency gradient 81R (df/dt) of each mains voltage period.
Through multiple evaluations of the frequency gradient in sequence, the continuity of the directional change (sign
of the frequency gradient) is determined. Because of this special measuring procedure, a high safety in tripping
and thus a high stability against transient processes (e. g.: switching procedure) are achieved.
The frequency gradient (rate of change of frequency [df/dt]) may have a negative or positive sign, depending on
frequency increase (positive sign) or decrease (negative sign).
In the frequency parameter sets, the User can define the kind of df/dt mode:
•
•
•
Positive df/dt = the frequency element detects an increase in frequency;
Negative df/dt = the frequency element detects a decrease in frequency; and
Absolute df/dt (positive and negative) = the frequency element detects both, increase and decrease in
frequency.
This protection element provides a tripping threshold and a tripping delay. If the frequency gradient df/dt
exceeds or falls below the set tripping threshold, an alarm will be issued instantaneously. If the frequency
gradient remains still above/below the set tripping threshold until the tripping delay has elapsed, a tripping
command will be issued.
Working Principle
(Please refer to block diagram on next page.)
The frequency element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If any of the three phase
voltages is below 15% Vn, the frequency calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode
set in the Device Planning (81R), the phase voltages are compared to the set frequency gradient (df/dt)
threshold. If in any of the phases, the frequency gradient exceeds or falls below the set pickup threshold (acc. to
the set df/dt mode) and if there are no blocking commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued
instantaneously and the tripping delay timer is started. When the frequency gradient still exceeds or is below the
set pickup threshold after the tripping delay timer has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
www.eaton.com
529
530
www.eaton.com
VC
VB
3
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
<15%Vn
<15%Vn
<15%Vn
df/dt Calculation
81R-Rate of Change
Name.Mode
Device Planning
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
VA
2
81[1]...[n]: 81R-Rate of Change
Name = 81[1]...[n]
Absolute df/dt
AND
Idf/dtI
-df/dt
+df/dt
Negative df/dt
Positive df/dt
df/dt Mode
81R-Rate of Change
AND
0
t
Name.t
AND
14
15
Name.Blo by V<
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
Name.Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
81UR – Under-frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt)
With this setting, the frequency element supervises if the frequency falls below a set pickup threshold and if the
frequency gradient exceeds a set threshold at the same time.
In the selected frequency parameter set 81[X], an under-frequency pickup threshold f<, a frequency gradient
df/dt, and a tripping delay can be set.
Whereby:
•
•
•
Positive df/dt = the frequency element detects an increase in frequency;
Negative df/dt = the frequency element detects a decrease in frequency; and
Absolute df/dt (positive and negative) = the frequency element detects both, increase and decrease in
frequency.
81OR – Over-frequency and Rate of Change of Frequency (df/dt)
With this setting, the frequency element supervises if the frequency exceeds a set pickup threshold and if the
frequency gradient exceeds a set threshold at the same time.
In the selected frequency parameter set 81[X], an over-frequency pickup threshold f>, a frequency gradient df/dt,
and a tripping delay can be set.
Whereby:
•
•
•
Positive df/dt = the frequency element detects an increase in frequency;
Negative df/dt = the frequency element detects a decrease in frequency; and
Absolute df/dt (positive and negative) = the frequency element detects both, increase and decrease in
frequency.
Working Principle
(Please refer to block diagram on next page.)
The frequency element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If any of the three phase
voltages is below 15% Vn, the frequency calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode
set in the Device Planning (81UR & df/dt or 81OR & dt/dt), the phase voltages are compared to the set
frequency pickup threshold and the set frequency gradient (df/dt) threshold. If in any of the phases, both the
frequency and the frequency gradient exceed or falls below the set thresholds and if there are no blocking
commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously and the tripping delay timer is started.
When the frequency and the frequency gradient still exceed or are below the set threshold after the tripping
delay timer has elapsed, a tripping command will be issued.
www.eaton.com
531
532
3
2
www.eaton.com
<15%Vn
<15%Vn
<15%Vn
df/dt Calculation
Frequency Calculation
f
f
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
VC
VB
VA
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Idf/dtI
-df/dt
+df/dt
AND
Absolute df/dt
Negative df/dt
Positive df/dt
df/dt Mode
81U-Under
81O-Over
81UR- Under & df/dt
81OR- Over & df/dt
Name.Mode
Device Planning
81[1]...[n]: 81UR- Under & df/dt Or 81OR- Over & df/dt
Name = 81[1]...[n]
81R-Rate of Change
f
AND
0
t
Name.t
AND
Name.Pickup 81
14
15
Name.Blo by V<
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
Name.Trip 81
Name.Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
81UΔR – Under-frequency and DF/DT
With this setting, the frequency element supervises the frequency and the absolute frequency difference during a
definite time interval.
In the selected frequency parameter set 81[X], an under-frequency pickup threshold f<, a threshold for the
absolute frequency difference (frequency decrease) DF and supervision interval DT can be set.
81OΔR – Over-frequency and DF/DT
With this setting, the frequency element supervises the frequency and the absolute frequency difference during a
definite time interval.
In the selected frequency parameter set 81[X], an over-frequency pickup threshold f>, a threshold for the
absolute frequency difference (frequency increase) DF and supervision interval DT can be set.
Working Principle
(Please refer to block diagram on next page.)
The frequency element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If any of the three phase
voltages is below 15% Vn, the frequency calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode
set in the Device Planning (81UR & DF/DT or 81OR & DF/DT), the phase voltages are compared to the set
frequency pickup threshold and the set frequency decrease or increase threshold DF.
If in any of the phases, the frequency exceeds or falls below the set pickup threshold and if there are no blocking
commands for the frequency element, an alarm is issued instantaneously. At the same time the timer for the
supervision interval DT is started. When, during the supervision interval DT, the frequency still exceeds or is
below the set pickup threshold and the frequency decrease/increase reaches the set threshold DF, a tripping
command will be issued.
Working Principle of DF/DT Function
(Please refer to f(t) diagram after the block diagram.)
Case 1:
When the frequency falls below a set f< threshold (81U) at t1, the DF/DT element energizes. If the frequency
difference (decrease) does not reach the set value DF before the time interval DT has expired, no trip will occur.
The frequency element remains blocked until the frequency falls below the under-frequency threshold f< (81U)
again.
Case 2:
When the frequency falls below a set f< threshold (81U) at t4, the DF/DT element energizes. If the frequency
difference (decrease) reaches the set value DF before the time interval DT has expired (t5), a trip command is
issued.
www.eaton.com
533
534
4
2
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
www.eaton.com
<15%Vn
<15%Vn
<15%Vn
Frequency Calculation
f
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
VC
VB
VA
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
AND
81U-Under
81O-Over
81UDR- Under & DF/DT
81ODR- Over & DF/DT
Name.Mode
Device Planning
81[1]...[n]: 81UDR- Under & DF/DT Or 81ODR- Over & DF/DT
Name = 81[1]...[n]
f
AND
DT
<name>.81+D
F
1
t
AND
AND
14
15
Name.Blo by V<
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
Name.Trip 81
Name.Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Name.Pickup 81
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
81U-Under
fN
f
81[1]...[n]: 81UDR- Under & DF/DT
Name = 81[1]...[n]
t1
DT
t2
t3
Temporarily Blocking
Reset
t4
DT
t5
t6
Trip
t
EDR-5000
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
DF
DF
DF
535
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
78V Vector Surge
The vector surge supervision protects synchronous generators in mains parallel operation due to very fast
decoupling in case of mains failure. Very dangerous are mains auto reclosings for synchronous generators. The
mains voltage returning typically after 300 ms can hit the generator in asynchronous position. A very fast
decoupling is also necessary in case of long time mains failures.
Generally there are two different applications.
•
Only mains parallel operation - no single operation:
In this application, the vector surge supervision protects the generator by tripping the generator breaker
in case of mains failure.
•
Mains parallel operation and single operation:
For this application, the vector surge supervision trips the mains breaker. Here it is insured that the
gen.-set is not blocked when it is required as an emergency set.
A very fast decoupling in case of mains failures for synchronous generators is very difficult. Voltage supervision
units cannot be used because the synchronous alternator, as well as the load impedance, support the
decreasing voltage.
In this situation, the mains voltage drops only after some 100 ms below the pickup threshold of the voltage
supervision and, therefore, a safe detection of mains auto reclosings is not possible with voltage supervision
only.
Frequency supervision is partially unsuitable because only a highly loaded generator decreases its speed within
100 ms. Current relays detect a fault only when short-circuit type currents exist, but cannot avoid their
development. Power relays are able to pickup within 200 ms, but they also cannot prevent the power from rising
to short-circuit values. Since power changes are also caused by sudden loaded alternators, the use of power
relays can be problematic.
Whereas the vector surge supervision of the device detects mains failures within 60 ms without the restrictions
described above because it is specially designed for applications where very fast decoupling from the mains is
required. Adding the typical operating time of a breaker or contactor, the total disconnection time remains below
150 ms.
Basic requirement for tripping of the generator/mains monitor is a change in load of more than 15 - 20% of the
rated load. Slow changes of the system frequency, for instance at regulating processes (adjustment of speed
regulator), do not cause the relay to trip.
Trippings can also be caused by short-circuits within the grid, because a voltage vector surge higher than the
preset value can occur. The magnitude of the voltage vector surge depends on the distance between the shortcircuit and the generator. This function is also of advantage to the Power Utility Company because the mains
short-circuit capacity and, consequently, the energy feeding the short-circuit is limited.
To prevent a possible false tripping, the vector surge measuring is blocked at a low input voltage <15% Vn. The
undervoltage lockout acts faster then the vector surge measurement.
Vector surge tripping is blocked by a phase loss so that a VT fault (e. g.: faulty VTs fuse) does not cause false
tripping.
536
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Measuring Principle of Vector Surge Supervision
Equivalent circuit at synchronous generator in parallel with the mains.
V = I1* j Xd
VP
I1 I2
V1
Grid
Voltage vectors at mains parallel operation.
V1
VP
V = I1* j Xd
Grid/Load
Generator
The rotor displacement angle between stator and rotor is dependent on the mechanical moving torque of the
generator shaft. The mechanical shaft power is balanced with the electrical fed mains power and, therefore, the
synchronous speed keeps constant.
www.eaton.com
537
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Equivalent circuit at mains failure.
V´ = I´1* j Xd
VP
I1
V´1
Grid
In case of mains failure or auto-reclosing, the generator suddenly feeds a very high load. The rotor
displacement angle is decreased repeatedly and the voltage vector V1 changes its direction (V1').
Voltage vectors at mains failure.
VP
V1
V´1
V´ = I´1* j Xd
Generator
538
Load
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Voltage vector surge.
Voltage Vector Surge
V(t)
V(t)
V(t)`
Trip
t=0
t
78V vector surge
As shown in the voltage/time diagram, the instantaneous value of the voltage jumps to another value and the
phase position changes. This is called phase or vector surge.
The relay measures the cycle duration. A new measuring is started at each zero passage. The measured cycle
duration is internally compared with a reference time and from this the deviation of the cycle duration of the
voltage signal is ascertained. In case of a vector surge as shown in the above graphic, the zero passage occurs
either earlier or later. The established deviation of the cycle duration is in compliance with the vector surge
angle. If the vector surge angle exceeds the set value, the relay trips immediately.
Tripping of the vector surge is blocked in case of loss of one or more phases of the measuring voltage.
Working Principle
(Please refer to block diagram on next page.)
The vector surge element supervises the three phase voltages »VA«, »VB« and »VC«. If any of the three phase
voltages is below 15% Vn, the vector surge calculation is blocked. According to the frequency supervision mode
set in the Device Planning (78V), the phase voltages are compared to the set vector surge threshold. If in any of
the phases, the vector surge exceeds the set threshold and if there are no blocking commands for the frequency
element, an alarm and a trip command is issued instantaneously.
www.eaton.com
539
540
www.eaton.com
VC
VB
3
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
<15%Vn
<15%Vn
<15%Vn
Delta phi Calculation
78V vector surge
Name.Mode
Device Planning
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
VA
2
81[1]...[n]: 78V vector surge
Name = 81[1]...[n]
AND
78V vector
surge
Name.78V vector
surge
AND
AND
15
14
Name.Blo by V<
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
Name.Trip Vector Surge
Name.Pickup
Name.Pickup Vector Surge
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
81[1]: 81O- [Device PlanOver
ning]
81U-Under,
81[2]:
81O-Over
81O-Over,
81UR- Under & df/dt,
81[3]:
81U-Under
81OR- Over & df/dt,
81UDR- Under & DF/DT,
81ODR- Over & DF/DT,
81R-Rate of Change,
78V vector surge
81[4]:
81U-Under
81[5]:
81R-Rate
of Change
81[6]:
81R-Rate
of Change
Global Protection Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
www.eaton.com
541
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Setting Group Parameters of the Frequency Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Blo TripCmd
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive
Inactive,
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
81O-Over
81[1]: 61.00 Hz
[Protection Para
81[2]: 61.0 Hz
/<n>
81[3]: 51.00 Hz
/Freq-Prot
81[4]: 51.00 Hz
/81[1]]
Pickup value for over-frequency.
40.00 – 69.95 Hz
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode
= 81O-Over Or 81OR- Over & df/dt Or
81ODR- Over & DF/DT
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
81[5]: 51.00 Hz
81[6]: 51.00 Hz
81U-Under
Pickup value for under-frequency.
40.00 – 69.95 Hz
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode
= 81U-Under Or 81UR- Under & df/dt Or
81UDR- Under & DF/DT
81[1]: 59.0 Hz
[Protection Para
81[2]: 49.00 Hz
/<n>
81[3]: 59.0 Hz
/Freq-Prot
81[4]: 59.0 Hz
/81[1]]
81[5]: 59.0 Hz
81[6]: 59.0 Hz
542
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
t
Tripping delay
0.00 – 3600.00 s
1.00 s
[Protection Para
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode
= 81U-Under Or 81O-OverOr 81OR- Over
& df/dt Or 81UR- Under & df/dt
/<n>
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
81R-Rate of
Change
Measured value (calculated): Rate-offrequency-change.
0.1 – 10.0 Hz/s
1.0 Hz/s
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode
= 81R-Rate of Change Or 81UR- Under &
df/dt Or 81OR- Over & df/dt
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
t-df/dt
Trip delay df/dt
0.00 – 300.00 s
1.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
DF
Frequency difference for the maximum
0.0 – 10.0 Hz
admissible variation of the mean of the rate
of frequency-change. This function is
inactive if DF=0.
1.00 Hz
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Freq-Prot
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode
= 81UDR- Under & DF/DT Or 81ODROver & DF/DT
DT
Time interval of the maximum admissible
rate-of-frequency-change.
/81[1]]
0.1 – 10.0 s
1.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode
= 81UDR- Under & DF/DT Or 81ODROver & DF/DT
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
df/dt Mode
df/dt Mode
Absolute df/dt,
Absolute df/dt
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode Positive df/dt,
= 81R-Rate of Change Or 81UR- Under &
df/dt Or 81OR- Over & df/dt Only available Negative df/dt
if: Device Planning: 81.Mode = 81R-Rate
of Change Or 81UR- Under & df/dt Or
81OR- Over & df/dt Only available if: Device
Planning: 81.Mode = 81R-Rate of Change
78V vector
surge
Measured Value (Calculated): Vector Surge 1 - 30°
Only available if: Device Planning: 81.Mode
= 78V vector surge
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
10°
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
www.eaton.com
543
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Frequency Protection Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/Freq-Prot
/81[1]]
Frequency Protection Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo by V<
Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange
Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Commissioning: Over-frequency [ANSI 81O]
Object to be tested:
All configured over-frequency protection stages.
544
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Necessary means:
•
Three-phase voltage source with variable frequency; and
•
Timer.
Procedure:
Testing the threshold values
•
Keep on increasing the frequency until the respective frequency element is activated;
•
Note the frequency value; and
•
Disconnect the test voltage.
Testing the trip delay
•
Set the test voltage to nominal frequency and
•
Now connect a frequency jump (activation value) and then start a timer. Measure the tripping time at the
relay output.
Testing the drop-out ratio:
Reduce the measuring quantity to less than 99.95% of the trip value (or 0.05% fn). The relay must only fall back
at 99.95% of the trip value at the earliest (or 0.05% fn).
Successful test result:
Permissible deviations/tolerances can be taken from the Technical Data.
Commissioning: Under-frequency [ANSI 81U]
For all configured under-frequency elements, this test can be carried out similar to the test for over-frequency
protection (by using the related under-frequency values).
Please consider the following deviations:
•
For testing the threshold values, the frequency has to be decreased until the protection element is
activated.
•
For detection of the drop-out ratio, the measuring quantity has to be increased to more than 100.05% of
the trip value (or 0.05% fn). At 100.05% of the trip value the relay is to fall back at the earliest (or 0.05%
fn).
Commissioning: 81R Rate of Change (df/dt)
Object to be tested:
All frequency protection stages that are projected as df/dt.
Necessary means:
•
Three-phase voltage source and
•
Frequency generator that can generate and measure a linear, defined rate of change of frequency.
Procedure:
Testing the threshold values
•
Keep on increasing the rate of change of frequency until the respective element is activated and
•
Note the value.
www.eaton.com
545
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Testing the trip delay
•
Set the test voltage to nominal frequency:
•
Now apply a step change (sudden change) that is 1.5 times the setting value (example: apply 3 Hz per
second if the setting value is 2 Hz per second); and
•
Measure the tripping time at the relay output. Compare the measured tripping time to the configured
tripping time.
Successful test result:
Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratios can be taken from the Technical Data.
Commissioning: 81U and Rate of Change (f< and -df/dt)
Object to be tested:
All frequency protection stages that are projected as f< and -df/dt.
Necessary means:
•
Three-phase voltage source and
•
Frequency generator that can generate and measure a linear, defined rate of change of frequency.
Procedure:
Testing the threshold values
•
Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device:
•
Decrease the frequency below the f< threshold: and
•
Apply a rate of change of frequency (step change) that is below the setting value (example: apply -1 Hz
per second if the setting value is -0.8 Hz per second). After the tripping delay is expired the relay has to
trip.
Successful test result:
Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratios can be taken from the Technical Data.
Commissioning: 81O and Rate of Change (f> and df/dt)
Object to be tested:
All frequency protection stages that are projected as f> and df/dt.
Necessary means:
•
Three-phase voltage source and
•
Frequency generator that can generate and measure a linear, defined rate of change of frequency.
Procedure:
Testing the threshold values
•
Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device;
•
Increase the frequency above the f> threshold; and
•
Apply a rate of change of frequency (step change) that is above the setting value (example: apply 1 Hz
per second if the setting value is 0.8 Hz per second). After the tripping delay is expired the relay has to
trip.
546
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Successful test result:
Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratios can be taken from the Technical Data.
Commissioning: 81UΔR – Under-frequency and DF/DT
Object to be tested:
All frequency protection stages that are projected as f< and Df/Dt.
Necessary means:
•
Three-phase voltage source and
•
Frequency generator that can generate and measure a defined frequency change.
Procedure:
Testing the threshold values
•
Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device;
•
Decrease the frequency below the f< threshold; and
•
Apply a defined frequency change (step change) that is above the setting value (example: apply a
frequency change of 1 Hz during the set time interval DT if the setting value DF is 0.8 Hz ). The relay
has to trip immediately.
Successful test result:
Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratios can be taken from the Technical Data.
Commissioning: 81OΔR – Over-frequency and DF/DT
Object to be tested:
All frequency protection stages that are projected as f> and Df/Dt.
Necessary means:
•
Three-phase voltage source and
•
Frequency generator that can generate and measure a defined frequency change.
Procedure:
Testing the threshold values
•
Feed nominal voltage and nominal frequency to the device;
•
Increase the frequency above the f> threshold; and
•
Apply a defined frequency change (step change) that is above the setting value (example: apply a
frequency change of 1 Hz during the set time interval DT if the setting value DF is 0.8 Hz ). The relay
has to trip immediately.
Successful test result:
Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratios can be taken from the Technical Data.
www.eaton.com
547
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Commissioning: Vector Surge 78V
Object to be tested:
All frequency protection stages that are projected as vector surge (78V).
Necessary means:
•
Three-phase voltage source that can generate a definite step (sudden change) of the voltage pointers
(phase shift).
Procedure:
Testing the threshold values
•
Apply a vector surge (sudden change) that is 1.5 times the setting value (example: if the setting value is
10° apply 15°).
Successful test result:
Permissible deviations/tolerances and dropout ratio can be taken from the Technical Data.
548
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
32 - Power Protection
Available Elements:
32[1] ,32[2] ,32[3]
This is the 32 device Power Protection setting. Each element can be set to one of five settings:
•
•
•
•
•
Do Not Use;
Over Forward Power (P>);
Under Forward Power (P<);
Over Reverse Power (Pr>); and
Under Reverse Power (Pr<).
Each element consists of a Pickup and a Delay setting. These elements are based on rated apparent power
VAn.
Definition for VAn is as follows:
•
•
VAn = SQRT(3) * VT secondary rating * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for wye or
VAn = 3 * VT secondary rating/SQRT(3) * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for delta connections.
The following graphics show the areas that are protected by the corresponding modes.
www.eaton.com
549
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
32 - Forward Power - Over and Under
Q
No Trip
Trip Region
P
Pickup P>
Q
Trip Region
No Trip
P
Pickup P<
550
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
32 - Reverse Power - Over and Under
Q
Trip Region
No Trip
P
Pickup Pr>
Q
No Trip
Trip Region
P
Pickup Pr<
www.eaton.com
551
552
Please Refer to Diagram:.CTS
40
www.eaton.com
3
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
Syst W RMS
Pickup Pr<
Pickup Pr>
Pickup P<
Pickup P>
PQS.Mode
Device Planning
Please Refer to Diagram:.LOP
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
38
2
32[1]...[n]
Name = 32[1]...[n]
OR
OR
Name.Mode
Pickup P>, Pickup P<, Pickup Pr>, Pickup Pr<
active
Loss of Potential Blo
AND
AND
0
t
Name.t
AND
14
15
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
Name.Pickup
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Power Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
32[1]: Over [Device Planforward
ning]
Over forward,
32[2]:
Under
forward
Under forward,
Over reverse,
32[3]:
Over
reverse
Under reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the Power Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
Parameter Set Parameters of the Power Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
www.eaton.com
553
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
ExBlo Fc
Blo TripCmd
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
[Protection Para
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive
Inactive,
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
Loss of
Potential Blo
Active
Blocking of the protective element in case
that of lacking measuring input quantities
(Loss of Potential)
Inactive,
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
Pickup P>
Over(load) Active Power Pickup Value. Can 0.02 – 10.00 VAn
be used for monitoring the maximum
allowed forward power limits of
transformers or overhead lines.
1.20 VAn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power-Prot
Only available if: Device Planning:
PQS.Mode = Pickup P>
Pickup P<
Under(load) Active Power Pickup Value
(e.g.: caused by idling motors).
/32[1]]
0.02 – 10.00 VAn
0.80 VAn
[Protection Para
/<n>
Only available if: Device Planning:
PQS.Mode = Pickup P<
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
Pickup Pr>
Over Reverse
0.02 – 10.00 VAn
Only available if: Device Planning:
PQS.Mode = Pickup Pr>
1.20 VAn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
554
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Pickup Pr<
Under Reverse
0.02 – 10.00 VAn
0.80 VAn
[Protection Para
Only available if: Device Planning:
PQS.Mode = Pickup Pr<
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
t
Tripping delay
0.00 – 1100.00 s
0.01 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
States of the Inputs of the Power Protection Module
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32[1]]
Signals of the Power Protection Module (States of the Outputs)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
www.eaton.com
555
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Commissioning Examples for the Power Protection Module
Object to be tested:
Testing the projected Power Protection Modules:
•
•
•
•
P>;
P<;
Pr>; and
Pr<.
Necessary means:
•
•
•
3-phase AC voltage source ;
3-phase AC current source; and
Timer.
Procedure – Testing the wiring:
•
Feed rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
•
Adjust the current pointers 30 degrees lagging to the voltage pointers.
•
The following measuring values have to be shown:
•
P=0.86 Pn;
•
Q=0.5 Qn; and
•
S=1 Sn.
If the measured values are shown with a negative (algebraic) sign, check
the wiring.
The examples shown within this chapter have to be carried out with the
tripping values and tripping delays that apply to the User's switchboard.
If the User is testing „greater than thresholds“ (e.g.: P>), start at 80% of the
tripping value and increase the object to be tested until the relay picks up.
In case the User is testing „less than thresholds“ (e.g.: P<), start at 120% of
the tripping value and reduce the object to be tested until the relay picks
up.
If the User is testing tripping delays of „greater than“ modules (e.g.: P>),
start a timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be
tested from 80% of the tripping value to 120% of the tripping value.
If the User is testing tripping delays of „less than“ modules (e.g.: P<), start
a timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested
from 120% of the tripping value to 80% of the tripping value.
556
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
P>
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).
•
The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 1.1 Pn).
•
In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value.
Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).
•
The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 1.1 Pn).
•
In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Increase the current with an abrupt change to 1.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.
Successful test result:
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section.
P<
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.3 Pn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).
•
The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 0.3 Pn).
•
In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Decrease the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured.
Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 0.3 Pn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).
•
The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a positive algebraic sign.
www.eaton.com
557
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
•
Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 0.3 Pn).
•
In order to test the tripping delay feed, 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Decrease the current with an abrupt change to 0.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and
voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.
Successful test result:
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section.
Pr>
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current with 180 degree phase angle between voltage and
current pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.
•
The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e. g.: 1.1 Pn).
•
In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value.
Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Pn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current with 180 degree phase shift between voltage and current
pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.
•
The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 1.1 Pn).
•
In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Increase the current with an abrupt change to 1.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.
Successful test result:
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section.
558
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Pr<
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.3 Pn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current with 180 degree phase shift between voltage and current
pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.
•
The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e. g.: 0.3 Pn).
•
In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Decrease the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value.
Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 0.3 Pn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current with 180 degree phase shift between voltage and current
pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.
•
The measured values for the active power „P“ must show a negative algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 0.3 Pn).
•
In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Decrease the current with an abrupt change to 0.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and
voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.
Successful test result:
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section.
www.eaton.com
559
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
32V - Reactive Power Protection
Available Elements:
32V[1] ,32V[2] ,32V[3]
This is the 32V device Reactive Power Protection setting. Each element can be set to one of five settings:
•
•
•
•
•
Do Not Use;
Over Forward Reactive Power (Q>);
Under Forward Reactive Power (Q<);
Over Reverse Reactive Power (Qr>); and
Under Reverse Reactive Power (Qr<).
Each element consists of a Pickup and a Delay setting. These elements are based on rated apparent power
Van.
Definition for VAn is as follows:
•
•
VAn = SQRT(3) * VT secondary rating * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for wye or
VAn = 3 * VT secondary rating/SQRT(3) * CT secondary rating (I=1/5A) for delta connections.
The following graphics show the areas that are protected by the corresponding modes.
560
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
32V Forward Reactive Power - Over and Under
Q
Trip Region
Pickup Q>
No Trip
P
.
Q
No Trip
Pickup Q<
Trip Region
P
www.eaton.com
561
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
32V Reverse Reactive Power - Over and Under
Q
P
No Trip
Pickup Qr>
Trip Region
Q
P
Trip Region
Pickup Qr<
No Trip
562
www.eaton.com
www.eaton.com
3
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
Pickup Qr<
Pickup Qr>
Pickup Q<
Pickup Q>
PQS.Mode
Device Planning
Please Refer to Diagram:.CTS
Please Refer to Diagram:.LOP
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Syst VAr RMS
40
38
2
32V[1]...[n]
Name = 32V[1]...[n]
OR
OR
Name.Mode
Pickup Q>, Pickup Q<, Pickup Qr>, Pickup Qr<
active
Loss of Potential Blo
AND
AND
0
t
Name.t
AND
14
15
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
Name.Pickup
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
563
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Reactive Power Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
32V[1]:
Over
forward
[Device Planning]
Over forward,
Under forward,
32V[2]:
Under
forward
Over reverse,
Under reverse
32V[3]:
Over
reverse
Global Protection Parameters of the Reactive Power Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
Parameter Set Parameters of the Reactive Power Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
564
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
ExBlo Fc
Blo TripCmd
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
[Protection Para
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive
Inactive,
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
Loss of
Potential Blo
Active
Blocking of the protective element in case
that of lacking measuring input quantities
(Loss of Potential)
Inactive,
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
Pickup Q>
Over(load) Reactive Power Pickup Value.
0.02 – 10.00 VAn
Monitoring the maximum allowed reactive
power of the electrical equipment like
transformers or overhead lines). If the
maximum value is exceeded, a condensator
bank could be switched off.
1.20 VAn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
Only available if: Device Planning:
PQS.Mode = Pickup Q>
Pickup Q<
Under(load) Reactive Power Pickup Value.
Monitoring the minimum value of the
reactive power. If it falls below the set
value, a condensator bank could be
switched on.
0.02 – 10.00 VAn
0.80 VAn
/<n>
/Power-Prot
Only available if: Device Planning:
PQS.Mode = Pickup Q<
Pickup Qr>
Over Reverse
[Protection Para
/32V[1]]
0.02 – 10.00 VAn
Only available if: Device Planning:
PQS.Mode = Pickup Qr>
1.20 VAn
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
www.eaton.com
565
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Pickup Qr<
Under Reverse
0.02 – 10.00 VAn
0.80 VAn
[Protection Para
Only available if: Device Planning:
PQS.Mode = Pickup Qr<
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
t
Tripping delay
0.00 – 1100.00 s
0.01 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
States of the Inputs of the Reactive Power Protection Module
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/Power-Prot
/32V[1]]
Signals of the Reactive Power Protection Module (States of the Outputs)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
566
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Commissioning Examples for the Reactive Power Protection Module
Object to be tested:
Testing the projected Power Protection Modules.
•
•
•
•
Q>;
Q<;
Qr>; and
Qr<.
Necessary means:
•
•
•
3-phase AC voltage source;
3-phase AC current source; and
Timer.
Procedure – Testing the wiring:
•
Feed rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
•
Adjust the current pointers 30° lagging to the voltage pointers.
•
The following measuring values have to be shown:
•
P=0.86 Pn;
•
Q=0.5 Qn; and
•
S=1 Sn.
If the measured values are shown with a negative (algebraic) sign, check
the wiring.
The examples shown within this chapter have to be carried out with the
tripping values and tripping delays that apply to the User's switchboard.
If the User is testing „greater than thresholds“ (e.g.: Q>), start at 80% of the
tripping value and increase the object to be tested until the relay picks up.
In case the User is testing „less than thresholds“ (e.g.: Q<), start at 120% of
the tripping value and reduce the object to be tested until the relay picks
up.
If the User is testing tripping delays of „greater than“ modules (e.g.: Q>),
start a timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be
tested from 80% of the tripping value to 120% of the tripping value.
If the User is testing tripping delays of „less than“ modules (e.g.: Q<), start
a timer simultaneously with an abrupt change of the object to be tested
from 120% of the tripping value to 80% of the tripping value.
www.eaton.com
567
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Q>
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1,1 Qn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current (90 degrees phase shift) to the measuring inputs of the
relay (PF=0).
•
The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 1.1. Qn).
•
In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value.
Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Qn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current (90 degree phase shift) to the measuring inputs of the
relay (PF=0).
•
The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e.g. 1.1. Qn).
•
In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Increase the current with an abrupt change to 1.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.
Successful test result:
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section.
Q<
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.3 Qn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current (90 degree phase shift) to the measuring inputs of the
relay (PF=0).
•
The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 0.3 Qn).
•
In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Decrease the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value.
568
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 0.3 Qn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current (90 degree phase shift) to the measuring inputs of the
relay (PF=0).
•
The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a positive algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e.g.: 0.3 Qn).
•
In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Decrease the current with an abrupt change to 0.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and
voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.
Successful test result:
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section.
Qr>
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 1.1 Qn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current with -90 degree phase shift between voltage and current
pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.
•
The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e. g.: 1.1 Qn).
•
In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Increase the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value.
Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 1.1 Qn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.9 times rated current with -90 degree phase shift between voltage and current
pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.
•
The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e. g. 1.1 Qn).
•
In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.9 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Increase the current with an abrupt change to 1.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.
Successful test result:
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section.
www.eaton.com
569
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Qr<
Testing the threshold values (Example, Threshold 0.3 Qn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current with -90 degree phase shift between voltage and current
pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.
•
The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e. g.: 0.3 Qn).
•
In order to test the pickup thresholds, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Decrease the current slowly until the relay picks up. Ensure that the angle between current and voltage
remains constant. Compare the measured pickup value to the configured value.
Testing the tripping delay (Example, Threshold 0.3 Qn)
•
Feed rated voltage and 0.5 times rated current with -90 degree phase shift between voltage and current
pointers to the measuring inputs of the relay.
•
The measured values for the active power „Q“ must show a negative algebraic sign.
•
Set the pickup threshold (e. g. 0.3 Qn).
•
In order to test the tripping delay, feed 0.5 times rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
Decrease the current with an abrupt change to 0.2 In. Ensure that the angle between current and
voltage remains constant. Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay.
Successful test result:
The measured total tripping delays or individual tripping delays, threshold values, and dropout ratios correspond
with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found in the Technical Data section.
570
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
55A and 55D - PF Protection
Available elements:
PF-55D[1] ,PF-55D[2] ,PF-55A[1] ,PF-55A[2]
Definition Apparent Power Factor 55A (RMS - Includes Harmonics):
The Apparent Power Factor is computed by dividing real power (watts) by volt-amperes. The apparent power
factor computation includes harmonics.
PF apparent =
Watt
VA
Definition Displacement Power Factor 55D (Fundamental):
The Displacement Power Factor is computed by dividing the fundamental watts by the fundamental voltamperes as shown below. This definition is only valid at the system fundamental operating frequency. The
Displacement Power Factor isolates the fundamental portion of the Power Factor from the effects of harmonics.
PF displacement =
Watt
Watt 2var2
These elements supervise the Power Factor within a defined area (limits).
The area is defined by four parameters:
•
The Trigger Quadrant (lead or lag);
•
•
The Threshold (Power Factor value);
•
•
The Reset Quadrant (lead or lag); and
•
•
The Reset Value (Power Factor value).
Q
leading
lagging
PF<0
PF>0
90°<phi<180°
0°<phi<90°
P
lagging
leading
PF>0
PF<0
180°<phi<270°
270°<phi<360°
www.eaton.com
571
572
3
2
www.eaton.com
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
φ
<0.5%In
<20%Vn
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
Imax
V
PF
RMS
Fund.
Name.Criterion
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Name = PF[1]...[n]
PF[1]...[n]
OR
Name.PF
OR
AND
Comp
Comp
0
t
Name .t
Pre-trigger time
Name.t-Reset
Name.t-Pickup
Post-trigger time
Pickup Delay And Release Delay
AND
14
Name.Impossible
15
Name.TripCmd
Name.Trip
Name.Compensator
Name.Pickup
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Power Factor Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameter of the Power Factor Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
Set Parameters of the Power Factor Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
www.eaton.com
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
573
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Blo TripCmd
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
Trig Mode
Lagging
Trigger Mode. Should the Module be
Leading,
triggered if the Current Phasor is leading to
the Voltage Phasor = Lead? Or should the Lagging
Module be triggered if the Current Phasor is
lagging to the Voltage Phasor = Lag?
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
Trigger-PF
This is the power factor where the relay will 0.5 - 0.99
pick up
0.7
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
Res Mode
Trigger Mode. Should the Module be
Leading,
triggered if the Current Phasor is leading to
the Voltage Phasor = Lead? Or should the Lagging
Module be triggered if the Current Phasor is
lagging to the Voltage Phasor = Lag?
Lagging
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
Reset-PF
This setting is the power factor, at which the 0.5 - 0.99
relay will reset the power factor trip. It is like
setting a hysteresis for the Trigger setting.
0.9
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
t-trip
Tripping delay
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
574
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
t-Pickup Comp Pre-trigger time for the Compensation
Signal. When this timer is elapsed the
compensation signal will be activated.
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
0.00 – 300.00 s
5.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
t-Reset Comp
Reset (Post-trigger) time of the
Compensation Signal. When this timer is
elapsed the compensation signal will be
deactivated.
0.00 – 300.00 s
5.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
States of the Inputs of the Power Factor Module
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/Power Factor-Prot
/PF-55D[1]]
Signals of the Power Factor Module (States of the Outputs)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Factor
Trip
Signal: Trip Power Factor
www.eaton.com
575
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Compensator
Signal: Compensation Signal
Impossible
Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible
Commissioning: Power Factor
Object to be tested:
•
Testing the projected Power Factor Modules.
Necessary means:
•
•
•
Three-phase AC voltage source;
Three-phase AC current source; and
Timer.
Procedure – Testing the wiring:
•
Feed the rated voltage and rated current to the measuring inputs of the relay.
•
Adjust the current pointers 30° lagging to the voltage pointers.
•
The following measuring values have to be shown:
•
P = 0.86 Pn
•
Q = 0.5 Qn
•
S = 1 Sn
If the measured values are shown with a negative (algebraic) sign, check
the wiring.
In this example, the PF-Trigger is set to 0.86 = 30° (lagging) and the PFReset is set to 0.86 = 30° (leading).
Carry out the test with the settings (trigger and reset) that fit the
switchboard.
Testing the threshold values (Trigger) (PF Trigger: Example = 0.86 lagging):
•
Feed the rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).
•
Adjust the angle between the voltage and current (current pointer lagging) until the relay picks up.
•
Write down the pickup value.
Testing the Reset (PF Reset: Example = 0.86 leading):
•
576
Reduce the angle between voltage and current beyond PF = 1 (current pointer leading) until the alarm
drops off.
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
•
IM02602007E
Write down the reset value.
Testing the trip delay (PF Trigger: Example = 0.86 lagging):
•
Feed the rated voltage and rated current in phase to the measuring inputs of the relay (PF=1).
•
Adjust the angle between voltage and current (current pointer lagging) with an abrupt change to
PF = 0.707 (45°) lagging.
•
Measure the tripping delay at the output of the relay. Compare the measured tripping time to the
selected trip time.
Successful test result:
The measured total tripping delays, threshold, and reset values correspond with those values specified in the adjustment list. Permissible deviations/tolerances can be found the Technical Data section.
www.eaton.com
577
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
ExP - External Protection
Available elements:
ExP[1] ,ExP[2] ,ExP[3] ,ExP[4]
All elements of the external protection ExP[1]...[4] are identically structured.
By means of these elements, the protective device can detect and execute pickups and trips that are issued by
other external devices. This can be helpful, for logging purposes, if the other device is not equipped with an
event or disturbance recorder. This might also be helpful if the other device has no communication (SCADA)
interface.
578
www.eaton.com
www.eaton.com
3
2
(Tripping command not deactivated or blocked. )
Please Refer to Diagram: Trip Blockings
1..n, Assignment List
Name.Trip
1..n, Assignment List
Name.Alarm
(Element is not deactivated
and no active blocking
signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Name = ExP[1]...[n]
ExP[1]...[n]
AND
AND
AND
14
Name.TripCmd
15
Name.Trip
Name.Alarm
Name.Alarm-I
Name.Trip-I
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
579
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the External Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Do not use [Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the External Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd External blocking of the Trip Command of
the module/the element, if blocking is
activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Alarm
Assignment for External Alarm
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Trip
External trip of the Bkr. if the state of the
assigned signal is true.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
580
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Setting Group Parameters of the External Protection Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
ExBlo Fc
Blo TripCmd
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Permanent blocking of the Trip Command
of the module/element.
Inactive
Inactive,
[Protection Para
/<n>
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Active
[Protection Para
/<n>
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
ExBlo TripCmd Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
Fc
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo TripCmd
Fc=active".
Inactive
[Protection Para
/<n>
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
External Protection Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
www.eaton.com
581
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the [Protection Para
Trip Command
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Alarm-I
Module Input State: Alarm
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
Trip-I
Module Input State: Trip
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/ExP
/ExP[1]]
External Protection Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
Alarm
Signal: Alarm
Trip
Signal: Trip
TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Commissioning: External Protection
Object to be tested:
•
Test of the External Protection Module.
Necessary means:
•
Dependent on the application.
Procedure:
•
582
Simulate the functionality of the External Protection (pickup, trip, and blockings) by (de-)energizing the
digital inputs.
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Successful test result:
All external pickups, external trips, and external blockings are correctly recognized and processed by the device.
www.eaton.com
583
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Supervision
50BF – Breaker Failure Supervision
BF
Principle – General Use
The breaker failure (BF) protection is used to provide backup protection in the event that a breaker fails to operate properly during fault clearing. A breaker failure condition is recognized if current is still flowing through the
breaker after tripping or opening breaker commands have been issued for a specified time. The User can select
different trigger modes. In addition, up to three additional trigger events (trip commands) can be assigned from
all the protection modules.
Trigger Modes
There are three trigger modes for the breaker failure available. In addition, there are three assignable trigger
inputs available.
•
All Trips: All trip signals that are assigned to this breaker (within the breaker manager) will start the BF
module.
•
Current Trips: All current trips that are assigned to this breaker (within the breaker manager) will start the
BF module.
•
External Trips: All external trips that are assigned to this breaker (within the breaker manager) will start
the BF module.
In addition, the User can also select none (e.g.: if the User intends to use one of the three additional assignable
trigger inputs).
Those trips can exclusively start the breaker failures that are assigned
within the breaker manager to the breaker that is to be supervised.
Select the winding side from which the measured currents should be taken
in case this protective device is a transformer differential protection.
584
www.eaton.com
www.eaton.com
IC
IB
IA
BF.Trigger3
BF.Trigger2
BF.Trigger1
15
15 15
2
15
15
15
none
Name.I-BF >
External Trips
Current Trips
All Trips
External Trips
Current Trips
All Trips
Determining the trigger mode for
the Breaker Failure.
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking
signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
Name = BF
BF
AND
OR
AND
R1
S
Res Lockout
Q
Q
0
t-BF
Name.t-BF
R1
S
1
1
14
BF.Lockout
BF.Trigger3-I
BF.Trigger2-I
BF.Trigger1-I
BF.Trip
BF.Pickup
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
585
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Direct Commands
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Res Lockout
Reset Lockout
Inactive,
Inactive
[Operation
Active
/Reset]
Device Planning Parameters of the BF Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Use
Use
[Device Planning]
Global Protection Parameters of the BF Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
Trigger
Trigger1
Determining the trigger mode for the
Breaker Failure.
Trigger that will start the BF
- . -,
All Trips
[Protection Para
All Trips,
/Global Prot Para
Current Trips,
/Supervision
ExP Fc
/BF]
Trigger
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
Trigger2
Trigger that will start the BF
Trigger
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
586
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Trigger3
Trigger that will start the BF
Trigger
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
Setting Group Parameters of the BF Module
In order to prevent a faulty activation of the BF Module, the pickup (alarm)
time must be greater than the sum of:
•
The close-open time of the breaker (please refer to the technical data of
the manufacturer of the breaker);
•
+ The tripping delay of the device (please refer to the Technical Data
section);
•
+ The security margin; and
•
+ The operating time.
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Supervision
/BF]
ExBlo Fc
I-BF >
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Current level that needs to exist after Trip
Command has been given.
0.00 In
0.00 – 0.10 In
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Supervision
/BF]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Supervision
/BF]
t-BF
If the delay time is expired, an BF alarm is
given out.
0.00 – 10.00 s
0.20 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Supervision
/BF]
www.eaton.com
587
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
BF Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
Trigger1
Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
Trigger2
Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
Trigger3
Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/BF]
BF Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Pickup
Signal: BF-Module Started (Pickup)
Trip
Signal: Breaker Failure Trip
Lockout
Signal: Lockout
Res Lockout
Signal: Reset Lockout
588
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
BF Module Trigger Functions
In case that the protective device is equipped with directional overcurrent
protection. All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be
displayed as ANSI 50/51 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 50/51
element wont change, if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional”
to “directional”.
These trips will start the BF module if all trips have been selected as the trigger event.
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
50P[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50P[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50P[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50X[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50X[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51X[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51X[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50R[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50R[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51R[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51R[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27M[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27M[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59M[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59M[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27A[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27A[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59A[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59A[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59N[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59N[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
46[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
46[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
47[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
47[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
www.eaton.com
589
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
81[4].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[5].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[6].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55D[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55D[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55A[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55A[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ZI.TripCmd
Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Command
ExP[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[4].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
DI-8P X1.DI 1
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 2
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 3
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 4
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 5
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 6
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 7
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 8
Signal: Digital Input
Logic.LE1.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE1.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE1.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE1.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE2.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE2.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE2.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE2.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE3.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE3.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE3.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE3.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE4.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE4.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE4.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE4.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE5.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE5.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE5.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
590
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE5.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE6.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE6.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE6.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE6.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE7.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE7.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE7.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE7.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE8.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE8.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE8.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE8.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE9.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE9.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE9.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE9.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE10.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE10.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE10.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE10.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE11.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE11.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE11.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE11.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE12.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE12.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE12.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE12.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE13.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE13.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE13.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE13.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE14.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE14.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE14.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE14.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE15.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE15.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
www.eaton.com
591
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE15.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE15.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE16.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE16.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE16.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE16.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE17.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE17.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE17.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE17.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE18.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE18.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE18.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE18.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE19.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE19.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE19.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE19.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE20.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE20.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE20.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE20.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE21.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE21.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE21.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE21.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE22.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE22.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE22.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE22.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE23.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE23.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE23.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE23.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE24.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE24.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE24.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE24.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE25.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
592
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE25.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE25.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE25.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE26.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE26.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE26.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE26.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE27.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE27.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE27.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE27.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE28.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE28.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE28.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE28.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE29.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE29.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE29.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE29.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE30.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE30.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE30.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE30.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE31.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE31.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE31.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE31.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE32.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE32.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE32.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE32.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE33.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE33.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE33.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE33.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE34.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE34.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE34.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE34.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
www.eaton.com
593
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE35.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE35.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE35.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE35.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE36.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE36.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE36.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE36.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE37.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE37.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE37.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE37.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE38.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE38.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE38.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE38.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE39.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE39.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE39.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE39.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE40.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE40.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE40.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE40.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE41.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE41.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE41.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE41.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE42.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE42.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE42.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE42.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE43.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE43.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE43.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE43.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE44.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE44.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE44.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
594
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE44.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE45.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE45.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE45.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE45.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE46.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE46.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE46.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE46.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE47.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE47.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE47.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE47.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE48.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE48.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE48.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE48.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE49.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE49.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE49.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE49.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE50.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE50.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE50.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE50.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE51.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE51.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE51.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE51.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE52.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE52.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE52.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE52.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE53.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE53.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE53.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE53.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE54.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE54.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
www.eaton.com
595
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE54.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE54.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE55.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE55.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE55.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE55.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE56.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE56.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE56.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE56.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE57.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE57.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE57.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE57.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE58.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE58.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE58.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE58.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE59.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE59.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE59.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE59.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE60.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE60.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE60.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE60.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE61.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE61.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE61.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE61.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE62.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE62.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE62.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE62.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE63.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE63.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE63.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE63.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE64.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
596
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE64.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE64.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE64.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE65.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE65.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE65.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE65.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE66.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE66.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE66.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE66.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE67.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE67.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE67.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE67.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE68.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE68.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE68.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE68.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE69.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE69.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE69.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE69.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE70.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE70.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE70.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE70.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE71.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE71.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE71.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE71.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE72.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE72.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE72.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE72.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE73.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE73.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE73.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE73.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
www.eaton.com
597
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE74.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE74.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE74.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE74.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE75.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE75.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE75.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE75.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE76.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE76.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE76.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE76.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE77.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE77.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE77.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE77.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE78.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE78.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE78.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE78.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE79.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE79.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE79.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE79.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE80.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE80.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE80.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE80.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
These trips will start the BF module if all current functions have been selected as the trigger event.
In case that the protective device is equipped with directional overcurrent
protection. All ANSI 67 elements (directional overcurrent protection), will be
displayed as ANSI 50/51 elements. That means, that the name of an ANSI 50/51
element wont change, if it is set within the device planning from “non-directional”
to “directional”.
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
50P[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50P[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
598
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
50P[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50X[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50X[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51X[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51X[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50R[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50R[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51R[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51R[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
46[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
46[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ZI.TripCmd
Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Command
These trips will start the BF module if external trips have been selected as the trigger event.
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
ExP[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[4].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Commissioning: Breaker Failure Protection
The time that is configured for the BF MUST NOT be below the breaker
control time, otherwise an unwanted operation of the BF is caused by any
protective trip.
Object to Be Tested:
•
Test of the breaker failure protection.
Necessary Means:
•
•
•
Current source;
Current meter; and
Timer.
www.eaton.com
599
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
When testing, the applied test current must always be higher than the
tripping threshold »I-BF«. If the test current falls below the threshold while
the breaker is in the “Off” position, no pickup will be generated.
Procedure (Single-Phase):
For testing the tripping time of the BF protection, a test current has to be higher than the threshold value of one
of the current protection modules that are assigned to trigger the BF protection. The BF trip delay can be
measured from the time when one of the triggering inputs becomes active to the time when the BF protection trip
is asserted.
To avoid wiring errors, checked to make sure the breaker in the upstream system switches off.
The time, measured by the timer, should be in line with the specified tolerances.
Re-connect the control cable to the breaker!
Successful Test Result:
The actual times measured comply with the setpoint times. The breaker in the higher-level section switches off.
600
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
CTS – Current Transformer Supervision
CTS
Most functions of metering, protection, and control in the relay rely on correct current measurements. It is
important to make sure the CT connections and their operations are correct. The failures (including CT
secondary wire broken, insulation broken down, broken wiring between CT and relay, and mismatched
polarities) will cause the incorrect current measurements. The other CT errors (due to the magnetizing current
that is proportional to the primary current, CT saturation, and measuring circuit and quantization error) can also
cause inaccurate current measurements.
The CTS utilizes the Kirchhoff’s current law to detect a CT failure and can differentiate the wiring errors from the
measurement errors by adding biases to offset the measurement related errors. The biases include two terms,
one of which is related to the static error that accounts for CT magnetizing characteristic differences and current
measurement circuit calibration errors and other is the dynamic error that is proportional to the measured
maximum current due to CT transformation characteristics. The CTs are assumed to be used in the wyegrounded winding sides. Under normal conditions, the mismatch between the calculated and the measured zero
sequence current should be less than the bias value. However, if there is a CT wiring error, such relationship
will not hold true. If the mismatch exceeds the bias for a specified time, an alarm will be generated.
The operating principle can be expressed in terms of CT secondary currents as follow:
 IL1IL2IL3KI∗IG=3∗I 0KI∗  IG∆IKd∗Imax
KI is the ratio of the ground CT ratio over the phase CT ratio, and it is automatically calculated from the rated
system parameters.
∆I
=
Kd
=
Imax
=
Total bias value =
The static error, a minimum mismatch allowed between the calculated and measured zero
sequence current.
The dynamic error factor, a restrain slope that defines a percentage error generated by a
high current.
maximum phase current.
∆I + Kd x Imax.
The current transformer supervision operation can be graphically represented as follows.
Limit Value
Kd*Imax
I
Imax
If the current is measured in two phases only (for example only IA/IB) or if
there is no separate ground current measuring (e.g.: normally via a zero
sequence CT), the supervision function should be deactivated.
www.eaton.com
601
2
602
www.eaton.com
IX
IC
IB
IA
IX
Calculated
(Element is not deactivated and no active blocking signals)
Please Refer to Diagram: Blockings
CTS
Σ
-
+
Kd
CTS.
¬I
0
t
CTS.t
AND
CTS.Pickup
40
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Device Planning Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Do not use [Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameter of the Current Transformer Supervision
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Default
Menu Path
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CTS]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CTS]
Setting Group Parameters of the Current Transformer Supervision
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Supervision
/CTS]
ExBlo Fc
ΔI
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
In order to prevent faulty tripping of phase
selective protection functions that use the
current as tripping criterion. If the
difference of the measured ground current
and the calculated value I0 is higher than
the pick up value ΔI, an pickup event is
generated after expiring of the excitation
time. In such a case, a fuse failure, a
broken wire or a faulty measuring circuit
can be assumed.
0.50 In
0.10 – 1.00 In
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Supervision
/CTS]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Supervision
/CTS]
www.eaton.com
603
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Pickup delay
Pickup delay
0.1 – 9999.0 s
1.0 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Supervision
/CTS]
Kd
Dynamic correction factor for the evaluation 0.00 - 0.99
of the difference between calculated and
measured ground current. This correction
factor allows transformer faults, caused by
higher currents, to be compensated.
0.00
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Supervision
/CTS]
Current Transformer Supervision Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CTS]
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/CTS]
Current Transformer Supervision Signals (Outputs States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision
Commissioning: Current Transformer Failure Supervision
Preconditions:
1.Measurement of all three-phase currents (are applied to the measuring
inputs of the device).
2.The ground current is detected via a zero sequence transformer (not in
residual connection).
604
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Object to Be Tested:
Check of the CT Supervision (by comparing the calculated with the measured ground current).
Necessary Means:
Three-phase current source.
Procedure, Part 1:
•
•
•
•
Set the limiting value of the CTs to »delta I=0.1*In«.
Feed a three-phase, symmetrical current system (approx. nominal current) to the secondary side.
Disconnect the current of one phase from one of the measuring inputs (the symmetrical feeding at the
secondary side has to be maintained).
Make sure that the »CTS.ALARM« signal is generated.
Successful Test Result, Part 1:
The »CTS.ALARM« signal is generated.
Procedure, Part 2:
•
•
•
Feed a three-phase, symmetrical current system (approx. nominal current) to the secondary side.
Feed a current that is higher than the threshold value for the measuring circuit supervision to the ground
current measuring input.
Make sure that the »CTS.ALARM« signal is generated.
Successful Test Result, Part 2:
The »CTS.ALARM« signal is generated.
www.eaton.com
605
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
74TC - Trip Circuit Monitoring
TCM
The trip circuit monitoring is used for monitoring if the trip circuit is ready for opening operations. The monitoring
can be fulfilled by two ways. The one way assumes only 52a is used in the trip circuit and other assumes
besides 52a, 52b is also used for the circuit monitoring. Two options either 52a only (or breaker closed) or both
(52a and 52b) are provided for the User to select based on use of the breaker status in the trip circuit. With 52a
only in the trip circuit, the monitoring is only effective when the breaker is closed while if both 52a and 52b are
used, the trip circuit will be monitored all time as long as the control power is on.
The trip circuit continuity is monitored through the digital inputs DI1 and DI2, and the breaker status 52a or 52b
or both must be monitored through the other digital inputs. Note that the digital inputs used for this purpose
must be configured properly based on the trip circuit control voltage and also that the de-bouncing times must be
set to minimum. If the trip circuit is detected broken, an alarm will be issued with a specified delay, which must
be greater than a period from the time when a trip contact is closed to the time when the breaker status is clearly
recognized by the relay.
In Slot 1 has two digital inputs, each of which has a separate root (contact
separation) for the trip circuit supervision.
In this case, the trip circuit supply voltage serves also as supply voltage for the digital inputs and so the supply
voltage failure of a trip circuit can be detected directly.
In order to identify a conductor failure in the trip circuit on the supply line or in the trip coil, the off-coil has to be
looped-in to the supervision circuit.
The time delay is to be set in a way that switching actions cannot cause false trips in this module.
606
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
One Breaker Application Examples
Trip Circuit Monitoring for one Breaker: Auxiliary Contacts (52a and 52b) in trip circuit.
Relay Control Voltage
V+
V-
Breaker 1 (Bkr[1]) Control Voltage
- DC
X1
COM1
DI1
COM2
DI2
W1-52a
W1-52b
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
PE
V+
TC
V-
52a
52b
Trip
+DC
52a and 52b in Trip Circuit
DI-Threshold
X1
6
5
AND
t-TCM
OR
DI-Threshold
t
TCM.Pickup
0
X1
8
7
AND
www.eaton.com
607
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Trip Circuit Monitoring for One Breaker: Auxiliary Contacts (52a Only) in Trip Circuit.
Relay Control Voltage
V+
V-
Breaker 1 (Bkr[1]) Control Voltage
- DC
X1
COM1
DI1
W1-52a
W1-52b
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
PE
V+
TC
V-
52a
52b
Trip
+DC
52a only in Trip Circuit
DI-Threshold
X1
6
5
t-TCM
TCM.Pickup
t
AND
0
Bkr.Pos CLOSE
Device Planning Parameters of the Trip Circuit Monitoring Module
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
Mode
Mode
Do not use,
Use
[Device Planning]
Use
Global Protection Parameters of the Trip Circuit Monitoring Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Mode
Select if trip circuit is going to be monitored Closed,
when the breaker is closed or when the
breaker is either open or close.
Either
Default
Menu Path
Closed
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCM]
608
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Input 1
Select the input configured to monitor the
trip coil when the breaker is closed.
-.-,
DI-8P X1.DI 1
[Protection Para
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
/Global Prot Para
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
/Supervision
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
/TCM]
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
Input 2
Select the input configured to monitor the
trip coil when the breaker is open. Only
available if Mode set to “Either”.
-.-,
-.-
[Protection Para
DI-8P X1.DI 1,
/Global Prot Para
Only available if: Mode = Either
DI-8P X1.DI 2,
/Supervision
DI-8P X1.DI 3,
/TCM]
DI-8P X1.DI 4,
DI-8P X1.DI 5,
DI-8P X1.DI 6,
DI-8P X1.DI 7,
DI-8P X1.DI 8
ExBlo1
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCM]
ExBlo2
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
-.-
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCM]
www.eaton.com
609
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Setting Group Parameters of the Trip Circuit Monitoring Module
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Function
Permanent activation or deactivation of
module/element.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Protection Para
Active
/<n>
/Supervision
/TCM]
ExBlo Fc
t-TCM
Activate (allow) or inactivate (disallow)
Inactive,
blocking of the module/element. This
parameter is only effective if a signal is
Active
assigned to the corresponding global
protection parameter. If the signal becomes
true, those modules/elements are blocked
that are configured "ExBlo Fc=active".
Inactive
Tripping delay time of the Trip Circuit
Supervision
0.2 s
0.10 – 10.00 s
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Supervision
/TCM]
[Protection Para
/<n>
/Supervision
/TCM]
Trip Circuit Monitoring Module Input States
Name
Description
Assignment Via
CinBkr-52a-I
Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52a)
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCM]
CinBkr-52b-I
Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the [Protection Para
Bkr. (52b)
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCM]
ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCM]
610
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
[Protection Para
/Global Prot Para
/Supervision
/TCM]
Bkr Pos Detect-I
Module Input State: Criterion by which the
Breaker Switch Position is to be detected.
[]
Trip Circuit Monitoring Module Signals (Output States)
Name
Description
Active
Signal: Active
ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Pickup
Signal: Pickup Trip Circuit Supervision
Not Possible
Not possible because no state indicator assigned to the breaker.
Commissioning: Trip Circuit Monitoring for Breakers
For breakers that trip by means of little energy (e.g.: via an optocoupler), it
has to be ensured that the current applied by the digital inputs will not
cause false tripping of the breaker.
Object to Be Tested:
Test of the trip circuit monitoring (with 52a and 52b contact).
Procedure, Part 1:
Simulate failure of the control voltage in the power circuits.
Successful Test Result, Part 1:
After expiration of »t-TCM« the trip circuit supervision, TCM of the device should signal an alarm.
Procedure, Part 2:
Simulate a broken cable in the breaker control circuit.
Successful Test Result, Part 2:
After expiration of »t-TCM«, the trip circuit supervision TCM of the device should signal an alarm.
www.eaton.com
611
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Self Supervision
The System-OK contact (SC relay, life-contact) cannot be configured. The system contact is a Form “C” contact
that picks up when the device is free from internal faults. While the device is booting up, the System OK relay
(SC) remains dropped-off (unenergized). As soon as the system is properly started (and protection is active),
the System Contact picks up and the System LED is activated accordingly.
The devices are continuously monitored and supervised by different methods during normal operation as well as
during the start-up phase.
Results of this supervision may be:
•
•
•
•
•
Messages appearing within the event recorder;
Indications within the display or PowerPort-E;
Corrective measures;
Restart of the device; or
Any combination of the above results.
In case of failures that cannot be corrected immediately, 3 restarts within 20 minutes are accepted before the
device will be deactivated. In such a case, the device should be removed for service to ensure continuous
correct operation. The Eaton Customer Service contact information and address can be found at the front of this
manual.
In case of any failures, the recorders of the device should be left untouched to ensure an easy diagnosis and
proper repair at the factory. Besides the records and visible indications to the customer, there is internal
information about failures. These allow Eaton service personnel at the repair facility to make a detailed analysis
of files with failure reports.
Self supervision is applied by different functions at different cyclic or non-cyclic timings to the following parts and
functions of the device:
•
•
•
•
•
Faultless cyclic execution of the software;
Functional capability of memory boards;
Consistency of data;
Functional capability of hardware sub-assemblies; and
Faultless operation of the measuring unit.
Faultless cyclic operation of the software is supervised by timing analysis and checking results of different
functions. Errors of the software (watchdog function) lead to restarting the device and switching off the SystemOK contact (life contact). In addition, the “System-OK” LED will blink red after 3 unsuccessful attempts to restart
the device within a time period of 20 minutes.
The main processor cyclically monitors the operation of the signal processor and initiates corrective actions or
restart of the device in case of faulty operation. Data and files are generally secured against unintended
overwriting or faulty changes by check-sums.
The measuring unit continuously checks the measured data by comparing received data with data from a
second channel sampled in parallel.
The auxiliary voltage is monitored continuously. If the voltage of one of the different supply circuits falls below a
certain threshold, a restart of the device is initiated. If the voltage staggers around the threshold, the device also
starts again after several seconds. Additionally the level of all internal supply voltage groups are continuously
monitored.
Independent of these separate monitoring functions, the intermediate voltage circuit is buffered until all important
and relevant operational and fault-data have been saved and the device initiates a restart.
612
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Error Messages / Codes
After a reboot of the device, the reason for rebooting will be displayed under [Operation/Status
Display/Sys/Reboot]. For more information about the reboot reason, please refer to the information in this
section.
The reboot will also be logged within the event recorder. Rebooting causes an event named “Sys.Reboot”.
Numeric Reboot Codes
Error Messages/Codes
1.
Reboot after clean switching off of the device - Normal reboot after clean shut-down of the
device.
2.
Reboot by User command - User-initiated reboot through panel command.
3.
Super reset - Reset to factory settings.
4.
Restart by debugger - Eaton internally for system-analysis purposes.
5.
Restart because of configuration changes.
6.
General failure - Reboot without definite reason.
7.
Reboot by “SW-system abort” (HOST-side) - Summary of several reboot reasons detected by the
software (i.e.: wrong pointer, corrupted files, etc.).
8.
Reboot by watchdog timeout (HOST-side) - Signaling if the protection-class-task hangs.
9.
Reboot by system abort (DSP-side) - Summary of several reboot reasons detected by software
(i.e.: wrong pointer, DSP-side).
10.
Reboot by watchdog timeout (DSP-side) - Appears when DSP sequence needs too long for one
cycle.
11.
Loss of auxiliary voltage or low voltage reboot after loss of auxiliary voltage or voltage dropping
below reboot level but not becoming zero.
12.
Faulty memory access - Message of MMU (memory mapping unit) that prohibited memory
access has occurred.
www.eaton.com
613
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Programmable Logic
Available Elements (Equations):
Logic
General Description
The protective device includes programmable logic equations for programming inputs, outputs, blocking of
protective functions, and custom logic functions in the relay.
The logic provides control of the relay output contacts based on the state of the inputs that can be chosen from
the assignment list (protective function pickups, protective function states, breaker states, system alarms, and
module inputs). The User can use the output signals of a logic equation as inputs in higher equations (e.g.: the
output signal of logic equation 10 might be used as an input of logic equation 11).
Principle Overview
Type of logic gate selectable
IN1
Inverting settable
IN2
Inverting settable
Gate Out
Timer Out
Delay Timer
AND
OR
t-On Delay
NAND
IN3
Inverting settable
IN4
Inverting settable
Reset Latched
Inverting settable
614
NOR
Inverting settable
Set
S
Q
Reset
R
Q
Out
t-Off Delay
www.eaton.com
Out inverted
www.eaton.com
Inactive
Active
Inverting Reset
1..n, Assignment List
LE[x].Reset Latched
Inactive
Active
Inverting4
1..n, Assignment List
LE[x].IN4
Inactive
Active
Inverting3
1..n, Assignment List
LE[x].IN3
Inactive
Active
Inverting2
1..n, Assignment List
LE[x].IN2
Inactive
Active
Inverting1
1..n, Assignment List
LE[x].IN1
LE[1]...[n]
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
XOR
AND
OR
NAND
NOR
φ
NOR
NAND
OR
AND
Gate
Inactive
Active
Inverting Set
t-Off Delay
t-On Delay
Delay Timer
XOR
R
S
Q
Q
Out inverted
Out
Timer Out
Gate Out
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Detailed Overview – Overall Logic Diagram.
615
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Available Gates (Operators)
Within the Logic Equation, the following Gates can be used.
Gate
AND
AND
OR
AND
OR
NAND
OR
NOR
Input Signals
The User can assign up to four Input signals (from the assignment list) to the inputs of the gate.
As an option, each of the four input signals can be inverted (negated).
Timer Gate (On Delay and Off Delay)
The output of the gate can be delayed. The User has the option to set an On and an Off delay.
Latching
The timer issues two signals: an unlatched and a latched signal. The latched output can optionally be inverted.
In order to reset the latched signal, the User has to assign a reset signal from the assignment list. Optionally,
the reset signal can also be inverted.
If no »Reset Latched« signal is assigned, then the »LATCH OUT «signal will be identical with the »TIMER OUT «
signal.
Cascading Logical Outputs
The device will evaluate output states of the logic equations starting from “Logic Equation 1” up to the logic
equation with the highest number. This evaluation cycle will be continuously repeated.
Cascading Logic Equations in an ascending sequence.
Cascading in an ascending sequence means that the User utilizes the output signal of “Logic Equation n” as
input of “Logic Equation n+1”. If the state of “Logic Equation n” changes, the state of the output of “Logic
Equation n+1” will be updated within the same cycle.
Cascading Logic Equations in a descending sequence.
Cascading in a descending sequence means that the User utilizes the output signal of “Logic Equation n+1” as
input of “Logic Equation n”. If the output of “Logic Equation n+1” changes, this change of the feed back signal at
the input of “Logic Equation n” will be delayed for one cycle.
616
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Cascading in Ascending Order
LE1.IN1
Update within the same evaluation cycle
LE1.IN2
LE1.IN3
Logic Equation1
Output of Logic Equation 1
LE2.IN2
LE1.IN4
LE2.IN3
Logic Equation2
Output of Logic Equation 2
LE2.IN4
LE1.IN1
Update within the same evaluation cycle
LE1.IN2
LE1.IN3
Logic Equation1
Output of Logic Equation 1
LE2.IN2
LE1.IN4
LE2.IN3
Logic Equation2
Output of Logic Equation 2
LE3.IN2
LE2.IN4
Logic Equation3
LE3.IN3
LE3.IN4
Cascading in Descending Order
LE2.IN1
Output of Logic Equation 3
Update within the same evaluation cycle
Update within the next evaluation cycle (1 cycle delay)
LE2.IN2
LE2.IN3
Logic Equation2
Output of Logic Equation 2
LE1.IN2
LE2.IN4
LE1.IN3
Logic Equation1
Output of Logic Equation1
LE1.IN4
LE3.IN1
Update within the same evaluation cycle
LE3.IN2
LE3.IN3
Update within the next evaluation cycle (1 cycle delay)
Logic Equation3
Output of Logic Equation 3
Update within the next but one evaluation cycle (2 cycles
delay)
LE2.IN2
LE3.IN4
LE2.IN3
Logic Equation2
Output of Logic Equation 2
LE1.IN2
LE2.IN4
LE1.IN3
Logic Equation1
Output of Logic Equation 1
LE1.IN4
www.eaton.com
617
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Programmable Logic at the Panel
WARNING improper use of logic equations might result in personal injury
or damage the electrical equipment.
Do not use logic equations unless the User can ensure the safe
functionality.
How to configure a logic equation?
•
Within the Device Planning, set the number of required Logic Equations.
•
Call up the [Logic] menu.
•
Select a Logic Equation that is to be set.
•
Set the Input Signals (where necessary, invert them).
•
If required, configure the timer (»On delay« and »Off delay«).
•
If the latched output signal is used, assign a reset signal to the reset input.
•
Within the »status display«, the User can check the status of the logical inputs and outputs of the logic
equation.
In case the logic equations should be cascaded, the User has to be aware of timing delays (cycles) in case of
descending sequences (Please refer to the Cascading Logical Outputs section).
By means of the Status Display [Operation/Status Display], the logical states can be verified.
Programmable Logic Via PowerPort-E
WARNING improper use of logic equations might result in personal injury
or damage the electrical equipment.
Do not use logic equations unless the User can ensure the safe
functionality.
It is recommended to configure the logic via the PowerPort-E application.
How to configure a logic equation?
•
Within the Device Planning, set the number of required Logic Equations.
•
Call up the [Logic] menu.
•
Set the Input Signals (where necessary, invert them).
618
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
•
If required, configure the timer (»On delay« and »Off delay«).
•
If the latched output signal is used, assign a reset signal to the reset input.
•
Within the »status display«, the User can check the status of the logical inputs and outputs of the logic
equation.
In case the logic equations should be cascaded, the User has to be aware of timing delays (cycles) in case of
descending sequences (Please refer to section: Cascading Logical Outputs).
By means of the Status Display [Operation/Status Display], the logical states can be verified.
Device Planning Parameters of the Programmable Logic
Parameter
Description
Options
Default
Menu Path
No of
Equations:
Number of required Logic Equations:
0,
20
[Device Planning]
5,
10,
20,
40,
80
Selection List for Logic Input Signals
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
Prot.Active
Signal: Active
Prot.Available
Signal: Protection is available
Prot.I dir fwd
Signal: Phase current failure forward direction
Prot.I dir n poss
Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage
Prot.I dir rev
Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction
Prot.IR dir fwd
Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) forward
Prot.IR dir n poss
Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) direction detection not possible
Prot.IR dir rev
Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) reverse direction
Prot.IX dir fwd
Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) forward
Prot.IX dir n poss
Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) direction detection not possible
Prot.IX dir rev
Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) reverse direction
Prot.Pickup
Signal: General Pickup
Prot.Trip
Signal: General Trip
Breaker.Interl CLOSE1-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command
Breaker.Interl CLOSE2-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command
www.eaton.com
619
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Breaker.Interl CLOSE3-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command
Breaker.Interl OPEN1-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command
Breaker.Interl OPEN2-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command
Breaker.Interl OPEN3-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command
Breaker.Ack unsucc SwitchCmd-I
State of the module input: Acknowledge an error signal the
signalizes an unsuccessful switching attempt
Breaker.SC CLOSE-I
State of the module input: Switching CLOSE Command, e.g.: the
state of the Logic or the state of the digital input
Breaker.SC OPEN-I
State of the module input: Switching OPEN Command, e.g.: the
state of the Logic or the state of the digital input
Breaker.CinBkr-52a-I
Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52a)
Breaker.CinBkr-52b-I
Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52b)
Breaker.Ready-I
Module Input State: Breaker Ready
Breaker.Sys-in-Sync-I
State of the module input: This signals has to become true within
the synchronization time. If not, switching is unsuccessful.
Breaker.Operate Position-I
State of the module input: The withdrawable Breaker is in the
Operate Position
Breaker.Test Position-I
State of the module input: The withdrawable Breaker is in the Test
Position
Breaker.Removed-I
State of the module input: The withdrawable Breaker is Removed
Breaker.Ack TripCmd-I
State of the module input: Acknowledgment Signal (only for
automatic acknowledgment). Module input signal
Breaker.SI SingleContactInd
Signal: The Position of the Switchgear is detected by one auxiliary
contact (pole) only. Thus indeterminate and disturbed Positions
cannot be detected.
Breaker.Pos not CLOSE
Signal: Pos not CLOSE
Breaker.Pos CLOSE
Signal: Breaker is in CLOSE-Position
Breaker.Pos OPEN
Signal: Breaker is in OPEN-Position
Breaker.Pos Indeterm
Signal: Breaker is in Indeterminate Position
Breaker.Pos Disturb
Signal: Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Breaker Position. The feedback signals (Position Indicators) contradict themselves. After
expiring of a supervision timer this signal becomes true.
Breaker.Ready
Signal: Breaker is ready for operation.
Breaker.t-Dwell
Signal: Dwell time
Breaker.Operate Position
Signal: The withdrawable Breaker is in the Operate Position
Breaker.Test Position
Signal: The withdrawable Breaker is in the Test Position
Breaker.Removed
Signal: The withdrawable Breaker is Removed
Breaker.CES succesf
Command Execution Supervision: Switching command executed
successfully.
Breaker.CES Disturbed
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command
unsuccessful. Switchgear in disturbed position.
Breaker.CES SAuthority
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
executed. No switching authority.
620
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Breaker.CES SwitchgDir
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Direction Control. A
switchgear that is already OPEN should be switched OPEN again
(doubly).
Breaker.CES DoubleOperating
Command Execution Supervision: A second switch command is in
conflict with a pending one.
Breaker.CES CLOSE durg OPEN Cmd
Command Execution Supervision: CLOSE Command during a
pending OPEN Command.
Breaker.CES SG not ready
Command Execution Supervision: Switchgear not ready
Breaker.CES Field Interl
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
executed because of field interlocking.
Breaker.CES Station Interl
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
executed because of station interlocking.
Breaker.CES SyncTimeout
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
executed No Synchronization signal while t-sync was running.
Breaker.Prot CLOSE
Signal: CLOSE command issued by the Prot module.
Breaker.TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Breaker.Ack TripCmd
Signal: Acknowledge Trip Command
Breaker.CLOSE incl Prot CLOSE
Signal: The CLOSE Command includes the CLOSE Command
issued by the Protection module.
Breaker.OPEN incl TripCmd
Signal: The OPEN Command includes the OPEN Command
issued by the Protection module.
Breaker.Position Ind manipulated
Signal: Position Ind manipulated
Breaker.Bwear Slow Breaker
Signal: Slow Breaker Alarm
Breaker.Res Bwear Slow Breaker
Signal: Resetting the slow breaker alarm.
Breaker.CLOSE Cmd
Signal: CLOSE command issued to the switchgear. Depending on
the setting the signal may include the CLOSE command of the
Prot module.
Breaker.OPEN Cmd
Signal: OPEN command issued to the switchgear. Depending on
the setting the signal may include the OPEN command of the Prot
module.
Breaker.CLOSE Cmd manual
Signal: CLOSE Cmd manual
Breaker.OPEN Cmd manual
Signal: OPEN Cmd manual
Breaker.CLOSE request
Signal: Synchronous CLOSE request
50P[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup
50P[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
50P[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50P[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup
50P[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
50P[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50P[3].Pickup
Signal: Pickup
50P[3].Trip
Signal: Trip
50P[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup
www.eaton.com
621
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
51P[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
51P[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup
51P[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
51P[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[3].Pickup
Signal: Pickup
51P[3].Trip
Signal: Trip
51P[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50X[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
50X[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
50X[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50X[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
50X[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
50X[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51X[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
51X[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
51X[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51X[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
51X[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
51X[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50R[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
50R[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
50R[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50R[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
50R[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
50R[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51R[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
51R[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
51R[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51R[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
51R[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
51R[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27M[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
27M[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
27M[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27M[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
27M[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
27M[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59M[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
622
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
59M[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
59M[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59M[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
59M[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
59M[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27A[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
27A[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
27A[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27A[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
27A[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
27A[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59A[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
59A[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
59A[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59A[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
59A[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
59A[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59N[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
59N[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
59N[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59N[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
59N[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
59N[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
46[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Negative Sequence
46[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
46[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
46[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Negative Sequence
46[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
46[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
47[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry
47[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
47[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
47[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry
47[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
47[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[1].Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
81[1].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange.
www.eaton.com
623
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
81[1].Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[1].Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[1].Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[1].Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
81[1].Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
81[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[2].Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
81[2].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange.
81[2].Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[2].Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[2].Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[2].Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
81[2].Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
81[3].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[3].Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
81[3].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange.
81[3].Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[3].Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[3].Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[3].Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
81[3].Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
81[4].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[4].Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
81[4].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange.
81[4].Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[4].Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[4].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[4].Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[4].Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
81[4].Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
81[5].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[5].Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
81[5].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange.
624
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
81[5].Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[5].Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[5].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[5].Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[5].Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
81[5].Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
81[6].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[6].Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
81[6].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange.
81[6].Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[6].Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[6].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[6].Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[6].Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
81[6].Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
32[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32[1].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
32[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32[2].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
32[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32[3].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32[3].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
32[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32V[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32V[1].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
32V[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32V[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32V[2].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
32V[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32V[3].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32V[3].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
32V[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55D[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Factor
PF-55D[1].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Factor
PF-55D[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55D[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Factor
PF-55D[2].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Factor
www.eaton.com
625
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
PF-55D[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55A[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Factor
PF-55A[1].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Factor
PF-55A[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55A[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Factor
PF-55A[2].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Factor
PF-55A[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ZI.Ground OUT
Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground OUT
ZI.Ground Pickup
Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Pickup
ZI.Ground Trip
Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Trip
ZI.IN
Signal: Zone Interlocking IN
ZI.OUT
Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT
ZI.Phase OUT
Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase OUT
ZI.Phase Pickup
Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Pickup
ZI.Phase Trip
Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Trip
ZI.Pickup
Signal: Pickup Zone Interlocking
ZI.Trip
Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip
ZI.TripCmd
Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Command
SOTF.Active
Signal: Active
SOTF.enabled
Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to
modify Overcurrent Protection Settings.
SOTF.Ex Man CLOSE Cmd-I
Module Input State: External manual breaker CLOSE command
(NOT for AR!)
SOTF.I<
Signal: No Load Current.
CLPU.detected
Signal: Cold Load detected
CLPU.enabled
Signal: Cold Load enabled
CLPU.ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
CLPU.ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
CLPU.ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
CLPU.I<
Signal: No Load Current.
CLPU.Load Inrush
Signal: Load Inrush
CLPU.Settle Time
Signal: Settle Time
BF.Lockout
Signal: Lockout
BF.Pickup
Signal: BF-Module Started (Pickup)
BF.Trip
Signal: Breaker Failure Trip
TCM.Not Possible
Not possible because no state indicator assigned to the breaker.
TCM.Pickup
Signal: Pickup Trip Circuit Supervision
CTS.Pickup
Signal: Pickup Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision
LOP.Pickup
Signal: Pickup Loss of Potential
AR.Blo
Signal: Auto Reclosure is blocked
626
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
AR.failed
Signal: Auto Reclosing Failure
AR.Lock
Signal: Auto Reclosure is locked out
AR.Pre Shot
Pre Shot Control
AR.Ready
Signal: Ready to shoot
AR.Running
Signal: Auto Reclosing Running
AR.Standby
Signal: Standby
AR.successful
Signal: Auto Reclosing successful
Sync.In-Sync Allowed
Signal: In-Sync Allowed
Sync.Sys-in-Sync
Signal: Bus and line voltages are in synchronism according to the
system synchronism criteria.
Sync.LiveBus
Signal: Live-Bus or Dead-Bus flag: 1=Live-Bus, 0=Dead-Bus
Sync.LiveLine
Signal: Live-Line or Dead-Line flag: 1=Live-Line, 0=Dead-Line
Sync.SlipTooHigh
Signal: Frequency difference (slip frequency) between bus and line
voltages too high.
Sync.SynchronFailed
Signal: This signal indicates a failed synchronization. It is set for
5 s when the breaker is still open after the Sync-check Run-timer
has timed out.
Sync.Sync-checkRunTiming
Signal: Sync-check RunTiming
Sync.SyncOverridden
Signal: Sync-check is overridden because one of the Synchronism
overriding conditions (DB/DL or ExtBypass) is met.
Sync.VDiffTooHigh
Signal: Voltage difference between bus and line too high.
WiredInputs.52a M1-I
State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Closed
WiredInputs.52b M1-I
State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Open
WiredInputs.TOCa M1-I
State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Connected
WiredInputs.43/10 M1-I
State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Selected To Trip
WiredInputs.52a M2-I
State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Closed
WiredInputs.52b M2-I
State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Open
WiredInputs.TOCa M2-I
State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Connected
WiredInputs.43/10 M2-I
State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Selected To Trip
WiredInputs.52a T -I
State of the module input: Tie Breaker Closed
WiredInputs.52b T-I
State of the module input: Tie Breaker Open
WiredInputs.TOCa T-I
State of the module input: Tie Breaker Connected
WiredInputs.43/10 T-I
State of the module input: Tie Breaker Selected To Trip
WiredInputs.43 M-I
State of the module input: System In Manual
WiredInputs.43 A-I
State of the module input: System in Auto
WiredInputs.43 P1-I
State of the module input: Preferred Source 1
WiredInputs.43 P2-I
State of the module input: Preferred Source 2
WiredInputs.Bkr Trouble-I
Breaker Trouble
DI-8P X1.DI 1
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 2
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 3
Signal: Digital Input
www.eaton.com
627
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
DI-8P X1.DI 4
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 5
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 6
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 7
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 8
Signal: Digital Input
RO-6 X5.RO 1
Signal: Relay Output
RO-6 X5.RO 2
Signal: Relay Output
RO-6 X5.RO 3
Signal: Relay Output
RO-6 X5.RO 4
Signal: Relay Output
RO-6 X5.RO 5
Signal: Relay Output
RO-6 X5.RO 6
Signal: Relay Output
RO-4Z X2.ZI OUT
Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT
RO-4Z X2.RO 1
Signal: Relay Output
RO-4Z X2.RO 2
Signal: Relay Output
RO-4Z X2.RO 3
Signal: Relay Output
RO-4Z X2.RO 4
Signal: Relay Output
IEC61850.VirtualOutput1-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput2-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput3-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput4-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput5-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput6-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput7-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput8-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput9-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput10-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput11-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput12-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput13-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput14-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput15-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput16-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualInput1
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput2
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput3
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput4
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput5
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput6
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput7
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
628
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
IEC61850.VirtualInput8
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput9
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput10
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput11
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput12
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput13
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput14
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput15
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput16
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
Logic.LE1.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE1.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE1.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE1.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE2.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE2.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE2.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE2.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE3.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE3.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE3.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE3.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE4.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE4.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE4.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE4.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE5.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE5.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE5.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE5.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE6.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE6.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE6.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE6.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE7.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE7.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE7.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE7.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE8.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE8.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
www.eaton.com
629
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE8.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE8.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE9.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE9.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE9.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE9.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE10.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE10.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE10.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE10.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE11.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE11.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE11.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE11.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE12.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE12.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE12.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE12.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE13.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE13.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE13.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE13.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE14.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE14.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE14.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE14.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE15.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE15.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE15.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE15.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE16.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE16.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE16.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE16.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE17.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE17.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE17.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE17.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE18.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
630
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE18.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE18.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE18.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE19.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE19.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE19.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE19.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE20.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE20.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE20.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE20.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE21.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE21.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE21.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE21.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE22.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE22.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE22.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE22.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE23.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE23.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE23.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE23.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE24.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE24.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE24.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE24.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE25.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE25.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE25.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE25.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE26.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE26.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE26.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE26.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE27.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE27.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE27.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE27.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
www.eaton.com
631
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE28.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE28.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE28.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE28.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE29.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE29.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE29.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE29.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE30.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE30.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE30.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE30.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE31.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE31.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE31.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE31.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE32.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE32.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE32.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE32.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE33.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE33.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE33.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE33.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE34.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE34.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE34.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE34.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE35.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE35.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE35.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE35.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE36.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE36.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE36.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE36.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE37.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE37.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE37.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
632
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE37.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE38.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE38.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE38.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE38.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE39.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE39.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE39.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE39.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE40.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE40.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE40.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE40.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE41.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE41.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE41.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE41.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE42.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE42.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE42.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE42.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE43.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE43.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE43.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE43.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE44.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE44.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE44.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE44.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE45.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE45.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE45.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE45.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE46.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE46.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE46.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE46.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE47.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE47.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
www.eaton.com
633
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE47.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE47.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE48.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE48.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE48.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE48.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE49.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE49.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE49.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE49.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE50.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE50.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE50.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE50.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE51.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE51.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE51.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE51.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE52.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE52.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE52.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE52.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE53.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE53.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE53.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE53.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE54.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE54.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE54.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE54.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE55.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE55.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE55.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE55.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE56.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE56.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE56.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE56.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE57.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
634
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE57.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE57.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE57.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE58.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE58.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE58.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE58.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE59.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE59.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE59.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE59.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE60.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE60.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE60.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE60.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE61.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE61.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE61.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE61.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE62.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE62.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE62.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE62.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE63.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE63.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE63.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE63.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE64.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE64.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE64.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE64.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE65.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE65.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE65.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE65.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE66.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE66.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE66.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE66.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
www.eaton.com
635
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE67.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE67.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE67.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE67.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE68.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE68.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE68.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE68.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE69.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE69.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE69.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE69.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE70.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE70.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE70.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE70.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE71.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE71.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE71.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE71.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE72.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE72.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE72.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE72.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE73.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE73.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE73.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE73.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE74.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE74.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE74.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE74.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE75.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE75.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE75.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE75.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE76.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE76.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE76.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
636
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE76.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE77.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE77.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE77.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE77.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE78.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE78.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE78.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE78.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE79.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE79.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE79.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE79.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE80.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE80.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE80.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE80.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
System Alarms.Alarm Current Demand
Signal: Alarm Current demand value
System Alarms.Alarm I THD
Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Current
System Alarms.Alarm V THD
Signal: Alarm Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
System Alarms.Alarm VA Demand
Signal: Alarm VAs demand value
System Alarms.Alarm VA Power
Signal: Alarm VAs peak
System Alarms.Alarm VAr Demand
Signal: Alarm VARs demand value
System Alarms.Alarm VAr Power
Signal: Alarm VArs peak
System Alarms.Alarm Watt Demand
Signal: Alarm WATTS demand value
System Alarms.Alarm Watt Power
Signal: Alarm WATTS peak
System Alarms.Trip Current Demand
Signal: Trip Current demand value
System Alarms.Trip I THD
Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Current
System Alarms.Trip V THD
Signal: Trip Total Harmonic Distortion Voltage
System Alarms.Trip VA Demand
Signal: Trip VAs demand value
System Alarms.Trip VA Power
Signal: Trip VAs peak
System Alarms.Trip VAr Demand
Signal: Trip VARs demand value
System Alarms.Trip VAr Power
Signal: Trip VArs peak
System Alarms.Trip Watt Demand
Signal: Trip WATTS demand value
System Alarms.Trip Watt Power
Signal: Trip WATTS peak
Sys.Maint Mode Active
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Active
Sys.Maint Mode Comm
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Comm. Mode
Sys.Maint Mode DI
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Digital Input Mode
Sys.Maint Mode Inactive
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Inactive
www.eaton.com
637
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Sys.MaintMode Manually
Signal: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Manual Mode
Sys.Maint Mode-I
Module Input State: Arc Flash Reduction Maintenance Switch
Sys.Min. 1 param changed
Signal: At least one parameter has been changed.
Sys.PS 1
Signal: Parameter Set 1
Sys.PS 2
Signal: Parameter Set 2
Sys.PS 3
Signal: Parameter Set 3
Sys.PS 4
Signal: Parameter Set 4
Sys.PS1-I
State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should
activate this Parameter Setting Group.
Sys.PS2-I
State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should
activate this Parameter Setting Group.
Sys.PS3-I
State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should
activate this Parameter Setting Group.
Sys.PS4-I
State of the module input, respectively of the signal, that should
activate this Parameter Setting Group.
Sys.PSS manual
Signal: Manual switch over of a Parameter Set
Sys.PSS via Comm
Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Communication
Sys.PSS via Inp fct
Signal: Parameter Set Switch via Input Function
Sys.Res AlarmCr
Signal: Res AlarmCr
Sys.Res OperationsCr
Signal: Res OperationsCr
Sys.Res TotalCr
Signal: Res TotalCr
Sys.Res TripCr
Signal: Res TripCr
Global Protection Parameter of the Programmable Logic
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
LE1.Gate
Logic gate
AND,
AND
[Logic
OR,
/LE 1]
NAND,
NOR
LE1.IN1
Assignment of the Input Signal
1..n, LogicList
-.-
[Logic
/LE 1]
LE1.Inverting1
LE1.IN2
Inverting the input signals.
Inactive,
Only available if an input signal has been
assigned.
Active
Assignment of the Input Signal
1..n, LogicList
Inactive
[Logic
/LE 1]
-.-
[Logic
/LE 1]
638
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
LE1.Inverting2
Inverting the input signals.
Inactive,
Inactive
[Logic
Only available if an input signal has been
assigned.
Active
Assignment of the Input Signal
1..n, LogicList
LE1.IN3
/LE 1]
-.-
[Logic
/LE 1]
LE1.Inverting3
LE1.IN4
Inverting the input signals.
Inactive,
Only available if an input signal has been
assigned.
Active
Assignment of the Input Signal
1..n, LogicList
Inactive
[Logic
/LE 1]
-.-
[Logic
/LE 1]
LE1.Inverting4
Inverting the input signals.
Inactive,
Only available if an input signal has been
assigned.
Active
LE1.t-On Delay Switch On Delay
0.00 – 36000.00 s
Inactive
[Logic
/LE 1]
0.00 s
[Logic
/LE 1]
LE1.t-Off Delay Switch Off Delay
0.00 – 36000.00 s
0.00 s
[Logic
/LE 1]
LE1.Reset
Latched
Reset Signal for the Latching
1..n, LogicList
-.-
[Logic
/LE 1]
LE1.Inverting
Reset
Inverting Reset Signal for the Latching
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
LE1.Inverting
Set
Inverting the Setting Signal for the Latching Inactive,
[Logic
/LE 1]
Inactive
Active
[Logic
/LE 1]
Programmable Logic Inputs
Name
Description
Assignment Via
LE1.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of
the Input Signal
[Logic
/LE 1]
LE1.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of
the Input Signal
[Logic
/LE 1]
LE1.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of
the Input Signal
[Logic
/LE 1]
LE1.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of
the Input Signal
[Logic
/LE 1]
www.eaton.com
639
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Assignment Via
LE1.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for
the Latching
[Logic
/LE 1]
Programmable Logic Outputs
Name
Description
LE1.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
LE1.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
LE1.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
LE1.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
640
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Commissioning
Before starting work on an open switchboard, it is required that the switchboard is de-energized and the following
five safety regulations have been met.
Safety precautions:
• Disconnect the power supply;
• Secure against reconnection;
• Verify that the equipment is de-energized;
• Connect to ground and short-circuit all phases; and
• Cover or safeguard all live adjacent parts.
The secondary circuit of a current transformer must never be opened
during operation. The prevailing high voltages can cause severe injury or
death.
Even when the auxiliary voltage is switched off, it is likely that there are still
hazardous voltages at the component connections.
All locally applicable national and international installation and safety
regulations for working at electrical power installations MUST always to be
followed.
Prior to the initial voltage connection, the following must be guaranteed:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Correct grounding of the device;
That all signal circuits are tested;
That all control circuits are tested;
Transformer wiring is checked;
Correct rating of the CTs;
Correct burden of the CTs;
That the operational conditions are in line with the Technical Data;
Correct rating of the transformer protection;
Function of the transformer fuses;
Correct wiring of all digital inputs;
Polarity and capacity of the supply voltage; and
Correct wiring of the analog inputs and outputs.
The permissible deviations of measuring values and device adjustment are
dependent on the Technical Data/Tolerances.
Commissioning/Protection Test
Commissioning/protection test must be carried out by authorized and
qualified personnel. Before the device is put into operation, the related
documentation MUST be read and understood.
www.eaton.com
641
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
With any test of the protection functions, the following has to be checked:
Is activation/tripping saved in the event recorder?
Is tripping saved in the fault recorder?
Is tripping saved in the disturbance recorder?
Are all signals/messages correctly generated?
Do all generally configured blocking functions work properly?
Do all temporarily configured (via DI) blocking functions work
properly?
To enable checks on all LEDs and relay functions, these have to
be provided with the relevant pickup (alarm) and tripping functions
of the respective protection functions/elements. This MUST be
tested in practical operation.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check of all temporary blockings (via digital inputs).
•
In order to avoid malfunctions, all blockings related to
tripping/non-tripping of protection function MUST be tested. The
test can be very complex and should therefore be performed by
the same personnel who set up the protection concept.
Check all general trip blockings. All general trip blockings MUST be tested.
Prior to the initial operation of the protection device, all tripping times and
values shown in the adjustment list MUST be confirmed by a secondary
test.
Any description of functions, parameters, inputs, or outputs that does not
match the device in hand can be ignored.
Decommissioning – Removing the Plug from the Relay
Dismounting the relay will lead to a loss of the protection functionality.
Ensure that there is a back-up protection. If you are not aware of the
consequences of decommissioning the device – STOP! DO NOT start.
Inform SCADA before you start.
Switch-off the power supply.
Ensure that the cabinet is de-energized and that there are no voltages that
could lead to injury of personnel.
Disconnect the terminals at the rear-side of the device. DO NOT pull any
cable – pull on the plug! If it is stuck, use a screw driver.
Fasten the cables and terminals in the cabinet by means of cable clips to
ensure that no accidental electrical connections are caused.
Hold the device at the front-side while removing the mounting nuts.
642
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Remove the device carefully from the cabinet.
In case no other device is to be mounted or replaced, cover/close the cutout in the front-door.
Close the cabinet.
www.eaton.com
643
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Service and Commissioning Support
Within the service menu, various functions support maintenance and commissioning of the device.
General
Within the [Service/General] menu, the User can initiate a reboot of the device.
Maintenance Mode
Principle – General Use
The Maintenance Mode can be used to reduce arc flash levels.
Refer to Std. NFPA70E.
DO NOT attempt to install or perform maintenance on equipment while it is
energized. Severe personal injury or death can result from contact with
energized equipment. Verify that no voltage is present before opening
doors of the switchboard.
If maintenance will be performed on a device, special protective clothing
and equipment MUST BE USED and all industry standard procedures MUST
BE FOLLOWED. Failure to do so can result in severe personal injury or
death.
The Maintenance Mode can improve safety by providing a simple and reliable method to reduce fault clearing
time and lower incident energy levels at energized panels. The Maintenance Mode allows the User to switch to
more sensitive settings via the HMI/panel, Communication, or via a Digital Input while maintenance work is being
performed at an energized panel or device. The more sensitive settings provide greater security for
maintenance personnel and helps reduce the possibility of injury.
The status of the Maintenance Mode (active/inactive) is stored power fail-safe.
Manual activation is only possible via the HMI/panel (not via PowerPort-E).
The Maintenance Mode can be activated:
•
•
•
Manually (only at the HMI/panel);
Via communication; or
Via a digital input.
Changing to another mode is only possible if there is no active Activation
Signal (e.g.: if the device is in the “Via Digital Input Mode” and while the
assigned Digital Input is “true”, the User cannot switch to the “Manual
Mode”).
644
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Before Use
The sensitivity settings for the Maintenance Mode have to be calculated
and programmed into the device (according to Std. NFPA70E).
They are not part of the device by default.
When the Maintenance Mode is enabled and fault current causes its operation, the fault clearing time of the
associated breaker has to be very fast. Calculate the sensitivity setting on the basis of Std. NFPA70E.
Program those sensitivity settings either into a setting group or into Adaptive Parameters.
How to Use the Maintenance Mode
Calculate the sensitivity setting on the basis of Std. NFPA70E. Program those sensitivity settings either into a
setting group or into Adaptive Parameters.
The Maintenance Mode offers two output signals: “Maint Mode activated” and “Maint Mode not activated”.
The »Maint Mode.ACTIVATED« signal should be used to:
•
•
•
Switch to another setting group (in case the sensitivity settings are saved within this setting group);
Activate “Adaptive Parameters” (in case the sensitivity settings are saved within these adaptive
parameters); and/or
Block or activate dedicated functions.
Please see the Adaptive Parameters section for more details.
The »Maint Mode.NOT ACTIVATED« signal should be used to:
•
Switch back to the standard setting group when Maintenance Mode should not be used.
For fast access, the Maintenance Mode can be accessed by means of the »Softkey« Maint on the start screen
(root) of the device.
www.eaton.com
645
646
www.eaton.com
1..n, Dig Inputs
Sys.Maint Mode Activated by
Activation via DI
Activation via Comm
Activation Manually
Inactive
Sys.Maint Mode Mode
Maint Mode
Sys
Comm Cmd
Active
Inactive
Sys.MaintMode Manually
AND
AND
AND
OR
Sys.Maint Mode-I
Sys.Maint Mode Inactive
Sys.Maint Mode Active
Sys.Maint Mode DI
Sys.Maint Mode Comm
Sys.MaintMode Manually
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Forcing the Relay Output Contacts
The parameters, their defaults, and setting ranges have to be taken from
Relay Output Contacts section.
Principle – General Use
The User MUST ENSURE that the relay output contacts operate normally
after maintenance is completed. If the relay output contacts do not operate
normally, the protective device WILL NOT provide protection.
For commissioning purposes or for maintenance, relay output contacts can be set by force.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Force RO], relay output contacts can be
set by force:
•
•
Permanent; or
Via timeout.
If they are set with a timeout, they will keep their “Force Position” only as long as this timer runs. If the timer
expires, the relay will operate normally. If they are set as Permanent, they will keep the “Force Position”
continuously.
There are two options available:
•
•
Forcing a single relay »Force Rox«; and
Forcing an entire group of relay output contacts »Force all Outs«.
Forcing an entire group takes precedence over forcing a single relay output contact!
A relay output contact WILL NOT follow a force command as long as it is
disarmed at the same time.
A relay output contact WILL follow a force command:
•
•
If it is not disarmed; and
If the Direct Command is applied to the relay(s).
Keep in mind, that forcing all relay output contacts (of the same assembly
group) takes precedence over the force command of a single relay output
contact.
www.eaton.com
647
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Disarming the Relay Output Contacts
The parameters, their defaults, and setting ranges have to be taken from
the Relay Output Contacts section.
Principle – General Use
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/DISARMED], entire groups of relay output
contacts can be disabled. By means of this test mode, contact outputs switching actions of the relay output
contacts are prevented. If the relay output contacts are disarmed, maintenance actions can be carried out
without the risk of taking entire processes off-line.
The User MUST ENSURE that the relay output contacts are ARMED AGAIN
after maintenance is complete. If they are not armed, the protective device
WILL NOT provide protection.
Zone Interlocking Output and the Supervision Contact cannot be disarmed.
Within this mode [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/DISARMED] entire groups of relay output
contacts can be disarmed:
•
•
Permanent; or
Via timeout.
If they are set with a timeout, they will keep their “Disarm Position” only as long as this timer runs. If the timer
expires, the relay output contacts will operate normally. If they are set Permanent, they will keep the “Disarm
State” continuously.
A relay output contact WILL NOT be disarmed as long as:
•
A relay output contact WILL NOT be disarmed if it is latched (and
not yet reset).
•
A relay output contact WILL NOT be disarmed as long as a running
t-OFF-delay timer is not yet expired (hold time of a relay output
contact).
•
If the Disarm Control is not set to active.
•
If the Direct Command is not applied.
A relay output contact WILL be disarmed if it is not latched and:
648
•
If there is no running t-OFF-delay timer (hold time of a relay output
contact); and
•
If the DISARM Control is set to active; and
•
If the Direct Command Disarm is applied.
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Failure Simulator (Sequencer)*
Available Elements:
Sine wave gen
* = Availability depends on ordered device.
For commissioning support and in order to analyze failures, the protective device offers the option to simulate
measuring quantities. The simulation menu can be found within the [Service/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave gen] menu. The simulation cycle consists of three states:
•
•
•
Pre-failure;
Failure; and
Post-failure State (Phase).
Within the [Service/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave gen/Configuration] sub-menu, the
duration of each phase can be set. In addition; the measuring quantities to be simulated can be determined
(e.g.: voltages, currents, and the corresponding angles) for each phase (and ground).
Setting the device into the simulation mode means taking the protective
device out of operation for the duration of the simulation. Do not use this
feature during operation of the device if the User cannot guarantee that
there is a running and properly working backup protection.
Sine wave gen
pre
Failure Simulation
post
t-PreFault
t-FaultSimulation
t-PostFault
The energy counters will be stopped while the failure simulator is running.
The simulation voltages are always phase to neutral voltages, irrespectively
of the mains voltage transformers' connection method (Phase-to-phase /
Wye / Open Delta).
www.eaton.com
649
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Application Options of the Fault Simulator**:
Stop Options
Do not stop
Cold Simulation (Option 1)
Hot Simulation (Option 2)
Simulation without tripping
the breaker:
Simulation is authorized to trip
the breaker:
Run complete:
Pre Failure, Failure, Post Failure.
Blocking protective Trips to the
Breaker. That means verifying if
the protective device generates
How To?: Call up [Service/Test Mode
a trip without energizing the trip
(Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave coil of the breaker (similar to
gen/Process]
disarm the relay output contact).
Ex Force Post = no assignment and
Press/Call up Start Simulation.
Stop by external signal
How To?:
Call up [Service/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine
wave gen/Process]
Trip Cmd Mode = Trip
How To?:
Call up [Service/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine
wave gen/Process]
Force Post: As soon as this signal becomes true,
the Fault Simulation will be forced to switch into the Trip Cmd Mode = No Trip
Post Failure mode.
How To?: Call up [Service/Test Mode
(Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave
gen/Process]
Ex Force Post = Assigned Signal
Manual stop
As soon as this signal becomes true, the Fault
Simulation will be terminated and the device
changes back to normal operation.
How To?: Call up [Service/Test Mode
(Prot inhibit)/WARNING! Cont?/Sine wave
gen/Process]
Press/Call up Stop Simulation.
**Please note: Due to internal dependencies, the frequency of the simulation module is 0.16% greater than the rated one.
Global Protection Parameter of the Failure Simulator
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
t-PreFault
Pre Fault Duration
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.0 s
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/Times]
650
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
tDuration of Fault Simulation
FaultSimulation
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
0.00 – 10800.00 s
0.0 s
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/Times]
t-PostFault
t-PostFault
0.00 – 300.00 s
0.0 s
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/Times]
TripCmd Mode Trip Command Mode
No TripCmd,
No TripCmd
With TripCmd
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Process]
ExBlo
External blocking of the module, if blocking 1..n, Assignment List
is activated (allowed) within a parameter set
and if the state of the assigned signal is
true.
Breaker.Pos
CLOSE
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Process]
Ex ForcePost
Force Post state. Abort simulation.
1..n, Assignment List
-.-
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Process]
www.eaton.com
651
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Voltage Parameter of the Failure Simulator
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
VA Fund.
Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre
State: Phase A
0.00 – 2.00 Vn
1.0 Vn
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Voltage]
VB Fund.
Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre
State: Phase B
0.00 – 2.00 Vn
1.0 Vn
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Voltage]
VC Fund.
Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre
State: Phase C
0.00 – 2.00 Vn
1.0 Vn
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Voltage]
652
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
VX Fund.
Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Pre
State: VX
0.00 – 2.00 Vn
0.0 Vn
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Voltage]
Angle VA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Voltage Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase A
0°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Voltage]
Angle VB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Voltage Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase B
240°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Voltage]
Angle VC
Fund.
Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Voltage Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase C
120°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Voltage]
www.eaton.com
653
IM02602007E
Parameter
EDR-5000
Description
Setting Range
Angle VX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Fund.
Voltage Phasor during Pre Phase: VX
Default
Menu Path
0°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Voltage]
VA Fund.
Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault
State: Phase A
0.00 – 2.00 Vn
0.5 Vn
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Voltage]
VB Fund.
Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault
State: Phase B
0.00 – 2.00 Vn
0.5 Vn
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Voltage]
VC Fund.
Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault
State: Phase C
0.00 – 2.00 Vn
0.5 Vn
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Voltage]
654
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
VX Fund.
Voltage Fundamental Magnitude in Fault
State: Phase VX
0.00 – 2.00 Vn
0. 5Vn
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Voltage]
Angle VA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Voltage Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase
A
0°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Voltage]
Angle VB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Voltage Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase
B
240°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Voltage]
Angle VC
Fund.
Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Voltage Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase
C
120°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Voltage]
www.eaton.com
655
IM02602007E
Parameter
EDR-5000
Description
Setting Range
Angle VX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Fund.
Voltage Phasor during Fault Phase: VX
Default
Menu Path
0°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Voltage]
VA Fund.
Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during
Post phase: Phase A
0.00 – 2.00 Vn
1.0 Vn
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Voltage]
VB Fund.
Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during
Post phase: Phase B
0.00 – 2.00 Vn
1.0 Vn
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Voltage]
VC Fund.
Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during
Post phase: Phase C
0.00 – 2.00 Vn
1.0 Vn
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Voltage]
656
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
VX Fund.
Voltage Fundamental Magnitude during
Post phase: Phase VX
0.00 – 2.00 Vn
0.0 Vn
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Voltage]
Angle VA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Voltage Phasor during Post phase: Phase A
0°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Voltage]
Angle VB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Voltage Phasor during Post phase: Phase B
240°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Voltage]
Angle VC
Fund.
Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Voltage Phasor during Post phase: Phase
C
120°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Voltage]
www.eaton.com
657
IM02602007E
Parameter
EDR-5000
Description
Setting Range
Angle VX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Fund.
Voltage Phasor during Post phase: Phase
VX
Default
Menu Path
0°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Voltage]
Current Parameter of the Failure Simulator
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
IA Fund.
Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre
State: Phase A
0.00 – 40.00 In
0.0 In
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Current]
IB Fund.
Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre
State: Phase B
0.00 – 40.00 In
0.0 In
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Current]
658
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
IC Fund.
Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre
State: Phase C
0.00 – 40.00 In
0.0 In
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Current]
IX meas Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Pre
State: IX
0.00 – 25.00 In
0.0 In
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Current]
Angle IA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Current Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase A
0°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Current]
Angle IB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Current Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase B
240°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Current]
www.eaton.com
659
IM02602007E
Parameter
EDR-5000
Description
Setting Range
Angle IC Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Current Phasor during Pre Phase:Phase C
Default
Menu Path
120°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Current]
Angle IX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Fund.
Current Phasor during Pre Phase: IX
0°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PreFault
/Current]
IA Fund.
Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault
State: Phase A
0.00 – 40.00 In
0.0 In
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Current]
IB Fund.
Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault
State: Phase B
0.00 – 40.00 In
0.0 In
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Current]
660
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
IC Fund.
Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault
State: Phase C
0.00 – 40.00 In
0.0 In
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Current]
IX meas Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude in Fault
State: IX
0.00 – 25.00 In
0.0 In
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Current]
Angle IA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Current Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase A
0°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Current]
Angle IB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Current Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase B
240°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Current]
www.eaton.com
661
IM02602007E
Parameter
EDR-5000
Description
Setting Range
Angle IC Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Current Phasor during Fault Phase:Phase
C
Default
Menu Path
120°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Current]
Angle IX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Fund.
Current Phasor during Fault Phase: IX
0°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-FaultSimulation
/Current]
IA Fund.
Current Fundamental Magnitude during
Post phase: Phase A
0.00 – 40.00 In
0.0 In
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Current]
IB Fund.
Current Fundamental Magnitude during
Post phase: Phase B
0.00 – 40.00 In
0.0 In
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Current]
662
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
IC Fund.
Current Fundamental Magnitude during
Post phase: Phase C
0.00 – 40.00 In
0.0 In
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Current]
IX meas Fund. Current Fundamental Magnitude during
Post phase: IX
0.00 – 25.00 In
0.0 In
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Current]
Angle IA Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Current Phasor during Post phase: Phase A
0°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Current]
Angle IB Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Current Phasor during Post phase: Phase B
240°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Current]
www.eaton.com
663
IM02602007E
Parameter
EDR-5000
Description
Setting Range
Angle IC Fund. Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Current Phasor during Post phase: Phase C
Default
Menu Path
120°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Current]
Angle IX meas Start Position respectively Start Angle of the -360 - 360°
Fund.
Current Phasor during Post phase: IX
0°
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Configuration
/t-PostFault
/Current]
States of the Inputs of the Failure Simulator
Name
Description
Assignment Via
ExBlo
Module Input State: External Blocking
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Process]
Ex ForcePost-I
State of the module input:Force Post state. [Service
Abort simulation.
/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Process]
664
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Signals of the Failure Simulator (States of the Outputs)
Name
Description
Running
Signal: Measuring value simulation is running.
State
Signal: Wave generation states: 0=AdcNormal, 1=PreFault,
2=Fault, 3=Post, 4=InitReset.
Direct Commands of the Failure Simulator
Parameter
Description
Setting Range
Default
Menu Path
Start
Simulation
Start Fault Simulation (Using the test
parameters)
Inactive,
Inactive
[Service
Active
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Process]
Stop Simulation Stop Fault Simulation (Using the test
parameters)
Inactive,
Inactive
Active
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot
inhibit)
/WARNING! Cont?
/Sine wave gen
/Process]
Failure Simulator Values
Value
Description
Default
Size
Menu Path
State
Wave generation states:
0=AdcNormal, 1=PreFault, 2=Fault,
3=Post, 4=InitReset
L1 L2 L3 Normal
L1 L2 L3
Normal,
[Service
/Test Mode (Prot inhibit)
t-PreFault,
/WARNING! Cont?
tFaultSimulati /Sine wave gen
on,
/State]
t-PostFault,
Init Res
www.eaton.com
665
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Technical Data
Use Copper conductors only, 75°C (167°F).
Conductor size AWG 14 [2.5 mm].
Climatic Environmental Conditions
Storage Temperature:
Operating Temperature:
Permissible Humidity at Ann. Average:
Permissible Installation Altitude:
-30°C to +70°C (-22°F to 158°F)
-20°C to +60°C (-4°F to 140°F)
<75% rel. (on 56d up to 95% rel.)
<2,000 m (6,561.67 ft) above sea level
If 4,000 m (13,123.35 ft) altitude applies, a changed
classification of the operating and test voltages may be
necessary.
Degree of Protection EN 60529
HMI Front Panel with Seal:
IP54
Rear Side Terminals:
IP20
Routine Test
Insulation Test Acc. to IEC60255-5:
Aux. Voltage Supply, Digital Inputs,
Current Measuring Inputs, Signal Relay Outputs:
Voltage Measuring Inputs:
All Wire-Bound Communication Interfaces:
All tests to be carried out against ground and other input and output circuits.
2.5 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz
3.0 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz
1.5 kV DC
Housing
Housing B2: Height / Width
Housing Depth (Incl. Terminals):
Material, Housing:
Material, Front Panel:
Mounting Position:
Weight:
666
183 mm (7.205 in.) / 212.7 mm (8.374 in.)
208 mm (8.189 in.)
Aluminum extruded section
Aluminum/Foil front
Horizontal (±45° around the X-axis must be permitted)
Approx. 4.2 kg (9.259 lb)
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Current and Ground Current Measurement
Plug-in Connector with Integrated Short-Circuiter
(Conventional Current Inputs)
Phase and Ground Current
Inputs:
Nominal Currents:
Max. Measuring Range:
Capacity:
Overcurrent Proof:
Power Consumption:
1A/5A
Up to 40 x In (phase currents)
Up to 25 x In (ground current standard)
4 x In/continuously
30 x In / 10 s
100 x In / 1 s
250 x In / 10 ms (1 half-wave)
Phase current inputs
At In = 1 A S = 0.15 mVA
At In = 5 A S = 0.15 mVA
Ground current input
At In = 1 A S = 0.35 mVA
At In = 5 A S = 0.35 mVA
Sensitive Ground Current
Inputs:
Nominal Currents:
Max. Measuring Range:
Capacity:
Overcurrent Proof:
Power Consumption:
Frequency Range:
Terminals:
1 A / 5 A with a special 50:0.025 core balance CT
Up to 2.5 x In
1.5 x In / continuously
3.0 x In / 10 s
10 x In / 1 s
25 x In / 10 ms (1 half-wave)
At In = 1 A S = 0.35 mVA
At In = 5 A S = 0.35 mVA
50 Hz / 60 Hz ±10%
Screw-type terminals with integrated short-circuiters (contacts)
Screws
M4, captive type acc. to VDEW
Connection Cross Sections: 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x AWG 14) with wire end ferrule
1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x AWG 12) with ring cable sleeve or cable sleeve
1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x AWG 10) with ring cable sleeve or cable sleeve
The current measuring board´s terminal blocks may be used as with 2
(double) conductors AWG 10,12,14 otherwise with single conductors only.
Voltage and Residual Voltage Measurement
Nominal Voltages:
Max. Measuring Range:
Continuous Loading Capacity:
Power Consumption:
Frequency Range:
Terminals:
100 V/ 110 V/ 230 V/ 400 V (can be configured)
2 x nominal voltage
2 x nominal voltage (800 Vac)
at Vn = 100 V S = 0.1 mVA
at Vn = 110 V S = 0.1 mVA
at Vn = 230 V S = 0.4 mVA
at Vn = 400 V S = 1.0 mVA
50 Hz or 60 Hz ±10%
Screw-type terminals
www.eaton.com
667
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Frequency Measurement
Nominal Frequencies:
50 Hz / 60 Hz
Voltage Supply
Aux. Voltage:
Buffer Time in Case of Supply Failure:
Max. Permissible Making Current:
24 - 270 Vdc / 48 - 230 Vac (-20/+10%)
>= 50 ms at minimal aux. voltage
Interrupted communication is permitted.
18 A peak value for <0.25 ms
12 A peak value for <1 ms
The voltage supply must be protected by a fuse of:
•
2,5 A time-lag miniature fuse 5 x 20 mm (approx. 0.2 x 0.8 in.) according to IEC 60127
•
3,5 A time-lag miniature fuse 6,3 x 32 mm (approx. 0.25 x 1.25 in.) according to UL 248-14
Power Consumption
Power Supply Range:
24 - 270 Vdc:
48 - 230 Vac
(For Frequencies of 50-60 Hz):
Power consumption
in Idle Mode
Approx. 7 W
Approx. 7 VA
Max. Power Consumption
Approx.13 W
Approx.13 VA
Display
Display Type:
Resolution - Graphics Display:
LCD with LED background illumination
128 x 64 pixel
LED - Type:
Number of LEDs, Housing B2:
Two colored: red / green
15
Front Interface RS232
Baud Rates:
Handshake:
Connection:
115,200 Baud
RTS and CTS
9-pole D-Sub plug
Real Time Clock
Running Reserve of the Real Time
Clock:
1 year min.
Digital Inputs
Max. Input Voltage:
Input Current:
Reaction Time:
Drop-out Time:
668
300 Vdc / 259 Vac
<4 mA
<20 ms
<30 ms
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
(Safe State of the Digital Inputs)
Switching Thresholds:
Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, 60 Vdc,
110 Vac / dc, 230 Vac / dc
Un = 24 Vdc
Switching Threshold 1 ON:
Switching Threshold 1 OFF:
Min. 19.2 Vdc
Max. 9.6 Vdc
Un = 48 V / 60Vdc
Switching Threshold 2 ON:
Switching Threshold 2 OFF:
Min. 42.6 Vdc
Max. 21.3 Vdc
Un = 110 / 120 Vac / dc
Switching Threshold 3 ON:
Switching Threshold 3 OFF:
Min. 88.0 Vdc / 88.0 Vac
Max. 44.0 Vdc / 44.0 Vac
Un = 230 / 240 Vac / dc
Switching Threshold 4 ON:
Switching Threshold 4 OFF:
Min. 184 Vdc / 184 Vac
Max. 92 Vdc / 92 Vac
Terminals:
Screw-type terminal
Relay Outputs
Continuous Current:
Max. Make Current:
Max. Breaking Current:
Max. Switching Voltage:
Switching Capacity:
Contact Type:
Terminals:
5 A ac / dc
25 A ac / 25 A dc for 4 s
30 A / 230Vac according to ANSI IEEE Std C37.90-2005
30 A / 250Vdc according to ANSI IEEE Std C37.90-2005
5 A ac up to 240 Vac
5 A dc up to 30 V (resistive)
0.3 A dc at 250 V (resistive)
250 V ac / 250 Vdc
1,250 VA
Form C or normally open contact
Screw-type terminals
Supervision Contact (SC)
Continuous Current:
Max. Switch-on Current:
Max. Breaking Current:
Max. Switching Voltage:
Switching Capacity:
Contact Type:
Terminals:
5 A ac / dc
15 A ac / 15 A dc for 4 s
5 A ac up to 250 Vac
5 A dc up to 30 Vdc (resistive)
0,25 A at 250 Vdc (resistive)
250 V ac / 250 Vdc
1,250 VA
Form C or normally open contact
Screw-type terminals
Time Synchronization IRIG-B00X
Nominal input voltage:
Connection:
5V
Screw-type terminals (twisted pair)
www.eaton.com
669
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Zone Interlocking
Only for Zone Interlock Tripping Outputs (Zone Interlock, semiconductor
output): 5 Vdc, <2mA for connection to electronic inputs only.
Zone Out:
Output voltage (High)
Output voltage (Low)
4.75 to 5.25 Vdc
0.0 to +0.5 Vdc
Zone In:
Nominal input voltage
Max. input voltage
Switching threshold ON
Switching threshold OFF
+5 Vdc
+5.5 Vdc
min. 4.0 Vdc
max. 1.5 Vdc
Galvanic isolation
Connection:
2.5 kV ac (to ground and other IO)
Screw-type terminals (twisted pair)
RS485*
Master/Slave:
Connection:
Slave
6 screw-clamping terminals RM 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
(terminating resistors internal)
The RS485 interface is realized via terminals. The communication cable has
to be shielded. The shielding has to be fixed at the screw that is marked
with the ground symbol (rear side of the device).
Fiber Optic*
Master/Slave:
Connection:
Slave
ST-Plug
URTD-Interface*
Connection:
Versatile Link
*availability depends on device
Boot Phase
After switching on the power supply, the protection will be available in approximately 16 seconds. After
approximately 97 seconds, the boot phase is completed (HMI and Communication initialized).
670
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Standards
Approvals
•
UL-listed file: e217753
Design Standards
Generic Standard
Product Standard
EN 61000-6-2
EN 61000-6-3
IEC 60255-6
EN 50178
UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 14-95 (Industrial Control Equipment)
ANSI C37.90
High Voltage Tests (IEC 60255-6)
High Frequency Interference Test
IEC 60255-22-1
Within one circuit
Class 3
Insulation Voltage Test
IEC 60255-5
EN 50178
1 kV/2 s
Circuit to ground
2.5 kV/2 s
Circuit to circuit
2.5 kV/2 s
All circuits to other circuits and
exposed conductive parts
2.5 kV (eff.)/50Hz, 1 min.
Except interfaces
1.5 kV DC, 1 min.
Voltage measuring input
3 kV (eff.)/50 Hz, 1 min.
Impulse Voltage Test
IEC 60255-5
5 kV/0.5J, 1.2/50 µs
EMC Immunity Tests
Fast Transient Disturbance Immunity Test (Burst)
IEC 60255-22-4
Power supply, mains inputs
IEC 61000-4-4
Class 4
Other in- and outputs
ANSI C37.90.1
Surge Immunity Test
IEC 61000-4-5
Class 4
Class 3
±4 kV, 2.5 kHz
±2 kV, 5 kHz (coupling network)
±4 kV, 2.5 kHz (coupling clamp)
Within one circuit
2 kV
Circuit to ground
4 kV
Communication cables to ground
2 kV
www.eaton.com
671
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Electrical Discharge Immunity Test
IEC 60255-22-2
Air discharge
IEC 61000-4-2
Class 3
Contact discharge
Radiated Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field Immunity Test
IEC 61000-4-3
26 MHz – 80 MHz
Class X
80 MHz – 1 GHz
ANSI C37.90.2
1 GHz – 3 GHz
8 kV
6 kV
10 V/m
35 V/m
10 V/m
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields
IEC 61000-4-6
10 V
Class 3
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity Test
IEC 61000-4-8
Continuous
Class 4
3 sec
30 A/m
300 A/m
EMC Emission Tests
Radio Interference Suppression Test
IEC/CISPR11
Limit value class B
Radio Interference Radiation Test
IEC/CISPR11
Limit value class B
Environmental Tests
Classification:
IEC 60068-1
Climatic
20/060/56
Classification
IEC 60721-3-1
Classification of ambient conditions
(Storage)
Classification of ambient conditions
(Transportation)
Classification of ambient conditions
(Stationary use at weather protected
locations)
1K5/1B1/1C1L/1S1/1M2
but min. -30°C (-22°F)
2K4/2B1/2C1/2S1/2M2
but min. -30°C (-22°F)
3K6/3B1/3C1/3S1/3M2
but min. -20°C (-4°F) /max 60°C
(140°F)
Temperature
Test duration
-20°C (-4°F)
16 h
Temperature
Relative humidity
Test duration
60°C (140°F)
<50%
72 h
Test Cab: Damp Heat (Steady State)
IEC 60068-2-78
Temperature
Relative humidity
Test duration
40°C (104°F)
93%
56 d
IEC 60721-3-2
IEC 60721-3-3
Test Ad: Cold
IEC 60068-2-1
Test Bd: Dry Heat
IEC 60068-2-2
672
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Test Db: Damp Heat (Cyclic)
IEC 60068-2-30
Temperature
Relative humidity
Cycles (12 + 12-hour)
60°C (140°F)
95%
2
Mechanical Tests
Test Fc: Vibration Response Test
IEC 60068-2-6
(10 Hz – 59 Hz)
IEC 60255-21-1
Displacement
Class 1
(59Hz – 150Hz)
Acceleration
0.0014 in. (0.035 mm)
0.5 gn
Number of cycles in each axis
Test Fc: Vibration Endurance Test
IEC 60068-2-6
(10 Hz – 150 Hz)
IEC 60255-21-1
Acceleration
Class 1
Number of cycles in each axis
Test Ea: Shock Test
IEC 60068-2-27
IEC 60255-21-2
Class 1
1.0 gn
20
Shock response test
5 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses in each
direction
Shock resistance test
15 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses in each
direction
Test Eb: Shock Endurance Test
IEC 60068-2-29
Shock endurance test
IEC 60255-21-2
Class 1
Test Fe: Earthquake Test
IEC 60068-3-3
KTA 3503
IEC 60255-21-3
Class 2
1
Single axis earthquake vibration test
10 gn, 16 ms, 1,000 impulses in
each direction
3 – 7 Hz:
Horizontal 0.394 in. (10
mm), 1 cycle each axis
7 – 35 Hz Horizontal: 2 gn,
1 cycle each axis
www.eaton.com
673
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Specifications
Specifications of the Real Time Clock
Resolution:
1 ms
Tolerance:
<1 minute / month (+20°C [68°F])
Specifications of the Measured Value Acquisition
Phase and Ground Current Measuring
Frequency Range:
50 Hz / 60 Hz ± 10%
Accuracy:
Class 0.5
Amplitude Error if I < In:
±0.5% of the rated value
Amplitude Error if I > In:
±0.5% of the measured value
Amplitude Error if I > 2 In:
±1.0% of the measured value
Resolution:
0.01 A
Harmonics:
Up to 20% 3rd harmonic ±2%
Up to 20% 5th harmonic ±2%
Frequency Influence:
<±2% / Hz in the range of ±5 Hz of the configured nominal frequency
Temperature Influence:
<±1% within the range of 0°C to +60°C (+32°F to +140°F)
Phase-to-ground and Residual Voltage Measurement
Nominal voltage (Vn):
60 ... 600 V in 1 V steps
Max measuring range:
2 x nominal value (Vn)
Frequency range:
50 Hz or 60 Hz ±10%
Precision:
Class 0,5
Amplitude error for V<Vn (measured):
±0.5% of the rated value
Amplitude error for V<Vn (calculated):
±1.0% of the rated value
Amplitude error for V>Vn (measured):
±0.5% of the measured value
Amplitude error for V>Vn (calculated):
±1.0% of the calculated value
Resolution:
0.1 V
Harmonics:
up to 20% 3rd harmonic ±1%, up to 20% 5th harmonic ±1%
Frequency influence:
<±2% / Hz in the range of ±5 Hz of the configured nominal frequency
Temperature influence:
<±1% within the range of 0°C up to +55°C
Frequency Measurement
Nominal frequency:
50 Hz / 60 Hz
Precision:
±0.05% of fn within the range of 40-70 Hz at voltages >50 V
Voltage dependency:
frequency acquisition of 5 V – 800 V
674
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Protection Elements Accuracy
The tripping delay relates to the time between alarm and trip. The accuracy
of the operating time relates to the time between when the measured value
has exceeded the threshold until the protection element is picked-up.
Overcurrent Protection Elements 50P[x], 51P/[x]
and directional Overcurrent Protection 67P[x]
Accuracy
Pickup
±1.5% of the setting value resp. 1% x In.
Dropout Ratio
97% or 0.5% x In
t
DEFT
±1% resp. ±10 ms
Operating Time
<35 ms
Starting from I higher than 1.1 x I>
Disengaging Time
<45 ms
t-Multiplier
±5%
IEC NINV
IEC VINV
IEC EINV
IEC LINV
ANSI MINV
ANSI VINV
ANSI EINV
Flat
It
I2t
I4t
Reset Mode
±1% resp. ±10 ms
IEC NINV
IEC VINV
IEC EINV
IEC LINV
5%
ANSI MINV
ANSI VINV
ANSI EINV
Flat
It
I2t
I4t
www.eaton.com
675
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Voltage restraint 51V[x]
Accuracy
Pickup
±1.5% of the setting value resp. 1% x In.
Dropout Ratio
97% or 0.5% x In
Operating Time
<35 ms
Starting from I higher than 1.1 x I>
Disengaging Time
<45 ms
t-Multiplier
±5%
IEC NINV
IEC VINV
IEC EINV
IEC LINV
ANSI MINV
ANSI VINV
ANSI EINV
Flat
It
I2t
I4t
Reset Mode
±1% resp. ±10 ms
IEC NINV
IEC VINV
IEC EINV
IEC LINV
5%
ANSI MINV
ANSI VINV
ANSI EINV
Flat
It
I2t
I4t
Ground Current Elements: 50X[x], 50R[x], 51X[x],
51R[x] and directional Ground Current Protection 67X[x],
67R[x]
Accuracy
Pickup (measured ground current)
±1.5% of the setting value, Resp. 1% x In
Pickup (calculated ground current)
±2.0% of the setting value, Resp. 1.5% x In
Dropout Ratio
97% or 0.5% x In
t
DEFT
±1% resp. ±10 ms
676
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Operating Time
<35 ms
Starting from IE higher than 1.1 x IE>
Disengaging Time
<45 ms
t-Multiplier
±5%
IEC NINV
IEC VINV
IEC EINV
IEC LINV
ANSI MINV
ANSI VINV
ANSI EINV
Flat
It
I2t
I4t
Reset Mode
±1% resp. ±10 ms
IEC characteristics
IEC NINV
IEC VINV
IEC EINV
IEC LINV
5%
Reset curves if ANSI characteristics
ANSI MINV
ANSI VINV
ANSI EINV
Flat
It
I2t
I4t
Phase under- and phase overvoltage 27M[x]/59M[x]
Pickup
Accuracy
±1.5% of the setting value
Operating Time
Resp. 1% x Vn
97% or 0.5% x Vn
DEFT
±1% resp. ±10 ms
<35 ms
Starting from V higher/lower than 1.1 x V> or V<
Disengaging Time
<45 ms
Dropout Ratio
t
www.eaton.com
677
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Aux. under- and phase overvoltage and neutral
overvoltage 27A[x]/59A[x]/59N[x]
Pickup
Accuracy
±1.5% of the setting value
Operating Time
Resp. 1% x Vn
97% or 0.5% x Vn
DEFT
±1% resp. ±10 ms
<35 ms
Starting from VG or VX higher than 1.1 x VG> or VX>
Disengaging Time
<45 ms
Dropout Ratio
t
Current unbalance: 46[x]
Threshold
I2/I1 ≥ 0.1 x In
t
Operating Time
Accuracy
±2% of the setting value resp.1% In
±1%
DEFT
±1% resp. ±10 ms
<60 ms
Starting from I2/I1 ≥ 1.1 x In
Disengaging Time
<40 ms
Voltage unbalance: 47[x]
Threshold
V2/V1 ≥ 0.1 x Vn
t
Operating Time
Accuracy
±2% of the setting value resp.1% Vn
±1%
DEFT
±1% resp. ±10 ms
<60 ms
Starting from V2/V1 ≥ 1.1 x Vn
Disengaging Time
<40 ms
Frequency Protection 81O[x]
Threshold
Dropout ratio
t
Operating time
Starting from f higher than f>+0.02 Hz
Disengaging time
Frequency Protection 81U[x]
Threshold
t
Dropout ratio
Operating time
Starting from f lower than f<-0.02 Hz
Release time
V Block f
Dropout ratio
678
Accuracy
10 mHz at fn
99.95%
or 0.05% x fn
±1% resp. ±10 ms
40-50Hz <60 ms
50-70Hz <50 ms
40-50Hz <85 ms
50-70Hz <75 ms
Accuracy
10 mHz at fn
±1% resp. ±10 ms
100.05% or 0.05% x fn
40-50Hz <60 ms
50-70Hz <50 ms
40-50Hz <85 ms
50-70Hz <75 ms
±1.5% of the setting value resp. 1% x Vn
103%
or 0.5% x Vn
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Rate of Change of Frequency df/dt
Threshold
t
Operating time
Accuracy
100 mHz per Second
±1% resp. ±10 ms
<40 ms
Disengaging time
<40 ms
Rate of Change of Frequency Df/Dt
Threshold
t
Operating time
Accuracy
100 mHz per Second
±1% resp. ±10 ms
<40 ms
Disengaging time
<40 ms
Vector surge 87V
Threshold
Operating time
Accuracy
±0,5° [1-30°] at Vn and fn
<40 ms
PQ-protection 32[x]/32V[x]
Threshold
t
Operating time
Disengaging time
Dropout Ratio
Accuracy
±3% or ±1.5% Sn
±1% resp. ±10 ms
75 ms
75 ms
97% for P>/Q> and 103% for P</Q<
PF-55D/PF-55A - Power Factor
Threshold
Operating time
Accuracy
± 0.01 (absolute)
<120 ms
AR – Auto Reclosing
t-ManualCloseBlock
t-Lock2Ready
t-Run2Ready
t-Block2Ready
t-Brk CLOSE Cmd
t-sync_AR
t-AR Supervision
Accuracy
±1% resp. ±10 ms
±1% resp. ±10 ms
±1% resp. ±10 ms
±1% resp. ±10 ms
±1% resp. ±10 ms
±1% resp. ±10 ms
±1% resp. ±10 ms
Sync - Sync-Check
Operating time
t-MaxBrkCloseDelay
t-MaxSyncSuperv
MinLiveBusVoltage
MaxDeadBusVoltage
MinLiveLineVoltage
MaxDeadLineVoltage
t-VoltDead
MaxVoltageDiff
MaxSlipFrequency
MaxAngleDiff
Accuracy
Max. 300 ms
±1% resp. ±10 ms
±1% resp. ±10 ms
±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x Vn
±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x Vn
±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x Vn
±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x Vn
±1% resp. ±10 ms
±1.5% of the setting value Resp. 1% x Vn, may be
exceeded when open delta is configured
10 mHz at fn
±1°
SOTF – Switch onto fault
Operating time
I<
t-enable
Accuracy
<35 ms
±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% x In
±1% resp. ±10 ms
www.eaton.com
679
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
CLPU – Cold load pickup
Operating time
t-Load OFF
t-Max Block
I<
Accuracy
<35 ms
±1% resp. ±10 ms
±1% resp. ±10 ms
±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% x In
Breaker Failure Protection 50BF
Accuracy
I-BF>
±1.5% of the setting value resp.1% x In
t-BF
±1% resp. ±10 ms
Operating Time
<40 ms
Starting from I Higher than 1.3 x I-BF>
Disengaging Time
<40 ms
Trip Circuit Monitoring TCM
t-TCM
Accuracy
±1% resp. ±10 ms
LOP - loss of potential
t-Pickup
Accuracy
±1% resp. ±10 ms
Current Transformer Supervision CTS
ΔI
Dropout Ratio
Pickup delay
Accuracy
±2% of the setting value resp. 1.5% In
94%
±1% resp. ± 10 ms
680
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
Appendix
The following terms, abbreviations, and acronyms are used in this manual. Please refer to this section for their
meanings / definitions.
A
AC
A/D
Ack.
AMP
AND
ANG
ANSI
AR
AUX
AVG, avg
AWG
BF
BFI
BKR, bkr
Blo
°C
calc
CB
CD
Char
CHK
CHNL
Cmd.
CMND
CMN
COM
Comm
COMP
CONN
CONT
CPU
Cr.
CRT, CRNT
CSA
CT
Ctrl.
CTS
d
D/A
D-Sub-Plug
DC, dc
DEFT
DFLT
DGNST
DI
Diagn.
Ampere(s), Amp(s)
Alternating current
Analog to digital
Acknowledge
Ampere(s), Amp(s)
Logical gate (The output becomes true if all Input signals are true.)
Angle
American National Standards Institute
Automatic reclosure
Auxiliary
Average
American wire gauge
Breaker failure
Breaker failure initiate
Breaker
Blocking(s)
Degrees Celsius
Calculated
Circuit breaker, Breaker
Compact disk
Curve shape
Check
Channel
Command
Command
Common input
Common input
Communication
Compensated, comparison
Connection
Continuous, contact
Central processing unit
Counter(s)
Current
Canadian Standards Association
Control transformer
Control
Current transformer supervision
Day
Digital to analog
Communication interface
Direct current
Definite time characteristic (Tripping time does not depend on the height of the current.)
Default
Diagnostics
Digital Input
Diagnosis
www.eaton.com
681
IM02602007E
Diagn Cr
DIFF
DIN
DIR, dir
DMD
DPO
DSP
dt
EINV
EMC
EN
err. / Err.
EVTcon
Ex
ExBlo
ExP
EXT
°F
F
Fc
FIFO
FIFO Principal
FLA
FO
FTP
fund
FWD
G, g
gn
GND
GPS
h
HARM
HMI
HTL
HTTP
Hz
I
I
I0
I1
I2
IA
IAB
IB
IBC
I-BF
IC
IC's
ICA
ID
IEC
IED
682
EDR-5000
Diagnosis counter(s)
Differential
Deutsche Industrie Norm
Directional
Demand
Dropout
Digital signal processor
Rate of change
Extremely inverse tripping characteristic
Electromagnetic compatibility
Europäische Norm
Error
Parameter determines if the residual voltage is measured or calculated.
External
External blocking(s)
External protection
Extension, external
Degrees Fahrenheit
Field
Function (Enable or disable functionality = allow or disallow.)
First in first out
First in first out
Full load current
Fiber optic
File transfer protocol
Fundamental (ground wave)
Forward
Generator
Acceleration of the earth in vertical direction (9.81 m/s2)
Ground
Global positioning system
Hour
Harmonic / harmonics
Human machine interface (Front of the protective relay)
Manufacturer internal product designation
Hyper text transfer protocol
Hertz
Fault current
Current
Zero current (symmetrical components), Zero sequence current
Positive sequence current (symmetrical components)
Negative sequence current (symmetrical components)
Phase A current
Phase A minus B current
Phase B current
Phase B minus C current
Tripping threshold
Phase C current
Manufacturer internal product designation
Phase C minus A current
Identification
International Electrotechnical Commission
Intelligent electronic device
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
IM02602007E
IEEE
IG
IG
Igd
IGnom
IH1
IH2
IINV
in.
incl.
Info.
Interl.
INV
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
Ground current (not residual)
Fault current
Differential ground current
Nominal ground current
Fundamental harmonic (1st harmonic)
2nd harmonic
Inverse
Inch
Include, including
Information
Interlocking
Inverse characteristic (The tripping time will be calculated depending on the height of the
current)
I/O
Input / output
IOC
Instantaneous overcurrent
IOV
Instantaneous overvoltage
IR
Calculated ground current
IRIG
Input for time synchronization (Clock), Inter-range instrumentation group
ISO
International Standards Organization
IT
Thermal Characteristic
I2T
Thermal Characteristic
I4T
Thermal Characteristic
IUV
Instantaneous undervoltage
IX
4th measuring input of the current measuring assembly group (either ground or neutral current)
J
Joule
kA
Kiloampere
kg
Kilogram
kHz
Kilohertz
kV
Kilovolt(s)
kVdc or kVDC Kilovolt(s) direct current
L1
Phase A
L2
Phase B
L3
Phase C
l/ln
Ratio of current to nominal current.
LED
Light emitting diode
lb-in
Pound-inch
LINV
Long time inverse tripping characteristic
LV
Low voltage
m
Meter
M
Machine
mA
Milliampere(s), Milliamp(s)
MAG
Magnitude
MAN, man.
Manual / manually
MAX, max.
Maximum
meas
Measured
MIN, min.
Minimum
min.
Minute
MINV
Moderately Inverse Tripping Characteristic
MK
Manufacturer Internal Product Designation Code
mm
Millimeter
MMU
Memory mapping unit
MRT
Minimum response time
www.eaton.com
683
IM02602007E
ms
MTA
MTR
MV
mVA
MVA
MVA A
MVA B
MVA C
MVAR
MVAR A
MVAR B
MVAR C
MVARH
MW
MW A
MW B
MW C
MWH
N
N/A, n/a
N.C.
NEG
NINV
Nm
No
N.O.
NOM, Nom.
NT
O
OC, O/C
O/P, Op, OUT
OV
OVERFREQ
OVLD
P
Para.
PC
PCB
PE
PF
PF A
PF B
PF C
Ph
POS
PRESS
PRI, pri
PROT, Prot
PS1
PS2
PS3
PS4
684
EDR-5000
Milli-second(s)
Maximum torque angle
Motor
Medium voltage
Milli volt amperes (Power)
Mega volt-ampere (total 3-phase)
Mega volt-ampere (phase A)
Mega volt-ampere (phase B)
Mega volt-ampere (phase C)
Mega Var (total 3-phase)
Mega Var (phase A)
Mega Var (phase B)
Mega Var (phase C)
Mega Var-Hour
Megawatt(s) (total 3-phase)
Megawatt(s) (phase A)
Megawatt(s) (phase B)
Megawatt(s) (phase C)
Megawatt-Hour(s)
Neutral
Not applicable
Not connected
Negative
Normal inverse tripping characteristic
Newton-meter
Number
Normal open (Contact)
Nominal
Manufacturer internal product designation code
Over
Overcurrent
Output
Overvoltage
Over-frequency
Overload
Phase
Parameter
Personal computer
Printed circuit board
Protected Earth
Power factor (total 3-phase)
Power factor (phase A)
Power factor (phase B)
Power factor (phase C)
Phase
Positive
Pressure
Primary
Protection Module (Master Module), protection
Parameter set 1
Parameter set 2
Parameter set 3
Parameter set 4
www.eaton.com
EDR-5000
PSet
PSS
pu
PWM
PWR
R
rec.
REF
rel
REM
res
ResetFct
REV
RevData
RMS
RO
RO1
RO2
RO3
Rst
RTD
RX (Rx)
s
S
SAT
SC
Sca
SCADA
sec
SEC, sec
SENS
SEQ
Sig.
SNTP
SRC
StartFct
STATS
Sum
SUPERV
SW
SYNC
SYNCHCHK
Sys.
t or t.
t
T
Tcmd
TCP
TCP/IP
TEMP, temp
THD
TI
TOC
IM02602007E
Parameter set
Parameter set switch (Switching from one parameter set to another)
Per unit
Pulse width modulated
Power
Reset
Record
Reference
Relative
Remote
Reset
Reset function
Reverse
Review data
Root mean square
Relay Output
1st Relay Output
2nd Relay Output
3rd Relay Output
Reset
Resistance-temperature detector
Receive, receiver
Second
Sensitive
CT saturation
Supervision contact
SCADA
Communication module, supervisory control and data acquisition
Second(s)
Secondary
Sensitive
Sequence
Signal
Simple network time protocol
Source
Start function
Statistics
Summation
Supervision
Software
Sync-check, Synchrocheck
Sync-check, Synchrocheck
System
Time
Tripping delay
Time, transformer
Trip command
Transmission control protocol
Communication protocol
Temperature
Total harmonic distortion
Manufacturer internal product designation code
Time overcurrent
www.eaton.com
685
IM02602007E
TOV
TRANS
TripCmd
TX (Tx)
txt
UC
UL
UMZ
URTD
USB
V
V0
V1
V2
VA
VAB
Vac / V ac
VAG
VARH
VB
VBA
VBG
VC
VCA
VCG
Vdc / V dc
VDE
VDEW
VE
V/Hz
VINV
VT
VTS
W
WDC
WDG
WH
www
X
XCT
XInv
Z
686
EDR-5000
Time overvoltage
Transient
Trip command
Transmit, transmitter
Text
Undercurrent
Underwriters Laboratories
DEFT (definite time tripping characteristic)
Universal resistance-temperature detector
Universal serial bus
Volts
Zero sequence voltage
Positive sequence voltage
Negative sequence voltage
Phase A voltage
Phase A to B voltage
Volts alternating current
Phase A to ground voltage
Var-hour voltage
Phase B voltage
Phase B to A voltage
Phase B to ground voltage
Phase C voltage
Phase C to A voltage
Phase C to ground voltage
Volts direct current
Verband Deutscher Elektrotechnik
Verband der Elektrizitätswirtschaft
Residual voltage
Volts per Hertz
Very inverse tripping characteristic
Voltage transformer
Voltage transformer supervision
Watt(s)
Watch dog contact (supervision contact)
Winding
Watthour
World wide web
Reactance
4th current measuring input (ground or neutral current)
Inverse characteristic
Impedance, zone
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Instantaneous Current Curves (Phase)
Explanation:
t = Tripping delay
I = Fault current
Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip.
DEFT
100
I
10
0.01
Pickup
40
t [s]
1
300 s
t
0.1
0.0 s
0.01
1
10
I
Pickup
www.eaton.com
687
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Time Current Curves (PHASE)
The following characteristics are available:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NINV (IEC/XInv);
VINV (IEC/XInv);
LINV (IEC/XInv);
EINV (IEC/XInv);
MINV (ANSI/XInv);
VINV (ANSI/XInv);
EINV (ANSI/XInv);
Thermal Flat;
Therm Flat IT;
Therm Flat I2T; and
Therm Flat I4T.
Explanation:
t = Tripping delay
t-multiplier = Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor
I = Fault current
Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip.
688
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IEC NINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
0.14
I
*t-multiplier [s]
2
(Pickup)
Trip
-1
t=
0.14
I
0.02
(Pickup)
t [s]
*t-multiplier [s]
-1
t-multiplier
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
www.eaton.com
689
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IEC VINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
13.5
I
2
(Pickup)-1
Trip
*t-multiplier [s]
13.5
t=
I
(Pickup)-1
t [s]
t-multiplier
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
690
*t-multiplier [s]
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IEC LINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
120
I
2
(Pickup)-1
*t-multiplier [s]
Trip
120
t=
I
*t-multiplier [s]
( Pickup)-1
t-multiplier
t [s]
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
www.eaton.com
691
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IEC EINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
80
I
2
(Pickup)
*t-multiplier [s]
-1
Trip
t=
80
I
2
(Pickup)
*t-multiplier [s]
-1
t [s]
t-multiplier
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
692
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
ANSI MINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
4.85
I
*t-multiplier [s]
2
(Pickup)
-1
Trip
t=
(
0.0515
+ 0.1140
0.02
I
(Pickup) -1
)
*t-multiplier [s]
t-multiplier
t [s]
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
www.eaton.com
693
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
ANSI VINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
21.6
2
I
)-1
(Pickup
*t-multiplier [s]
Trip
t=
(
19.61
I
2
(Pickup)
t [s]
)
*t-multiplier [s]
t-multiplier
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
694
-1
+ 0.491
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
ANSI EINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
29.1
*t-multiplier [s]
2
I
(Pickup)-1
Trip
t=
(
28.2
I
(Pickup)
t [s]
+ 0.1217
2
-1
)
*t-multiplier [s]
t-multiplier
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
www.eaton.com
695
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Therm Flat
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
(
5*3
I
In
Trip
2
2
0
)
5*1
t=
*t-multiplier [s]
(
I
In
0
*t-multiplier [s]
)
t = 45 *t-multiplier [s]
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
TM[s]=
10
5
100
2
1.0
t [s]
10
0.5
1
0.05
0.1
0.01
0.01
0.1
1
10
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
696
www.eaton.com
100
t-multiplier
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IT
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
Trip
2
t=
(
5*3
I
In
0
)
1
*t-multiplier [s]
5*3
t=
(
I
In
1
*t-multiplier [s]
)
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
TM[s]=
t [s]
10
10
t-multiplier
5
2
1
1.0
0.5
0.1
0.05
0.01
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
www.eaton.com
697
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
I2T
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
Trip
2
t=
(
5*3
I
In
2
0
*t-multiplier [s]
t=
)
(
5*3
I
In
2
)
*t-multiplier [s]
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
t [s]
t-multiplier
10
TM[s]=
1
10
5
0.1
2
1.0
0.01
0.01
0.05
0.1
1
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
698
www.eaton.com
10
0.5
100
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
I4T
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
Trip
4
2
t=
(
5*3
I
In
0
)
t=
*t-multiplier [s]
(
5*3
I
In
*t-multiplier [s]
4
)
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
t [s]
t-multiplier
10
TM[s]=
1
10
5
2
0.1
1.0
0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
www.eaton.com
699
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Calculated)
The following characteristics is available:
DEFT (definite time).
•
Explanation:
t = Tripping delay
IG = Fault current
Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip.
The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual
connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents; but this is only possible
if the current transformers are Wye-connected.
DEFT
100
IR calc
Pickup
10
0.01
I/I>
20
40
t [s]
1
300 s
t
0.1
0.0 s
0.01
1
IR calc
Pickup
700
www.eaton.com
10
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Instantaneous Current Curves (Ground Current Measured)
The following characteristics is available:
•
DEFT (definite time).
Explanation:
t = Tripping delay
IX = Fault current
Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip.
The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual
connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents; but this is only possible
if the current transformers are Wye-connected.
DEFT
100
IX
Pickup
10
0.01
I/I>
20
40
t [s]
1
300 s
t
0.1
0.0 s
0.01
1
IX
10
Pickup
www.eaton.com
701
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Time Current Curves (Ground Current)
The following characteristics are available:
NINV (IEC/XInv);
VINV (IEC/XInv);
LINV (IEC/XInv);
EINV (IEC/XInv);
MINV (ANSI/XInv);
VINV (ANSI/XInv);
EINV (ANSI/XInv);
Thermal Flat;
Therm Flat IT;
Therm Flat I2T; and
Therm Flat I4T.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Explanation:
t = Tripping delay
t-multiplier = Time multiplier/tripping characteristic factor
IG = Fault current
Pickup = If the pickup value is exceeded, the module/element starts to time out to trip.
The ground current can be measured either directly via a zero sequence transformer or detected by a residual
connection. The ground current can alternatively be calculated from the phase currents; but this is only possible
if the current transformers are Wye-connected.
702
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IEC NINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
0.14
2
IG
(Pickup) -1
*t-multiplier [s]
Trip
t=
0.14
0.02
IG
(Pickup) -1
t [s]
*t-multiplier [s]
t-multiplier
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
www.eaton.com
703
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IEC VINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
13.5
IG 2
(Pickup)-1
*t-multiplier [s]
Trip
t=
13.5
IG
(Pickup) -1
t [s]
t-multiplier
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
704
*t-multiplier [s]
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IEC LINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
120
IG 2
)-1
(Pickup
Trip
*t-multiplier [s]
t=
120
IG
(Pickup)-1
*t-multiplier [s]
t-multiplier
t [s]
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
www.eaton.com
705
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IEC EINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
80
IG 2
(Pickup) -1
*t-multiplier [s]
Trip
t=
80
IG 2
(Pickup) -1
t [s]
t-multiplier
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
706
*t-multiplier [s]
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
ANSI MINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
4.85
2
IG
(Pickup)
*t-multiplier [s]
-1
Trip
t=
(
0.0515
+ 0.1140
0.02
IG
(Pickup) -1
)
*t-multiplier [s]
t-multiplier
t [s]
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
www.eaton.com
707
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
ANSI VINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
21.6
IG 2
)-1
(Pickup
*t-multiplier [s]
t=
(
19.61
2
IG
(Pickup) -1
t [s]
+ 0.491
)
*t-multiplier [s]
t-multiplier
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
708
Trip
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
ANSI EINV
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
t=
29.1
*t-multiplier [s]
IG 2
)-1
(Pickup
Trip
t=
(
28.2
+ 0.1217
2
IG
(Pickup) -1
t [s]
)
*t-multiplier [s]
t-multiplier
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
www.eaton.com
709
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Therm Flat
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
5*1
IG
t=
Trip
2
0
(IGnom)
t=
*t-multiplier [s]
5
IG
0
(IGnom)
*t-multiplier [s]
t = 5 *t-multiplier [s]
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
TM[s]=
10
5
100
2
t [s]
1.0
10
0.5
1
0.05
0.1
0.01
0.01
0.1
1
10
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
710
www.eaton.com
100
t-multiplier
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
IT
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
Trip
2
5*1
IG
t=
1
0
(IGnom)
*t-multiplier [s]
t=
5*1
IG
1
(IGnom)
*t-multiplier [s]
1× 104
3
1× 10
100
t [s]
t-multiplier
TM[s]=
10
5
10
5
1
2
2
1.0
0.1
0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
www.eaton.com
711
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
I2T
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
Trip
2
2
t=
5*1
IG
0
5*1
IG
t=
*t-multiplier [s]
2
(IGnom)
(IGnom)
*t-multiplier [s]
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
t [s]
t-multiplier
10
TM[s]=
1
10
5
0.1
2
0.05
0.01
0.01
0.1
1
1.0
0.5
10
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
712
www.eaton.com
100
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
I4T
Notice!
Various Reset Modes are available. Resetting via characteristic, delayed, and
instantaneous.
Reset
Trip
2
5*1
IG
t=
4
0
(IGnom)
*t-multiplier [s]
5*1
IG
t=
4
(IGnom)
*t-multiplier [s]
4
1× 10
3
1× 10
100
t [s]
t-multiplier
10
TM[s]=
10
1
5
2
0.1
1.0
0.5
0.05
0.01
0.01
0.1
1
10
100
x * Pickup (Multiples of Pickup)
www.eaton.com
713
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Assignment List
The »ASSIGNMENT LIST« below summarizes all module outputs (signals) and inputs (e.g.: states of the
assignments).
Name
Description
-.-
No assignment
Prot.Available
Signal: Protection is available.
Prot.Active
Signal: Active
Prot.ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Prot.Pickup Phase A
Signal: General Pickup Phase A
Prot.Pickup Phase B
Signal: General Pickup Phase B
Prot.Pickup Phase C
Signal: General Pickup Phase C
Prot.Pickup IX or IR
Signal: General Pickup - Ground Fault
Prot.Pickup
Signal: General Pickup
Prot.Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
Prot.Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
Prot.Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
Prot.Trip IX or IR
Signal: General Trip Ground Fault
Prot.Trip
Signal: General Trip
Prot.Res Fault a Mains No
Signal: Resetting of fault number and number of grid faults.
Prot.I dir fwd
Signal: Phase current failure forward direction
Prot.I dir rev
Signal: Phase current failure reverse direction
Prot.I dir n poss
Signal: Phase fault - missing reference voltage
Prot.IR dir fwd
Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) forward
Prot.IR dir rev
Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) reverse direction
Prot.IR dir n poss
Signal: IR Ground fault (calculated) direction detection not
possible.
Prot.IX dir fwd
Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) forward
Prot.IX dir rev
Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) reverse direction
Prot.IX dir n poss
Signal: IX Ground fault (measured) direction detection not
possible.
Prot.ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
Prot.ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
Control.Local
Switching Authority: Local
Control.Remote
Switching Authority: Remote
Breaker.SI SingleContactInd
Signal: The Position of the Switchgear is detected by one auxiliary
contact (pole) only. Thus indeterminate and disturbed Positions
cannot be detected.
Breaker.Pos not CLOSE
Signal: Pos not CLOSE
Breaker.Pos CLOSE
Signal: Breaker is in CLOSE-Position
Breaker.Pos OPEN
Signal: Breaker is in OPEN-Position
714
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Breaker.Pos Indeterm
Signal: Breaker is in Indeterminate Position
Breaker.Pos Disturb
Signal: Breaker Disturbed - Undefined Breaker Position. The feedback signals (Position Indicators) contradict themselves. After
expiring of a supervision timer this signal becomes true.
Breaker.Ready
Signal: Breaker is ready for operation.
Breaker.CES succesf
Command Execution Supervision: Switching command executed
successfully.
Breaker.CES Disturbed
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command
unsuccessful. Switchgear in disturbed position.
Breaker.CES SAuthority
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
executed. No switching authority.
Breaker.CES SwitchgDir
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Direction Control. A
switchgear that is already OPEN should be switched OPEN again
(doubly).
Breaker.CES DoubleOperating
Command Execution Supervision: A second switch command is in
conflict with a pending one.
Breaker.CES CLOSE durg OPEN Cmd
Command Execution Supervision: CLOSE Command during a
pending OPEN Command.
Breaker.CES SG not ready
Command Execution Supervision: Switchgear not ready.
Breaker.CES Field Interl
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
executed because of field interlocking.
Breaker.CES SyncTimeout
Command Execution Supervision: Switching Command not
executed No Synchronization signal while t-sync was running.
Breaker.Prot CLOSE
Signal: CLOSE command issued by the Prot module.
Breaker.TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
Breaker.Ack TripCmd
Signal: Acknowledge Trip Command
Breaker.Bwear Slow Breaker
Signal: Slow Breaker Alarm
Breaker.Res Bwear Slow Breaker
Signal: Resetting the slow breaker alarm.
Breaker.CLOSE Cmd
Signal: CLOSE command issued to the switchgear. Depending on
the setting the signal may include the CLOSE command of the
Prot module.
Breaker.OPEN Cmd
Signal: OPEN command issued to the switchgear. Depending on
the setting the signal may include the OPEN command of the Prot
module.
Breaker.CLOSE Cmd manual
Signal: CLOSE Cmd manual
Breaker.OPEN Cmd manual
Signal: OPEN Cmd manual
Breaker.CLOSE request
Signal: Synchronous CLOSE request
Breaker.CinBkr-52a-I
Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52a)
Breaker.CinBkr-52b-I
Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52b)
Breaker.Ready-I
Module Input State: Breaker Ready
Breaker.Sys-in-Sync-I
State of the module input: This signals has to become true within
the synchronization time. If not, switching is unsuccessful.
Breaker.Ack TripCmd-I
State of the module input: Acknowledgment Signal (only for
automatic acknowledgment). Module input signal.
Breaker.Interl CLOSE1-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command
www.eaton.com
715
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Breaker.Interl CLOSE2-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command
Breaker.Interl CLOSE3-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of the CLOSE command
Breaker.Interl OPEN1-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command
Breaker.Interl OPEN2-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command
Breaker.Interl OPEN3-I
State of the module input: Interlocking of the OPEN command
Breaker.SC CLOSE-I
State of the module input: Switching CLOSE Command, e.g.: the
state of the Logic or the state of the digital input.
Breaker.SC OPEN-I
State of the module input: Switching OPEN Command, e.g.: the
state of the Logic or the state of the digital input.
Breaker.Operations Alarm
Signal: Service Alarm, too many Operations
Breaker.Isum Intr trip: IA
Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded: IA.
Breaker.Isum Intr trip: IB
Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded: IB.
Breaker.Isum Intr trip: IC
Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded: IC.
Breaker.Isum Intr trip
Signal: Maximum permissible Summation of the interrupting
(tripping) currents exceeded in at least one phase.
Breaker.Res TripCmdCr
Signal: Resetting of the Counter: total number of trip commands.
Breaker.Res Isum trip
Signal: Reset summation of the tripping currents.
Breaker.WearLevel Alarm
Signal: Breaker Wear curve Alarm Level in %.
Breaker.WearLevel Lockout
Signal: Breaker Wear Curve Lockout Level in %.
Breaker.Res Bwear Curve
Signal: Res Bwear Curve
Breaker.Isum Intr per hour Alarm
Signal: Isum Intr per hour Alarm
Breaker.Res Isum Intr per hour Alarm
Signal: Res Isum Intr per hour Alarm
50P[1].Active
Signal: Active
50P[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
50P[1].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
50P[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
50P[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50P[1].Pickup IA
Signal: Pickup IA
50P[1].Pickup IB
Signal: Pickup IB
50P[1].Pickup IC
Signal: Pickup IC
50P[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup
50P[1].Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
50P[1].Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
50P[1].Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
50P[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
50P[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50P[1].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
50P[1].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
716
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
50P[1].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
50P[1].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
50P[1].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
50P[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
50P[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
50P[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50P[1].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
50P[1].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter1
50P[1].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter2
50P[1].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter3
50P[1].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter4
50P[2].Active
Signal: Active
50P[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
50P[2].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
50P[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
50P[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50P[2].Pickup IA
Signal: Pickup IA
50P[2].Pickup IB
Signal: Pickup IB
50P[2].Pickup IC
Signal: Pickup IC
50P[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup
50P[2].Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
50P[2].Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
50P[2].Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
50P[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
50P[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50P[2].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
50P[2].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
50P[2].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
50P[2].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
50P[2].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
50P[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
50P[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
50P[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50P[2].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
50P[2].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
50P[2].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
50P[2].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
50P[2].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
50P[3].Active
Signal: Active
www.eaton.com
717
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
50P[3].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
50P[3].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
50P[3].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
50P[3].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50P[3].Pickup IA
Signal: Pickup IA
50P[3].Pickup IB
Signal: Pickup IB
50P[3].Pickup IC
Signal: Pickup IC
50P[3].Pickup
Signal: Pickup
50P[3].Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
50P[3].Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
50P[3].Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
50P[3].Trip
Signal: Trip
50P[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50P[3].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
50P[3].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
50P[3].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
50P[3].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
50P[3].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
50P[3].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
50P[3].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
50P[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50P[3].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
50P[3].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
50P[3].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
50P[3].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
50P[3].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
51P[1].Active
Signal: Active
51P[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
51P[1].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
51P[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
51P[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51P[1].Pickup IA
Signal: Pickup IA
51P[1].Pickup IB
Signal: Pickup IB
51P[1].Pickup IC
Signal: Pickup IC
51P[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup
51P[1].Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
51P[1].Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
51P[1].Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
51P[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
718
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
51P[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[1].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
51P[1].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
51P[1].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
51P[1].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
51P[1].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
51P[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
51P[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
51P[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51P[1].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
51P[1].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
51P[1].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
51P[1].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
51P[1].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
51P[2].Active
Signal: Active
51P[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
51P[2].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
51P[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
51P[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51P[2].Pickup IA
Signal: Pickup IA
51P[2].Pickup IB
Signal: Pickup IB
51P[2].Pickup IC
Signal: Pickup IC
51P[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup
51P[2].Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
51P[2].Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
51P[2].Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
51P[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
51P[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[2].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
51P[2].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
51P[2].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
51P[2].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
51P[2].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
51P[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
51P[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
51P[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51P[2].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
51P[2].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
51P[2].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
www.eaton.com
719
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
51P[2].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
51P[2].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
51P[3].Active
Signal: Active
51P[3].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
51P[3].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
51P[3].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
51P[3].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51P[3].Pickup IA
Signal: Pickup IA
51P[3].Pickup IB
Signal: Pickup IB
51P[3].Pickup IC
Signal: Pickup IC
51P[3].Pickup
Signal: Pickup
51P[3].Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
51P[3].Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
51P[3].Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
51P[3].Trip
Signal: Trip
51P[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51P[3].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
51P[3].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
51P[3].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
51P[3].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
51P[3].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
51P[3].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
51P[3].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
51P[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51P[3].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
51P[3].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
51P[3].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
51P[3].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
51P[3].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
50X[1].Active
Signal: Active
50X[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
50X[1].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
50X[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
50X[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50X[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
50X[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
50X[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50X[1].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
50X[1].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
720
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
50X[1].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
50X[1].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
50X[1].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
50X[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
50X[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
50X[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50X[1].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
50X[1].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
50X[1].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
50X[1].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
50X[1].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
50X[2].Active
Signal: Active
50X[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
50X[2].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
50X[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
50X[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50X[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
50X[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
50X[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50X[2].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
50X[2].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
50X[2].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
50X[2].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
50X[2].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
50X[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
50X[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
50X[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50X[2].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
50X[2].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
50X[2].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
50X[2].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
50X[2].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
51X[1].Active
Signal: Active
51X[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
51X[1].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
51X[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
51X[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51X[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
51X[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
www.eaton.com
721
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
51X[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51X[1].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
51X[1].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
51X[1].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
51X[1].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
51X[1].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
51X[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
51X[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
51X[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51X[1].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
51X[1].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
51X[1].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
51X[1].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
51X[1].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
51X[2].Active
Signal: Active
51X[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
51X[2].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
51X[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
51X[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51X[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
51X[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
51X[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51X[2].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
51X[2].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
51X[2].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
51X[2].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
51X[2].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
51X[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
51X[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
51X[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51X[2].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
51X[2].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
51X[2].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
51X[2].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
51X[2].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
50R[1].Active
Signal: Active
50R[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
50R[1].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
50R[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
722
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
50R[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50R[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
50R[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
50R[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50R[1].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
50R[1].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
50R[1].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
50R[1].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
50R[1].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
50R[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
50R[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
50R[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50R[1].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
50R[1].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
50R[1].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
50R[1].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
50R[1].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
50R[2].Active
Signal: Active
50R[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
50R[2].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
50R[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
50R[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50R[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
50R[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
50R[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
50R[2].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
50R[2].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
50R[2].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
50R[2].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
50R[2].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
50R[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
50R[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
50R[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
50R[2].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
50R[2].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
50R[2].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
50R[2].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
50R[2].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
51R[1].Active
Signal: Active
www.eaton.com
723
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
51R[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
51R[1].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
51R[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
51R[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51R[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
51R[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
51R[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51R[1].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
51R[1].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
51R[1].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
51R[1].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
51R[1].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
51R[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
51R[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
51R[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51R[1].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
51R[1].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
51R[1].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
51R[1].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
51R[1].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
51R[2].Active
Signal: Active
51R[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
51R[2].Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
51R[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
51R[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51R[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup IX or IR
51R[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
51R[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
51R[2].DefaultSet
Signal: Default Parameter Set
51R[2].AdaptSet 1
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 1
51R[2].AdaptSet 2
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 2
51R[2].AdaptSet 3
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 3
51R[2].AdaptSet 4
Signal: Adaptive Parameter 4
51R[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
51R[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
51R[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
51R[2].Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
51R[2].AdaptSet1-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 1
51R[2].AdaptSet2-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 2
724
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
51R[2].AdaptSet3-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 3
51R[2].AdaptSet4-I
Module Input State: Adaptive Parameter 4
27M[1].Active
Signal: Active
27M[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
27M[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
27M[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
27M[1].Pickup Phase A
Signal: Pickup Phase A
27M[1].Pickup Phase B
Signal: Pickup Phase B
27M[1].Pickup Phase C
Signal: Pickup Phase C
27M[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
27M[1].Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
27M[1].Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
27M[1].Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
27M[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
27M[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27M[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
27M[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
27M[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
27M[2].Active
Signal: Active
27M[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
27M[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
27M[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
27M[2].Pickup Phase A
Signal: Pickup Phase A
27M[2].Pickup Phase B
Signal: Pickup Phase B
27M[2].Pickup Phase C
Signal: Pickup Phase C
27M[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
27M[2].Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
27M[2].Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
27M[2].Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
27M[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
27M[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27M[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
27M[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
27M[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59M[1].Active
Signal: Active
59M[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
59M[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
59M[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59M[1].Pickup Phase A
Signal: Pickup Phase A
www.eaton.com
725
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
59M[1].Pickup Phase B
Signal: Pickup Phase B
59M[1].Pickup Phase C
Signal: Pickup Phase C
59M[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
59M[1].Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
59M[1].Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
59M[1].Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
59M[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
59M[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59M[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
59M[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
59M[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59M[2].Active
Signal: Active
59M[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
59M[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
59M[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59M[2].Pickup Phase A
Signal: Pickup Phase A
59M[2].Pickup Phase B
Signal: Pickup Phase B
59M[2].Pickup Phase C
Signal: Pickup Phase C
59M[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Element
59M[2].Trip Phase A
Signal: General Trip Phase A
59M[2].Trip Phase B
Signal: General Trip Phase B
59M[2].Trip Phase C
Signal: General Trip Phase C
59M[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
59M[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59M[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
59M[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
59M[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
27A[1].Active
Signal: Active
27A[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
27A[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
27A[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
27A[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
27A[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
27A[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27A[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
27A[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
27A[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
27A[2].Active
Signal: Active
27A[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
726
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
27A[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
27A[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
27A[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
27A[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
27A[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
27A[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
27A[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
27A[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59A[1].Active
Signal: Active
59A[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
59A[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
59A[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59A[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
59A[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
59A[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59A[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
59A[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
59A[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59A[2].Active
Signal: Active
59A[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
59A[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
59A[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59A[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
59A[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
59A[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59A[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
59A[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
59A[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59N[1].Active
Signal: Active
59N[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
59N[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
59N[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59N[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
59N[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
59N[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59N[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
59N[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
59N[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59N[2].Active
Signal: Active
www.eaton.com
727
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
59N[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
59N[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
59N[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
59N[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Residual Voltage Supervision-Element
59N[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
59N[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
59N[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
59N[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
59N[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
46[1].Active
Signal: Active
46[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
46[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
46[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
46[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Negative Sequence
46[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
46[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
46[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
46[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
46[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
46[2].Active
Signal: Active
46[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
46[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
46[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
46[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Negative Sequence
46[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
46[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
46[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
46[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
46[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
47[1].Active
Signal: Active
47[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
47[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
47[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
47[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry
47[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
47[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
47[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
47[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
47[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
728
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
47[2].Active
Signal: Active
47[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
47[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
47[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
47[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Voltage Asymmetry
47[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
47[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
47[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
47[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
47[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
81[1].Active
Signal: Active
81[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
81[1].Blo by V<
Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
81[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
81[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
81[1].Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
81[1].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange.
81[1].Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[1].Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[1].Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
81[1].Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
81[1].Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
81[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
81[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
81[2].Active
Signal: Active
81[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
81[2].Blo by V<
Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
81[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
81[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
81[2].Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
81[2].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange.
81[2].Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[2].Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[2].Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
www.eaton.com
729
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
81[2].Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
81[2].Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
81[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
81[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
81[3].Active
Signal: Active
81[3].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
81[3].Blo by V<
Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
81[3].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
81[3].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
81[3].Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
81[3].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange.
81[3].Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[3].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[3].Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[3].Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
81[3].Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
81[3].Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[3].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
81[3].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
81[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
81[4].Active
Signal: Active
81[4].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
81[4].Blo by V<
Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
81[4].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
81[4].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
81[4].Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
81[4].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange.
81[4].Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[4].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[4].Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[4].Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
81[4].Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
81[4].Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[4].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[4].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
730
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
81[4].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
81[4].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
81[5].Active
Signal: Active
81[5].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
81[5].Blo by V<
Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
81[5].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
81[5].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
81[5].Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
81[5].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange.
81[5].Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[5].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[5].Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[5].Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
81[5].Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
81[5].Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[5].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[5].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
81[5].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
81[5].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
81[6].Active
Signal: Active
81[6].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
81[6].Blo by V<
Signal: Module is blocked by undervoltage.
81[6].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
81[6].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
81[6].Pickup 81
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection
81[6].Pickup df/dt | DF/DT
Pickup instantaneous or average value of the rate-of-frequencychange.
81[6].Pickup Vector Surge
Signal: Pickup Vector Surge
81[6].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[6].Trip 81
Signal: Frequency has exceeded the limit.
81[6].Trip df/dt | DF/DT
Signal: Trip df/dt or DF/DT
81[6].Trip Vector Surge
Signal: Trip delta phi
81[6].Trip
Signal: Trip Frequency Protection (collective signal)
81[6].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
81[6].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
81[6].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
81[6].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32[1].Active
Signal: Active
32[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
www.eaton.com
731
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
32[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
32[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32[1].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
32[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
32[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
32[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32[2].Active
Signal: Active
32[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
32[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
32[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32[2].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
32[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
32[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
32[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32[3].Active
Signal: Active
32[3].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
32[3].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
32[3].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32[3].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32[3].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
32[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32[3].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
32[3].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
32[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32V[1].Active
Signal: Active
32V[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
32V[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
32V[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32V[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32V[1].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
32V[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32V[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
32V[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
32V[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32V[2].Active
Signal: Active
732
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
32V[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
32V[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
32V[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32V[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32V[2].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
32V[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32V[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
32V[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
32V[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32V[3].Active
Signal: Active
32V[3].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
32V[3].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
32V[3].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
32V[3].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Protection
32V[3].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Protection
32V[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
32V[3].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
32V[3].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
32V[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55D[1].Active
Signal: Active
PF-55D[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
PF-55D[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
PF-55D[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55D[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Factor
PF-55D[1].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Factor
PF-55D[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55D[1].Compensator
Signal: Compensation Signal
PF-55D[1].Impossible
Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible
PF-55D[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
PF-55D[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
PF-55D[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55D[2].Active
Signal: Active
PF-55D[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
PF-55D[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
PF-55D[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55D[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Factor
PF-55D[2].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Factor
PF-55D[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55D[2].Compensator
Signal: Compensation Signal
www.eaton.com
733
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
PF-55D[2].Impossible
Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible
PF-55D[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
PF-55D[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
PF-55D[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55A[1].Active
Signal: Active
PF-55A[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
PF-55A[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
PF-55A[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55A[1].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Factor
PF-55A[1].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Factor
PF-55A[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55A[1].Compensator
Signal: Compensation Signal
PF-55A[1].Impossible
Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible
PF-55A[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
PF-55A[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
PF-55A[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55A[2].Active
Signal: Active
PF-55A[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
PF-55A[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
PF-55A[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
PF-55A[2].Pickup
Signal: Pickup Power Factor
PF-55A[2].Trip
Signal: Trip Power Factor
PF-55A[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
PF-55A[2].Compensator
Signal: Compensation Signal
PF-55A[2].Impossible
Signal: Pickup Power Factor Impossible
PF-55A[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
PF-55A[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
PF-55A[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ZI.Active
Signal: Active
ZI.ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
ZI.Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ZI.ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ZI.Bkr Blo
Signal: Blocked by Breaker Failure
ZI.Phase Pickup
Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Pickup
ZI.Phase Trip
Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase Trip
ZI.Ground Pickup
Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Pickup
ZI.Ground Trip
Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground Trip
ZI.Pickup
Signal: Pickup Zone Interlocking
ZI.Trip
Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip
734
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
ZI.TripCmd
Signal: Zone Interlocking Trip Command
ZI.Phase OUT
Signal: Zone Interlocking Phase OUT
ZI.Ground OUT
Signal: Zone Interlocking Ground OUT
ZI.OUT
Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT
ZI.IN
Signal: Zone Interlocking IN
ZI.ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
ZI.ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking2
ZI.ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ZI.Bkr Blo-I
Signal: Blocked by Breaker Failure
SOTF.Active
Signal: Active
SOTF.ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
SOTF.Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
SOTF.enabled
Signal: Switch Onto Fault enabled. This Signal can be used to
modify Overcurrent Protection Settings.
SOTF.I<
Signal: No Load Current.
SOTF.ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
SOTF.ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
SOTF.Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
SOTF.Ex Man CLOSE Cmd-I
Module Input State: External manual breaker CLOSE command
(NOT for AR!)
SOTF.Ext SOTF-I
Module Input State: External Switch Onto Fault Alarm
CLPU.Active
Signal: Active
CLPU.ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
CLPU.Rvs Blo
Signal: Reverse Blocking
CLPU.enabled
Signal: Cold Load enabled
CLPU.detected
Signal: Cold Load detected
CLPU.I<
Signal: No Load Current.
CLPU.Load Inrush
Signal: Load Inrush
CLPU.Settle Time
Signal: Settle Time
CLPU.ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
CLPU.ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking
CLPU.Rvs Blo-I
Module Input State: Reverse Blocking
ExP[1].Active
Signal: Active
ExP[1].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
ExP[1].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExP[1].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[1].Alarm
Signal: Alarm
ExP[1].Trip
Signal: Trip
ExP[1].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[1].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
www.eaton.com
735
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
ExP[1].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking2
ExP[1].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[1].Alarm-I
Module Input State: Alarm
ExP[1].Trip-I
Module Input State: Trip
ExP[2].Active
Signal: Active
ExP[2].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
ExP[2].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExP[2].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[2].Alarm
Signal: Alarm
ExP[2].Trip
Signal: Trip
ExP[2].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[2].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking1
ExP[2].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking2
ExP[2].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[2].Alarm-I
Module Input State: Alarm
ExP[2].Trip-I
Module Input State: Trip
ExP[3].Active
Signal: Active
ExP[3].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
ExP[3].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExP[3].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[3].Alarm
Signal: Alarm
ExP[3].Trip
Signal: Trip
ExP[3].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[3].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
ExP[3].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
ExP[3].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[3].Alarm-I
Module Input State: Alarm
ExP[3].Trip-I
Module Input State: Trip
ExP[4].Active
Signal: Active
ExP[4].ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
ExP[4].Blo TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command blocked
ExP[4].ExBlo TripCmd
Signal: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[4].Alarm
Signal: Alarm
ExP[4].Trip
Signal: Trip
ExP[4].TripCmd
Signal: Trip Command
ExP[4].ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
ExP[4].ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
ExP[4].ExBlo TripCmd-I
Module Input State: External Blocking of the Trip Command
ExP[4].Alarm-I
Module Input State: Alarm
736
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
ExP[4].Trip-I
Module Input State: Trip
BF.Active
Signal: Active
BF.ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
BF.Pickup
Signal: BF-Module Started (Pickup)
BF.Trip
Signal: Breaker Failure Trip
BF.Lockout
Signal: Lockout
BF.Res Lockout
Signal: Reset Lockout
BF.ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
BF.ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
BF.Trigger1
Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF
BF.Trigger2
Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF
BF.Trigger3
Module Input: Trigger that will start the BF
TCM.Active
Signal: Active
TCM.ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
TCM.Pickup
Signal: Pickup Trip Circuit Supervision
TCM.Not Possible
Not possible because no state indicator assigned to the breaker.
TCM.CinBkr-52a-I
Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52a)
TCM.CinBkr-52b-I
Module Input State: Feed-back signal of the Bkr. (52b)
TCM.ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
TCM.ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
CTS.Active
Signal: Active
CTS.ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
CTS.Pickup
Signal: Pickup Current Transformer Measuring Circuit Supervision
CTS.ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
CTS.ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
LOP.Active
Signal: Active
LOP.ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
LOP.Pickup
Signal: Pickup Loss of Potential
LOP.LOP Blo
Signal: Loss of Potential blocks other elements
LOP.ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
LOP.ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
AR.Active
Signal: Active
AR.ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
AR.Standby
Signal: Standby
AR.t-Man Close Blo
Signal: AR blocked after breaker was switched on manually. This
timer will be started if the breaker was switched on manually.
While this timer is running, AR cannot be started.
AR.Ready
Signal: Ready to shoot
AR.Running
Signal: Auto Reclosing Running
AR.t-dead
Signal: Dead time between trip and reclosure attempt
www.eaton.com
737
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
AR.Bkr CLOSE Cmd
Signal: Bkr. Switch ON (CLOSE) Command
AR.t-Run2Ready
Signal: Examination Time: If the Breaker remains after a reclosure
attempt (shot) for the duration of this timer in the Closed position,
the AR has been successful and the AR module returns into the
ready state.
AR.Lock
Signal: Auto Reclosure is locked out
AR.t-Reset Lockout
Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR lockout. The reset of the
AR lockout state will be delayed for this time after the reset signal
(e.g digital input or Scada) has been detected.
AR.Blo
Signal: Auto Reclosure is blocked
AR.t-Blo Reset
Signal: Delay Timer for resetting the AR blocking. The release
(de-blocking) of the AR will be delayed for this time, if there is no
blocking signal anymore.
AR.successful
Signal: Auto Reclosing successful
AR.failed
Signal: Auto Reclosing Failure
AR.t-AR Supervision
Signal: AR Supervision
AR.Pre Shot
Pre Shot Control
AR.Shot 1
Shot Control
AR.Shot 2
Shot Control
AR.Shot 3
Shot Control
AR.Shot 4
Shot Control
AR.Shot 5
Shot Control
AR.Shot 6
Shot Control
AR.Service Alarm 1
Signal: AR - Service Alarm 1, too many switching operations
AR.Service Alarm 2
Signal: AR - Service Alarm 2, too many switching operations
AR.Max Shots / h exceeded
Signal: The maximum allowed number of shots per hour has been
exceeded.
AR.Res Statistics Cr
Signal: Reset all statistic AR counters: Total number of AR,
successful and unsuccessful no of AR.
AR.Res Service Cr
Signal: Reset the Service Counters for pickup and blocking.
AR.Reset Lockout
Signal: The AR Lockout has been reset via the panel.
AR.Res Max Shots / h
Signal: The Counter for the maximum allowed shots per hour has
been reset.
AR.ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
AR.ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
AR.Ex Shot Inc-I
Module input state: The AR Shot counter will be incremented by
this external Signal. This can be used for Zone Coordination (of
upstream Auto Reclosure devices). Note: This parameter enables
the functionality only. The assignment has to be set within the
global parameters.
AR.Ex Lock-I
Module input state: External AR lockout.
AR.DI Reset Ex Lock-I
Module input state: Resetting the lockout state of the AR (if the
resetting via digital inputs has been selected).
738
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
AR.Comm Reset Ex Lock-I
Module input state: Resetting the Lockout State of the AR by
Communication.
Sync.Active
Signal: Active
Sync.ExBlo
Signal: External Blocking
Sync.LiveBus
Signal: Live-Bus or Dead-Bus flag: 1=Live-Bus, 0=Dead-Bus
Sync.LiveLine
Signal: Live-Line or Dead-Line flag: 1=Live-Line, 0=Dead-Line
Sync.SynchronRunTiming
Signal: Sync-checkRunTiming
Sync.SynchronFailed
Signal: This signal indicates a failed synchronization. It is set for
5s when the breaker is still open after the Sync-check Run-timer
has timed out.
Sync.SyncOverridden
Signal:Sync-check is overridden because one of the Synchronism
overriding conditions (DB/DL or ExtBypass) is met.
Sync.VDiffTooHigh
Signal: Voltage difference between bus and line too high.
Sync.SlipTooHigh
Signal: Frequency difference (slip frequency) between bus and line
voltages too high.
Sync.AngleDiffTooHigh
Signal: Phase Angle difference between bus and line voltages too
high.
Sync.Sys-in-Sync
Signal: Bus and line voltages are in synchronism according to the
system synchronism criteria.
Sync.In-Sync Allowed
Signal: In-Sync Allowed
Sync.ExBlo1-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 1
Sync.ExBlo2-I
Module Input State: External Blocking 2
Sync.Bypass-I
State of the module input: Bypass
Sync.BkrCloseInitiate-I
State of the module input: Breaker Close Initiate with synchronism
check from any control sources (e.g. HMI / SCADA). If the state of
the assigned signal becomes true, a Breaker Close will be initiated
(Trigger Source).
WiredInputs.52a M1-I
State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Closed
WiredInputs.52b M1-I
State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Open
WiredInputs.TOCa M1-I
State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Connected
WiredInputs.43/10 M1-I
State of the module input: Main 1 Breaker Selected To Trip
WiredInputs.52a M2-I
State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Closed
WiredInputs.52b M2-I
State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Open
WiredInputs.TOCa M2-I
State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Connected
WiredInputs.43/10 M2-I
State of the module input: Main 2 Breaker Selected To Trip
WiredInputs.52a T -I
State of the module input: Tie Breaker Closed
WiredInputs.52b T-I
State of the module input: Tie Breaker Open
WiredInputs.TOCa T-I
State of the module input: Tie Breaker Connected
WiredInputs.43/10 T-I
State of the module input: Tie Breaker Selected To Trip
WiredInputs.43 M-I
State of the module input: System In Manual
WiredInputs.43 A-I
State of the module input: System in Auto
WiredInputs.43 P1-I
State of the module input: Preferred Source 1
www.eaton.com
739
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
WiredInputs.43 P2-I
State of the module input: Preferred Source 2
WiredInputs.Bkr Trouble-I
Breaker Trouble
DI-8P X1.DI 1
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 2
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 3
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 4
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 5
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 6
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 7
Signal: Digital Input
DI-8P X1.DI 8
Signal: Digital Input
RO-6 X5.RO 1
Signal: Relay Output
RO-6 X5.RO 2
Signal: Relay Output
RO-6 X5.RO 3
Signal: Relay Output
RO-6 X5.RO 4
Signal: Relay Output
RO-6 X5.RO 5
Signal: Relay Output
RO-6 X5.RO 6
Signal: Relay Output
RO-6 X5.DISARMED!
Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform
maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire process
off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot
be disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that the relays are
ARMED AGAIN after maintenance.
RO-6 X5.Outs forced
Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by
force. That means that the state of at least one Relay is forced
and hence does not show the state of the assigned signals.
RO-4Z X2.ZI OUT
Signal: Zone Interlocking OUT
RO-4Z X2.RO 1
Signal: Relay Output
RO-4Z X2.RO 2
Signal: Relay Output
RO-4Z X2.RO 3
Signal: Relay Output
RO-4Z X2.RO 4
Signal: Relay Output
RO-4Z X2.DISARMED!
Signal: CAUTION! RELAYS DISARMED in order to safely perform
maintenance while eliminating the risk of taking an entire process
off-line. (Note: Zone Interlocking and Supervision Contact cannot
be disarmed). The User MUST ENSURE that the relays are
ARMED AGAIN after maintenance.
RO-4Z X2.Outs forced
Signal: The State of at least one Relay Output has been set by
force. That means that the state of at least one Relay is forced
and hence does not show the state of the assigned signals.
Event rec.Res all rec
Signal: All records deleted
Disturb rec.Recording
Signal: Recording
Disturb rec.Memory full
Signal: Memory Full
Disturb rec.Clear fail
Signal: Clear Failure in Memory
Disturb rec.Res all rec
Signal: All records deleted
Disturb rec.Res record
Signal: Delete Record
740
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Disturb rec.Man. Trigger
Signal: Manual Trigger
Disturb rec.Start1-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Disturb rec.Start2-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Disturb rec.Start3-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Disturb rec.Start4-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Disturb rec.Start5-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Disturb rec.Start6-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Disturb rec.Start7-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Disturb rec.Start8-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Fault rec.Res record
Signal: Delete Record
Fault rec.Man. Trigger
Signal: Manual Trigger
Fault rec.Start1-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Fault rec.Start2-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Fault rec.Start3-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Fault rec.Start4-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Fault rec.Start5-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Fault rec.Start6-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Fault rec.Start7-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Fault rec.Start8-I
State of the module input: Trigger event / start recording if:
Trend rec.Hand Reset
Hand Reset
EnergyCr.Cr Overflow VAh Net
Signal: Counter Overflow VAh Net
EnergyCr.Cr Overflow Wh Net
Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Net
EnergyCr.Cr Overflow Wh Fwd
Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Fwd
EnergyCr.Cr Overflow Wh Rev
Signal: Counter Overflow Wh Rev
EnergyCr.Cr Overflow VArh Net
Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Net
EnergyCr.Cr Overflow VArh Lag
Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Lag
EnergyCr.Cr Overflow VArh Lead
Signal: Counter Overflow VArh Lead
EnergyCr.VAh Net Res Cr
Signal: VAh Net Reset Counter
EnergyCr.Wh Net Res Cr
Signal: Wh Net Reset Counter
EnergyCr.Wh Fwd Res Cr
Signal: Wh Fwd Reset Counter
EnergyCr.Wh Rev Res Cr
Signal: Wh Rev Reset Counter
EnergyCr.VArh Net Res Cr
Signal: VArh Net Reset Counter
EnergyCr.VArh Lag Res Cr
Signal: VArh Lag Reset Counter
EnergyCr.VArh Lead Res Cr
Signal: VArh Lead Reset Counter
EnergyCr.Res all Energy Cr
Signal: Reset of all Energy Counters
EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn VAh Net
Signal: Counter VAh Net will overflow soon.
EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn Wh Net
Signal: Counter Wh Net will overflow soon.
EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn Wh Fwd
Signal: Counter Wh Fwd will overflow soon.
EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn Wh Rev
Signal: Counter Wh Rev will overflow soon.
www.eaton.com
741
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn VArh Net
Signal: Counter VArh Net will overflow soon.
EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn VArh Lag
Signal: Counter VArh Lag will overflow soon.
EnergyCr.Cr OverflwWarn VArh Lead
Signal: Counter VArh Lead will overflow soon.
Modbus.Transmission
Signal: Communication Active
Modbus.Comm Cmd 1
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 2
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 3
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 4
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 5
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 6
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 7
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 8
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 9
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 10
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 11
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 12
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 13
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 14
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 15
Communication Command
Modbus.Comm Cmd 16
Communication Command
IEC61850.VirtualInput1
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput2
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput3
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput4
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput5
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput6
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput7
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput8
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput9
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput10
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput11
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput12
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput13
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput14
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput15
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualInput16
Signal: Virtual Input (IEC61850 GGIO Ind)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput1-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput2-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput3-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
742
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
IEC61850.VirtualOutput4-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput5-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput6-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput7-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput8-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput9-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput10-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput11-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput12-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput13-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput14-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput15-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IEC61850.VirtualOutput16-I
Module input state: Binary state of the Virtual Output (GGIO)
IRIG-B.Active
Signal: Active
IRIG-B.Inverted
Signal: IRIG-B inverted
IRIG-B.Control Signal1
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal2
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal4
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal5
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal6
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal7
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal8
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal9
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal10
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal11
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal12
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal13
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal14
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal15
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal16
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal17
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
IRIG-B.Control Signal18
Signal: IRIG-B Control Signal
Statistics.ResFc all
Signal: Resetting of all Statistic values (Current Demand, Power
Demand, Min, Max)
Statistics.ResFc I Demand
Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Current Demand (avg, peak avg)
Statistics.ResFc P Demand
Signal: Resetting of Statistics - Power Demand (avg, peak avg)
Statistics.ResFc Max
Signal: Resetting of all Maximum values
Statistics.ResFc Min
Signal: Resetting of all Minimum values
Statistics.StartFc 1-I
State of the module input: Start of Statistics 1 (Update the
displayed Demand)
www.eaton.com
743
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Statistics.StartFc 2-I
State of the module input: Start of Statistics 2 (Update the
displayed Demand)
Logic.LE1.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE1.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE1.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE1.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE1.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE1.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE1.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE1.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE1.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE2.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE2.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE2.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE2.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE2.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE2.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE2.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE2.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE2.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE3.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE3.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE3.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE3.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE3.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE3.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE3.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE3.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE3.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE4.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE4.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE4.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE4.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE4.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE4.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE4.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE4.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE4.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE5.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
744
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE5.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE5.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE5.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE5.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE5.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE5.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE5.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE5.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE6.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE6.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE6.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE6.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE6.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE6.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE6.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE6.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE6.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE7.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE7.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE7.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE7.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE7.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE7.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE7.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE7.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE7.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE8.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE8.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE8.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE8.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE8.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE8.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE8.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE8.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE8.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE9.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE9.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE9.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE9.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
www.eaton.com
745
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE9.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE9.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE9.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE9.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE9.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE10.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE10.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE10.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE10.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE10.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE10.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE10.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE10.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE10.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE11.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE11.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE11.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE11.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE11.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE11.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE11.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE11.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE11.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE12.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE12.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE12.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE12.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE12.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE12.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE12.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE12.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE12.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE13.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE13.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE13.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE13.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE13.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE13.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE13.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
746
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE13.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE13.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE14.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE14.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE14.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE14.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE14.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE14.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE14.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE14.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE14.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE15.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE15.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE15.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE15.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE15.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE15.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE15.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE15.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE15.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE16.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE16.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE16.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE16.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE16.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE16.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE16.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE16.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE16.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE17.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE17.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE17.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE17.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE17.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE17.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE17.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE17.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE17.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE18.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
www.eaton.com
747
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE18.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE18.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE18.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE18.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE18.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE18.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE18.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE18.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE19.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE19.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE19.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE19.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE19.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE19.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE19.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE19.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE19.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE20.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE20.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE20.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE20.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE20.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE20.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE20.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE20.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE20.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE21.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE21.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE21.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE21.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE21.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE21.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE21.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE21.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE21.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE22.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE22.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE22.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE22.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
748
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE22.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE22.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE22.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE22.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE22.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE23.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE23.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE23.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE23.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE23.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE23.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE23.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE23.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE23.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE24.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE24.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE24.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE24.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE24.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE24.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE24.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE24.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE24.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE25.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE25.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE25.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE25.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE25.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE25.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE25.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE25.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE25.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE26.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE26.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE26.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE26.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE26.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE26.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE26.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
www.eaton.com
749
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE26.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE26.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE27.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE27.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE27.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE27.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE27.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE27.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE27.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE27.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE27.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE28.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE28.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE28.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE28.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE28.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE28.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE28.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE28.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE28.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE29.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE29.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE29.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE29.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE29.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE29.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE29.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE29.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE29.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE30.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE30.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE30.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE30.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE30.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE30.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE30.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE30.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE30.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE31.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
750
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE31.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE31.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE31.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE31.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE31.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE31.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE31.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE31.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE32.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE32.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE32.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE32.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE32.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE32.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE32.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE32.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE32.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE33.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE33.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE33.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE33.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE33.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE33.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE33.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE33.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE33.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE34.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE34.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE34.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE34.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE34.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE34.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE34.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE34.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE34.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE35.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE35.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE35.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE35.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
www.eaton.com
751
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE35.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE35.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE35.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE35.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE35.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE36.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE36.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE36.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE36.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE36.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE36.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE36.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE36.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE36.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE37.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE37.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE37.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE37.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE37.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE37.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE37.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE37.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE37.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE38.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE38.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE38.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE38.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE38.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE38.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE38.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE38.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE38.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE39.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE39.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE39.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE39.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE39.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE39.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE39.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
752
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE39.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE39.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE40.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE40.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE40.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE40.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE40.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE40.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE40.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE40.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE40.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE41.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE41.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE41.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE41.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE41.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE41.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE41.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE41.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE41.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE42.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE42.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE42.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE42.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE42.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE42.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE42.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE42.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE42.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE43.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE43.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE43.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE43.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE43.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE43.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE43.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE43.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE43.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE44.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
www.eaton.com
753
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE44.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE44.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE44.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE44.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE44.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE44.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE44.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE44.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE45.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE45.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE45.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE45.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE45.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE45.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE45.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE45.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE45.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE46.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE46.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE46.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE46.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE46.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE46.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE46.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE46.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE46.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE47.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE47.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE47.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE47.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE47.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE47.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE47.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE47.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE47.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE48.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE48.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE48.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE48.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
754
www.eaton.com
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE48.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE48.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE48.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE48.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE48.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE49.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE49.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE49.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE49.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE49.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE49.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE49.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE49.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE49.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE50.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE50.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE50.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE50.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE50.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE50.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE50.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE50.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE50.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE51.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE51.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE51.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE51.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE51.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE51.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE51.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE51.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE51.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE52.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE52.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE52.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE52.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE52.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE52.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE52.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
www.eaton.com
755
IM02602007E
EDR-5000
Name
Description
Logic.LE52.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE52.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE53.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE53.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE53.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE53.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE53.Gate In1-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE53.Gate In2-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE53.Gate In3-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE53.Gate In4-I
State of the module input: Assignment of the Input Signal
Logic.LE53.Reset Latch-I
State of the module input: Reset Signal for the Latching
Logic.LE54.Gate Out
Signal: Output of the logic gate
Logic.LE54.Timer Out
Signal: Timer Output
Logic.LE54.Out
Signal: Latched Output (Q)
Logic.LE54.Out inverted
Signal: Negated Latched Output (Q NOT)
Logic.LE54.Gate In1-I
State of